Table of Contents Why Capilano College? 1 C a l e n d a r for 1982-83 2 Admission 3 Registration 4 C h a n g i n g Registration Status 5 Fees 6 G e n e r a l C o u r s e Information 7 C a m p u s Services 11 Financial A i d s & A w a r d s 15 Academic Studies/University Transfer P r o g r a m s 19 Career/Vocational Programs 57 General Awards 124 Transfer G u i d e 129 H o w to G e t T h e r e 140 Parking & C a m p u s Map Index .• : 141 ...142 College Board & Administration Lynnmour Campus & Administrative O f f i c e s 2055 P u r c e l l W a y North V a n c o u v e r , B . C . V J 7 3 H 5 T e l e p h o n e (604) 986-1911 Squamish Learning Centre 38038 C l e v e l a n d A v e n u e and 37827 S e c o n d A v e n u e P . O . B o x 1531, S q u a m i s h , B . C . V O N 3 G 0 T e l e p h o n e (604) 892-5322 Sechelt L e a r n i n g C e n t r e 1360 Inlet A v e n u e P.O. B o x 1609, Sechelt, B . C . VON 3 A 0 T e l e p h o n e (604) 885-9310 Downtown Education Centre 549 H o w e Street Vancouver, B.C. V 6 C 2L6 P u b l i s h e d by: Information S e r v i c e s D e s i g n : Bill Little Photographs: Media Production Centre Typesetting: P r o f e s s i o n a l G r a p h i c s & T r a n s l a t i o n Ltd. Layout: Information S e r v i c e s Printing: T h e T i m e s 144 Why Come to Capilano College? Before y o u make any d e c i s i o n about c o m i n g to C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e , we hope y o u will give c o n s i d e r a t i o n to both our strengths and our s h o r t c o m i n g s . T h i s is not a c o l l e g e for all people, but we have a great deal to offer to many. O u r s is not a typical c o l l e g e student body. While we have almost 2,500 full-time students, mostly recent high s c h o o l graduates who are similar to students at any other c o l l e g e or university, we also have even more students w h o may be part-time, older, or w o r k i n g as well a s attending c o l l e g e , whose interests are not those of conventional college students — except that they, too, want the best possible e d u c a t i o n . W e w e l c o m e all w h o have a mature desire to learn, and we extend a special w e l c o m e to part-time and w o m e n students and wish to assure y o u that y o u s h o u l d not be intimidated by the prospect of returning to s c h o o l — y o u will have plenty of company. We believe that it is our blend of full-time and part-time y o u n g e r a n d older, w o m e n a n d men that gives C a p i l a n o a special character a n d a s p e c i a l strength. Capilano's programs are very diverse, but all have a c o m m o n objective of high quality. T w o - y e a r C a r e e r P r o g r a m s are rigorous, but offer excellent career opportunities for g r a d uates. O u r A c a d e m i c S t u d i e s P r o g r a m offers a full set of first a n d s e c o n d year c o u r s e s equivalent to those provided at university and most c o u r s e s are transferable to B . C . universities; students s e e k i n g a solid general e d u c a t i o n will be challenged by A c a d e m i c Studies. These courses may be taken for credit, or on an audit (credit free) basis without the pressures of a s s i g n m e n t s and e x a m s . W e offer as well a number of V o c a t i o n a l P r o g r a m s of less than a year's duration w h i c h provide graduates with e m p l o y able skills. T h e Basic E d u c a t i o n p r o g r a m s train adults w h o have not completed secondary s c h o o l with the skills necessary to begin p o s t - s e c o n d a r y programs. T h r o u g h C o m m u n i t y E d u c a t i o n we offer a variety of c o u r s e s and activities w h i c h do not carry credit for a c o l l e g e d i p l o m a , but which meet a whole range of interests in the c o m m u n i t y . O u r programs for B u s i n e s s and Industry offer training opportunities w h i c h assist corporations and c o m m u n i t y a g e n c i e s in improving their performance. P r o g r a m s are, of course, no better than the people w h o develop a n d run them. C a p i l a n o is very p r o u d of its instructional staff — d y n a m i c , highly s p e c i a l i z e d , c o m m i t t e d to quality instruction and service. In addition to excellent instruction, we provide a n u m b e r of services a c c e s s i b l e to all students w h o need support of different kinds — a first-rate Library and M e d i a Centre, a W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e Centre, L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e , C o u n s e l l i n g , P l a c e m e n t and Financial A i d , a m o n g others. C a p i l a n o ' s style is distinctive. W e have no large c l a s s e s , and we attempt to give e a c h student individual attention. Tutorials, w o r k s h o p s , a n d other methods of s m a l l - g r o u p instruction are favoured. Laboratories are w e l l - e q u i p p e d and small. A b o v e all, we have a staff constantly w o r k i n g to assist students in difficulty. C a p i l a n o also has its s h o r t c o m i n g s . M a n y of our buildings are quite unspectacular, and s o m e are less than satisfactory. Although we have a Housing Service, we do not have residence facilities; we have no o n - c a m p u s theatre, and therefore use c o m m u n i t y facilities; a n d our recreational facilities are inadequate. T h e c o r e of the c o l l e g e is the L y n n m o u r C a m p u s in North V a n c o u v e r — a lovely forested site, but not the easiest of a c c e s s . S o m e students find the c o l l e g e too large for their tastes (a student body of 4,000 c a n be impersonal), but others find it too small; those w h o are self-starters tend to find it just right. Capilano also has Learning Centres in Sechelt and Squamish and offers c o u r s e s in many other locations in H o w e S o u n d , on the S u n s h i n e C o a s t and in North & West V a n c o u v e r . Y o u d o not need to c o m m u t e from c a m p u s to c a m p u s — it is C a p i l a n o ' s desire to reach out from our main c a m p u s when there is a sufficient d e m a n d for our services. In the final analysis, C a p i l a n o is a serious place for serious students of different ages, b a c k g r o u n d s , interests a n d goals. C a p i l a n o is also a friendly place b e c a u s e our people are helpful to o n e another. A n d C a p i l a n o people have a s e n s e of humour w h i c h allows them to a c c e p t the less attractive features of the college while capitalizing on its real strengths. Welcome. Principal 1 Calendar for 1982-83 1982 FALL TERM JULY S M T JANUARY W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 S *l M T W F S T W F S T W T F S F S 6 7 8 9 (^YU)12 13 14 15 16{Um)]9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 5 M T W T September 1: In-Person Registration. 15:00 - 20:00 (Faculty A d v i s o r s present). September 2: In-Person Registration. 14:00 - 20:00 (Faculty A d v i s o r s present). A d v i s o r s present). M September 8: C l a s s e s C o m m e n c e for A c a d e m i c a n d C a r e e r Divisions. October 5: Last day to A D D a c o u r s e , or c h a n g e status from AUDIT TO CREDIT. October 8: Deferred fees due. Last d a y to receive 80% refund of tuition fees. October 11: T h a n k s g i v i n g Day. C o l l e g e C l o s e d . November 8: Last d a y to W I T H D R A W from a c o u r s e , or c h a n g e status from C R E D I T T O A U D I T , or c h a n g e sections. MARCH T September 1: C o u r s e C h a n g e Day. 13:00 - 15:00 (for students w h o r e g i s t e r e d b y m a i l , b u t n e e d to a l t e r t h e i r c o u r s e registration. Faculty A d v i s o r s present). September 7: In-Person Registration. 14:00 - 20:00 (Faculty 5 SEPTEMBER M T FEBRUARY T 1 2 © 4 5 6 7 8 9 TO 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19(20)21 22 23 24 25 26 77 28 29 3 0 © S W 7 8 9 Qfj) IT 1? 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 AUGUST S T August 3-August 20: Mail Registration (for North S h o r e , H o w e S o u n d , S e c h e l t a n d Returning Students). F S 1 2 3 4 5 5 6 © 8 9 10 11 6 7 8 © 1 0 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 26 27 28 29 30 27 28 29 30 31 November 11: R e m e m b r a n c e D a y . C o l l e g e C l o s e d . November 15-December 10: Mail Registration for S p r i n g Term (for North S h o r e , H o w e S o u n d , S e c h e l t a n d Returning Students). December 10: Last D a y of C l a s s e s for A c a d e m i c a n d C a r e e r Divisions. December 13-17: Examination Week for A c a d e m i c and C a r e e r Divisions. December 23: Last day of C l a s s e s for V o c a t i o n a l Division. OCTOBER S M T W T F S S 3 3 4© December 24-28: C o l l e g e C l o s e d . APRIL 6 7(B) 9 M T W T F S QO 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 m ) l 2 13 14 15 16 10 11 12 13 1 4 @ 1 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 1 7 ( l 8 ) l 9 20 21 22 23 24 25 2 6 © 2 8 © 30 NOVEMBER MAY S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 fit 1 0 © 12 13 14(13)16 17 TB 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 9 7 S M T W 1983 SPRING TERM January 1: N e w Years D a y . C o l l e g e C l o s e d . January 4: C l a s s e s c o m m e n c e for V o c a t i o n a l D i v i s i o n . January 4: C o u r s e C h a n g e D a y . 13:00 - 15:00 (for students who have registered by mail, but need to alter their c o u r s e registration). January 4: In-Person Registration. 15:00 - 20:00 A d v i s o r s present). (Faculty January 5: In-Person Registration. 14:00 - 20:00 (Faculty A d v i s o r s present). T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 January 6: In-Person Registration. 14:00 - 20:00 (Faculty A d v i s o r s present). January 10: C l a s s e s c o m m e n c e for A c a d e m i c a n d C a r e e r Divisions. February 10: Last day to A D D a course, or c h a n g e status from AUDIT T O CREDIT. February 11: Deferred Fees D u e . Last d a y to receive 8 0 % refund of tuition fees. JUNE DECEMBER S 5 M T W T 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 February 17-18: Mid-term break. N o C l a s s e s S c h e d u l e d . F S 11 A © 1 2 @ 1 4 15 1MJ7)18 19 20 21 22(23)24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 . March 9: Last d a y to W I T H D R A W from a c o u r s e or c h a n g e status from C R E D I T T O A U D I T , or c h a n g e sections. April 1: G o o d Friday. C o l l e g e C l o s e d . April 4: Easter M o n d a y . C o l l e g e C l o s e d . April 15: Last D a y of C l a s s e s for A c a d e m i c a n d C a r e e r Divisions. April 18-27: E x a m i n a t i o n Week for A c a d e m i c a n d C a r e e r Divisions. April 29: Last d a y of c l a s s e s for V o c a t i o n a l Division. 1983 SUMMER TERM April: S u m m e r Term Mail Registration begins o n a c o n t i n u o u s basis a n d C o u n s e l l i n g S e r v i c e s are available. 2 Admission iii. How to Apply for A d m i s s i o n A. Lynnmour Campus: 1. O b t a i n an "Application for A d m i s s i o n F o r m ' ' f r o m the Registrar's Office. If y o u need a s s i s t a n c e in c o m p l e t i n g this form, y o u may arrange a meeting with the C o l l e g e A d m i s s i o n s A d v i s o r or a C o u n s e l l o r by c a l l i n g the C o u n s e l l i n g Office at 986-1911, local 298. P e r s o n s w i s h i n g admittance to the C o l l e g e to enter a C a r e e r P r o g r a m must arrange an interview with the C a r e e r P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r prior to being admitted. Individuals w h o are not admitted to a particular C a r e e r P r o g r a m may still be eligible for a d m i s s i o n to the C o l l e g e to e n t e r an A c a d e m i c S t u d i e s or G e n e r a l S t u d i e s P r o g r a m . If y o u are in d o u b t please c o n t a c t the Registrar's Office. P e r s o n s w i s h i n g to enter full-time or part-time programs of studies are a d v i s e d to c o n s u l t with a c o u n s e l l o r prior to a p p l y i n g for a d m i s s i o n . 2. C o m p l e t e the A p p l i c a t i o n F o r m and b r i n g or mail it to the Registrar's Office. Include with y o u r A p p l i c a t i o n F o r m any former e d u c a t i o n r e c o r d s w h i c h are required, s u c h as H i g h S c h o o l G r a d u a t i o n Certificates, Official T r a n s c r i p t s from other post-secondary institutions, English Placement Test s c o r e s . 3. O n c e y o u r a p p l i c a t i o n for A d m i s s i o n has been p r o c e s s e d , y o u will receive a "Permit to Register" from the Registrar's Office by mail. (See page 4 for Registration dates a n d procedures). B. Howe S o u n d and Sechelt Centres: E a c h term C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e offers a n u m b e r of c o u r s e s in H o w e S o u n d a n d the S u n s h i n e C o a s t . S t u d e n t s w h o w i s h to be admitted to the C o l l e g e in order to register for these c o u r s e s s h o u l d c o n t a c t the S q u a m i s h C e n t r e (38038 C l e v e l a n d A v e n u e , 892-5322) or, the S e c h e l t C e n t r e (1360 Inlet A v e n u e , 885-9310) for forms a n d details of c o u r s e offerings. C o u n s e l l i n g services are available at both centres and the A p p l i c a t i o n p r o c e d u r e s are as outlined above. When to Apply for Admission A p p l i c a t i o n for A d m i s s i o n to the C o l l e g e may be made at any time d u r i n g the year. However, the following d e a d l i n e s are suggested to e n s u r e that y o u have every opportunity to be able to register for the c o u r s e s y o u wish. Term Fall Spring Summer 1982 1983 1983 Application Deadline J u l y 15, 1982 O c t o b e r 15, 1982 April 15, 1983 S o m e Career P r o g r a m s have earlier application deadlines than those listed above. F o r details please c o n t a c t the Registrar's Office. Who is Eligible for Admission? A n y person w h o is 18 or older and w h o is a C a n a d i a n citizen or L a n d e d Immigrant is eligible for a d m i s s i o n . Persons under 18 years of age are also eligible if they are in at least one of the following categories: i. T h e y have a B . C . S e c o n d a r y S c h o o l graduation certificate or equivalent e d u c a t i o n a l r e c o r d ; ii. They are s e c o n d a r y s c h o o l students attending a s c h o o l in the College Region and have the written recommendation of their s c h o o l p r i n c i p a l ; / P e r s o n s at least 16 years of age w h o c a n satisfy a C o l l e g e counsellor that they possess an interest in, and an aptitude for, a vocation for w h i c h the C o l l e g e provides instruction, may be eligible to enter the related C o l l e g e V o c a t i o n a l program. English Proficiency A p p l i c a n t s are required to be functional in the E n g l i s h language T h e C o l l e g e reserves the right to assess the c o m petence of a p p l i c a n t s in the E n g l i s h language prior to granting a d m i s s i o n . T h o s e students w h o wish to enrol in E n g l i s h and H u m a n i t i e s in the a c a d e m i c division must submit the results of the B . C . G o v e r n m e n t E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t Test with their registration forms. T h o s e students who have not taken the B . C . G o v e r n m e n t E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t Test must take the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e S c r e e n i n g E x a m i n a t i o n before registering for any of these c o u r s e s . S c h e d u l e s of E n g l i s h S c r e e n i n g E x a m i n a t i o n s will be available in the Registrar's Office, 986-1911, local 213, S q u a m i s h L e a r n i n g Centre, 892-5322, S e c h e l t L e a r n i n g Centre, 885-3514, or the H u m a n i t i e s D i v i s i o n , 986-1911, local 218. Student Number - Identification C a r d W h e n a student is first admitted to the C o l l e g e s/he is a s s i g n e d a permanent student number. This n u m b e r controls the Student's R e c o r d , Statement of G r a d e s a n d C o l l e g e Identification C a r d . The student is requested to familiarize him/herself with this number. T o use the Library S e r v i c e s of the C o l l e g e , to sign out audiovisual materials or to vote in Student Society elections, a student must have a C o l l e g e Identification Card> T h e s e cards will be available from the Registrar's Office two weeks after the b e g i n n i n g of c l a s s e s . If this card is not received within two weeks, students s h o u l d contact the Registrar's Office. If the card is lost, a duplicate may be obtained from the Registrar's Office for $2.00. Registration O n c e y o u have received a " P e r m i t to R e g i s t e r " , y o u may select your c o u r s e s a n d register. P a y m e n t of fees is required at the time of registration. When to Register MAIL REGISTRATION: The Mail Registration period is from A u g u s t 3 to August 20 for the Fall Term and N o v e m b e r 15 to D e c e m b e r 10 for the Spring Term Returning students and C o l l e g e region residents only permitted to register d u r i n g this period. IN-PERSON REGISTRATION: T h e In-Person Registration period is S e p t e m b e r 1, 2 and 7 for Fall Term and J a n u a r y 4 to J a n u a r y 6 for S p r i n g T e r m . A l l new students with a " P e r m i t to R e g i s t e r " a n d returning students w h o d i d not register d u r i n g mail registration may register at these times. " R e s i d e n t s " and "returning students" are defined as: Resident: A person w h o has lived in the official C o l l e g e region (North V a n c o u v e r , West V a n c o u v e r , H o w e S o u n d , or S u n s h i n e C o a s t ) for at least four m o n t h s as of the first day of the term for w h i c h application is made. Returning Student: A n y student w h o has registered for. a n d has attended, credit c l a s s e s at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . R e t u r n i n g students who have been a c a d e m i c a l l y disqualified in the previous semester s h o u l d c o n s u l t a c o u n s e l l o r about eligibility. How to Register 1. For Academic Programs and Courses at Lynnmour: a. O b t a i n r e g i s t r a t i o n f o r m s a n d t i m e t a b l e s f r o m t h e Registrar's Office. Timetables giving the times of c o u r s e offerings, r o o m n u m b e r s a n d instructors are available a p p r o x i m a t e l y seven weeks prior to e a c h term. b. Return the c o m p l e t e d form either d u r i n g P e r s o n Registration. M a i l or In- 2. For Career Programs and Courses a. Obtain registration forms and timetables from the Registrar's Office. b. A d m i s s i o n s c r e e n i n g begins at least four m o n t h s before Fall registration a n d two m o n t h s before S p r i n g registration. There is limited s p a c e in most C a r e e r p r o g r a m s so a d m i s s i o n is limited to places available. A d m i t t e d students wishing to register s h o u l d c h e c k actual a d v a n c e registration times with the appropriate program c o o r d i n a t o r . c. S u b m i t r e g i s t r a t i o n a p p l i c a t i o n s to the a p p r o p r i a t e program coordinator for a p p r o v a l . For new students this will normally involve an interview and c o u n s e l l i n g . d. Registration c a n often be c o m p l e t e d prior to the normal -mail registration period, however, registrants w h o have been a c c e p t e d before mail registration, but w h o have not c o m p l e t e d their a d v a n c e registration (by fee payment), must submit their approved registration forms (with fees) to the Registrar's Office either d u r i n g M a i l or I n - P e r s o n Registration. 3. For Vocational Programs and Courses: a Obtain registration Registrar's Office. forms and timetables from the b. C o m p l e t e the registration form a n d obtain the p r o g r a m c o o r d i n a t o r ' s signature on the c o m p l e t e d form. c. Submit the c o m p l e t e d form to the Registrar's Office prior to the b e g i n n i n g of the p r o g r a m . 4. For Credit Free Courses and Activities: S e e P a g e 6 of the calendar. 5. For Courses in Howe Sound and the Sunshine Coast: a. Obtain registration forms a n d timetables from either the S q u a m i s h or S e c h e l t C e n t r e s . b. Return the c o m p l e t e d registration form with attached to the appropriate centre. payment 6. For Courses on More than One Campus: a. O b t a i n r e g i s t r a t i o n f o r m s a n d t i m e t a b l e s f r o m the Registrar's Office on the L y n n m o u r C a m p u s or from the S q u a m i s h or S e c h e l t C e n t r e . b. Return the c o m p l e t e d registration form with payment attached to the L y n n m o u r C a m p u s , either by mail or in person. Course Overload A c o u r s e overload is a registration for more than 16 credit hours of a c a d e m i c c o u r s e s or more than the full requirements specified for a C a r e e r P r o g r a m . Students may register at their d i s c r e t i o n for a c o u r s e overload up to a total of 21 credit h o u r s so long as they have d i s c u s s e d their need for/wish for an o v e r l o a d with a c o u n s e l lor. S c i e n c e students however, are automatically allowed to register for more than 16 credit hours, so long as the total credit hours d o e s not e x c e e d 21 credit h o u r s a n d does not arise from registration in more than five c o u r s e s . Students may not register for a c o u r s e o v e r l o a d until after In-Person Registration Downtown Education Centre For the c o n v e n i e n c e of North S h o r e residents w h o work in d o w n t o w n V a n c o u v e r , C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e has c o u r s e s a n d t r a i n i n g s e s s i o n s at the D o w n t o w n E d u c a t i o n C e n t r e at 549 H o w e Street. Changing Registration Status C h a n g e of Name a n d / o r A d d r e s s Limitations of S p a c e The C o l l e g e cannot guarantee that s p a c e s will be available in all c o u r s e s or programs. Limitations of space, equipment and budget are likely to restrict the student's range of c h o i c e . The C o l l e g e , therefore, reserves the right to c a n c e l p r o g r a m s or limit registration in c o u r s e s . C o u r s e Verification F o l l o w i n g the last day to add a c o u r s e the Registrar's Office will issue C o u r s e Verification forms to each student. It is the student's responsibility to c h e c k h i s / h e r list of c o u r s e s . If a student believes that there is a n error in his/her registration, s/he must correct the errors with a C o u r s e C h a n g e F o r m before the final withdrawal date. Failure to correct the error may result in an " F " grade on the student's transcript (or no credit being granted for work done). A d d i n g or C h a n g i n g a C o u r s e A student may enrol in a c o u r s e , c h a n g e s e c t i o n s , or c h a n g e from audit to credit status (see page 5) after the late registration period but before the final date to a d d a c o u r s e . This must be d o n e on a C o u r s e C h a n g e F o r m , be s i g n e d by the instructors involved a n d submitted to the Registrar's Office. The addition of a c o u r s e or c h a n g e from audit to credit status after the final date to a d d a c o u r s e m a y only be d o n e in e x c e p t i o n a l c i r c u m s t a n c e s a n d with the approval of the Instructor, C o o r d i n a t o r a n d Registrar. R e q u e s t s for s u c h c h a n g e s after the final date to add a c o u r s e s h o u l d be directed first to the Registrar. Registration Schedule F O R It is the responsibility of the student to inform the Registrar's Office of any c h a n g e s in h i s / h e r name, a d d r e s s , or p h o n e number. D o c u m e n t a t i o n must be p r o v i d e d to support a c h a n g e of name request. Withdrawing from a C o u r s e or C h a n g i n g From Credit to Audit Status S t u d e n t s may withdraw from a c o u r s e or c h a n g e from credit to audit status after the last day of the In-Person Registration period but before the final date to withdraw from a c o u r s e . T h i s must be d o n e o n a C o u r s e C h a n g e F o r m signed by the instructor involved and submitted to the Registrar's Office. Requests after the final date to withdraw from a c o u r s e require the approval of the Instructor, C o o r d i n a t o r and Registrar. A p p r o v a l will not normally be granted unless the records of the C o l l e g e are incorrect as the result of an error by the C o l l e g e , or the student is simply requesting a c h a n g e from o n e s e c t i o n to another of the s a m e c o u r s e , or is transferring to a lower level c o u r s e at the request of the instructor, or the student is unable to meet the deadline date b e c a u s e of illness or e m e r g e n c y c i r c u m s t a n c e s . ' N o t e : A p p r o v a l for late a d d s a n d / o r late d r o p s will not be granted simply b e c a u s e the student was unaware of, or n e g l e c t e d to c o m p l y with, the C o l l e g e ' s registration p o l i c i e s and p r o c e d u r e s . Right to Register A student w h o has not maintained a satisfactory standing in a program in any term may be denied p e r m i s s i o n to register in that p r o g r a m in a subsequent term. A C A D E M I C / C A R E E R F A L L 81 S T U D E N T S S P R I N G 82 Mail Registration A u g u s t 3 - A u g u s t 20 N o v e m b e r 15 - D e c e m b e r 10 C o u r s e C h a n g e Day (for students w h o have registered by mail, but need to alter their c o u r s e registration) September 1 13:00 - 15:00 January 4 13:00 - 15:00 In-Person Registration (Faculty A d v i s o r s present. C h i l d m i n d i n g Available.) September 1 15:00 - 20:00 January 4 15:00 p.m. - 20:00 September 2 15:00 - 20:00 January 5 15:00 - 20:00 September 7 15:00 - 20:00 January 6 15:00 - 20:00 S U M M E R 82 A p r i l 1 - 29 Classes C o m m e n c e September 8 (Academic and Career Divisions J a n u a r y 10 Dependent upon course. Final Date to A D D a course, or c h a n g e from Audit to Credit Status. October 5 February 10 Dependent upon course. November 8 March 9 Dependent upon course. "Instructors required* signature Final Date to W I T H D R A W from a c o u r s e , or c h a n g e f r o m C r e d i t to A u d i t Status, or c h a n g e sections. 'Instructors signature required' Fee Refunds Financial Information Conditions: a. A c o m p l e t e refund of fees will be made w h e n c o u r s e s or p r o g r a m s are c a n c e l l e d by the C o l l e g e . Fees Payment of fees is required at the time of registration. Fee Schedule 1. Credit Courses and Programs a. Effective J a n u a r y 1, 1982, tuition fees are $13.00 per credit hour to a m a x i m u m of $156.00 per term. Registrants for c o u r s e s with less than three (3) credits in a term are subject to a m i n i m u m fee of $39.00; the m i n i m u m term fee of $39.00 may not be required for d e s i g n a t e d parts of specific programs. b. N o additional tuition fee for laboratory c o u r s e s is levied by the c o l l e g e , however students will incur additional c o s t s in c o u r s e s a n d p r o g r a m s w h i c h require supplies, materials, manuals, b o o k s , field trips, etc. c. T h e Student Activity Fee a s s e s s e d by the Student U n i o n is $1.66 per credit h o u r to a m a x i m u m of $20.00 per term F e e - p a y i n g v o c a t i o n a l students enroled d u r i n g any term will be a s s e s s e d the respective Student Activity Fee (This fee is optional for c o u r s e s in H o w e S o u n d and on the Sunshine Coast). Note: Fees are subject to c h a n g e by the B o a r d of College. the 2. Credit Free Activities S e e Credit Free Activities, page 6. b. R e f u n d s may a l s o be granted to a student on the basis of a c o m p l e t e or partial official withdrawal (see s c a l e below). c. Student S o c i e t y activity fees may be r e f u n d e d , subject to B o a r d P o l i c y N o . 18, u p o n written a p p l i c a t i o n to the Student S o c i e t y office; s u c h a p p l i c a t i o n to be received within two w e e k s of the e n d of I n - P e r s o n R e g i s t r a t i o n . Scale: a S t u d e n t s w h o withdraw before the first day of c l a s s e s will receive an 80% refund of tuition fees, a n d 100% of lab fees. Student S o c i e t y activity fees will not be r e f u n d e d , e x c e p t as per item c. a b o v e . b If a student withdraws within one month of the date classes c o m m e n c e , 8 0 % of both tuition a n d lab fees will be refunded. Student activity fees will not be r e f u n d e d , except as per item c. above S e e " W i t h d r a w i n g from a C o u r s e " page 5. c. From the date following the last day s p e c i f i e d in (b) until the end of the term, no refund will be granted. Deadline: Fall Term Last day to receive a refund of 8 0 % of tuition fees is O c t o b e r 8, 1982. Spring Term Conditions of Registration Last day to receive a refund of 8 0 % of tuition fees is F e b r u a r y 11, 1983. a. A l l c h e q u e s a n d m o n e y orders are to be made payable to " C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e " a n d a c c o m p a n i e d by a c o m p l e t e d Registration F o r m . Non-Registration b. U n d e r p a i d registrations will be returned u n p r o c e s s e d . (This may c a u s e u n a v o i d a b l e d e l a y s a n d requested c o u r s e s m a y not be available. P l e a s e c h e c k y o u r fee c a l c u l a t i o n carefully.) c. A c h a r g e of $5.00 will be levied for c o s t s of h a n d l i n g c h e q u e s returned by the bank for non-sufficient funds d. P o s t - d a t e d c h e q u e s or separate c h e q u e s for tuition fees a n d Student U n i o n activity fees will not be a c c e p t e d . e. Students w h o s e fees are to be paid by a g e n c i e s , other than G o v e r n m e n t S c h o l a r s h i p s , are required to present a letter to this effect at registration. f. T h e student's c o p y of the Registration F o r m is the only tax receipt issued by the C o l l e g e . Special Fee Waivers for Senior Citizens A n y person 60 years of age or over is entitled to free tuition, a n d is not required to pay student activity fees. A p p l i c a n t s for this special senior citizen fee waiver need only p r o d u c e appropriate identification s u c h as the C o u r t e s y C a r d for senior citizens or P h a r m a c a r e c a r d . Deferred Fees All fees are due and payable in full at the time of registration. Students enroling for 12 or more credit hours w h o are unable to pay their fees in full may apply in person to the F i n a n c i a l A i d office before Registration to defer up to o n e half of their tuition and lab fees for a m a x i m u m period of one month. R e t u r n i n g students with debts to the C o l l e g e (e.g. lost materials; lost e q u i p m e n t ; tuition fees not paid) will be refused registration until s u c h debts are e r a s e d . De-Registration T h e C o l l e g e may de-register students w h o pay tuition fees with N.S.F. c h e q u e s or w h o fail to pay deferred fees when due. Fees Policy - Credit Free Courses and Services Information about credit-free c o u r s e s a n d s e r v i c e s is generally p r o d u c e d in b r o c h u r e s w h i c h are distributed o n the • North S h o r e . Tuition fees c h a r g e d for credit-free c o u r s e s a n d s e r v i c e s are based on the principle of r e c o v e r i n g the c o s t of direct instructional e x p e n s e s . A n y p e r s o n 60 years or over is entitled to free credit-free tuition. A p p l i c a n t s for this tuition fee waiver n e e d only p r o d u c e identification s u c h as the C o u r t e s y C a r d for S e n i o r C i t i z e n s or a P h a r m a c a r e C a r d . The C o l l e g e reserves the right to c a n c e l a n y c o u r s e for w h i c h registration-does not reach the required m i n i m u m , a n d to withdraw, p o s t p o n e , or c o m b i n e c l a s s e s , or to c h a n g e instructors. Fees c h a r g e d for c o u r s e s that are later c a n c e l l e d by the C o l l e g e will be refunded in full. A p p l i c a t i o n s for withdrawals a n d refunds will not be a c c e p t e d after the s e c o n d s e s s i o n of a c o u r s e has been h e l d ; for c o u r s e s of up to three d a y s ' d u r a t i o n , a p p l i c a t i o n s for withdrawals a n d refunds will be a c c e p t e d no later than the d a y before the c o u r s e c o m m e n c e s . A l l refunds are s u b j e c t to a 20% administration c h a r g e . F e e s paid for a c o u r s e or service are not transferable to another c o u r s e or services to be offered d u r i n g a different term. 6 General Course Information The Instructional Year T h e Instructional year is divided into two four-month terms, Fall and S p r i n g , and an equivalent S u m m e r S e s s i o n of two months (May and J u n e ) . C o u r s e Credits A student will receive credit only for the c o u r s e s in w h i c h s / h e is officially registered a c c o r d i n g to the records in the Registrar's Office. A credit hour normally represents o n e hour per week of c l a s s r o o m work per term. M o s t c o u r s e s offered are three credit hours c o u r s e s . A s s u c h , they normally require three class hours per week and may, in addition, require laboratories, seminars and tutorials. A n additional and optional fourth hour of instruction will be offered in e a c h three credit hour c o u r s e . T h i s extra e d u c a tional opportunity may take the form of a w o r k s h o p , seminar, field-trip or similar activity, at the discretion of e a c h instructor and as c i r c u m s t a n c e s allow. Fourth hour activities are not a factor in determining final grades. A t t e n d a n c e is on a voluntary basis. A student expecting to be absent from c l a s s e s b e c a u s e of p r o l o n g e d illness is advised to notify his/her instructor as s o o n as p o s s i b l e and to arrange to make up m i s s e d instruction. T h e instructor may require that a m e d i c a l certificate be presented to re-instate the student. If illness prevents a student from writing a final examination or assignment, s/he may be a s s i g n e d a grade or granted a deferral at the discretion of his/her instructor. In s u c h cases, a m e d i c a l certificate must be submitted within one week of the date of the examination or due date of the assignment Faculty members are authorized to d i s m i s s from a class a student w h o is disruptive to the learning p r o c e s s . Visitors A person may attend a class session as a visitor for a limited period of time, provided s/he has permission from the instructor in a d v a n c e . T h i s privilege does not extend to s c i e n c e a n d language labs or c o u r s e s requiring the use of m a c h i n e r y or materials. A visitor is not registered, d o e s not sit e x a m i n a tions, d o e s not receive credit and attends not more than three weeks during the term. Academic Policies Credit Status A student may attend all c l a s s e s , s e m i n a r s , labs etc. of the c o u r s e and pays the normal tuition fee. S / h e is required to submit a s s i g n m e n t s and sit e x a m i n a t i o n s . G r a d i n g System Capilano grading. C o l l e g e u s e s the Letter G r a d e Point following categories of See: A t t e n d a n c e . Audit Status A student may attend all meetings of a credit class without receiving credit. T h e audit student attends all c l a s s e s , s e m i nars, labs etc. of the c l a s s and pays the normal tuition fee. S / h e is not required to sit e x a m i n a t i o n s or submit a s s i g n ments. T h e status of audit will be d e n i e d by an instructor if the student has not met the attendance requirements for that class. This denial may be a p p e a l e d through the grade appeal process. Audit students will be a c c e p t e d on a s p a c e available basis, a n d are only permitted to register after the last day of In-Person Registration. Credit Free Status A student is registered for a credit-free c o u r s e or activity who has paid the appropriate fee. Course Challenge Procedure T h e C o l l e g e has a p o l i c y w h i c h allows registered C o l l e g e students to request e x a m i n a t i o n for achievement in certain courses. By this p r o c e d u r e , a student may receive credit for a course without taking the c o u r s e . Interested students s h o u l d consult a c o u n s e l l o r for current information on this c h a l l e n g e procedure. There are certain c o u r s e s w h i c h may not be c h a l l e n g e d . A student c h a l l e n g i n g a c o u r s e will be required to pay the normal tuition fee for that c o u r s e . C o u r s e s c h a l l e n g e d s u c c e s s f u l l y will be indicated on the student's transcript. Note: Credit for c o u r s e s s u c c e s s f u l l y c h a l l e n g e d will apply towards a Certificate or D i p l o m a from C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e , however, s o m e other institutions may not grant credit for c o u r s e s c h a l l e n g e d . A+ A A- 4% 4 3% B+ B B- 3% 3 C+ C C- *k D CR F NC 1 W NA AUD 2% 2 Classification First Class Second Class Pass 1% 1 Pass _ 0 - 0 _ _ _ Credit Granted* Fail No Credit Granted" Incomplete" Withdrawn' X Not A t t e n d i n g * t Audit* not c a l c u l a t e d in G r a d e Point Average $ not s h o w n on transcript Repeating a C o u r s e A c o u r s e may be repeated for the p u r p o s e of improving a grade. T h e grade for e a c h attempt will be r e c o r d e d with the higher grade used in the c o m p u t a t i o n of the G r a d e Point Average. Students are c a u t i o n e d that other institutions may i n c l u d e both grades in the G . P . A . c o m p u t a t i o n . Attendance G r a d e Point Average A student is e x p e c t e d to attend all c l a s s e s in w h i c h s/he is registered, s i n c e evaluation of progress in any c o u r s e is cumulative, based on c l a s s a s s i g n m e n t s , participation and examinations. G r a d e Point A v e r a g e s are reported on e a c h P e r m a n e n t Student R e c o r d . T h e G . P . A . is the s u m of the g r a d e point hours earned in the term, divided by the n u m b e r of credit hours a p p l i c a b l e to the G r a d e Point c o m p u t a t i o n . 7 Interpretation of Grades Diploma and Certificate Requirements "I" grades are given at the e n d of a term w h e n , in the judgement of the instructor, the student w o u l d have a reasonable expectation of p a s s i n g the c o u r s e but has not c o m p l e t e d the work required. A n "I" grade is only awarded where the instructor a n d student have arranged for the work to be c o m p l e t e d by a s p e c i f i e d date, w h i c h is noted in the class list with grades. S t u d e n t s w h o c o m p l e t e the p r o g r a m s fill out a " R e q u e s t for D i p l o m a or C e r t i f i c a t e " form at the Registrar's O f f i c e o n e month before the e n d of the term in w h i c h the p r o g r a m is to be c o m p l e t e d . A student granted an "I" grade must complete the necessary assignments on the date specified by the instructor on the grade sheet or s/he will automatically receive a predetermined grade w h i c h reflects the i n c o m p l e t e d work. T o be eligible for an A s s o c i a t e in A r t s a n d S c i e n c e D i p l o m a , a student must have: U p o n the c o m p l e t i o n of the required a s s i g n m e n t s by the specified time, the instructor will record the final grade based o n the c o m p l e t e d work. a. C o m p l e t e d 60 credit hours, of w h i c h at least 30 must be c o m p l e t e d at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . Students are c a u t i o n e d that other institutions may include "I" grades in G P A . c a l c u l a t i o n . c. O b t a i n at least 45 credit hours f r o m the f o l l o w i n g subject areas, i n c l u d i n g at least 6 credit hours in E n g l i s h (100 level or higher), at least 6 credit h o u r s from subjects listed in A below, a n d at least 15 credit hours from 200 level c o u r s e s . A student w h o registers for a c o u r s e , d o e s not attend a n d d o e s not officially w i t h d r a w may be a s s i g n e d a grade designation of " N A " . N A grades are a s s i g n e d as of the final Drop date for the term registered in. All " F " grades are r e c o r d e d on the student's transcript. T h e s e grades are a s s i g n e d a value of z e r o in the c a l c u l a t i o n of a student's C u m u l a t i v e G r a d e Point A v e r a g e . Students are c a u t i o n e d that other institutions may not grant transfer credit for c o u r s e s c o m p l e t e d with a " D " grade. Registering as an audit student d o e s not guarantee that a student will receive audit status. B a s e d on the attendance and participation requirements of the instructor, an instructor will c o n f i r m or d e n y the "audit" status of a student in their course. A denial ruling is open to appeal by the student. Students w h o c o m p l e t e c o u r s e s (credit or credit free) w h i c h are not part of a program may also apply to the R e g i s trar's Office for a Certificate. 1. For a n A c a d e m i c S t u d i e s D i p l o m a b. Obtain a 2.00 G r a d e Point A v e r a g e or better. B Biology Chemistry Geography Geology Mathematics Physics Anthropology Art Commerce Economics English Fine Arts French German History 2. For a C a r e e r Studies D i p l o m a (by a. C o m p l e t e d the program Music Philosophy Political S c i e n c e Psychology Religious Studies Sociology Spanish Theatre Women's Studies program) requirements. b. O b t a i n e d a 2.00 G r a d e Point A v e r a g e or better. Official Transcript/Statement of Grades 3. For a- G e n e r a l S t u d i e s D i p l o m a A statement of grades is either mailed or distributed from the Registrar's Office. a. C o m p l e t e d 60 credit hours at least 30 of w h i c h must be c o m p l e t e d at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . Official transcripts are issued only at the request of the student. T h e student must c o m p l e t e a T r a n s c r i p t O r d e r F o r m and pay $1.00 per c o p y in order to obtain a c o p y . b. O b t a i n a 2.00 G r a d e Point A v e r a g e or better. T o be eligible for a Certificate, a student must have s u c c e s s f u l l y c o m p l e t e d the requirements of a c o u r s e or program of studies of less than four terms in duration. T h e r e is a $10 fee for d i p l o m a replacement. Scholastic Awards Appeal of Final Grades If a student w i s h e s to appeal a final grade s / h e must contact the c o u n s e l l o r not later than two weeks after receipt of grades or C h a n g e of G r a d e Notification. T h e c o u n s e l l o r will d i s c u s s the grade and appeal procedure with the student a n d attempt to arrange a meeting with the instructor. T h e c o u n s e l l o r will provide the student with a " F i n a l G r a d e A p p e a l " form. If the student w i s h e s to pursue the a p p e a l , the " F i n a l G r a d e A p p e a l " form is c o m p l e t e d and submitted to the Secretary of the A p p e a l s C o m m i t t e e with a fee of five dollars for e a c h c o u r s e to be a p p e a l e d . A p p e a l s are c o n s i d e r e d by an A p p e a l s C o m m i t t e e c h a i r e d by one of the c o l l e g e Deans. T h e C o m m i t t e e c o n s i s t s of representatives from faculty, students, a n d a counsellor. During the A p p e a l p r o c e s s all term grades, i n c l u d i n g the final examination mark, are taken into c o n s i d e r a t i o n . In all cases the student is informed in writing of the C o m m i t t e e ' s d e c i s i o n . S h o u l d the mark be c h a n g e d , the five dollar fee is refunded. O n l y those appeals that follow the a b o v e p r o c e s s will be considered. 8 Dean's List S p e c i a l r e c o g n i t i o n will be a c c o r d e d students w h o c o m plete a full p r o g r a m of studies at the C o l l e g e with a 3.50 or higher grade point average d u r i n g a term. S t u d e n t s with "I" grades are not eligible for the D e a n ' s list. Governor-General's Silver Medal T h i s award is presented to a D i p l o m a G r a d u a t e with the best c u m u l a t i v e grade point average, a n d w h o has attained this grade point average on a m i n i m u m of 15 credit h o u r s per term or full program load as outlined in the c a l e n d a r d u r i n g a t t e n d a n c e at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . Lieutenant Governor's Medal A w a r d e d for a c a d e m i c e x c e l l e n c e a n d c o n t r i b u t i o n to the college and community to a graduate in a Vocational or Career p r o g r a m of less than two years d u r a t i o n . Merit List S p e c i a l recognition will be a c c o r d e d part-time students with a 3.50 cumulative grade point average or higher w h o have s u c c e s s f u l l y c o m p l e t e d a m i n i m u m of 30 semester hours at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . Principal's C i t i z e n s h i p A w a r d This award is given in r e c o g n i t i o n of the student who has made the greatest contributions to C o l l e g e life. Principal's A w a r d s This award is presented to one D i p l o m a G r a d u a t e with the best grade point average in A c a d e m i c S t u d i e s , a n d to o n e D i p l o m a Graduate with the best grade point average in a Career Program. Academic Difficulties Students w h o are e x p e r i e n c i n g difficulties in their c o u r s e work during a term may be referred by an instructor to a Counsellor. T h e student is e n c o u r a g e d to consult with his/her instructor a n d C o u n s e l l o r to evolve a satisfactory plan w h i c h will remedy these difficulties. Plagiarism Plagiarism is the presentation of another person's w o r d s or ideas without a c k n o w l e d g i n g their s o u r c e — as if they were one's o w n . S t u d e n t s in doubt about the n e e d for a c k n o w l e d g e m e n t s h o u l d take care to avoid unintentional plagiarism by learning proper scholarly procedures. A d o c u ment explaining these p r o c e d u r e s is available from the Learning A s s i s t a n c e Centre. Intentional plagiarism is not only dishonest, but a rejection of the principles of s c h o l a r ship. A plagiarized college assignment, therefore, will ordinarily receive no credit. At the instructor's discretion, the plagiarist may receive an F for the paper or for the c o u r s e . c a u t i o n e d that student loan applications a n d other similar a p p l i c a t i o n s have s u c h consent written in the d o c u m e n t . Limit of Responsibility T h e C o l l e g e a c c e p t s no responsibility for the c a n c e l l a t i o n or d i s c o n t i n u a t i o n of any c o u r s e or program or class of instruction that may be n e c e s s a r y as a result of an A c t of G o d , fire, labour problems, lack of funds, or other similar causes. The C o l l e g e a c c e p t s no responsibility for any injury, toss or e x p e n s e sustained, arising out of or in any way c o n n e c t e d with a student's participation in any c o u r s e or program. O p e n Learning Institute T h e O p e n L e a r n i n g Institute offers credit a n d credit free university c o u r s e s by c o r r e s p o n d e n c e . It was established by the Ministry of E d u c a t i o n to provide learning opportunities to students unable b e c a u s e of time constraints or l o c a t i o n to attend existing c o l l e g e s or universities. F o r information on c o u r s e offerings and transfer credit contact the institute at 7671 Alderbridge Way, R i c h m o n d , B . C . V6X 1Z9, Tel: 270-4131. C o u r s e Description C o d e O n the right h a n d side of e a c h c o u r s e d e s c r i p t i o n there is a series of c o d e letters a n d n u m b e r s , for e x a m p l e : E n g l i s h 100 L a n g u a g e Skills (F,S) (3,0,1) Student Records T h e first letter(s) indicate the term in w h i c h the class will be offered. E x a m p l e : F-Fall, S - S p r i n g , S U - S u m m e r . T h u s , E n g l i s h 100 is to be offered in the Fall a n d S p r i n g terms. All official student records are kept in the Registrar's Office. T h e information on file for a student is always available to that student for e x a m i n a t i o n . N o information on file is divulged to any a g e n c y or person other than the student without the student's permission -except for institutional research projects approved by the C o l l e g e . T h e p r o c e s s for approval of s u c h projects is e s t a b l i s h e d by the C o l l e g e and the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Student U n i o n . Students are T h e first number indicates the number of credit hours granted for the c o u r s e a n d the n u m b e r of h o u r s taught per week, the s e c o n d n u m b e r d e n o t e s the n u m b e r of lab and language c o n v e r s a t i o n a l hours per week, and the third n u m b e r d e n o t e s t h e n u m b e r of seminar/tutorial/4th instructional hours per week. T h u s , E n g l i s h 100 is offered three hours a week for three credit hours with no lab time and one hour per week of 4th instructional hour. Services Student U n i o n and Student Activities Sexual Harassment Every student registered at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e w h o has paid a student activity fee is a m e m b e r of the Student U n i o n . T h e Student U n i o n w a s established in order to represent the interests of all students at the C o l l e g e in a n u m b e r of capacities. It is i n c o r p o r a t e d under the S o c i e t i e s Act of B . C . T h e C o l l e g e makes every effort to e n s u r e that no student is subjected to sexual harassment. S e x u a l h a r a s s m e n t is s e e n as any c o n d u c t , c o m m e n t , gesture or c o n t a c t of a s e x u a l nature w h i c h (1) might be perceived by any student as p l a c i n g a c o n d i t i o n of a sexual nature on a student, a n d / o r (2) is likely to c a u s e offence, e m b a r r a s s m e n t , or h u m i l i a t i o n to a student. There are ten e l e c t e d positions in the U n i o n for which any interested student of C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e is eligible. E l e c t i o n s are h e l d in M a r c h for the f o l l o w i n g y e a r ' s representatives. T h e elected body of the Student U n i o n is responsible for e n s u r i n g that students are represented on all d e c i s i o n - m a k i n g c o m m i t t e e s of the C o l l e g e . T h e y are also responsible for maintaining active m e m b e r s h i p within the C a n a d i a n Federation of Students. T h e U n i o n provides services to students that are not under the jurisdiction of the C o l l e g e administration, s u c h as the organization of films, s o c i a l s , c o u r s e u n i o n s , c l u b s a n d general information services. T h e S t u d e n t U n i o n E x e c u t i v e holds weekly meetings w h i c h the student b o d y is w e l c o m e to attend. For further information students may call 986-1911, local 347 or go to the office in A 1 1 4 . Student Newspaper The student newspaper of C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e is the C a p i l a n o C o u r i e r , a b i - w e e k l y p u b l i c a t i o n f u n d e d by the S t u d e n t Society and run by an independent staff of student volunteers. T h e C o u r i e r is a m e m b e r of C a n a d i a n University Press, a co-operative news organization of more than 60 c o l l e g e and university papers from a c r o s s C a n a d a . A s the C o u r i e r is written, typeset a n d laid out on c a m p u s , there are always positions o p e n in the areas of news and feature writing, reporting, editing, layout, photography, artwork, typesetting and advertising. A l l interested students are w e l c o m e to join. Parking P a r k i n g is available to all students o n the north a n d s o u t h parking lots only. For exact l o c a t i o n s , c o n s u l t the P a r k i n g a n d C a m p u s maps, page 142. T h e following parking regulations, w h i c h have b e e n d e s i g n e d to meet the District Fire M a r s h a l ' s i n s t r u c t i o n s , are in effect: a. N o restrictions apply to O p e n P a r k i n g areas o n the N o r t h and South Campuses. b. No parking is permitted in a Fire Z o n e . c. V e h i c l e s may park in a L o a d i n g Z o n e for up to 15 m i n u t e s while l o a d i n g or u n l o a d i n g . V e h i c l e s p a r k e d in e x c e s s of this time period are subject to the C o l l e g e t o w i n g p o l i c y (see F below). d Reserved P a r k i n g may be made available to s e l e c t e d departments and to h a n d i c a p p e d p e r s o n s requiring a vehicle to be parked near s p e c i f i c work a r e a s . In s u c h cases, a permit must be s e c u r e d from the Facilities Department a l l o w i n g extended parking privileges. e. A l l traffic a n d parking s i g n s must be o b s e r v e d . f. Vehicles parking in u n a u t h o r i z e d areas will be t o w e d away at the owner's e x p e n s e by Tritow S y s t e m s Ltd., — storage yard 2336 Dollarton Hwy., N o r t h V a n c o u v e r . — T e l e p h o n e : 685-8181. The C o u r i e r e n c o u r a g e s input from the entire c o l l e g e c o m m u n i t y . C l a s s i f i e d ads (which are free to students, staff and faculty), letters to the editor, and other contributions c a n be submitted to N F 2 0 9 or through local 200. F o o d and Beverage Service Info Centre North Campus T h e p u r p o s e of the Student Information Centre is to centralize and facilitate information relevant to students. L o c a t e d a c r o s s from the reception desk in the lobby of Building " B " , the Centre deals with both internal and external information, i n c l u d i n g h o u s i n g and jobs. It c a n be reached at local 277. T h e main cafeteria is located in B u i l d i n g N E offering full hot meal service d u r i n g the Fall a n d S p r i n g terms from a p p r o x i m a t e l y 8:00 a.m. (0800 hrs.) t h r o u g h 8:30 p.m. (2030 hrs.) daily e x c e p t F r i d a y s w h e n it c l o s e s at 3:30 p.m. (1530 hrs.) South Campus Lost and F o u n d • Students may a d d r e s s inquiries about lost or found items to the Info Centre, located in the lobby of b u i l d i n g " B " , S o u t h C a m p u s , local 277. Services for Disabled Students S p e c i a l N e e d s S e r v i c e s , a division of the L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e C e n t r e , provides services as required by d i s a b l e d students. Students are advised to contact the S p e c i a l N e e d s Advisor (local 356) as far in a d v a n c e of registration as possible. Individual arrangements c a n be made to assist d i s a b l e d applicants to register by c a l l i n g the Registrar's Office in a d v a n c e (986-1911, local 213). C o u n s e l l i n g services are also available — contact J o a n n e M a h or David J o n e s (local 298). S p e c i a l parking permits c a n be a r r a n g e d through the M a i n t e n a n c e department (local 309). T h e M e d i a C e n t r e will give e d u c a t i o n a l support and w o u l d like a d v a n c e notice so that they c a n prepare the n e c e s s a r y materials a n d equipment (local 242). Several instructors have taken special training to assist d i s a b l e d students with their particular needs in c l a s s room a n d lab settings — for more information contact the L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e C e n t r e (local 356). 10 The satellite cafeteria is located in Building B — Cafetheatre — o f f e r i n g l i m i t e d hot f o o d s a n d s n a c k i t e m s f r o m a p p r o x i m a t e l y 8:30 a . m . (0830 hrs.) t h r o u g h 3:30 p.m. (1530 hrs.) a n d 6:30 p.m. (1830 hrs.) t h r o u g h 9:00 p.m. (2100 hrs.) M o n d a y through T h u r s d a y ; Friday 8:30 a.m. (0830 hrs.) through 3:30 p.m. (1530 hrs.) only. Vending Machine V e n d i n g service offering limited f o o d , beverage a n d c o n f e c t i o n e r y items is available in the S o u t h C a m p u s (Cafetheatre) and North C a m p u s foyer area, B u i l d i n g N E . Use of Cafeterias Limited d i n i n g s p a c e (seating a n d circulation) d o e s not allow for the use of either cafeteria for s p e c i a l f u n c t i o n s d u r i n g the period the food service is in o p e r a t i o n . Bookstore T h e B o o k s t o r e , l o c a t e d in B u i l d i n g N E , N o r t h C a m p u s , offers required a n d r e c o m m e n d e d texts. A postage stamp selling m a c h i n e is l o c a t e d in the B o o k s t o r e . C a n a d a P o s t b o x e s are l o c a t e d on both North a n d South campuses. COUNSELLING Faculty B a g s h a w , R., B . C o m m . , M . E d . ( U B C ) , M.A. (Colorado) Forsyth, Ian, B.Ed. ( U B C ) H o w a r d , P., B.A. ( U B C ) T e a c h i n g Cert. (Sask.), M . E d . (Memorial) J o n e s , D., B.A., M.A. (Dalhousie) M a h , J . G . , B.A., B.S.W. ( U B C ) , M.S.W. (Toronto) P e n n , M . H . , B.A. (Alta.), M.A. ( U B C ) Schmidt, L.L., B.Ed., M.Ed., P h . D . (Alta.) — (On leave until A u g u s t 1, 1982) Siegrist, B . G . , M . B . A . (SFU) General Information "Down South" " D o w n S o u t h " is the tiny boutique in the S o u t h C a m p u s T o w e r run by the s e c o n d year m e r c h a n d i s i n g students of the Retail M e r c h a n d i s i n g department. This small shop serves as a laboratory for the merchandising students to practise the skills learned in the program, and also as an outlet for all c a m p u s artists, artisans a n d craftspeople, w h o may sell items o n a c o n s i g n m e n t basis. Operated as a unique gift s h o p , the store is o p e n from N o v e m b e r to A p r i l , daily from 11:30 to 1:00 p.m. Athletics C a p i l a n o is a full m e m b e r of the T o t e m C o n f e r e n c e , w h i c h is the g o v e r n i n g b o d y for all inter-college athletics in British C o l u m b i a . P r o v i n c i a l c h a m p i o n s are d e t e r m i n e d a n n u a l l y with winners a d v a n c i n g to a Western C a n a d a final in most sports, and national finals in s o m e . T h i s affords our C o l l e g e ' s highly s k i l l e d student athletes the opportunity to meet with and c o m p e t e against the best C o l l e g e athletes in C a n a d a . Intercollegiately, C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e c o m p e t e s in R u g b y , S o c c e r , B a s k e t b a l l , V o l l e y b a l l and C u r l i n g . At present, g y m n a s i u m - b a s e d B l u e s teams operate out of what was formerly D e l b r o o k H i g h S c h o o l ' s G y m n a s i u m . T h e facility has been c o m p l e t e l y renovated and u p g r a d e d to meet C o l l e g e standards. E a c h year, our many e x c e p t i o n a l athletes, w o r k i n g with the e x p e r i e n c e d B l u e s c o a c h i n g staff, have c o m b i n e d to p r o d u c e several T o t e m C o n f e r e n c e a n d Western C a n a d i a n (4-West) c h a m p i o n s h i p teams. C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e is proud of the a c c o m p l i s h m e n t s of its student athletes a n d of its g rowing reputation for athletic e x c e l l e n c e . Opportunities to take part in intramural activity are a l s o provided by the C o l l e g e . Activities offered vary from year to year with expressed interests, but usually include s u c h activities as badminton, volleyball, basketball, s o c c e r , t o u c h football, and P h y s i c a l Fitness. The Athletic Department annually s p o n s o r s several programs directed toward both the student body and the community at large, i n c l u d i n g P r e - S k i Fitness, B e g i n n e r a n d Intermediate T e n n i s , a n d the B . C . C o a c h i n g Certification Program. Fitness Centre T h e Fitness C e n t r e is located in the west c o r n e r of the South Parking lot. The facility contains showers, locker rooms, saunas, an equipment room and an exercise area, c o m p l e t e with weight training a n d fitness testing facilities. S c h e d u l e d fitness s e s s i o n s are intermingled with large b l o c k s of o p e n facility time. T h e Fitness Centre's professional staff will provide personal consultation and testing services relative to health, physical fitness, and weight c o n t r o l , o n an appointment basis. T h e Fitness C e n t r e is y o u r s ; make g o o d use of it. The services of trained c o u n s e l l o r s are available to all students of the C o l l e g e R e g i o n . C o u n s e l l o r s assist students in the e d u c a t i o n a l p l a n n i n g and provide g u i d a n c e in the solution of a c a d e m i c a n d personal problems. T h e C o l l e g e counselling objective is to help students achieve self-direction in d e c i s i o n - m a k i n g a n d p l a n n i n g . A p p o i n t m e n t s to see a c o u n s e l l o r may be made t h r o u g h the c o u n s e l l i n g receptionists. Until M a y 1982 they are located on the main floor of the N F b u i l d i n g . After A u g u s t 1, 1982 the entire c o u n s e l l i n g division c a n be f o u n d in the N D building. T h o s e living in the P e m b e r t o n - H o w e S o u n d R e g i o n requiring the assistance of a c o u n s e l l o r s h o u l d contact the S q u a m i s h Centre, 38038 C l e v e l a n d A v e n u e . A p p o i n t m e n t s may be arranged by c a l l i n g 892-5322. S u n s h i n e C o a s t R e g i o n residents s h o u l d call the S e c h e l t Centre 885-9310 for information and appointments with counsellors. The C o l l e g e A d m i s s i o n s A d v i s o r visits all s e c o n d a r y s c h o o l s in the C o l l e g e R e g i o n e a c h S p r i n g to speak to student g r o u p s about opportunities offered by C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . S c h o o l students planning to enter the C o l l e g e may take advantage of early a d m i s s i o n interviews at their s c h o o l by c o n t a c t i n g their s c h o o l C o u n s e l l o r for the appropriate dates. C o u n s e l l i n g offers credit free G r o u p P r o g r a m s , without c h a r g e , as a service to students a n d the c o m m u n i t y . T h e goals of these programs are to provide people with an opportunity to e x p a n d self-awareness, personal and career o p t i o n s . T h e p r o g r a m s c o m b i n e e l e m e n t s of p e r s o n a l d e v e l o p m e n t a n d s k i l l s a c q u i s i t i o n a n d are a v a i l a b l e a c c o r d i n g to d e m a n d . C o n t a c t the C o u n s e l l i n g Division reception area for times and dates. Career Development Resource Centre T h e C o l l e g e assists students in c o n s i d e r i n g career options a n d selecting a career by providing in-depth information on a wide variety of career options. T h e C a r e e r Development R e s o u r c e C e n t r e h o u s e s a c o l l e c t i o n of vocational literature, pamphlets a n d reference works. A r r a n g e m e n t s to use these materials may be made with the C o u n s e l l i n g receptionist in the N D building. Placement Centre T h e P l a c e m e n t C e n t r e aids students w h o desire assistance in locating part-time, temporary or full-time employment. A s s i s t a n c e is also given those students requesting volunteer or work e x p e r i e n c e situations. T h e C e n t r e a l s o c o n d u c t s an o n - c a m p u s recruiting program to assist program graduates with career placement. S t u d e n t s may a l s o g a i n a s s i s t a n c e with e m p l o y m e n t statistics a n d salary trends in various career areas. W o r k s h o p s are c o n d u c t e d periodically to assist students with resume writing a n d developing skills to be s u c c e s s f u l in the job interview. Students w h o wish to take advantage of a n y of these s e r v i c e s s h o u l d register at the P l a c e m e n t C e n t r e Office in the N D building. 11 FIRST AID AND HEALTH SERVICES Library/Media Services - Squamish First A i d and Health S e r v i c e s are located in N D B u i l d i n g o n the North C a m p u s . T h e C o m m u n i t y Health N u r s e a n d a p h y s i c i a n are available to provide the following services to students, staff and faculty: A small c i r c u l a t i n g and reference c o l l e c t i o n is held in the Learning Centre on Cleveland Avenue. The collection supports the services a n d the c o u r s e s offered at S q u a m i s h . A c c e s s to the book a n d m e d i a c o l l e c t i o n at L y n n m o u r is provided t h r o u g h use of the m i c r o f i c h e c a t a l o g u e . T h i s Service is available to students a n d c o m m u n i t y m e m b e r s alike. 1. First A i d — phone local 271. If no answer contact the College switchboard " O " . 2. Health C o u n s e l l i n g — to both individuals a n d g r o u p s in preventive health care as well as e m e r g e n c y care. S o m e areas of c o u n s e l l i n g involve: nutrition, weight control, communicable diseases, immunization, conception c o n trol, short and long term illness and pre and post natal care, and stress management c o u r s e s . 3. P h y s i c a l Health C a r e — involves v i s i o n c h e c k , hearing tests, blood pressure c h e c k , weight (skin caliper test), pregnancy tests (slide test). 4. D i a g n o s i s a n d treatment of illness or health c o n c e r n s . A p p o i n t m e n t s with the C o l l e g e P h y s i c i a n may be made through the Health S e r v i c e s ' receptionist. 5. Health Hazard Appraisal — provides a c o m p u t e r printout to portray the b a l a n c e between y o u r health history a n d habits a n d y o u r potential life e x p e c t a n c y . 6. P a m p h l e t s and T e a c h i n g A i d s on various t o p i c s s u c h as nutrition, heart, s m o k i n g , pregnancy, diseases, respiratory illness, cancer, venereal diseases, a n d c o n c e p t i o n control. 7. Regular meetings of the Health a n d Safety C o m m i t t e e are held at w h i c h time any c o m p l a i n t s or s u g g e s t i o n s re: h a z a r d o u s , unsafe, or health injuries items c a n be submitted, in writing, to the Health and Safety C o m m i t t e e via the Student Representatives. 8. A n Accident/Injury Reporting form (F167) is available f r o m the C o l l e g e N u r s e a n d Student Info-Centre. 9. First A i d Kits are available at central locations on c a m p u s . Referrals to outside a g e n c i e s , individuals, c a n be made through your Health Services. LIBRARY/MEDIA SERVICES General Information T h e M e d i a C e n t r e ' s main aim is to support all c o u r s e s offered by the C o l l e g e a n d to teach students self-sufficiency in library use. T h e M e d i a C e n t r e is an integral part of the instructional p r o c e s s of the c o l l e g e . B o o k s , films, m a g a z i n e s , A / V equipment and slides are provided a n d users are taught h o w to find information a n d make the best use of these materials. E q u i p m e n t a n d facilities are available in the M e d i a P r o d u c t i o n C e n t r e for film, tape, a n d g r a p h i c p r o d u c t i o n . LEARNING ASSISTANCE CENTRE Faculty Brennan, E.M, Ed. (McGill) D h a l i w a l , B „ B.A., ( S F U ) , S p e c i a l E d u c a t i o n ( U B C ) , E . S . L . / Learning Assistance H a m i l t o n , C . F . , Divisional Assistant H a u s c h i l d t R., B . S c . (Hons.) (Queen's) M . S c . ( U B C ) Hill. B., B . C . , T e a c h i n g C e r t . S q u a m i s h / L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e M c K e o w n , T., B.A. ( U B C ) , M.A. (York), E n g l i s h / L e a r n i n g Assistance Van N o r m a n , D.L., B.A. ( U B C ) , M.A. (Educ.) ( S F U ) , L e a r n i n g Assistance Wright, D., B . S c . (Idaho), M . S c . ( B r i g h a m Y o u n g ) , P h . D . (Arizona State), L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e Learning Assistance - Lynnmour T h e L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m has a r e s o u r c e centre for those w h o seek to increase their learning efficiency. E a c h term the P r o g r a m faculty offers g r o u p w o r k s h o p s on T h i n k i n g with Clarity, T i m e M a n a g e m e n t a n d G o a l S e t t i n g , C o m m u n i c a t i o n S k i l l s , S t u d y S k i l l s , R e a d i n g Improvement, V o c a b u l a r y Development, C o n c e p t u a l B l o c k b u s t i n g , W r i t i n g the C o l l e g e E s s a y , S p e l l i n g I m p r o v e m e n t , M n e m o n i c Strategies and P r o c e s s i n g Information Efficiently. T i m e s a n d dates of these W o r k s h o p s are p u b l i s h e d in the L e a r n i n g Assistance Brochure. Tutorials c a n be a r r a n g e d in most c o l l e g e subjects, s u c h as, c o m m u n i c a t i o n skills or E n g l i s h as a S e c o n d L a n g u a g e . Students with learning disabilities s h o u l d e n q u i r e about A s s e s s m e n t and Individual D e v e l o p m e n t tutorials. S t u d e n t s with Math difficulties may be assisted by the Math A s s i s t a n c e offered in the Math L a b or may benefit f r o m independent tape p r o g r a m s in the L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e C e n t r e . O p e n L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e is provided to students w h o are not able to s c h e d u l e tutorial times. In addition, students have a c c e s s t h r o u g h the C e n t r e to audiovisual programs, electric typewriters, cassette recorders and reading e q u i p m e n t . T h e L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e C e n t r e will a l s o c o n d u c t s p e c i a l w o r k s h o p s at the request of faculty or c o m m u n i t y g r o u p s providing sufficient notice is g i v e n . F o r students at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e , the M e d i a C e n t r e is an essential resource. S k i l l s in research c a n be learned there w h i c h will be valuable in whatever career pursued. If the library c a n n o t immediately satisfy user requests, other resources in the L o w e r M a i n l a n d are a c c e s s i b l e t h r o u g h the network of p u b l i c , c o l l e g e and university libraries. T h e Centre, located on the S o u t h C a m p u s in A 1 1 0 , has materials on a wide variety of learning a n d t e a c h i n g practices. For more information, call 986-1911, l o c a l 356, or d r o p by the C e n t r e . For more information, call 986-1911, L o c a l 242, or d r o p by the M e d i a C e n t r e in the B B u i l d i n g . T h e L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m provides a r e s o u r c e for those w h o seek to increase their learning efficiency. T h e C e n t r e h o u s e s materials on a wide variety of learning a n d teaching practices. For e x a m p l e , information o n note-taking, time m a n a g e m e n t , a n d e x a m writing is available in h a n d o u t form. In a d d i t i o n , students are w e l c o m e to use the library materials a n d a u d i o v i s u a l p r o g r a m s , and electric typewriters, cassette recorders a n d reading e q u i p m e n t are a l s o available for use in the centre. Library/Media Services - Sechelt A small c o l l e c t i o n is being d e v e l o p e d for the L e a r n i n g C e n t r e on Inlet A v e n u e . A c c e s s to the book and media c o l l e c tion at L y n n m o u r is provided through use of the m i c r o f i c h e catalogue. This service is available to students a n d c o m m u n i t y members alike. 12 Learning Assistance - Squamish Students with learning difficulties are invited to talk over their c o n c e r n s with L e a m i n g ' A s s i s t a n c e Faculty d u r i n g d r o p in hours. C o l l e g e and c o m m u n i t y m e m b e r s may a l s o wish to participate in small g r o u p w o r k s h o p s . T i m e s and dates for these w o r k s h o p s are p u b l i s h e d in the L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e Centre B r o c h u r e . For more information a n d / o r w o r k s h o p a p p l i c a t i o n forms, visit the Centre at 37827 2nd A v e n u e or call 892-5322. Learning Assistance - Sechelt Learning A s s i s t a n c e is also available at the new L e a r n i n g Centre at 1360 Inlet Avenue in Sechelt. A n y o n e having trouble with reading, studying, m e m o r y or any of the writing skills may benefit from an interview with L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e p e r s o n n e l . S t u d e n t s may m a k e u s e of s p e e d r e a d i n g equipment, s e l f - p r o g r a m m e d reading labs or taped materials on specific skills available for use any time the C e n t r e is o p e n . A p p o i n t m e n t s for L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e may be made at 885-9310. WOMEN'S RESOURCE CENTRE Faculty Trew, M., B.A. ( K a n s a s State), M.A. (Central M i s s o u r i State), P h . D . ( M i c h i g a n State) A a r o n s , R., B . A . ( T o r o n t o ) , P h . D . ( M i c h i g a n ) , M . S . W . (Toronto) Waterman, D.. B.A., M.A. ( U B C ) Easton, J . , B.A. (San J o s e State) T h e W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e C e n t r e s p o n s o r s a variety of programs that are of interest to both w o m e n of our community and those registered at the C o l l e g e . T h e s e activities are p u b l i c i z e d in b r o c h u r e s that are available through the Centre located in the A - B u i l d i n g . In addition, the faculty are c o m m i t t e d to r e s p o n d i n g to the e x p r e s s e d needs of w o m e n , and will work with any g r o u p interested in c u s t o m d e s i g n i n g an activity or w o r k s h o p w h i c h is in keeping with the goals of the C o l l e g e . Students w h o e x p e r i e n c e sexual harassment s h o u l d feel free to d i s c u s s the matter at the W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e Centre. Women's Resource Centre - Lynnmour T h e W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e C e n t r e provides a variety of programs available to students, staff, faculty and other m e m b e r s of the c o m m u n i t y . T h e s e i n c l u d e credit-free c o u r s e s , a C o m m u n i t y R e s o u r c e File for the North S h o r e , library m a t e r i a l s , c u s t o m - d e s i g n e d c r e d i t - f r e e c o u r s e s , o n - c a m p u s w o r k s h o p s , life planning, career development a n d , with the C o u n s e l l i n g D i v i s i o n , d r o p - i n c o u n s e l l i n g and testing. In a d d i t i o n to these activities, the W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e C e n t r e offers a lounge area where p e r s o n s may meet with others or sit and read. For further information, contact M a r s h a T r e w or Rita J o h n s o n , W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e C e n t r e , 986-1911, local 350, or d r o p in. Women's Resource Centre - Squamish T h e W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e C e n t r e is a service provided by C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e for the benefit of S q u a m i s h and surrounding areas. It is our p u r p o s e to be responsive to the interests a n d needs of c o m m u n i t y groups. W e invite your ideas and your participation in the Centre. Please make this y o u r centre. T h e W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e is d e s i g n e d to meet the specialized needs of w o m e n in the c o m m u n i t y and to this e n d , a variety ot programs will be offered on t o p i c s of special interest to w o m e n . T h e s e will include films, speakers, w o r k s h o p s , and credit-free c o u r s e s directed to w o m e n who may be at home with c h i l d r e n , students of the c o l l e g e , or out in the labour force. There is a library c o n t a i n i n g publications by a n d for w o m e n on s u c h subjects as parenting skills, career planning, p s y c h o l o g y of w o m e n , w o m e n ' s rights, health a n d nutrition, and many others. For further information call 892-5322 or visit the C e n t r e at 38038 C l e v e l a n d A v e n u e , S q u a m i s h . CREDIT-FREE EDUCATION T h e C o l l e g e offers a variety of credit-free c o u r s e s and activities in addition to those used to satisfy the requirements of a credit d i p l o m a or certificate. T h e r e are no pre-requisites for a d m i s s i o n to these c o u r s e s and, other than the o c c a s i o n a l informal assignment, there is no evaluation or g r a d i n g . Credit-free c o u r s e s are not listed in this c a l e n d a r — they are advertised in newspapers, by direct mail and by seasonal b r o c h u r e s distributed throughout the C o l l e g e region. T h e wide variety of credit-free c o u r s e s offered are drawn from the areas of creative arts, m u s i c , s o c i a l s c i e n c e s , career d e v e l o p m e n t , p e r s o n a l d e v e l o p m e n t , natural s c i e n c e s , business, fashion and d e s i g n , a n d theatre skills. A full range of m u s i c programs is available for children. E d u c a t i o n a l study tours of North A m e r i c a and a b r o a d are organized periodically. P u b l i c a n d Private U s e of C o l l e g e Facilities C a p i l a n o c a n provide program design and administrative services as well as facilities for c o n f e r e n c e s c o n c e r n e d with sharing information on b u s i n e s s , t e c h n o l o g i c a l or s o c i a l issues. Credit-free activities are an attempt to respond to e d u c a tional needs b e y o n d those met by p o s t - s e c o n d a r y credit c o u r s e s of our A c a d e m i c a n d C a r e e r / V o c a t i o n a l programs, and we w e l c o m e your s u g g e s t i o n s for new c o u r s e s a n d activities. F o r f u r t h e r i n f o r m a t i o n on c r e d i t - f r e e c o u r s e s or registration, phone: 986-1911, L o c a l 321 for lower m a i n l a n d ; 892-5322 for S q u a m i s h and H o w e S o u n d ; 885-9310 for S e c h e l t a n d the S u n s h i n e C o a s t . 13 Financial Aid and Awards Birks Family Foundation Bursary A bursary of $250 will be a w a r d e d in the S p r i n g semester. Satisfactory s c h o l a s t i c standing is a requirement. Deadline: J a n u a r y 30 FINANCIAL AID Margaret C a m p b e l l The Financial A i d Office, located in NF102 (North C a m p u s ) may be contacted for information and assistance regarding the C a n a d a Student L o a n and B . C . Student A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m , bursaries, s c h o l a r s h i p s and loans. Students w h o need financial aid s h o u l d get c o p i e s of the Financial A i d brochure w h i c h lists s o u r c e s administered by the C o l l e g e . A p p l i c a t i o n s for aid administered here can be obtained at the Office where there is an A d v i s o r available to d i s c u s s financial a s s i s t a n c e and provide c o u n s e l l i n g . A more detailed and c o m p r e h e n s i v e list of financial aid s o u r c e s is provided in the back of the calendar. T h e F i n a n c i a l A i d office also s p o n s o r s w o r k s h o p s on personal money management and distributes a free brochure called Student M o n e y Management. CAPILANO C O L L E G E FOUNDATION T h e C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e F o u n d a t i o n is an independent volunteer c o m m u n i t y o r g a n i z a t i o n , e s t a b l i s h e d under the Societies Act to e n c o u r a g e c o m m u n i t y interest in the c o l l e g e , to raise a n d administer donations primarily to a i d worthy students w h o require financial a s s i s t a n c e . M e m b e r s h i p in the F o u n d a t i o n is o p e n to all contributors. C o n t r i b u t i o n s s h o u l d be sent to T h e Treasurer, C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e F o u n d a t i o n , c / o O ' N e i l l . G o l d s t o n e & C o . , 152 West 15th Street, North V a n c o u v e r , B . C . T H E B.C. S T U D E N T A S S I S T A N C E PROGRAM A c o m b i n a t i o n loan and grant is provided to eligible students e n r o l e d in a m i n i m u m of 9 credit hours. S i n g l e students are eligible for a m a x i m u m $3800 per year; married students a n d / o r students with d e p e n d e n t s are eligible for a m a x i m u m $4200 per year. Students are strongly urged to apply two months in a d v a n c e of registration in a c o u r s e of studies. For further details, contact the F i n a n c i a l A i d office. INTERNAL AWARDS — BURSARIES ( N . B . — B u r s a r i e s are n o n - r e p a y a b l e grants b a s e d on need) T h e following bursaries are administered by the F i n a n c i a l A i d Office of C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . A p p l i c a t i o n forms are available in NF102 and s h o u l d be submitted to the F i n a n c i a l A i d Advisor, unless otherwise noted. Adult Basic Education Grants Students registered in B . T . S . D , E.S.L. a n d C A P p r o g r a m s may be eligible for grants of up to $240 for full-time students and $160 for part-time students. C o n t a c t F i n a n c i a l A i d for details. Association of University a n d C o l l e g e — Local #4 Bursaries Employees A bursary of $300 will be awarded on the basis of financial need to a full-time student in e a c h of the Fall and Spring semesters. Fall semester deadline: O c t o b e r 31 S p r i n g semester deadline: J a n u a r y 30 B . C . Youth Foundation Interest-free l o a n s are available to full-time students w h o are B . C . residents and under 30 years of age. Students are requested to apply first to the C a n a d a G u a r a n t e e d Student L o a n Plan ( B . C . Student A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m ) . A suitable adult guarantor is required. L o a n s may be for fees, b o o k s a n d / o r a monthly a l l o w a n c e for living c o s t s . Deadline: O p e n 14 Bursary This award is made p o s s i b l e by the North S h o r e B u s i n e s s and P r o f e s s i o n a l W o m e n ' s C l u b in r e c o g n i t i o n of A l d e r m a n Margaret C a m p b e l l ' s outstanding c o n t r i b u t i o n to the N o r t h V a n c o u v e r C o m m u n i t y and as past president of the C a n a d i a n Federation of B u s i n e s s and P r o f e s s i o n a l W o m e n ' s C l u b . T h e bursary is o p e n to w o m e n students e n r o l e d C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e in at least three c o u r s e s . at Deadline: J a n u a r y 30 Capilano College Faculty Association A bursary of $300 will be a w a r d e d in e a c h of the Fall a n d S p r i n g semesters. F i n a n c i a l need is the main c r i t e r i o n . Fall semester d e a d l i n e : O c t o b e r 1 S p r i n g semester deadline: J a n u a r y 30 Capilano College Foundation Bursaries John Percy Williamson Memorial Fund B u r s a r i e s worth $200 a n d $300 will be a w a r d e d in S p r i n g term. A m i n i m u m G P A of 2.3 (C+) is r e q u i r e d . Deadline: J a n u a r y 30. North Shore C o m m u n i t y Credit U n i o n A w a r d s E a c h S p r i n g a $200 bursary is granted to a student with financial need w h o exhibits l e a d e r s h i p , c i t i z e n s h i p a n d g o o d s c h o l a s t i c standing. Eligible c a n d i d a t e s are residents of N o r t h V a n c o u v e r C i t y or District w h o have c o m p l e t e d o n e year at C a p i l a n o College. Deadline: J a n u a r y 3 1 . Student Society Bursaries T h e Student S o c i e t y provides several bursaries a n n u a l l y to full-time a n d part-time students. F i n a n c i a l n e e d is the main requirement. Work-Study Program T h e W o r k - S t u d y P r o g r a m , a part of the British C o l u m b i a Student A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m , is d e s i g n e d to provide o n c a m p u s work e x p e r i e n c e for students requiring f i n a n c i a l a s s i s t a n c e while attending c o l l e g e . A limited n u m b e r of parttime o n - c a m p u s jobs, a v e r a g i n g 5 to 10 hours per week, may be available. T h e P r o g r a m is o n l y o p e n to s t u d e n t s d e m o n s t r a t i n g a financial need under the terms of the B . C . Student A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m . For further details c o n t a c t the F i n a n c i a l A i d Office. INTERNAL AWARDS - SCHOLARSHIPS The C o l l e g e has a limited n u m b e r of s c h o l a r s h i p s to offer to students with a d e m o n s t r a t e d r e c o r d of s c h o l a s t i c e x c e l l e n c e at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . B.C. Telephone Company Awards T w o awards of $500 will be a w a r d e d in the S p r i n g term. S t u d e n t s c o m p l e t i n g first year w h o intend to c o n t i n u e s e c o n d year at C a p i l a n o a n d w h o have an o u t s t a n d i n g s c h o l a s t i c record may be s e l e c t e d for these a w a r d s . C a n a d i a n Studies Scholarship A scholarship of $200 will be awarded to the first student to c o m p l e t e the C a n a d i a n S t u d i e s S p e c i a l t y on a n y C o l l e g e D i p l o m a . C o n t a c t the C h a i r p e r s o n of the C a n a d i a n S t u d i e s C o m m i t t e e for further details. Capilano College Fee Waiver Scholarships Several s c h o l a r s h i p s will be a w a r d e d to outstanding returning students w h o have c o m p l e t e d one year at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . T h e s c h o l a r s h i p s will be in the form of fee waivers for s e c o n d year. C a n d i d a t e s will be automatically s e l e c t e d by the faculty. Capilano College Foundation Scholarships Four $600 s c h o l a r s h i p s will be a w a r d e d annually to the highest a c h i e v i n g full-time students in the A c a d e m i c and C a r e e r programs as determined by G r a d e Point A v e r a g e Selection is automatic. S c h o l r s h i p s are limited to returning students and are intended to help defray tuition fee a n d hook costs Certified General Accountants Association of B . C . The Certified G e n e r a l A c c o u n t a n t s A s s o c i a t i o n of B C offers two s c h o l a r s h i p s equivalent to the first year's tuition ( a p p r o x i m a t e l y $550) to s t u d e n t s g r a d u a t i n g f r o m an a c c o u n t i n g / b u s i n e s s p r o g r a m who have been admitted to the C . G . A . p r o g r a m from C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . A p p l y to the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r . Michael Carr Memorial Award O n e $150 award will be granted annually in memory of M i c h a e l C a r r . The terms are under review. Deadline January 30. Michael Carr Memorial Bursary George Raven Wood Fund A large number of bursaries averaging $200 - $300 will be awarded in both Fall and S p r i n g terms A m i n i m u m G P A of 2.3 (C ) is required. A limited n u m b e r of first semester students may be c o n s i d e r e d in e x c e p t i o n a l cases but must provide a letter of r e c o m m e n d a t i o n from an instructor. Bursaries are available to part-time a n d full-time students. + Credit Union Foundation Bursary The Credit U n i o n F o u n d a t i o n of B C . a w a r d s two $150 grants e a c h year o n the basis of financial need A p p l i c a n t s must be C a n a d i a n , citizens and residents of the area served by the C o l l e g e Deadline: January 30 Data Processing Management Association Bursary A $100 bursary is available to a student who has completed the first year of the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m in the C o m p u t e r o p t i o n F i n a n c i a l need a n d a m i n i m u m G P A of 2.5 are criteria for eligibility. Deadline: January 30. Institute of Chartered of British C o l u m b i a Accountants A $100 bursary is available to a full-time student at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e c o m p l e t i n g the first year of the University Transfer p r o g r a m , who is p r o c e e d i n g to s e c o n d year or to a university in the c o m m e r c e option, has a g o o d r e c o r d in the a c c o u n t i n g classes c o m p l e t e d , has maintained a s e c o n d class standing overall has financial need and who is interested in b e c o m i n g a C h a r t e r e d A c c o u n t a n t Deadline: January 30. Mary Neil Memorial Bursary This S150 award is presented by the West V a n c o u v e r University W o m e n ' s C l u b in m e m o r y of Mary Neil, a former President a n d active m e m b e r S h e was a m u c h loved a n d respected member of the C l u b and had a life-long interest in education T h e bursary is presented e a c h year to a mature w o m a n student studying full-time or part-time w h o has satisfactory academic standing, demonstrated financial need, and who is registered in the a c a d e m i c p r o g r a m Deadline January 31. This award will be given annually to a student enroled in the s e c o n d semester of any first year p r o g r a m at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . T h e award will go to a student who has c o m b i n e d hard work and perseverance in s c h o l a s t i c s and athletics and w h o has s h o w n involvement in the c o m m u n i t y . S t u d e n t s w h o are p u r s u i n g studies in spite of h a n d i c a p s are e n c o u r a g e d to apply. Letters of reference from an instructor a n d an athletic c o a c h may be requested to s u p p l e m e n t the a p p l i c a t i o n . Deadline: O p e n Davis & C o . Legal Secretarial Scholarship A S300 s c h o l a r s h i p will be a w a r d e d to an outstanding student entering the s e c o n d term of the Legal Secretarial Program. I.B.M. Scholarship for Secretarial Studies Three $100 s c h o l a r s h i p s will be a w a r d e d to outstanding students in the s e c o n d term of Secretarial S t u d i e s . Kinsmen C l u b of North Shore Scholarship A $200 s c h o l a r s h i p will be a w a r d e d annually to the top M u s i c T h e r a p y student. A p p l y to the C o o r d i n a t o r . M u s i c Department Constance MacGregor Memorial Scholarship T h e C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e F o u n d a t i o n has e s t a b l i s h e d this s c h o l a r s h i p in recognition of the g e n e r o u s support received from the Estate of the late D o n a l d A n d e r s o n M a c G r e g o r T h e p u r p o s e of the s c h o l a r s h i p is to r e c o g n i z e the increasing importance of the study of C a n a d i a n affairs in post-secondary institutions. T o be eligible to apply, a student must have a c h i e v e d an excellent standing in the study of S o c i a l Sciences, particularly in relation to C a n a d i a n affairs. Deadline January 30. T. Buck Suzuki Memorial Scholarship T w o s c h o l a r s h i p s of S500 e a c h will be a w a r d e d annually to the two students involved full-time in a first year S c i e n c e program who have achieved the highest a c a d e m i c standard T h e s e s c h o l a r s h i p s are restricted to students w h o will be returning to C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e to complete the s e c o n d year of the S c i e n c e program. S e l e c t i o n will be made automatically by the S c i e n c e Faculty at the end of the S p r i n g semester. Caroline Smith Memorial Award O n e S150 award will be granted annually in m e m o r y of C a r o l i n e S m i t h . T h e terms are under review. Deadline: January 30. 15 Academic Studies/ specific c o u r s e s is available from the A d m i s s i o n s A d v i s o r , c o u n s e l l o r s a n d in the pertinent instructional d i v i s i o n . University Transfer Transfer information accurate to the time of printing is to be f o u n d in the Transfer G u i d e section at the back of the calendar. Students are urged to read this s e c t i o n w h e n establishing their programs of study. Counselling A c a d e m i c transfer c o u r s e s offered at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e provide the student with a variety of a c a d e m i c options within the framework of a two-year, comprehensive college. Students transferring to a university c a n select full p r o g r a m s of study acceptable for equivalency to c o u r s e s in the first two years of university (see note on C o u n s e l l i n g ) . Students w h o desire to take part-time a c a d e m i c studies or who are interested in a c a demic c o u r s e s at the first or s e c o n d year level, without the intention of c o n t i n u i n g to upper-level study, c a n select from a range of c o u r s e s in various disciplines. Students in need of extra help in key areas of a c a d e m i c study c a n select c o u r s e s aimed at basic literacy (see note on E n g l i s h placement exam and Math R e s o u r c e Centre). Students interested in s p e c i a l fields of study s u c h as C a n a d i a n Studies, W o m e n ' s Studies, L a b o u r S t u d i e s , Interdisciplinary studies or self-paced learning c a n select from innovative programs in these areas (as offered from year to year). Mature students, and people w h o have not attended college previously or for many years, are urged to enrol in any of these c o u r s e s a n d . in fact, form a large and s u c c e s s f u l portion of the a c a d e m i c student body. The focus of a c a d e m i c instruction at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e is on disciplinary a n d inter-disciplinary study of the highest intellectual calibre. T h e C o l l e g e carefully reviews the curriculum and a p p r o a c h e s to ensure a c a d e m i c c u r r e n c y a n d acceptable university equivalency. A significant, basic library c o l l e c t i o n is available as are full media reference services to complement the courses of study. A c o u n s e l l i n g a n d a d m i s s i o n s placement staff assists students in selecting the best program of studies. T h e final responsibility for c o u r s e selection, however, rests with the student. Associate in Arts and Science Diploma A student w h o has c o m p l e t e d the requirements of any four-term C o l l e g e program may receive an A s s o c i a t e in Arts and S c i e n c e D i p l o m a , provided s/he has fulfilled the following conditions. For further details, please refer to D i p l o m a and Certificate Requirements as listed under G e n e r a l C o u r s e Information Transfer To and From Other Institutions T h e A c a d e m i c D i v i s i o n takes seriously its responsibility to maintain transferability with other p o s t - s e c o n d a r y institutions. T o this e n d , meetings are held with other institutions to ensure that current practice is c o m m o n l y a c c e p t a b l e and that a full transfer p a c k a g e c a n be articulated C h a n g e s in prog r a m s , new c o u r s e s or new c o u r s e n u m b e r i n g s are carefully c o m p a r e d between institutions a n d this C o l l e g e strives to offer the most c o m p l e t e two year p a c k a g e p o s s i b l e within budget and facility restraints. There is agreement a m o n g all p u b l i c B . C . c o l l e g e s to accept e a c h other's credits upon transfer, if a p p l i c a b l e to a p r o g r a m given in the admitting c o l l e g e , a n d given suitable equivalency. C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e reserves the right to review individual c o u r s e credit. Transfer credits are granted to students o n a d m i s s i o n for acceptable work done at other institutions; the transfer credits reduce the total n u m b e r of credits w h i c h are required at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e for a certificate or d i p l o m a . Students w i s h ing transfer credit s h o u l d present suitable d o c u m e n t a t i o n to the Registrar's office for adjudication by the appropriate faculty. All approved transfer credits are noted on the student's Permanent Student R e c o r d . Full information o n transfer of 16 All a c a d e m i c students are advised to see the A d m i s s i o n s A d v i s o r or a C o u n s e l l o r to plan their c o u r s e s of s t u d y . Students s h o u l d c o n s u l t the G u i d a n c e Information a n d the University Transfer G u i d e in this c a l e n d a r English Placement Test T h o s e students w h o wish to enrol in E n g l i s h c o u r s e s in the A c a d e m i c D i v i s i o n must submit the results of the B . C . G o v e r n m e n t E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t Test with their registration forms. T h o s e students w h o have not taken the B . C . G o v e r n m e n t E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t Test are required to take the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e E n g l i s h S c r e e n i n g E x a m i n a t i o n before registering for a n y E n g l i s h c o u r s e . S c h e d u l e s of E n g l i s h S c r e e n i n g E x a m i n a t i o n s will be p o s t e d in the reception area, Student Info C e n t r e a n d the H u m a n i t i e s Division. T h e s c h e d u l e d government E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t tests are: T u e s d a y J u l y 6. 1982, in all B . C . C o l l e g e s (at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e in the North C a m p u s Cafeteria) Students s h o u l d write as early as p o s s i b l e . Canadian Studies Specialty New Offering by Capilano College Students w h o wish to c o n c e n t r a t e their studies on C a n a d i a n content c o u r s e s c a n c h o o s e c o u r s e s f r o m the list below. All c o u r s e s hold full transfer credit a n d transfer into the C a n a d i a n S t u d i e s P r o g r a m at S F U . T o quality for a C a n a d i a n S t u d i e s S p e c i a l t y , c o m p l e t e o n e of the C o l l e g e ' s 3 d i p l o m a s with at least 24 credits from the following list. C h o o s e these credits from c o u r s e s in at least 3 different departments. Of the 24 credits you c h o o s e , at least 6 must be n u m b e r e d 200 or above. F o r a C a n a d i a n S t u d i e s S p e c i a l t y to be applied to a G e n e r a l S t u d i e s D i p l o m a , an E n g l i s h or C o m m u n i c a t i o n s c o u r s e is required. 1982/83 SPRING A n t h r o p o l o g y 204 B i o l o g y 105, 205 Business M a n a g e m e n t 159, 160, 176, 185, 187, 240. 241, 253. 256, 261, 285 E c o n o m i c s 101 E n g l i s h 203 F r e n c h 161, 261, 291, 297 G e o g r a p h y 108 G e o l o g y 111 History 111, 201. 206 L a b o u r S t u d i e s 100. 110. 111, 115, 117, 131, 140 P o l i t i c a l S c i e n c e 202 S o c i o l o g y 201 C o u r s e d e s c r i p t i o n s appear under the appropriate discipline. A p p l y to the Registrar to have the S p e c i a l t y a d d e d to your D i p l o m a at the time of g r a d u a t i o n . D r o p y o u r name off at the Registrar as interested in the S p e c t a t t y to be placed on our mailing list. FALL B i o l o g y 204 Business M a n a g e m e n t 158, 160, 169, 170, 172, 184. 187. 240. 241, 253. 255, 260, 267, 284 E n g l i s h 202 F r e n c h . 160. 260 290, 296 G e o g r a p h y 106 History 110, 205 L a b o u r S t u d i e s 100. 110, 111, 115, 117; 119. 142. 150, 151 210 Political S c i e n c e 104 S o c i o l o g y 200 Science: General Information A. Non-Science Students Travel/Study Course to Mexico T h e department of A n t h r o p o l o g y is proposing to offer Anthropology 249, a university transfer course, mid-April and May, 1983, in M e x i c o . Students would participate in orientation before leaving, travel to several regions of M e x i c o , and a concentrated program of study in Oaxaca. Other subjects may also be available for credit. Students are requested to contact Karin L i n d , Social S c i e n c e s , for further information (See A N T H R O POLOGY) Students p l a n n i n g to c o n t i n u e studies at a university are advised to c o n s i d e r the following c o u r s e s to fulfill their S c i e n c e requirement: B i o l o g y 104, 105. (Note: Transfer credit for these B i o l o g y c o u r s e s is limited to n o n - s c i e n c e students) C h e m i s t r y 104, 105 G e o l o g y 110, 111 G e o g r a p h y 112, 114 Math 100, 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 108 P h y s i c s 104, 105 S t u d e n t s p l a n n i n g to p u r s u e studies in E c o n o m i c s at U B C must take Math 110 and Math 111; S F U requires Math 108 or Math 110. English Tutorial Room (B166) This room is reserved on a permanent basis to provide a d r o p - i n w o r k s h o p for students requiring a s s i s t a n c e with their writing problems. S t u d e n t s may avail themselves of this service by s i g n i n g the form posted outside the tutorial r o o m . This is not a c o u r s e . Math Learning Centre (NF108) T h i s centre is e q u i p p e d with math learning aids, video tapes, d i a g n o s t i c tests, c a l c u l a t o r s , c o m p u t e r terminals a n d reference textbooks. S t u d e n t s taking math c o u r s e s are e n c o u r a g e d to make use of this room to study math, a n d to seek aid from the faculty m e m b e r on duty. S e l f - s t u d y programs are available for students w i s h i n g to refresh or improve their mathematical skills t h r o u g h the M a t h 12 level. Refer to the c o u r s e d e s c r i p t i o n s of Math 009, 010, 011, 012 a n d consult with a math instructor for further information. Please c h e c k the prerequisites given in the course description. B. Science Students C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Natural S c i e n c e s D i v i s i o n offers a c o m p l e t e first a n d s e c o n d year university transfer p r o g r a m in B i o l o g y , C h e m i s t r y , Math and P h y s i c s . In a d d i t i o n , the Natural S c i e n c e s D i v i s i o n offers s c i e n c e transfer requirements in the f o l l o w i n g : p r e - m e d i c i n e , predentistry, e n g i n e e r i n g , c o m p u t e r s c i e n c e , g e o l o g y , g e o p h y s i c s and other earth s c i e n c e s , p h y s i c a l g e o g r a p h y , forestry, agriculture, p h a r m a c y , h o m e e c o n o m i c s , rehabilitation m e d i c i n e , dental hygiene. Students w i s h i n g s p e c i f i c c o u r s e requirements for a particular program s h o u l d contact the Natural S c i e n c e s D i v i s i o n . Either of above g r o u p i n g of transfer c o u r s e s from those listed below: i) Self Paced Learning (SPL) In k e e p i n g with the C o l l e g e ' s p o l i c y for the development of alternative instructional modes, it is possible for the student to pursue studies in first year C h e m i s t r y on a self-paced time line. Refresher c o u r s e s in math up to the G r a d e 12 level are also available in this self study format. B i o l o g y 110/111 C h e m i s t r y 110/111 or 108/111 P h y s i c s 110/111, 108/111 or 114/115 Math 110/111 T h e s e p a c k a g e d c o u r s e s , prepared for h o m e study with the aid of cassette tapes, manuals, slides a n d film loops, are designed to offer students w h o are unable to maintain regular attendance at the L y n n m o u r C a m p u s or a satellite centre the opportunity to pursue college c o u r s e s . T h e y are also available to students w h o are attending any c o l l e g e centre, providing these students with a viable alternative to the usual lecture/ tutorial instructional format. Second Year A W o m e n ' s Studies P r o g r a m , c o n s i s t i n g of a variety of transfer credit, c o l l e g e credit a n d credit-free c o u r s e s , has been d e v e l o p e d at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . T h e W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s C o m m i t t e e , w h i c h is advisory to all s e g m e n t s of the W o m e n ' s Studies P r o g r a m , is made u p of representatives from the college faculty, staff, student b o d y a n d the c o m m u n i t y . In addition to the W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s C o l l e g e credit a n d transfer credit c o u r s e s , there are a c a d e m i c a n d career c o u r s e s in other d i s c i p l i n e s of s p e c i a l interest to w o m e n . A b r o c h u r e is available e a c h term listing additional short, credit-free c o u r s e s , w o r k s h o p s , a n d other presentations of s p e c i a l interest to w o m e n in the c o l l e g e a n d the community. programs select Biological Sciences ( i n c l u d i n g B i o c h e m i s t r y ) First Year Women's Studies Program individual E n g l i s h (6 credits - see c o u r s e descriptions) A c o m p l e t e s e l e c t i o n of s e c o n d year c o u r s e s w h i c h are transferable to all three B . C . universities is available. C o n s u l t the B i o l o g y Department for the s p e c i f i c requirements to transfer into third year at the University of y o u r c h o i c e . ii) Chemistry First Year C h e m i s t r y 110/111 or 108/111 P h y s i c s 114/115. 110/111 or 108/111 M a t h 110/111 E n g l i s h (6 credits - see c o u r s e descriptions) Elective (6 credits) Second Year C h e m i s t r y 200/201, 204/205 (Transfers to U B C . C o n s u l t a faculty member) P h y s i c s 200/201 a n d 210/211 or 220/221 M a t h 230, 231 or 235 (depending u p o n university — c o n s u l t a faculty member) Math 200 Elective S c i e n c e Elective from M a t h , P h y s i c s ( r e c o m m e n d e d Math 235) (optional for C h e m i s t r y h o n o u r s students) 17 Hi) Geological Sciences ( i n c l u d i n g G e o p h y s i c s , G e o c h e m i s t r y a n d other earth s c i e n c e s ) First Year Only G e o l o g y 110/111 P h y s i c s 108/111, 110/111 or 114/115 C h e m i s t r y 110/111 or 108/111 M a t h 110/111 E n g l i s h (6 credits - see c o u r s e descriptions) iv) Mathematics First Year Math 110/111 P h y s i c s 114/115, 110/111, 108/111 C h e m i s t r y 110/111, 108/111 E n g l i s h (6 credits) Elective (6 credits)* (Math 101, 102, 103 are r e c o m m e n d e d for S F U b o u n d students. Math 103, 104, 106 are r e c o m m e n d e d for U B C b o u n d students.) Second Year Math 200, 230/231, 215, 235 Electives v) Physics First Year P h y s i c s 114/115, 110/111 or 108/111 C h e m i s t r y 110/111 or 108/111 M a t h 110/111 E n g l i s h (6 credits - see c o u r s e descriptions) N o n - s c i e n c e Elective or G e o l o g y , B i o l o g y , or C o m p u t e r S c i e n c e (6 credits) Second Year P h y s i c s 200/201, 210/211, 220/221 Math 200, 230, 235 N o n - s c i e n c e Elective (6 credits) S c i e n c e Elective (6 credits) S t u d e n t s interested in H o n o u r s P h y s i c s s h o u l d c o n s u l t P h y s i c s instructors. 18 vi) Other Programs or Combinations of Programs: C o n s u l t Natural S c i e n c e D i v i s i o n for c o u r s e s e l e c t i o n , particularly with regard to s e c o n d year c h o i c e s . Lab/Course Relationship M a n y c o u r s e s require that students c o m p l e t e a lab a n d / o r tutorial. S t u d e n t s s h o u l d e n s u r e that they are aware of a n y s u c h lab requirement a n d that their timetables i n c l u d e both lab and lecture hours. Students should note that it is necessary to pass the lab in o r d e r to pass the c o u r s e . T h e c o s t of the labs are i n c l u d e d in the tuition fee, e x c e p t for lab manuals a n d s o m e field trip c o s t s . A c a d e m i c C o u r s e Descriptions Full d e s c r i p t i o n s of all a c a d e m i c c o u r s e s c a n be f o u n d in the alphabetical listings f o l l o w i n g . S t u d e n t s are u r g e d to read carefully the general d i s c i p l i n e information i n c l u d e d in e a c h s e c t i o n . It is the student's responsibility to be familiar with the s p e c i a l information needed to select a c a d e m i c c o u r s e s . Please note that university transferable c o u r s e s for Art a n d M u s i c a p p e a r under their respective p r o g r a m h e a d i n g s in the C a r e e r / V o c a t i o n a l s e c t i o n of the C a l e n d a r . C o u r s e Description C o d e O n the right h a n d side of e a c h c o u r s e d e s c r i p t i o n there is a series of c o d e letters a n d n u m b e r s , for e x a m p l e : E n g l i s h 100 L a n g u a g e S k i l l s (F,S) (3,0,1) T h e first letter(s) indicate the term in w h i c h the c l a s s will be offered. E x a m p l e : F - F a l l , S - S p r i n g , S U - S u m m e r . T h u s , E n g l i s h 100 is to be offered in the Fall a n d S p r i n g terms. T h e first n u m b e r indicates the n u m b e r of credit h o u r s granted for the c o u r s e a n d the n u m b e r of hours taught per week, the s e c o n d n u m b e r d e n o t e s the n u m b e r of lab hours per week, and the third n u m b e r d e n o t e s the n u m b e r of seminar/tutorial/4th instructional hours per week. T h u s , E n g l i s h 100 is offered three hours a week for three credit hours with no lab times and o n e hour per week of 4th instructional hour. Anthropology Instructional Faculty B e r d i c h e w s k y , B., B.A. ( U . of C h i l e ) , P h . D . (Madrid) L i n d , K „ B.A., M.A. ( U B C ) General Information Students w h o intend to major o r minor in A n t h r o p o l o g y s h o u l d take both A n t h r o p o l o g y 120 a n d 121 if they will be attending U B C , S F U o r the University of V i c t o r i a . A l l other c o u r s e s listed receive A n t h r o p o l o g y credit at the a b o v e universities. W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s 122, W o m e n in A n t h r o p o l o g y , m a y be s u b s t i t u t e d f o r A n t h r o p o l o g y 120 o r 1 2 1 , m i n o r / m a j o r program. Anthropology 120 Introduction to Social A n t h r o p o l o g y (F,S) (3,0,1) A survey of the d i s c i p l i n e to i n c l u d e a brief introduction to human evolution and our place a m o n g the primates; structure a n d o r g a n i z a t i o n of s o c i e t y , a n d the individual a n d society. E m p h a s i s will b e p l a c e d o n the c o m p a r a t i v e study of social institutions of n o n - W e s t e r n c u l t u r e s s u c h a s family patterns, s o c i a l c o n t r o l in small c o m m u n i t i e s , religion a n d magic. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Anthropology 121 Introduction to Social A n t h r o p o l o g y (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A n t h r o p o l o g y 120, W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s 122, or by written p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor. A n e x a m i n a t i o n of A n t h r o p o l o g i c a l c o n c e p t s a n d theories of culture, as well as the a n a l y s i s of cultural institutions s u c h as kinship, e c o n o m i c s , religion a n d politics. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U . V i c . Anthropology 123 Introduction to A r c h a e o l o g y a n d the Prehistoric Past (F) (3,0,1) A survey of the g o a l s of A r c h a e o l o g y , its theoretical framework, a n d the m e t h o d a n d t e c h n i q u e s to treat material. R e l a t i o n s h i p with other d i s c i p l i n e s , both in s o c i a l a n d natural sciences. R e c o n s t r u c t i o n and interpretation of the prehistoric past. Illustrated with e x a m p l e s . S t u d e n t s will have the o p p o r tunity to visit A r c h a e o l o g i c a l c o l l e c t i o n s a n d laboratories a n d will participate in g r o u p laboratory s e s s i o n s . A n t h r o p o l o g y 202 Introduction to Cultural E c o l o g y (F) (3,0,1) T h e study of p e o p l e , culture a n d environment. T h e m e s will i n c l u d e the A r c h a e o l o g i c a l r e c o r d ; e c o l o g y of early f o o d p r o d u c t i o n ; a d a p t i v e s t r a t e g i e s of h u n t e r / g a t h e r e r s , pastoralists a n d peasants. C u r r e n t e c o l o g i c a l c o n c e r n s from an A n t h r o p o l o g i c a l perspective will i n c l u d e mountain e c o s y s t e m s s u c h as the H i m a l a y a s . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. A n t h r o p o l o g y 204 Ethnic Relations (F) (3,0,1) A study of the relations between ethnic g r o u p s i n c l u d i n g an e x a m i n a t i o n of h o w ethnic g r o u p s c o m e to be defined, h o w they a r e maintained, stereotyping, a n d h o w these p r o c e s s e s interrelate with other s o c i a l variables s u c h as e c o n o m i c s , e d u c a t i o n , v i o l e n c e a n d the family. T h e f o c u s will u s u a l l y be o n B . C . S t u d e n t s will be e n g a g e d in s o m e primary research. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. N o t offered in 1982/83. A n t h r o p o l o g y 249 Comparative Cultures: A Field Study in A n t h r o p o l o g y (S) (3) Prerequisite: A n t h r o p o l o g y 120 or by written p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor. A n interdisciplinary course to c o n s i d e r in depth a particular g e o g r a p h i c area a n d its people. C o m p a r a t i v e institutions, cultural e c o l o g y , the l a n d s c a p e , m e t h o d s of observation a n d study. S t u d e n t s and instructors study in the field. In alternate years study will also take place in a country outside of C a n a d a . P r o p o s e d for A p r i l - M a y 1983: S o u t h e r n M e x i c o Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. W o m e n ' s Studies 122 W o m e n in Anthropology (F) (3,0,1) T h e a n t h r o p o l o g i c a l perspective a p p l i e d to w o m e n in different cultures of the w o r l d ; their role in e c o n o m i c , political, religious, k i n s h i p , and e x p r e s s i v e s y s t e m s . E x p l o r a t i o n of the work of w o m e n a n t h r o p o l o g i s t s a n d the effect of theory on u n d e r s t a n d i n g w o m e n . What is the w o m a n ' s e x p e r i e n c e in cultures and areas s u c h as the E s k i m o , A m a z o n jungle, Israeli kibbutz, G r e e c e , A f g h a n i s t a n , India, M e x i c o a n d A f r i c a . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. A n t h r o p o l o g y credit is available for this c o u r s e . Please see W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s for further information: Transferable t o S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Anthropology 124 Archaeology a n d H u m a n Origins (S) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the theory and evidence for the physical and socio-cultural evolution of h u m a n k i n d a s presented by A r c h a e o l o g y and P h y s i c a l A n t h r o p o l o g y . S t u d e n t s will participate in field trips to m u s e u m s a n d A r c h a e o l o g y laboratories. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Anthropology 200 Intermediate Social A n t h r o p o l o g y (S) (3,0,1) A study of the s o c i a l structure a n d o r g a n i z a t i o n of various cultures of the w o r l d . E m p h a s i s o n the d y n a m i c s of culture, the c r o s s - c u l t u r a l a p p r o a c h , t h e t h e o r e t i c a l i s s u e s in A n t h r o p o l o g y . F o c u s 1982: Latin A m e r i c a n studies. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . 19 Biology Instructional Faculty Fitz-Earle, M . , B . S c . (Nottingham), M . S c , P h . D . (Toronto) Frazier, E.A., B . S c . (Bristol), Cert. E d . (Cantab), M.S., P h . D . (Wash.), C o o r d i n a t o r of B i o l o g y G i b s o n , W . G . , B.A., D i p l . E d . (Sask.), D i p l . E d . ( C a l g a r y ) , P h . D . ( U B C ) , Division C o o r d i n a t o r , Natural S c i e n c e s Division Ricker, N.A., B.A. (Calif.), M . S c , P h . D . ( U B C ) S h a r p , J . C . , B.A., B . S c . ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c . ( U B C ) W a d e , L.K., B . S c , M . S c . ( U B C ) , P h . D . (A.N.U.) Laboratory Supervisors and Technician C a n n i n g , J . , B . S c , Prof. T e a c h e r ' s C e r t . ( U B C ) , L a b o r a t o r y Supervisor M c D o n e l l , L., B . H . E . ( U B C ) , L a b o r a t o r y S u p e r v i s o r S a n d e r s o n , C , B . S c . (Durham), L a b o r a t o r y S u p e r v i s o r W i l l i a m s o n , B., D i p l . T e c h . ( B . C . l . T . ) , L a b o r a t o r y T e c h n i c i a n General Information C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e B i o l o g y Department offers c o u r s e s to meet a variety of e d u c a t i o n a l needs. S t u d e n t s with a general interest in b i o l o g y may take the B i o l o g y 100/101 c o u r s e s w h i c h have no laboratories. T h e B i o l o g y 104/105 series meet the laboratory s c i e n c e requirements for Arts students. T h o s e p l a n n i n g a major in biology or other life s c i e n c e (eg. a g r i c u l t u r e ) s h o u l d e n r o l in B i o l o g y 1 1 0 / 1 1 1 . P r e professional students w h o intend to enter Dentistry, Medicine, Forestry, Home E c o n o m i c s , Rehabilitation M e d i c i n e or Dental H y g i e n e s h o u l d a l s o take B i o l o g y 110/111. T h e department also offers a p a c k a g e of two c o u r s e s in Plant P r o p a g a t i o n , B i o l o g y 150/151, for the interested amateur, b i o l o g y majors a n d t h o s e students l o o k i n g for immediate entry into the j o b market. A prerequisite waiver e x a m i n a t i o n for B i o l o g y 110/111 is held during the first week of classes in September. Those who pass this exam may register directly in s e c o n d year biology c o u r s e s at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e , however, no credit is given for B i o l o g y 110/111. T h e prerequisite waiver e x a m is not intended for those students w h o must have credit in first year b i o l o g y for their s u b s e q u e n t e d u c a t i o n a l g o a l s . C o n t a c t the b i o l o g y c o o r d i n a t o r for further details. A c o m p l e t e selection of s e c o n d year c o u r s e s is available w h i c h meet the credit transfer requirements of the three B . C . universities. S o m e of these c o u r s e s m a y be i n c l u d e d in the requirements for pre-professional p r o g r a m s , a n d for s p e c i f i c life s c i e n c e p r o g r a m s . T h e student s h o u l d c o n s u l t the B i o l o g y Department for details of c o u r s e requirements for various p r o g r a m s . A l l b i o l o g y c o u r s e s except 100/101, 200 a n d 215 require w e e k l y laboratory periods a n d / o r field trips. ( S o m e c o u r s e s also have e x t e n d e d field trips.) S t u d e n t s ' c o n t r i b u t i o n s to the c o s t s of laboratories are i n c l u d e d in the c o u r s e tuition fee. L a b m a n u a l s for those c o u r s e s requiring them must be p u r c h a s e d for a n o m i n a l fee. T h e student is e x p e c t e d to defray in part the c o s t s a s s o c i a t e d with field trips. For those c o u r s e s w h i c h have credit transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c , the student s h o u l d c o n s u l t the Transfer G u i d e at the back of the calendar. Biology 100 Contemporary Biological Issues I (F) (3,0,1) and m a i n t e n a n c e of the human b o d y a n d relate these to b a s i c b i o l o g i c a l c o n c e p t s . T h e c o u r s e is a l s o d e s i g n e d to increase the students' ability to critically interpret a n d evaluate current issues related to b i o l o g y . T u t o r i a l s will provide an opportunity for students to q u e s t i o n a n d to contribute their o w n e x p e r i e n c e . There will a l s o be d e m o n s t r a t i o n s , films a n d other a u d i o v i s u a l materials related t o the c o u r s e content. T r a n s f e r a b l e t o S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Biology 101 Contemporary Biological Issues II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: N o n e . In this c o u r s e , w h i c h is a c o m p l e m e n t to B i o l o g y 100, issues related to h u m a n g e n e t i c s , evolution, b e h a v i o u r a n d e c o l o g y will be c o n s i d e r e d . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U. V i c . Biology 104 H u m a n Biology (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: N o n e . T h e first semester of a c o u r s e d e s i g n e d as a laboratory s c i e n c e elective for students w h o d o not plan to take further c o u r s e s in biology. B a s i c p r i n c i p l e s of h u m a n b i o l o g y will be presented a n d the impact of the environment u p o n h u m a n s will be e v a l u a t e d . Major t o p i c s will i n c l u d e h u m a n p h y s i o l o g y , h u m a n genetics a n d their d i s o r d e r s . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Biology 105 Environmental Biology (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: N o n e . T h e s e c o n d semester of a c o u r s e d e s i g n e d as a laboratory s c i e n c e elective for students w h o d o not plan to take further c o u r s e s in b i o l o g y except for B i o l o g y 204. B a s i c principles of e c o l o g y will be d e v e l o p e d a n d the impact of c o n t e m p o r a r y s o c i e t y o n the environment will be a s s e s s e d . Major t o p i c s i n c l u d e : e c o l o g i c a l c o n c e p t s a n d environmental issues. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Biology 110 Introductory Biology I (F,S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: N o n e ; however, at least B i o l o g y 11 is strongly recommended. T h e standard introductory b i o l o g y c o u r s e for students w h o plan to take further c o u r s e s in s c i e n c e . Major t o p i c s will include the origin of life, c e l l structure a n d f u n c t i o n , cell division, introductory genetics, and development. O n e e n r i c h e d s e c t i o n of B i o l o g y 110 may be available for w h i c h the prerequisite is G r a d e of B or better in B i o l o g y 12 or c o n s e n t of the instructor. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Biology 111 Introductory Biology II (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 110. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of B i o l o g y 110 w h i c h further d e v e l o p s the d i s c u s s i o n of b a s i c b i o l o g i c a l c o n c e p t s i n c l u d i n g b i o l o g i c a l systems, evolution a n d e c o l o g y . O n e e n r i c h e d s e c t i o n of B i o l o g y 111 may be available. Prerequisite: E n r i c h e d B i o l o g y 110. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Prerequisite: N o n e . T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d for n o n - s c i e n c e students w h o require or are interested in a s c i e n c e c o u r s e without a l a b o r a t o r y c o m p o n e n t . T h e c o u r s e w i l l c o n s i d e r in d e p t h c o n t e m p o r a r y b i o l o g i c a l issues, i n c l u d i n g fitness a n d repair 20 Biology 150 Plant Propagation I (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: N o n e ; however, at least B i o l o g y 11 is r e c o m mended. A c o u r s e in practical plant propagation t e c h n i q u e s . Introduction to vascular plant life c y c l e s , reproductive methods, tissue s y s t e m s , plant o r g a n s , a n d plant propagation systems in nature. Plant propagation objectives and t e c h n i q u e s will follow, with e m p h a s i s o n the various traditional propagation methods: layering, grafting, cuttings, offshoots, and propagation by seed. Weekly labs or field trips will e m p h a s i z e the development a n d practice of skills. M a n y of these will be held at U B C a n d V a n D u s e n B o t a n i c a l Gardens. A c o m p a r a t i v e study of the vascular plant g r o u p s , the pteridophytes, g y m n o s p e r m s and angiosperms with emphasis o n the evolution, m o r p h o l o g y , e c o l o g y a n d function of each of the groups. D i s c u s s i o n s of problems in plant m o r p h o l o g y . Transferable to S F U a n d U.Vic. A c o m p a r a t i v e survey of the major p h y l a a n d c l a s s e s of the invertebrates with e m p h a s i s upon evolutionary trends, adaptive biology a n d e c o l o g y of each group. T h e c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d a r o u n d the major unifying c o n c e p t of evolution. P r o b l e m s of c o n t e m p o r a r y interest in the field of invertebrate z o o l o g y . C o u r s e i n c l u d e s a 3-day field trip to the B a m f i e l d M a r i n e Station. Biology 151 Plant Propagation II (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 150. A continuation of B i o l o g y 150, with major e m p h a s i s o n tissue culture, its theory a n d practical a p p l i c a t i o n . C e l l biology, m i c r o b i o l o g y a n d sterile t e c h n i q u e s relevant to tissue culture will be e x a m i n e d as b a c k g r o u n d with further emphasis o n d e v e l o p i n g practical skills in this new field. P o l y p l o i d y a n d its i n d u c t i o n will be e x a m i n e d a s a plant breeding tool. Weekly labs and field trips, with e m p h a s i s o n practical e x p e r i e n c e , will be held, a n u m b e r of w h i c h will be off c a m p u s . U p o n c o m p l e t i o n of the c o u r s e a n optional practicum may be made available. Transferable to S F U a n d U.Vic. Biology 200 Genetics (S) (3,0,1) Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Biology 212 Invertebrate Z o o l o g y (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 110 a n d 111. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Biology 213 Vertebrate Z o o l o g y (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 110 a n d 111. A c o n t i n u a t i o n from invertebrate z o o l o g y , c o v e r i n g the vertebrates a n d protochordates. E m p h a s i s again o n e v o l u tionary trends, especially m o r p h o l o g y , function a n d e c o l o g y of e a c h class. C u r r e n t c o n c e p t s a n d p r o b l e m s will be stressed. T h e lab is d e s i g n e d to e x a m i n e representative s p e c i m e n s of existing c l a s s e s of vertebrates. M o r p h o l o g y and evolutionary trends in organ systems will be e m p h a s i z e d . Prerequisites: B i o l o g y 110 a n d 111. B i o l o g y 214 is r e c o m mended. T r a n s f e r a b l e t o S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. G e n e t i c s of procaryotes: c h e m i c a l basis of inheritance and the evolution of eukaryotes. M e n d e l i a n a n d m o d i f i e d M e n d e l i a n genetics, sex determination a n d s e x - l i n k a g e . G e n e t i c m a p p i n g and c h r o m o s o m a l aberrations. P o p u l a t i o n a n d quantitative genetics. C u r r e n t p r o b l e m s in a p p l i e d genetics. There is no laboratory for this c o u r s e . Biology 214 Cell Biology I - Structural Basis (F) (3,3,1) Transferable to S F U . U B C , a n d U.Vic. Biology 204 E c o l o g y I (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 105 or 111. The first term of an introductory course in general ecology, stressing biotic-environmental relationships at the e c o s y s t e m level, c o n c e p t of the e c o s y s t e m , its c o m p o n e n t s a n d d y n a m ics, energy flow in e c o s y s t e m s , nutrient c y c l i n g , b i o g e o climatic z o n e s with e m p h a s i s on British C o l u m b i a , vegetation and analysis. E m p h a s i s is on principles of plant e c o l o g y a n d on problems in this field. C o u r s e i n c l u d e s a 2-day field trip to M a n n i n g Park a n d the S o u t h e r n O k a n a g a n Valley. Transferable to S F U . U B C , a n d U.Vic Biology 205 E c o l o g y II (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 204. Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 110 a n d 111 a n d concurrent registration in C h e m i s t r y 200, if not already c o m p l e t e d . A n integrated study of cell structure a n d function as determined by electron m i c r o s c o p y ; ultrastructure will be related to cell p h y s i o l o g y a n d biochemistry. Interrelations a m o n g the various c o m p o n e n t s will be d i s c u s s e d from an evolutionary viewpoint. L a b o r a t o r y e x e r c i s e s will c o n c e n trate o n the use of light vs. electron m i c r o s c o p y and through this c o m p a r i s o n develop an a p p r e c i a t i o n for m i c r o s c o p i c units.. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Biology 215 Cell Biology (S) (3,0,1) II - Introduction to Biochemistry Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 214 a n d c o n c u r r e n t C h e m i s t r y 201, if not already c o m p l e t e d . registration in A n e x a m i n a t i o n of the fundamental p r i n c i p l e s a n d basic facts of biochemistry starting with protein structure a n d enzyme functions. Cell energetics, biosynthesis and m e c h a n i s m s ' w h i c h control cell metabolism will also be c o n s i d e r e d . T h e r e is no laboratory with this c o u r s e . A continuation of B i o l o g y 204, with e m p h a s i s on principles and problems of animal e c o l o g y . Included are selected n o n British C o l u m b i a n e c o s y s t e m s ; p o p u l a t i o n d y n a m i c s ; e c o l ogy of selected B . C . m a m m a l s ; e c o l o g i c a l a s p e c t s of animal behaviour. C o u r s e includes a 3-day field trip to the Tofino area, V a n c o u v e r Island. T r a n s f e r a b l e t o S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Transferable to S F U . U B C , a n d U.Vic. Biology 210 M o r p h o l o g y of Vascular Plants (F) (3,3,1) A c o m p r e h e n s i v e treatment of introductory m i c r o b i o l o g y . T h e origin, basic structure, g r o w t h a n d metabolism of m i c r o o r g a n i s m s will be d i s c u s s e d . T h e lab provides practical e x p e r i e n c e in standard m i c r o b i a l t e c h n i q u e s . Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 110 a n d 111. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Biology 220 Principles of Microbiology (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 110 a n d 111; C h e m i s t r y 110 a n d 111. C o r e q u i s i t e : Transfer to U B C requires C h e m i s t r y 200/201. 21 Biology 221 Principles of Microbiology (S) (3,3,1) Chemistry Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 220. A continuation of Biology 220. emphasizing immunological aspects, genetics and ecology of micro-organisms. The role of micro-organisms in agriculture, various industries, health and sanitation is considered. T h e lab also includes a major project of interest to the student. Transferable to S F U , U B C and U.Vic. Instructional Faculty Gilchrist, A . B . , P h . D . (SFU) L e C o u t e u r , P . C . , B . S c , M . S c . ( A u c k l a n d ) , P h . D . (Calif.), C o o r d i n a t o r of C h e m i s t r y , G e o l o g y and P h y s i c s . R e a d , D.W., B.A., M . S c ( U B C ) , P h . D . ( M c G i l l ) Laboratory S u p e r v i s o r s a n d T e c h n i c i a n s A l l a n , B . J . , D i p l . T e c h . (B.C.l.T.), Laboratory T e c h n i c i a n Nichols, C L , B.Sc. (Hons) (Waterloo), M . S c (SFU) Laboratory Supervisor Smith, I., H . N . C . (Aberdeen), L a b o r a t o r y S u p e r v i s o r General Information All chemistry courses include weekly three-hour laboratory periods unless otherwise stated. T h e cost of the labs are i n c l u d e d in the c o u r s e tuition fee except for lab manuals a n d s o m e field trip c o s t s For transfer status of the following c o u r s e s at S F U , U B C , or U.Vic, please refer to the Transfer G u i d e at the back of the calendar. Chemistry 030 An Introduction to Chemistry (SU) Possibly (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: N o n e . (No university transfer credit.) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d for those students w h o have had no previous chemistry, and w h o wish to g o on in s c i e n c e s . No labs are given. The atom, atomic m a s s e s , the mole, c h e m i c a l formulas, i o n i c a n d covalent b o n d i n g . B a l a n c i n g equations, s i m p l e stoichiometrical problems, solutions, acids, bases and salts, equilibrium. Chemistry 104 Fundamentals of Chemistry (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: N o n e , but s o m e chemistry a n d recommended. mathematics A c o u r s e s p e c i f i c a l l y d e s i g n e d for n o n - s c i e n c e students w h o need first-year chemistry requirements for n u r s i n g , h o m e e c o n o m i c s a n d p h y s i c a l e d u c a t i o n , etc. A study of chemical principles; stoichiometry; oxidation-reduction, solids, liquids and gases; the c h e m i c a l bond: atomic structure; c h e m i c a l periodicity. Transferable to S F U , U B C , and U . V i c . Chemistry 105 Fundamentals of Chemistry (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 104. A study of electrochemistry, introductory thermodynamics; representative inorganic chemistry; equilibrium; acids, bases and salts; o r g a n i c chemistry. Transferable to S F U , U B C , and U.Vic. Chemistry 108 Basic Chemistry (F) (4.5, 3, 1.5) Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 11 or C h e m i s t r y 030, Math 12 or equivalent. Math 110 s h o u l d be taken c o n c u r r e n t l y , if not already c o m p l e t e d . Students with C h e m i s t r y 12 permitted to enrol in C h e m i s t r y 108 only with C h e m i s t r y Department permission. T h i s c o u r s e covers the material of C h e m i s t r y 110 and, in addition, provides the b a c k g r o u n d n e c e s s a r y for a student 22 who has not taken C h e m i s t r y 12. A student p a s s i n g this c o u r s e s h o u l d be able t o enter C h e m i s t r y 111 in the S p r i n g . Transferable to S F U , U B C . a n d U.Vic. Chemistry 110 Principles a n d Methods of Chemistry (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 12 a n d Math 12 Math 110 must be taken c o n c u r r e n t l y if not already c o m p l e t e d . A c o u r s e for students who plan careers in s c i e n c e . A study of stoichiometry; the g a s e o u s state; solids; liquids; solutions; atomic structure; the periodic s y s t e m ; c h e m i c a l b o n d i n g Transferable t o S F U , U B C , a n d U V i c . Chemistry 110 S.P.L. - Principles a n d Methods of Chemistry (F,S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 12 a n d M a t h 12. M a t h 110 must be taken c o n c u r r e n t l y , if not already c o m p l e t e d . A s e l f - p a c e d learning c o u r s e equivalent in content to C h e m i s t r y 110, o p e n to a n y student but d e s i g n e d to be of particular value to those students w h o are unable to attend the L y n n m o u r C a m p u s , or a satellite centre, o n a regular basis. Transferable to S F U . U B C , a n d U.Vic. Chemistry 111 Principles a n d Methods of Chemistry (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 108 or 110. Math 111 must be taken concurrently, if not already c o m p l e t e d . T h e r m o d y n a m i c s , e q u i l i b r i u m , a c i d s , bases, a n d salts; redox equations, electrochemistry; transition metals and their c o m p l e x e s ; organic chemistry. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Chemistry 111 S . P . L . - Principles a n d Methods of Chemistry (F,S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 108 or 110. M a t h 111 must be taken concurrently, if not already c o m p l e t e d . A s e l f - p a c e d learning c o u r s e equivalent in content to C h e m i s t r y 111 a n d d e s i g n e d t o be of particular value to those students who are unable to attend the L y n n m o u r C a m p u s , or a satellite centre, o n a regular basis. Chemistry 204 Introduction to Physical Inorganic Chemistry (F) (3,3,1) Transferable to S F U , U B C . a n d U.Vic. Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 105 with " B " s t a n d i n g or C h e m i s t r y 111, a n d Math 1 1 1 . Chemistry 200 O r g a n i c Chemistry (F) (3,3,1) A study of thermodynamics, thermochemistry; equilibrium: a c i d s a n d bases. p H determinations, solubility products, quantitative inorganic analysis, c h e m i c a l kinetics. B i o l o g i c a l applications of these topics stressed. Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 105 o r 111. A study of n o m e n c l a t u r e , structure; identification a n d spectroscopy of organic molecules, alkanes, alkenes, alkynes, organometallic c o m p o u n d s , a l c o h o l s , a l d e h y d e s , ketones, ethers, acids. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Chemistry 205 Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic Chemistry 201 Organic Chemistry (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 200. Aromatic Chemistry, aldehydes, ketones, acid a n d derivatives, nitro, a z o , d i a z o a n d related c o m p o u n d s ; protein chemistry; h e t e r o c y c l i c s ; p o l y m e r s ; natural p r o d u c t s . Introduction to Physical Inorganic Chemistry (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 204. A study of electrochemistry; galvanic cells, o x i d a t i o n reduction in b i o l o g i c a l systems; m a c r o m o l e c u l a r systems, main g r o u p systematic c h e m i s t r y ; transition elements a n d coordination complexes. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. 23 Commerce Instructional Faculty H a u s c h i l d t , R., B . S c . (Hons) ( Q u e e n ' s ) , M . S c . ( U B C ) T o w s o n , K.V., B . S c . ( S F U ) , M . S c . ( S F U ) W a r d , P., B . S c . ( S F U ) , M S c . , E d . D . (Okla.State U.) General Information T h e C o m m e r c e P r o g r a m is a University Transfer P r o g r a m primarily intended for students w i s h i n g to c o n t i n u e their studies at U B C or S F U , Students are advised that the C o l l e g e also offers a two-year C a r e e r P r o g r a m under the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t Department. A . Transfer to U B C Students w i s h i n g to transfer to the Faculty of C o m m e r c e at U B C may d o s o after either o n e or two years of c o u r s e s at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . T h e first year c o n s i s t i n g of general, n o n c o m m e r c e c o u r s e s , is referred to as the P r e - C o m m e r c e year. T h e s e c o n d year, c o n s i s t i n g mainly of s p e c i a l c o m m e r c e oriented c o u r s e s , is referred to as First-Year C o m m e r c e . Pre-Commerce Year Students w i s h i n g to transfer into the faculty of C o m m e r c e at U B C after o n e year at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e must c o m p l e t e the following p a c k a g e of c o u r s e s : i) A n y t w o of E n g l i s h 100 (or 102), 104, 105, 106, 108 ii) E c o n o m i c s 200 a n d 2 0 1 . iii) O n e of the following first-year Mathematics combinations: Math 105 a n d 108 Math 105 a n d 110 Math 110 a n d 111 (Math 100 a n d 101 is allowed but N O T r e c o m m e n d e d for transfer to U B C . ) iv) 12 units of n o n - C o m m e r c e ' electives. *Note:Students w i s h i n g to transfer c o u r s e s to the Faculty of C o m m e r c e at U B C must c o m p l e t e the p r e - C o m m e r c e year before taking any First-year C o m m e r c e c o u r s e s for transfer credit Students w i s h i n g to remain at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e for FirstY e a r C o m m e r c e must a l s o c o m p l e t e t h e a b o v e P r e C o m m e r c e p a c k a g e , but are strongly advised to take the Math 105 a n d 108 c o m b i n a t i o n rather than the others. (Students planning to take First-Year C o m m e r c e at C a p i l a n o may not take Math 100 a n d 101 to satisfy the P r e - C o m m e r c e Math requirements.) Prerequisite: P r e - C o m m e r c e M a t h e m a t i c s S t u d e n t s w i s h i n g to t r a n s f e r i n t o t h e F a c u l t y of C o m m e r c e at U B C after two years at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e must complete the P r e - C o m m e r c e Year a n d the f o l l o w i n g p a c k a g e of c o u r s e s (First-Year C o m m e r c e ) : SPRING Math 109 Math 106 C o m m e r c e 253 E c o n o m i c s 212 Elective (3 credits) Interested s t u d e n t s s h o u l d c o n t a c t Division for further information Transferable to U B C . S F U , a n d U.Vic C o m m e r c e 220 Principles of Organizational Behaviour (F) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the study of o r g a n i z a t i o n s — what they are, h o w they f u n c t i o n , h o w individuals behave within them. T o p i c s i n c l u d e formal structures, the role of g r o u p s within o r g a n i z a t i o n s , motivated work effort, l e a d e r s h i p , c h a n g e . C o m m e r c e 251 Fundamentals of A c c o u n t i n g (F) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the fundamental p r i n c i p l e s b e h i n d the preparation of financial reports a n d statements. T o p i c s include general financial statement structure, revenue r e c o g n i t i o n , valuation of receivables, inventory, assets a n d liabilities. Transferable to U B C . S F U a n d U.Vic. the C o u n s e l l i n g C o m m e r c e 253 Financial A c c o u n t i n g B. Transfer to S F U Students w i s h i n g to transfer to the Faculty of Arts ( S c h o o l of B u s i n e s s Administration a n d E c o n o m i c s ) at S F U after o n e or two years at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e s h o u l d contact the Counselling Division. 24 requirements. A p p l i c a t i o n s of basic mathematics to c o m m e r c e a n d b u s i n e s s . T o p i c s i n c l u d e cost/benefit analysis, d i s c o u n t e d c a s h flow, transportation p r o b l e m s , linear p r o g r a m m i n g . T h e use of c o m p u t e r s to solve these p r o b l e m s will be i n c l u d e d extensively. Transferable to U B C , S F U , a n d U.Vic. First-Year C o m m e r c e FALL C o m m e r c e 210 C o m m e r c e 220 C o m m e r c e 251 E c o n o m i c s 211 Elective (3 credits) C o m m e r c e 210 Quantitative Methods I (F) (3,0,1) (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: C o m m e r c e 251 A continuation of the study of the c o n c e p t s of financial a c c o u n t i n g , i n c l u d i n g c o r p o r a t i o n i n c o m e tax, i n c o m e tax reporting, inter-corporate investments a n d taxes, p e n s i o n s , foreign e x c h a n g e , a n d statement analysis. Transferable to U B C . S F U , a n d U.Vic Economics E c o n o m i c s 200 Principles of M a c r o e c o n o m i c (F,S) (3,0,1) Theory Prerequisite: At least o n e 100 level E c o n o m i c s c o u r s e is strongly r e c o m m e n d e d . Instructional Faculty: A m o n , N., B.A. (Kent), M . A . ( S F U ) B r o w n , D., B.A. (Carleton), M . A . ( S F U ) Mirza, M.A., B . S c . ( U . L o n d o n ) , P h . D . ( S F U ) Sayre, J . E . , B.S., B . A . (Denver), M . A . (Boston) General Information Economics is a social science concerned with the allocation of scarce resources a n d involving the production, distribution, and c o n s u m p t i o n of wealth. E c o n o m i c s 100 a n d 101 are introductory courses which raise and explore the kinds of questions e c o n o m i s t s deal with. T h e y a l s o serve as an introduction to the study of formal e c o n o m i c theory in the 200 level c o u r s e s . Students w h o plan to major in E c o n o m i c s or C o m m e r c e s h o u l d c o m p l e t e E c o n o m i c s 200 a n d 201 before p r o c e e d i n g to third year c o u r s e s at U B C , S F U , or elsewhere. S t u d e n t s w h o plan to major in E c o n o m i c s at S F U are a l s o advised to complete E c o n o m i c s 120 a n d 121. S t u d e n t s w h o plan to transfer to U B C C o m m e r c e s h o u l d take E c o n o m i c s 200/201 in their first year. E c o n o m i c s 100 Introduction to E c o n o m i c s (S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e that involves the identification a n d study of current e c o n o m i c issues. R e f e r e n c e is made to the nature and historical d e v e l o p m e n t of c a p i t a l i s m a n d h o w it h a s been c h a n g i n g a n d to the contrasts between c a p i t a l i s m a n d s o c i a l i s m . G o v e r n m e n t fiscal a n d monetary p o l i c i e s a n d simple e c o n o m i c c o n c e p t s s u c h as s u p p l y a n d d e m a n d are dealt with. T h e formal K e y n e s i a n theory of national i n c o m e d e t e r m i nation a n d s o m e c o n t e m p o r a r y critiques of this theory are c o n s i d e r e d . Included is the study of the p o s s i b l e c a u s e s of a n d solutions to u n e m p l o y m e n t a n d inflation a n d the import a n c e of international trade. G o v e r n m e n t fiscal a n d monetary policies are e x a m i n e d in detail. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. E c o n o m i c s 201 Principles of M i c r o e c o n o m i c T h e o r y (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: At least o n e 100 level E c o n o m i c s c o u r s e is strongly r e c o m m e n d e d . A study of the theoretical constructs of c o n s u m e r behaviour and the operation of b u s i n e s s firms in the market e c o n o m y under conditions of perfect competition, oligopoly, m o n o p o l y and m o n o p o l i s t i c c o m p e t i t i o n . Included is the analysis of the firm's e q u i l i b r i u m position a n d the determinants of i n c o m e distribution. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. E c o n o m i c s 211 Intermediate M i c r o e c o n o m i c (F) (3,0,1) Analysis Prerequisite: E c o n o m i c s 201, M a t h 108 or 110. C o n s u m e r behaviour, p r o d u c t i o n , e x c h a n g e , e q u i l i b r i u m of the firm under different market structures, factor markets, e c o n o m i c welfare. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. T r a n s f e r a b l e to U B C , S F U , a n d U.Vic. E c o n o m i c s 101 Canadian E c o n o m i c s Macro a n d Micro Considerations E c o n o m i c s 212 Intermediate M a c r o e c o n o m i c (F) (3,0,1) A n e x a m i n a t i o n of t h e c o n t e m p o r a r y structure of the C a n a d i a n e c o n o m y with s o m e historical reference. T h e importance of international trade a n d tariffs, the effects of foreign investment a n d o w n e r s h i p ; the p r o b l e m s of regional disparities and poverty; the interplay of business, government and unions and federal-provincial relations a n d taxation policies are c o n s i d e r e d . F o c u s is o n the hard e c o n o m i c c h o i c e s the people of C a n a d a n o w face. Analysis (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: E c o n o m i c s 201 C o - r e q u i s i t e : Math 109. Income a n d e m p l o y m e n t theory, monetary theory, the o p e n e c o n o m y , e c o n o m i c fluctuations a n d growth. T r a n s f e r a b l e to U B C , S F U , a n d U.Vic. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. E c o n o m i c s 120 E c o n o m i c History of the Pre-lndustrial Era (F) (3,0,1) A broad s w e e p of e c o n o m i c history from man's earliest b e g i n n i n g s to the Industrial R e v o l u t i o n . T h e e c o n o m i c s of pre-historic m a n , the River C i v i l i z a t i o n s , G r e e c e , R o m e a n d E u r o p e in the M i d d l e A g e s are s t u d i e d , while e m p h a s i s is p l a c e d o n the transition from E u r o p e a n F e u d a l i s m to early forms of c a p i t a l i s m . Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. E c o n o m i c s 121 E c o n o m i c History of the Industrial Era (S) (3,0,1) A study of the Industrial R e v o l u t i o n a n d s u b s e q u e n t e c o n o m i c growth to the present in context of several c o u n tries i n c l u d i n g C a n a d a . Contrast is made between the paths of development of today's industrial nations and those nations that are n o w attempting to industrialize. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. 25 English Instructional Faculty Burstein, F., B . A . (Wash. St. L o u i s ) , M.A., P h . D . (Boston) C l i f f o r d , J . , B.A., M.A. ( U B C ) C o n n e l l , P.L., B.A., M . A . ( U B C ) C o u p e , R „ B.A. (Tasmania), P h . D . ( U B C ) C o u p e y , P.L., B.A. ( M c G i l l ) , M.A. ( U B C ) F a h l m a n R e i d , M.L., B . A . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Toronto) Forst, G . N . , B.A., P h . D . ( U B C ) Gilbert, S.R., B.A. (U.Vic.), M.A. ( U B C ) H i n d m a r c h , G . , B.A., M.A. ( U B C ) H o w a r d , I., B.A., M . A . ( U B C ) J a n t z e n , D.H., B.A. ( U B C ) , M.A. (York) M c K e o w n , T., B.A., M.A. ( U B C ) S c h e r m b r u c k e r , W . G . , B.A. (Capetown), P . G r a d . Cert, in E d . ( L o n d o n ) , M.A., P h . D . ( U B C ) S h e r r i n , R . G . , B.A., M . F . A . ( U B C ) T h e s e n , S . , B.A., M . A . ( S F U ) Whittaker, E . M . , B . A . ( U B C ) English 100 Composition (F,S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e in the f u n d a m e n t a l s of g o o d writing, g i v i n g students intensive practice in writing for a variety of p u r p o s e s , with e m p h a s i s on the e s s a y form. T h r o u g h o u t the term, m u c h attention is given to precise, appropriate a n d effective s e l e c tion of w o r d s , with progressively i n c r e a s i n g e m p h a s i s o n effective o r g a n i z a t i o n a n d development of material. P r o b l e m s in m e c h a n i c s of writing are dealt with individually, by revision of e s s a y s , a n d , if necessary, by g r o u p or individual drill. Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . English 102 Composition (S) (3,0,1) A c o m p o s i t i o n c o u r s e d e s i g n e d for those w h o require a more intensive a n d c o m p r e h e n s i v e a p p r o a c h t o E n g l i s h C o m p o s i t i o n than offered by the usual first year c o m p o s i t i o n c o u r s e (English 100). Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U . V i c . Note: E n g l i s h 100 a n d E n g l i s h 102 d o not transfer together as first year E n g l i s h . General Information Students intending to transfer to university s h o u l d take two first year E n g l i s h c o u r s e s other than 190, 191. T h o s e b o u n d for S i m o n Fraser University c a n obtain transfer credits for 010, if they desire. Intending majors a n d h o n o u r s students s h o u l d c o m p l e t e E n g l i s h 200 a n d 2 0 1 , a n d are e n c o u r a g e d to take other s e c o n d - y e a r E n g l i s h c o u r s e s . E n g l i s h 200 a n d 201 are s o m e times required for certain Arts a n d E d u c a t i o n p r o g r a m s . S t u d e n t s s h o u l d seek university c a l e n d a r s a n d help from A d v i s o r s in d e t e r m i n i n g requirements. English 104 Fiction (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of s e l e c t e d 20th c e n t u r y short stories a n d novels, e a c h of intrinsic literary merit. T h e chief a i m of t h e c o u r s e , b e y o n d b r o a d e n i n g a n d d e e p e n i n g the student's u n d e r s t a n d ing a n d a p p r e c i a t i o n of literature, is to e n c o u r a g e o r i g i n a l responses to literary e x p r e s s i o n , and to increase the student's ability to e x p r e s s those r e s p o n s e s in w e l l - d e v e l o p e d oral a n d written criticism. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Note: F o r 1st year E n g l i s h Transfer credit at U B C , students must take a n y t w o of 100 or 102, 104, 105, 106, 108. C o u r s e s Not Offered 1982-1983 H u m a n i t i e s 100/101 M o v e m e n t in Art a n d Literature are not offered in 1982-83. T h e y will be reactivated when there is sufficient student interest. If y o u s e r i o u s l y wish t o take o n e of these c o u r s e s , inform the E n g l i s h Department. English Placement Test T h o s e students w h o wish to enrol in E n g l i s h c o u r s e s in the A c a d e m i c Division must submit the results of the B . C . G o v e r n m e n t E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t Test with their registration forms. S c h e d u l e s of E n g l i s h S c r e e n i n g E x a m i n a t i o n s for those w h o have not taken the E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t Test, will be posted in the reception area, Student Info C e n t r e a n d the Humanities D i v i s i o n . English as a S e c o n d L a n g u a g e See listings in p r o g r a m s a n d c o u r s e s for s p e c i a l needs. English 010 L a n g u a g e Skills (F,S) (3,0,1) English 105 Poetry (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of s e l e c t e d major a n d significant m i n o r 20th c e n t u r y poets w h o s e poetry is of intrinsic literary merit. T h e chief a i m of the c o u r s e , b e y o n d b r o a d e n i n g a n d d e e p e n i n g the student's u n d e r s t a n d i n g a n d a p p r e c i a t i o n of literature, is to e n c o u r a g e original r e s p o n s e s to literary e x p r e s s i o n , a n d to increase the student's ability to e x p r e s s t h o s e r e s p o n s e s in w e l l - d e v e l o p e d oral a n d written c r i t i c i s m . Transferable t o S F U , U B C , a n d U . V i c . ; English 106 Drama (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of s e l e c t e d a n d representative 20th c e n t u r y plays. T h e chief aim of the c o u r s e , b e y o n d b r o a d e n i n g a n d d e e p e n ing the student's understanding a n d a p p r e c i a t i o n of literature, is to e n c o u r a g e original r e s p o n s e s to literary e x p r e s s i o n , a n d to increase the student's ability to e x p r e s s t h o s e r e s p o n s e s in w e l l - d e v e l o p e d criticism. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. • Note: Credit s e c t i o n s of this c o u r s e are transferable to S i m o n Fraser. D r o p - i n s e c t i o n s are non-credit. English 108 T h e m e s in C o n t e m p o r a r y Literature (F,S) (3,0,1) A n intensive Writing W o r k s h o p in basic l a n g u a g e skills to enable the student to p r o c e e d without difficulty t h r o u g h a regular c o l l e g e p r o g r a m . C u r r i c u l u m will evolve from the a s s e s s e d needs of the students. M o s t work will be practical. Students may enter the d r o p - i n s e c t i o n s of the Writing W o r k s h o p d u r i n g the semester by s i g n i n g a list posted in the H u m a n i t i e s D i v i s i o n for individual half-hour a p p o i n t m e n t s . A study of 20th c e n t u r y w o r k s , e a c h of intrinsic literary merit, a r r a n g e d u n d e r a thematic h e a d i n g of s i g n i f i c a n c e in the c o n t e m p o r a r y w o r l d . T h e theme h e a d i n g for e a c h s e c t i o n of the c o u r s e will be a n n o u n c e d at the time of registration. W o r k s will be d r a w n from various g e n r e s a n d will b e s t u d i e d as artistically f o r m e d e x p r e s s i o n s of feelings a n d ideas, both separately a n d in relation to o n e another. Transferable to S F U . Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U . V i c . 26 English 190 Creative Writing (F,S) (3,0,1) English 204 A n intensive w o r k s h o p c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to help students develop e x p r e s s i v e skill a n d c r a f t s m a n s h i p in poetry, fiction and drama. Students are required to write extensively in their c h o s e n genre a n d to d e v e l o p an a w a r e n e s s t h r o u g h written practice of at least o n e of the other genres. S t u d e n t s are a l s o required to submit their writing regularly for group d i s c u s s i o n . Students will be e n c o u r a g e d to develop their work to the point at which it s h o u l d b e c o m e a c c e p t a b l e for p u b l i c a t i o n in T H E C A P I L A N O R E V I E W a n d other literary m a g a z i n e s . Prerequisite: A n y c o m b i n a t i o n of t w o first year E n g l i s h c o u r s e s but N O T 100 and 102 together; or instructor's written permission. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U . V i c . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C , a n d U . V i c . Major A m e r i c a n Writers to 1850 (F) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to familiarize the student with the writings of s e l e c t e d major representative A m e r i c a n writers, a n d t o provide the student with a b r o a d historical a n d critical frame of reference. T e x t s are c o n s i d e r e d both for their o w n literary merits a n d in historical context. Not offered in 1982/83. English 191 Creative Writing (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of E n g l i s h 190. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U . V i c . English 200 English Literature to 1660 (F,S) (3,0,1) English 205 Major A m e r i c a n Writers since 1850 (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A n y c o m b i n a t i o n of t w o first y e a r E n g l i s h c o u r s e s but N O T 100 a n d 102 together; or instructor's written permission. A c o u r s e s i m i l a r to E n g l i s h 204, but c o v e r i n g the p e r i o d from 1850 to 1930. Prerequisite: A n y c o m b i n a t i o n of t w o first year E n g l i s h c o u r s e s but N O T 100 a n d 102 together; or instructor's written permission. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. A study of texts in all major g e n r e s from s e l e c t e d major authors to 1660. T h i s c o u r s e will provide the student with a broad historical a n d critical frame of reference, as well as s o m e in-depth study of individual w o r k s . English 206 S e c o n d Year Drama (F,S) (3,0,1) Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U . V i c . English 201 English Literature since 1660 (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A n y c o m b i n a t i o n of two first year E n g l i s h c o u r s e s but N O T 100 a n d 102 together; or instructor's written permission. A c o u r s e similar to E n g l i s h 200, but c o v e r i n g the later period indicated. Not offered in 1982/83. Prerequisite: A n y c o m b i n a t i o n of two first year E n g l i s h c o u r s e s but N O T 100 a n d 102 together; o r instructor's written permission. T h i s c o u r s e c o n t i n u e s from E n g l i s h 106 in investigating various forms of dramatic literature c h o s e n largely from a pre-20th century reading list. S t u d e n t s will e x p l o r e s p e c i f i c elements of style a n d form, various periods of d r a m a history, a n d various s u b genres of d r a m a . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C , a n d U . V i c . Transferable t o S F U , U B C , a n d U . V i c . English 212 Readings in World Literature to 1780 (F) (3,0,1) English 202 Canadian Literature (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A n y c o m b i n a t i o n of t w o first y e a r E n g l i s h c o u r s e s but N O T 100 a n d 102 together; or instructor's written permission. Prerequisite: A n y c o m b i n a t i o n of t w o first year E n g l i s h c o u r s e s but N O T 100 a n d 102 together; or instructor's written permission. A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to familiarize the student with major representative authors from the colonial beginnings of C a n a d a to World War II. T h i s c o u r s e will investigate various themes and styles which evolved through the early literature a n d w h i c h are reflected in c o n t e m p o r a r y C a n a d i a n literature. E x a m p l e s of significant F r e n c h - C a n a d i a n w o r k s will be studied in translation. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. English 203 Canadian Literature (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A n y c o m b i n a t i o n of t w o first year E n g l i s h c o u r s e s but N O T 100 a n d 102 together; or instructor's written permission. The continuation of E n g l i s h 202, b e c o m i n g more intensive in the investigation of individual major, m o d e r n authors of poetry, novels a n d plays in C a n a d a s i n c e W o r l d War II. T h i s c o u r s e will study the e m e r g e n c e in m o d e r n form of themes and attitudes of a sensibility uniquely C a n a d i a n . Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. A c o u r s e t o acquaint students with a variety of major or influential w o r k s of literature from the c l a s s i c a l G r e e k era to the e n d of the 18th century, a n d to provide the student with a b r o a d historical a n d critical frame of reference. T e x t s are c o n s i d e r e d both for their o w n literary merits a n d in historical context. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U . V i c . English 213 Readings in World Literature since 1780 (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A n y c o m b i n a t i o n of two first year E n g l i s h c o u r s e s but N O T 100 a n d 102 together; or instructor's written permission. A c o u r s e similar to E n g l i s h 212, but c o v e r i n g the period from 1780 to 1920, with e m p h a s i s o n the 19th century. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C , a n d U . V i c . English 215 Poetry a n d Poetics, Prior to the 20th Century (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A n y c o m b i n a t i o n of t w o first y e a r E n g l i s h c o u r s e s but N O T 100 a n d 102 together; or instructor's written permission. 27 T h i s c o u r s e offers a n investigation of poetry before the 20th century. Students will have an opportunity to read long w o r k s a n d / o r to c o n c e n t r a t e o n three o r f o u r major poets. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. English 216 Poetry a n d Poetics of the 20th Century (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A n y c o m b i n a t i o n of two first year E n g l i s h c o u r s e s but N O T 100 a n d 102 together; or instructor's written permission. This c o u r s e offers a study of theories of writing, theories of l a n g u a g e , s y s t e m s of t h o u g h t a n d u n d e r s t a n d i n g of tradition as they relate to 20th century poetry a n d poetics. Not a survey, this c o u r s e presents the o p p o r t u n i t y for intensive study of several significant poets a n d / o r the development of a particular f o r m . Transferable t o S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Creative Writing - Poetry (F or S) (3,0,1) E n g l i s h 190 or 191, or instructor's Students will be expected to read a variety of contemporary work, both p o e m s a n d statements poets have m a d e about their o w n p o e t i c s . T h e y will have the o p p o r t u n i t y t o try a variety of forms, for instance, the short lyric, the serial p o e m , narrative verse, prose poetry. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. English 291 Creative Writing - Fiction (F or S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: E n g l i s h 190 o r 191, o r instructor's written permission. This c o u r s e offers an intensive w o r k s h o p in the writing of fiction. It will c o n c e n t r a t e o n furthering the student's k n o w l edge of the state of current fiction while giving the student the opportunity to develop an awareness of voice, word c h o i c e a n d rhythm, d i a l o g u e , character, a n d points-of-view. Students will b e e x p e c t e d to read a variety of w o r k s of c o n t e m p o r a r y fiction a n d to d i s c u s s various t e c h n i q u e s . In their writing, they will have the opportunity of trying out these t e c h n i q u e s in both short a n d e x t e n d e d forms of fiction. English 290 Prerequisite: poetry. It will c o n c e n t r a t e o n furthering the student's k n o w l edge of current poetic forms while at the s a m e time increasing awareness of one's o w n voice, o n e ' s individual g r o u n d for writing, a n d the development of one's o w n poetic. written permission. This c o u r s e offers an intensive w o r k s h o p in the writing of Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Fine Arts Instructional Faculty J u n g i c , J . , B.A., M.A., ( U B C ) R o s e n b e r g , A . , B.A., M.A. ( U . of T.) General Information All Fine Arts C o u r s e s have direct or indirect transfer credit at S i m o n Fraser, U B C and the University of V i c t o r i a . (Please c h e c k t h e t r a n s f e r g u i d e in the c a l e n d a r f o r f u r t h e r information). A c a d e m i c students m a y a l s o take studio art c o u r s e s for credit in the C a r e e r Arts P r o g r a m . P l e a s e consult the appropriate s e c t i o n in the c a l e n d a r for details c o n c e r n i n g these credit offerings. Fine Arts 100 The History of Art I (F) (3,0,1) A survey of the art of Egypt, G r e e c e , R o m e , B y z a n t i u m a n d the M i d d l e A g e s in E u r o p e w h i c h studies the c h a n g i n g styles in painting, s c u l p t u r e and architecture and s h o w s how styles in art are s t r o n g l y i n f l u e n c e d by historical events a n d c h a n g i n g c o n c e p t s in religion, politics a n d p h i l o s o p h y . Fine Arts 101 T h e History of Art II (S) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. A survey of painting, sculpture a n d architecture from the R e n a i s s a n c e to the present, f o c u s i n g o n the work of great artists s u c h as L e o n a r d o , M i c h e l a n g e l o , R e m b r a n d t , G o y a , V a n G o g h a n d P i c a s s o . A l t h o u g h students are e n c o u r a g e d to take Fine Arts 100 first, it is p o s s i b l e to enrol in the s e c o n d semester offering. Fine Arts 104 Introduction to Visual Literacy I (F) (3,0,1) No prerequisite. T h i s c o u r s e i n t r o d u c e s students to s o m e objects from the 28 History of Art in o r d e r t o e n c o u r a g e them t o b e c o m e visually literate. T h r o u g h s u c h e x p o s u r e the student will b e c o m e i n c r e a s i n g l y aware of h o w he or s h e p e r c e i v e s , g a i n i n g c o n f i d e n c e and certainty in the interpretation of all a s p e c t s of a visual work. It is h o p e d that this c o n f r o n t a t i o n with a w i d e range of art forms a n d ideas will assist the student to think more visually. Fine Arts 105 Introduction to Visual Literacy II (S) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. In this c o u r s e there will be an e m p h a s i s o n local a r c h i t e c ture, recent B . C . art, certain a s p e c t s of l o c a l c u l t u r e (e.g. Northwest C o a s t Indian Art, Oriental Art) a n d , w h e n the c o u r s e is team taught with the a s s i s t a n c e of a n instructor from M e d i a R e s o u r c e s , there will be an i n t r o d u c t i o n to the aesthetics of F i l m a n d V i d e o . A s in F i n e A r t s 104, the e m p h a s i s will be u p o n d e v e l o p i n g visual literacy. Fine Arts 210 M o d e r n Art (19th Century) (F) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. A study of the b e g i n n i n g s of m o d e r n art in the work of David, Delacroix, Turner, G o y a , Monet, Van G o g h , Gauguin a n d C e z a n n e a n d m o v e m e n t s s u c h as N e o - c l a s s i c i s m , Romanticism, Realism, Impressionism and Post-Impressionism. Fine Arts 211 Modern Art (20th Century) (S) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. This c o u r s e begins with P i c a s s o a n d C u b i s m and studies the impact of revolutionary m o v e m e n t s of art s u c h as Futurism, Dada, Constructivism and Surrealism. America's contribution to m o d e r n art: A b s t r a c t E x p r e s s i o n i s m , P o p , M i n i m a l i s m , C o n c e p t u a l , P r o c e s s and Earth Art is studied as well as new d i r e c t i o n s in the art of the E i g h t i e s . Fine Arts 250/251 Renaissance and Mannerist Art: Directed Study Abroad in Florence (SU) (6,0,1) No prerequisite. Ottered in M a y - J u n e 1983. A study of Italian R e n a i s s a n c e a n d Mannerist painting, sculpture and architecture S t u d e n t s will live a n d study in Florence with day trips to S i e n a , A r e z z o , U r b i n o a n d a two day visit to the V a t i c a n in R o m e . T h e c o u r s e begins with the art of the Early R e n a i s s a n c e in F l o r e n c e , then f o c u s e s on the formation of the H i g h R e n a i s s a n c e style by L e o n a r d o and M i c h e l a n g e l o and traces its development in the art of Raphael and M i c h e l a n g e l o in R o m e . T h e d i s s o l u t i o n of the C l a s s i c a l style seen in the works of the Florentine Mannerists c o n c l u d e s this five week study. Preparatory lectures at the C o l l e g e c o m p l e t e the six week credit unit. Interested p e r s o n s may contact the H u m a n i t i e s D i v i s i o n . French FRENCH COURSES Instructional Faculty C a n t i n O r r - E w i n g . L , B.A. (Montreal), M.A. ( S F U ) Glass. R., B.A. ( C a l i f ) , M.A. (South Calif.), P h . D . (Washington) K e m p o , O., B.A. (Alta.), M.A., P h . D . ( U B C ) Ravolo, D., B.A. (Paris), M.A. ( U B C ) C o o r d i n a t o r of D i a l o g u e C a n a d a Reid, F., M.A. (Edinburgh) B o u r g e o i s - T r u m a n , Marie Bouton, Denys G a c i n a , Jeannette L a c h a n c e , Gabriel Miller, M i c h e l i n e Pellerin, M i c h e l i n e Language Lab Supervisor Noel, J o y c e Summary of Programs B e g i n n e r s : 100/101 Audio-lingual (Prerequisite: 100/101 or G r a d e 11) 102 103 202 203 Transferable to U B C and U.Vic. Dialogue Canada French D i a l o g u e C a n a d a c o u r s e s have a o n e - d a y - p e r - w e e k i m m e r s i o n a p p r o a c h : a 3 hour c l a s s f o l l o w e d by 1 % h o u r s of c o n v e r s a t i o n with a f r a n c o p h o n e Instructional A s s o c i a t e and 1V4 hours of practice in the language laboratory. T h e emphasis in the D i a l o g u e C a n a d a c o u r s e s is on C a n a d i a n content a n d the audio-visual method is used. Students are required to supply two new tapes onto w h i c h a lesson is r e c o r d e d for practice at home during the week. All students new to the D i a l o g u e C a n a d a program must attend a placement interview w h i c h will be held during in person registration. Instructional A s s o c i a t e s Dialogue Canada (Prerequisite: 100/101 c r G r a d e 11) 160 161 260 261 290 291 entry into D i a l o g u e C a n a d a F r e n c h 160 or F r e n c h 102. (See under D i a l o g u e C a n a d a F r e n c h c o u r s e s and F r e n c h A u d i o L i n g u a l c o u r s e s below.) Traditional a p p r o a c h (Prerequisite: G r a d e 12) 110 111 210 211 Students may opt to take a pair of courses in one program, then change to another pair of courses in a different program. Students are also e n c o u r a g e d to take c o u r s e s in any two programs at the s a m e time. It w o u l d be advisable to consult a member of the French Department before registering. In addition to the c o u r s e s d e s c r i b e d above, D i a l o g u e C a n a d a also offers F r e n c h 290/291 a n d F r e n c h 296/297, F r e n c h 298/299. Neither of these c o u r s e s has c o n v e r s a t i o n c l a s s e s or labs. T h e c o u r s e s in Q u e b e c Culture will be given in F r e n c h and in E n g l i s h . French 160 Elementary I (F,S,) (3,3*,1) Prerequisite: G r a d e 11 or F r e n c h 100/101. T h i s is a c o u r s e d e s i g n e d by C a n a d i a n linguists within a C a n a d i a n context. T h e method e m p h a s i z e s the s p o k e n language. *2.5 hours for evening sections. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U Vic. French 161 Elementary II (F,S) (3,3*,1) Prerequisite: French 160 or written permission of the instructor. Course Descriptions French 100 Beginners' French (F) (3,1.75,1) For absolute beginners a n d those who do not have G r a d e 11 F r e n c h or the equivalent. A n intensive introduction to the F r e n c h language through p h o n e t i c s , p r o n u n c i a t i o n drills a n d grammar. Transferable to U B C and U.Vic. French 101 Beginners' French (S) (3,1.75,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 100. This course, together with F r e n c h 100, covers H i g h S c h o o l French grades 8, 9, 10 and 11 and prepares the student for A continuation of F r e n c h 160. At this level the student will be e x p e c t e d to start writing small c o m p o s i t i o n s . *2.5 hours for evening sections. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. French 260 Intermediate I (F,S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 160/161 or F r e n c h 102/103 or written p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of F r e n c h 160/161. At this level the student will be e x p e c t e d to participate in short d i s c u s s i o n s , give oral presentations and write c o m p o s i t i o n s . *2.5 hours for e v e n i n g sections. Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . 29 French 299 Studies in Quebec Culture in English Translation (S) (3,0,1) French 261 Intermediate II (F,S,) (3,3*,1) Prerequisite: French 260 or written permission of the instructor. A continuation of F r e n c h 260 *2.5 hours for evening sections Prerequisite: instructor. F r e n c h 298 or written p e r m i s s i o n from, the T h i s c o u r s e is a c o n t i n u a t i o n of F r e n c h 298. Transferabie to S F U a n d U B C . French Audio-Lingual Courses French 290 Advanced Oral and Written French (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: French 261 or written permission of the instructor. This c o u r s e is intended as a f o l l o w - u p to F r e n c h 261. T h e ultimate goal of F r e n c h 290/291 is to bring students to a level of oral/written proficiency w h i c h will enable them to pursue their o w n study of the language. O r a l a n d written proficiency will be e n h a n c e d via the following methods: oral presentations, dictation, vocabulary e x e r c i s e s , a variety of grammatical e x e r c i s e s , the study of literary p a s s a g e s a n d recorded material. Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . T h e f o l l o w i n g F r e n c h c o u r s e s utilize the A u d i o - L i n g u a l method of language instruction A l l f o u r skills of listening, s p e a k i n g , reading a n d writing are taught, a l t h o u g h primary e m p h a s i s is p l a c e d , f r o m the b e g i n n i n g , on the listening a n d s p e a k i n g skills. French 102 Advanced Beginners' French I (F) (3,2.5,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 100/101 or F r e n c h 11. This c o u r s e , together with F r e n c h 103, constitutes G r a d e 12 F r e n c h . T h i s is a c o n v e r s a t i o n a l a p p r o a c h to the F r e n c h language, i n c l u d i n g c o n t i n u i n g instruction in b a s i c g r a m m a r . Transferable to S F U , U B C and U.Vic. French 291 Introduction to Quebec Literature (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: French 290 or written permission of French 103 Advanced Beginners' French II (S) (3,2.5,1) the instructor. This c o u r s e is intended as a f o l l o w - u p to F r e n c h 290 T h e g o a l s of F r e n c h 291 are (1) to pursue the student's oral and written proficiency a n d (2) to gain a better k n o w l e d g e of Q u e b e c via its literary w o r k s . Oral a n d written proficiency will be e n h a n c e d via the following methods: study of literary works, oral presentations, c o m p o s i t i o n s . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Prerequisite. F r e n c h 102 or p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. T h i s c o u r s e , t o g e t h e r with F r e n c h 102, c o n s t i t u t e s G r a d e 12 F r e n c h . A c o n t i n u a t i o n of F r e n c h 102, this c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to give a limited fluency in s p e a k i n g a n d reading, as well as writing skills. Transferable to S F U , U B C and U.Vic. French 202 Intermediate French I (F) (3,2.5,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 102/103 or F r e n c h 12. French 296 Studies in Quebec Culture (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 290/291 or F r e n c h 210/211. A n intermediate c o u r s e to c o n t i n u e oral f l u e n c y with g r a m m a r review, dictations, c o m p r e h e n s i o n , oral a n d written c o m p o s i t i o n . C o n t i n u e s the work of F r e n c h 103. T h e aim of the c o u r s e is to familiarize the student with the important a s p e c t s of Q u e b e c culture, f r o m its origins to the present day. The student s h o u l d gain a feeling of the c o n t i n u ity of the culture, its rapid transformation s i n c e 1960 and its p l a c e within c o n f e d e r a t i o n . T h i s will be d o n e by e x p l o r i n g Q u e b e c via its history, its politics, its literature, its m u s i c a n d its arts. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . A c o n t i n u a t i o n of the w o r k of F r e n c h 202, with further e m p h a s i s on oral a n d written e x p r e s s i o n . French 297 Studies in Quebec Culture (S) (3,0,1) Transferable to S F U , U B C and U.Vic. Prerequisite: F r e n c h 296. This c o u r s e is a continuation of F r e n c h 296. Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . French 298 Studies in Quebec Culture In English Ts-asisiatiom (F) (3,0,1) • T h e a i m of the c o u r s e is to familiarize the student with the important aspects of Q u e b e c culture, from its origins to the present day. T h e student s h o u l d gain a feeling of the c o n t i n u ity of the culture, its rapid transformation s i n c e 1960 a n d its place within C o n f e d e r a t i o n . This will be d o n e by e x p l o r i n g Q u e b e c via its history, its politics, its literature, its music a n d its arts. N o prerequisite. 30 French 203 Intermediate French II (S) (3,2.5,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 202 T h i s c o u r s e s h o u l d be taken whenever p o s s i b l e in the term following F r e n c h 202. French Traditional Method Courses T h e f o l l o w i n g F r e n c h c o u r s e s e m p l o y the traditional method of language instruction used at most universities, where the primary e m p h a s i s is p l a c e d o n g r a m m a r revision, written e x p r e s s i o n , style a n d literature. French 110 intermediate French I (F) (3,2.5,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 102/103 or F r e n c h grade 12 or s p e c i a l p e r m i s s i o n f r o m the instructor. T o be taken by all students intending to p r o c e e d to the Major or H o n o u r s p r o g r a m at another institution. Includes g r a m m a r revision, e x e r c i s e s , dictations, weekly a s s i g n m e n t s and F r e n c h literature. Transferable to S F U , U B C and U . V i c . and c o m p r e h e n s i o n tests. Literary w o r k s c h o s e n from 20th C e n t u r y novels will be studied, requiring s o m e b a c k g r o u n d reading T h e c o u r s e i n c l u d e s cultural e n r i c h m e n t t h r o u g h m e d i u m of slides, films a n d music. French 111 Intermediate French II (S) (3,2.5,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 110. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of the work d o n e in 110; i n c l u d i n g c o m p o s i t i o n a n d study of F r e n c h literary texts. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. French 211 A d v a n c e d F r e n c h II (S) (3,2.25,1) French 210 A d v a n c e d F r e n c h I (F) (3,2.25,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 210. T h i s c o u r s e s h o u l d be taken, whenever p o s s i b l e , in the term following F r e n c h 210. P r e r e q u i s i t e : F r e n c h 110/111 o r c o n s i d e r a b l e e x p e r i e n c e in written a n d oral work. previous A n a d v a n c e d c o u r s e with e m p h a s i s o n written work, i n c l u d i n g formal translation, stylistic e x e r c i s e s , dictations. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of the work of F r e n c h 210, literary texts will be c h o s e n from 20th C e n t u r y F r e n c h works; b a c k g r o u n d reading required. C o u r s e i n c l u d e s cultural enrichment. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Geography Instructional Faculty B r o w n , T., B . S c . (Bristol) E w i n g , K., B . A . , M . S c . (Michigan) J o r d a n , P., B . S c , M . S c . ( U B C ) M c G i l l i v r a y , B., B.A., M . A . ( U B C ) W i l s o n , G . , B . S c . (N.Y. State), M . A . ( U B C ) General Information G e o g r a p h y c o u r s e s are p l a n n e d for students w h o wish to major in this field as well as for those w h o wish electives. More than o n e G e o g r a p h y c o u r s e m a y b e taken s i m u l t a neously. Students intending to transfer to U B C may c o m b i n e G e o g r a p h y 111 a n d 200 to receive credit for U B C G e o g r a p h y 200/201. Students p l a n n i n g to transfer to S F U may take the G e o g r a p h y c o u r s e s in a n y s e q u e n c e with the e x c e p t i o n of G e o g r a p h y 216, 220 a n d 221 c o u r s e s w h i c h require prerequisites. G e o g r a p h y 112 a n d 114 are equivalent to G e o g r a p h y 101 at U B C a n d fulfill the lab s c i e n c e requirement at U B C and U.Vic. Note: A l l G e o g r a p h y c o u r s e s have university transferability. G e o g r a p h y 101 Environmental Geography: Perception & C h a n g e (F) (3,0,1) This course introduces the student to environmental issues and c o n c e r n s through e x a m i n i n g the conflicts between o u r lifestyles a n d attitudes, a n d the p h y s i c a l environment. T h e c o u r s e concentrates o n energy in o u r environment — e x a m ining interesting aspects that range from the role a n d n e e d of nuclear energy to the demonstration of solar panels T h e s e topics are a p p r o a c h e d through a p p l i c a t i o n of e c o l o g i c a l principles. Lectures, seminars, field trips, guest speakers, films, slides, etc. will be used in this course. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. G e o g r a p h y 102 Environmental G e o g r a p h y : Problems a n d Prospects (S) (3,0,1) Environmental G e o g r a p h y : P r o b l e m s a n d P r o s p e c t s is d e s i g n e d to follow G e o g r a p h y 101 but G e o g r a p h y 101 is not a prerequisite. In this c o u r s e s u c h important a n d interesting environmental issues s u c h a s the f o o d w e eat, the use of land, wastes, a n d r e c y c l i n g are d i s c u s s e d . T h e s e issues are e x a m ined through a comparison of human attitudes and perception, and natural/biological systems. F o l l o w i n g the 101 format, this c o u r s e e m p l o y s lectures, seminars, field trips, guest speakers, films, slides, etc. •Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. 31 G e o g r a p h y 106 British Columbia: A Regional Analysis (F) (3,0,1) G e o g r a p h y 114 Weather a n d Climate (F.S) (3,2,1) This c o u r s e is based o n a g e o g r a p h i c b a c k g r o u n d to many historical and c o n t e m p o r a r y issues in this province. It deals with physical regions in B . C . a n d d i s c u s s e s the relationship between p h y s i c a l s y s t e m s a n d h u m a n u s e s y s t e m s . T o p i c s include natives a n d their problems, minority groups and racism, the influence of the C.P.R., energy a n d alternative sources, B.C.'s industries, the preservation of agricultural land, a n d a range of other topics that will be a p p r o a c h e d through films, slides, simulation games, a n d lecture-discussion groups. A c o u r s e i n t r o d u c i n g students to the study of o u r a t m o s p h e r i c environment. P r i n c i p l e s of c l i m a t o l o g y a n d meteorology will be e x p l a i n e d (using films, lectures, labs a n d d i s c u s s i o n g r o u p s ) , to permit a b a s i c u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the weather we e x p e r i e n c e daily. E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d o n C a n a d i a n e x a m p l e s of the interactions between climate a n d other elements of o u r environment, i n c l u d i n g m a n . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. G e o g r a p h y 108 C a n a d a : A T o p i c a l Geography (S) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e deals with physical a n d h u m a n aspects of C a n a d i a n G e o g r a p h y . T h e c o u r s e d i s c u s s e s topical issues arising out of the c h a n g i n g e c o n o m i e s of the Maritime provinces, the cultural g e o g r a p h y of Q u e b e c , a n d the position of the Western P r o v i n c e s . It also e x a m i n e s issues relating to urban growth, N o r t h e r n development a n d energy a n d resource extraction. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. G e o g r a p h y 110 The S c o p e of G e o g r a p h y (F) (3,0,1) G e o g r a p h y is a n d c o n t i n u e s to be very diverse in its offerings (for example, U r b a n G e o g r a p h y . E c o n o m i c G e o g r a phy, G e o m o r p h o l o g y , etc.). However, this c o u r s e d o e s not confine y o u to a s p e c i f i c theme; rather, it stresses many themes a n d d i s c u s s e s the methods of inquiry a n d techniques of analysis that are c o m m o n in the study of people in their physical a n d human environments. Field trips, d i s c u s s i o n groups, media a n d lectures will be utilized. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. G e o g r a p h y 111 H u m a n G e o g r a p h y (F) (3,0,1) A n examination of h u m a n cultural characteristics a n d activities in different environmental situations. T h e distribution a n d characteristics of h u m a n p o p u l a t i o n s are e x a m i n e d in both global a n d c o n t e m p o r a r y North A m e r i c a n context. C o n c e p t s stressed will be those of p e r c e p t i o n , culture a n d diffusion, as well as environmental relationships to resource use a n d urban growth. Transferable to S F U . U B C a n d U V i c . G e o g r a p h y 112 Introduction to Earth Environments (F,S) (3,2,1) A n introduction to P h y s i c a l G e o g r a p h y using films, lectures, labs a n d field trips to e x p l a i n p r o c e s s e s in G e o m o r phology. S o m e of the environments to be c o n s i d e r e d are: g l a c i a l , v o l c a n i c , c o a s t a l , arid a n d fluvial. M a p s a n d aerial p h o t o graphs will be used to illustrate the various features. Emphasis will be placed o n C a n a d i a n examples a n d the interactions between people a n d their p h y s i c a l environment. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. G e o g r a p h y 200 Technology and Economic (S) (3,0,1) Environments A n e x a m i n a t i o n of the c o n c e p t s a n d themes of e c o n o m i c g e o g r a p h y in terms of p r o d u c t i o n a n d c o n s u m p t i o n . T h e traditional primary, s e c o n d a r y , tertiary a n d quaternary divis i o n s in e c o n o m i c g e o g r a p h y are reviewed in terms of c o n temporary issues s u c h as development versus u n d e r d e v e l o p ment, poverty, a n d the location of industrial activities. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. G e o g r a p h y 201 Urban Studies (S) (3,0,1) More a n d more of us are living in an urban world. Cities are b e c o m i n g more c o m p l e x ; cities are c a u s i n g us p s y c h o l o g i c a l and biological problems — it is necessary for us to understand our city. This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to e x a m i n e p r o b l e m s a n d issues that arise with urban living; i n c l u d i n g p s y c h o l o g i c a l problems, the cost of h o u s i n g , rapid transit, slums, s u b u r b s and their encroachment o n agricultural land. While this course uses local e x a m p l e s it also d r a w s u p o n e x a m p l e s from other cities in the world. This c o u r s e a p p r o a c h e s these t o p i c s through field trips into the city, slides, films, guest s p e a k e r s , simulation games, etc. Urban studies leads to s o m e understanding of urban planning, real estate, architecture, urban politics, a n d general c o m m u n i t y awareness. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. G e o g r a p h y 221 Map a n d Airphoto Interpretation (S) (3,2,1) Prerequisites: G e o g r a p h y 110 or 112 a n d / o r 114, or written p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor. T h i s c o u r s e deals with the u s e of maps a n d aerial p h o t o g r a p h y to interpret natural a n d m a n - m a d e p h e n o m e n a . Major topics: p h y s i c a l l a n d s c a p e s , urban d e v e l o p m e n t a n d regional land use. Lecture a n d labs will i n c l u d e t o p o g r a p h i c and geologic maps; vertical a n d oblique air photos; a n d black/ white a n d c o l o u r photography. L a n d - u s e m a p s a n d multispectral remote s e n s i n g t e c h n i q u e s will be additional topics covered. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. G e o g r a p h y 249 Comparative Cultures: A Field Study C o u r s e In G e o g r a p h y (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: D e p e n d s o n study area or written p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. T h i s c o u r s e applies the tools, t e c h n i q u e s , c o n c e p t s a n d m e t h o d s of the g e o g r a p h e r to e x a m i n i n g the l a n d s c a p e . T h e f o c u s is primarily on these field research t e c h n i q u e s as they apply to a study area; a n d the study area will alternate each year between B . C . a n d / o r C a n a d a a n d foreign c o u n t r i e s . Transferable to S F U . U B C a n d U . V i c . Not offered 1982/83. 32 Geology G e o l o g y 110 Physical G e o l o g y (F) (3,2,1) Instructional Faculty In P h y s i c a l G e o l o g y the structure and c o m p o s i t i o n of the earth's interior is d e d u c e d from indirect e v i d e n c e ; gravity, m a g n e t i s m , heat-flow, v o l c a n o e s a n d e a r t h q u a k e s . Athaide, D., B . S c . ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c , Prof. T e a c h e r ' s Cert. (UBC) T h o m l i n s o n , A . G . , B.A., M . S c , Prof. T e a c h e r ' s Cert. (UBC) General Information G e o l o g y c o u r s e s are d e s i g n e d for students p l a n n i n g a university degree p r o g r a m in the g e o l o g i c a l s c i e n c e s or in the arts, humanities, or s o c i a l s c i e n c e s . G e o l o g y 110 a n d 111 are e s p e c i a l l y a p p r o p r i a t e f o r s t u d e n t s in n e e d of a laboratory s c i e n c e w h i c h provides an u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the origin, structure, c o m p o s i t i o n a n d history of the earth. These courses include weekly two-hour laboratory investigations or the equivalent in field projects. Laboratory tuition fees are i n c l u d e d in the c o u r s e fee, however students must p u r c h a s e a laboratory m a n u a l and share s o m e field trip costs. Students transferring to U B C m a y c o m b i n e credit for G e o l o g y 110 and 111 to gain credit for the equivalent of U B C G e o l o g y 105. For transfer status of the f o l l o w i n g c o u r s e s at S F U , U B C and U.Vic, please refer to the Transfer G u i d e at the back of this calendar. German Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. G e o l o g y 111 Historical G e o l o g y (S) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: G e o l o g y 110 o r equivalent. T h e main theme of this c o u r s e is the g e o l o g i c evolution of C a n a d a a n d the adjacent o c e a n basins s i n c e the earth orginated more than 4.5 billion years a g o . T o p i c s to be s t u d i e d i n c l u d e : a g e a n d o r i g i n of t h e s o l a r s y s t e m , determination of relative a n d absolute ages of minerals, the g e o l o g i c time scale; origin of continents, o c e a n b a s i n s a n d sea-water, origin of life, fossils and stratigraphic paleontology; g e o l o g i c a l history of the N o r t h A m e r i c a n C o n t i n e n t a n d the Atlantic, A r c t i c a n d P a c i f i c O c e a n s ; the g e o l o g i c history of C a n a d a ' s mineral a n d fossil fuel resources; environmental impacts of mineral a n d energy projects in C a n a d a . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Native s p e a k e r s of G e r m a n w h o wish to take a first or s e c o n d - y e a r G e r m a n c o u r s e must c o n s u l t with the G e r m a n instructor first. University rules g o v e r n i n g s u c h students differ within departments, but the L a n g u a g e Department has c o r r e s p o n d e n c e d e a l i n g with matters relevant to credit transfer and point of entry; in order to avoid any misunderstanding, s u c h students are invited to d i s c u s s these p r o b l e m s with the department prior to enrolment. Instructional Faculty H a n k i n , B., B . A . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Wash.) Instructional A s s o c i a t e Freiberg, Renate G e r m a n 100 First Year G e r m a n (F) (3,2.5,1) SFU Students w h o wish to p r o c e e d to S F U a n d to p u r s u e further c o u r s e s in G e r m a n are r e m i n d e d of the present equiva l e n c y standards. Elective credit will be given at S F U for all C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e G e r m a n c o u r s e s . E x e m p t i o n from a n d p l a c e m e n t in higher c o u r s e s are d e t e r m i n e d by the results of a placement test or other a s s e s s m e n t p r o c e d u r e . A s a result of the placement test, area credit may be granted which w o u l d count toward a major in G e r m a n . C o u r s e s which d o not qualify toward a major will be a w a r d e d elective credit only. Prerequisite: N o n e . A c o m p r e h e n s i v e introduction to the G e r m a n l a n g u a g e using a multiple a p p r o a c h ; e m p h a s i s on u n d e r s t a n d i n g and s p e a k i n g with reinforcement t h r o u g h reading a n d writing. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , ' U B C a n d U.Vic. G e r m a n 101 First Year G e r m a n (S) (3,2.5,1) Prerequisite: G e r m a n 100, or its equivalent p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor. UBC In the c a s e of U B C present equivalent s t a n d a r d s provide transfer credit o n the following basis. Capilano College G e r m a n 100 a n d 101 (3 credits each) G e r m a n 200 a n d 201 (3 credits each) K n o w l e d g e of the c o m p o s i t i o n a n d structure of the continents and o c e a n b a s i n s is also g a i n e d from these s a m e indirect s o u r c e s as well as direct study of minerals a n d r o c k s and the ways in w h i c h they are constantly b e i n g altered and r e c y c l e d . T h i s p r o c e s s (the r o c k - c y c l e ) will be seen as the r e s u l t of i n t e r a c t i o n s b e t w e e n t h r e e p r o c e s s e s : t h e a t m o s p h e r i c a n d h y d r o s p h e r i c c y c l e s (solar-powered) a n d the lithospheric c y c l e (nuclear-powered), a l s o k n o w n a s plate t e c t o n i c s . UBC 100 (3) 200 (3) with written This c o u r s e s h o u l d be taken, w h e n e v e r p o s s i b l e , in the term f o l l o w i n g G e r m a n 100. R e c o m m e n d e d also for those w h o are c o n s i d e r i n g taking G e r m a n 200 at a later date a n d need review work. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. The student w i s h i n g to major fulfills departmental requirements with G e r m a n 223, w h i c h may be taken in the third year by p e r m i s s i o n of the Department. G e r m a n 200 S e c o n d Year G e r m a n (F) (3,1.75,1) Note: A l l c o u r s e s in G e r m a n include a total of five a n d o n e half hours of instruction per week, m a d e up of three hours of lectures; o n e a n d one-half h o u r s of laboratory practice; a n d o n e hour of c o n v e r s a t i o n a l practice with a native speaker. A course which includes conversation, grammar, c o m p o sition a n d the study of m o d e r n literary s e l e c t i o n s . Prerequisite: G e r m a n 101, or its equivalent p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor. with written T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . 33 G e r m a n 201 S e c o n d Year G e r m a n (S) (3,1.75,1) Prerequisite: G e r m a n 200, or its equivalent p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor. with written This c o u r s e s h o u l d be taken, whenever p o s s i b l e , in the term f o l l o w i n g G e r m a n 200. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of the w o r k in G e r m a n 200. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. History History 111 Instructional Faculty Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. C a n a d a S i n c e C o n f e d e r a t i o n (S) (3,0,1) A survey of C a n a d i a n history f r o m 1867 t o the present. C a m p b e l l , R., B.A. (California), M.A. ( U B C ) L e G a t e s , M . , B.A. (Washington), M.A., M . P h i l . , P h . D . (Yale) G e n e r a l Information Students planning to major in history s h o u l d have at least four history c o u r s e s at the C o l l e g e . T h e s e c a n be any four courses. A n intended major should also have a broad sampling of c o u r s e s in the S o c i a l S c i e n c e s and Humanities. Students planning to major in history at S i m o n Fraser University s h o u l d take six history c o u r s e s in the first two years. F o r U B C the requirement is four history c o u r s e s . Students planning to take honours should acquire a reading knowledge of an appropriate n o n - E n g l i s h language. History 200 T h e City, to 1800 (S) (3,0,1) A n analysis of Western E u r o p e a n urban life, f o c u s i n g o n the A n c i e n t M e d i e v a l , R e n a i s s a n c e , B a r o q u e a n d early industrial city. S p e c i a l e m p h a s i s is p l a c e d o n s o c i a l history. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. History 201 T h e City, 1800 T o T h e Present (F) (3,0,1) A study of North American urban life, with special emphasis placed o n the p r o c e s s of urbanization in the United States and C a n a d a . History 106 E u r o p e a n Civilization I (F) (3,0,1) Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Not offered in 1982/83. A n introduction to Western E u r o p e a n s o c i a l , political a n d cultural history from approximately 500 A . D . to 1550 A . D . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. History 107 E u r o p e a n Civilization II (S) (3,0,1) A n introduction to Western E u r o p e a n s o c i a l , political a n d cultural history from 1550 A . D . to the 20th C e n t u r y . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. History 205 British C o l u m b i a (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will provide a n overview of British C o l u m b i a , e m p h a s i z i n g its s o c i a l a n d political d e v e l o p m e n t f r o m the eighteenth century to recent times. T h e c o u r s e will a l s o e x a m i n e s o m e a s p e c t s of the development of the North Shore. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. History 108 Issues a n d T h e m e s in U . S . History (F) (3,0,1) A study of U.S. history, 1607 to 1877, f o c u s i n g on selected themes a n d topics. E m p h a s i s is placed o n the growth of an " A m e r i c a n " culture. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Not offered 1982/83. History 109 History 206 Q u e b e c in C a n a d a (S) (3,0,1) A n historical a p p r o a c h to the c o n f l i c t s b e t w e e n E n g l i s h and F r e n c h C a n a d i a n s a n d between "federalist" a n d " s e p a r a tist" F r e n c h C a n a d i a n s . Not offered in 1982/83. Transferable t o S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Issues a n d T h e m e s in U . S . History (S) (3,0,1) A study of U.S. history f r o m 1865 to the present w h i c h f o c u s e s o n selected themes a n d topics. E m p h a s i s is p l a c e d on the g r o w t h of a n " A m e r i c a n " culture. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. History 110 C a n a d a Before C o n f e d e r a t i o n (F) (3,0,1) A n overview of the of N e w F r a n c e a n d British North A m e r i c a , with s p e c i a l e m p h a s i s given to the m a k i n g of C a n a d i a n society. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. 34 W o m e n ' s Studies 120 W o m e n & the Past: A n Historical Survey (S) (3,0,1) A survey of the lives of w o m e n from the A n c i e n t W o r l d to 20th C e n t u r y North A m e r i c a . A n u n c o v e r i n g of w o m e n ' s participation in and contribution to the m a k i n g of history. Private lives as well as p u b l i c a n d political activities will be studied. T h e c o u r s e will e x a m i n e reasons b e h i n d the extent to w h i c h w o m e n have been " h i d d e n from history". Transferable to U.Vic. P r o c e d u r e s for transfer credit to S F U and U B C are in progress. F o r more information see W o m e n ' s Studies. Labour Studies L S P 113 Public Service Staff Relations A c t ( P S S R A ) (F,S) (1.5,0,0.5) Instructional Faculty A m o n , N . , B.A. (Kent), M.A. ( S F U ) B o l t o n , M „ B.A., L L . B . ( U B C ) Hoeppner, S., B.A. ( U B C ) Lavalle, E., B . C o m m . , L L . B . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Duke) M c G r a d y , L., B.A. (Toronto), L L . B . (Man.) M a c L e a n , A . H . , B.A. (Alta.), L L . B . ( U B C ) Meredith, G . Merrall, B. R u s h , S . , B.A. (Western O n t ) , L L . B . ( U B C ) S u n , C , B . A . (Hons.) ( S F U ) , L L . B . (Dalhousie) Trebble, M . Wallace, D . M . , B . A . ( U B C ) , M . A . ( S F U ) General Information T h e L a b o u r S t u d i e s P r o g r a m is c o m m i t t e d t o meet the special e d u c a t i o n needs of B . C . w o r k e r s , their o r g a n i z a t i o n s and the labour movement in g e n e r a l . C o u r s e s in L a b o u r S t u d i e s are offered o n both a credit and credit-free basis. T h e ' F a l l P r o g r a m is offered in O c t o b e r and N o v e m b e r a n d the S p r i n g P r o g r a m in F e b r u a r y through A p r i l . E a c h Fall a n d S p r i n g a s p e c i a l b r o c h u r e d e s c r i b i n g the c o u r s e s to be offered is i s s u e d . T h i s b r o c h u r e is available by writing the P r o g r a m o r t e l e p h o n i n g 986-1911 ( L o c a l 334). C o u r s e s are offered in the evening a n d on weekends. M a n y participants in the P r o g r a m have their registration fees paid by the E d u c a t i o n Department of their U n i o n . S o m e of the credit c o u r s e s offered in the P r o g r a m are as follows: L S P 100 Introduction to E c o n o m i c s for Trade Unionists (F) (1.5,0,0.5) Introduces e c o n o m i c s a n d e m p h a s i z e s both o r t h o d o x and alternative views of h o w the C a n a d i a n e c o n o m y has developed a n d how it operates. C a n a d i a n e c o n o m y is p l a c e d in an historical a n d international perspective. D i s c u s s i o n will centre around government policies towards unemployment, inflation, a n d the C a n a d i a n dollar. L S P 101 Labour E c o n o m i c s : Alternatives a n d Options (S) (1.5,0,0.5) This c o u r s e builds o n the material from L S P 100 to provide information o n alternative e c o n o m i c models i n c l u d i n g Marxist e c o n o m i c theory. D i s c u s s i o n will f o c u s o n the development and nature of capitalist e c o n o m i c s a n d the c a u s e s of long a n d short term e c o n o m i c crises. L S P 110 T h e British C o l u m b i a Labour (F,S) (1.5,0,0.5) Code A m o n g other issues, this c l o s e look at the B . C . L a b o u r C o d e e x a m i n e s unfair labour p r a c t i c e s , the L a b o u r Relations B o a r d , collective bargaining, strikes, essential services, a n d grievance arbitration. S e s s i o n s will also c o v e r labour law, p r o c e d u r e s before the L . R . B . a n d arbitration b o a r d s , as well as portions of the H u m a n R i g h t s C o d e . L S P 111 T h e C a n a d a Labour C o d e (F,S) (1.5,0,0.5) A b r o a d e x a m i n a t i o n of the C o d e a n d d e c i s i o n s w h i c h affect u n i o n s under Federal labour j u r i s d i c t i o n . T h i s c o u r s e will i n t r o d u c e methods of labour law research a n d their a p p l i c a t i o n . E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d o n the p o l i c y u n d e r l y i n g the C o d e a n d the creation and effect of the collective agreement. A wide e x a m i n a t i o n of the Federal labour laws d e a l i n g specifically with the Federal public sector w o r k e r a n d their impact. T h e r e will be e m p h a s i s o n labour law research m e t h o d s a n d their a p p l i c a t i o n , c o l l e c t i v e a g r e e m e n t s , g r i e v a n c e s a n d b a c k - t o - w o r k l e g i s l a t i o n for " e s s e n t i a l " service workers. L S P 115 Issues in O c c u p a t i o n a l Health a n d Safety (F,S) (1,0,0.3) A general b a c k g r o u n d to and overview of the main s o c i a l , m e d i c a l , e c o n o m i c , t e c h n i c a l a n d legal issues f a c i n g B . C . workers in the field of health and safety. S p e c i a l attention will be given to the W o r k e r s ' C o m p e n s a t i o n B o a r d . L S P 116 Workers' C o m p e n s a t i o n - A c t and W C B (F,S) (1,0,0.3) T h e s t a t u t o r y a n d a d m i n i s t r a t i v e f r a m e w o r k of t h e W o r k e r s ' C o m p e n s a t i o n B o a r d is e x a m i n e d . T h e c o u r s e is adjusted to the expectations of the majority of people enrolled in a n y term, but is generally geared to familiarize students with the preparation a n d presentation of a p p e a l s to the B o a r d of Review a n d C o m m i s s i o n e r s . A l l p h a s e s of c l a i m s h a n d l i n g are e x a m i n e d , from initial a c c e p t a n c e or rejection, i n c l u d i n g setting of w a g e rates to a s s e s s m e n t s a n d the payment of p e n s i o n s . L S P 117 Introduction to U.I.C. Procedures (F.S) (1,0,0.3) T h i s c o u r s e e m p h a s i z e s a practical u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the framework of u n e m p l o y m e n t i n s u r a n c e a n d , therefore, the jargon used in the A c t a n d by the C o m m i s s i o n . T h e c o u r s e will cover the structure of C a n a d a ' s U n e m p l o y m e n t Insurance A c t , i n c l u d i n g the most recent a m e n d m e n t s . It will outline the qualifications needed in order to claim u n e m p l o y m e n t i n s u r a n c e , i n c l u d i n g "insurable e m p l o y m e n t , " the "variable entrance requirement," "repeaters," " n e w entrance a n d re-entrance," a n d "part-time work." L S P 119 Civil Rights a n d the Workplace (F.S) (1,0,0.3) T o study the specific civil rights p r o b l e m s arising in the w o r k p l a c e , i n c l u d i n g issues of political, e c o n o m i c a n d legal rights of the worker: e x a m i n a t i o n of legal remedies available to trade u n i o n s a n d the e m p l o y e e to prevent infringement of civil rights in the w o r k p l a c e ; protection of civil rights under the provincial and federal legislation through c o n t r a c t i n g and in c o l l e c t i v e a g r e e m e n t s . A p r o b l e m - s o l v i n g format with d i s c u s s i o n s of current civil rights issues, 'right-to-work' legislation, race a n d sex d i s c r i m i n a t i o n . L S P 131 R a c e and Ethnic Relations (F,S) (1.5,0,0.5) T h e issue of racism has been used in the past to w e a k e n a n d divide unions. T h i s c o u r s e will help unionists b e c o m e sensitive to c o m p l e x i t i e s of race a n d e t h n i c relations; give practical a d v i c e o n integrating minority w o r k e r s into the u n i o n a n d develop t e c h n i q u e s to deal with biases a n d p r e j u d i c e at t h e w o r k p l a c e a n d in t h e c o m m u n i t y . A p p r o a c h e s to c o m b a t t i n g the disruptive effects of r a c i s m will be d i s c u s s e d . 35 L S P 140 History of T h e Labour Movement in C a n a d a (S) (1.5,0,0.5) L S P 151 Leadership Skills Assertiveness a n d A d v o c a c y (F,S) (1,0,0.3) A survey of the history of the labour movement in C a n a d a from the formation of the w o r k i n g class in the 19th C e n t u r y through mass industrial u n i o n i s m . B y l o o k i n g at s p e c i f i c conflicts a g o o d overview is obtained of the struggles of the labour movement to gain the right to o r g a n i z e , obtain union r e c o g n i t i o n , bargain c o l l e c t i v e l y , a n d provide decent wages and w o r k i n g c o n d i t i o n s . Part I attempts not only to provide w o m e n with the skills they need to take a leadership role in their trade u n i o n , but also takes a careful look at the w a y s e x role stereotyping inhibits us from d e v e l o p i n g these skills. T h i s part is divided into the following areas: Women and Power, Assertiveness, Advocacy, Organizing a n d Group Dynamics. L S P 170 C o m m u n i c a t i o n s : Public S p e a k i n g a n d Parliamentary Procedures (F,S) (1.5,0,0.5) L S P 142 History of T h e Labour Movement in B . C . (F) (1.5,0,0.5) T h e birth a n d growth of trade u n i o n i s m in B . C . T h r o u g h a wide c o l l e c t i o n of printed a n d visual materials participants will a n a l y z e the raw a n d vital struggles between B . C . ' s w o r k i n g people a n d the industrialists w h o o p p o s e d them. The major e c o n o m i c a n d political issues of the movement will be t r a c e d : the right to o r g a n i z e , the right to b a r g a i n , the d e m a n d for the nine a n d eight hour day, the p r o b l e m s of racism a n d i m m i g r a t i o n , the struggle to o r g a n i z e the industrial, p u b l i c a n d c l e r i c a l sectors, the fight for w o m e n ' s rights, political e x p r e s s i o n s . . . L S P 150 W o m e n a n d Power in Unions (F,S) (1,0,0.3) F o c u s e s o n what w o m e n want to d o in their union. It will e n c o m p a s s the political realities of the l a b o u r movement as it is today as well as personal and e m o t i o n a l politics within the trade union m o v e m e n t a s they exist in o u r sexist s o c i e t y . Participation in Level I will be required b e c a u s e w o m e n need to have a strong sense of themselves before they are aware of the subtleties of p o w e r a n d political relationships. O n c e w o m e n d e v e l o p both a s e n s e of self a n d a sense of politics they n e e d practical skills t o b e c o m e really effective within their trade unions. T h i s is a b a s i c c o u r s e in P u b l i c S p e a k i n g a n d Parliamentary P r o c e d u r e s directed e s p e c i a l l y to those w h o are already involved or wish to b e c o m e more involved in their trade u n i o n s . Attention will b e give to voice d e v e l o p m e n t a n d training with the a s s i s t a n c e of m i c r o p h o n e s and role playing. T i m e w i l l be g i v e n t o m e t h o d s of s p e a k i n g , w r i t i n g t e c h n i q u e s , h a n d l i n g fears, a n d w a y s in w h i c h y o u c a n b u i l d your v o c a b u l a r y . T h e P r i n c i p l e s or " R u l e s of O r d e r " w h i c h guide the c o n d u c t of meetings a n d h o w to use those rules will be d i s c u s s e d . L S P 182 Practical Skills for U n i o n Involvement (F,S) (1,0,0.3) Attempts, in a basic way, to deal with s p e c i a l p r o b l e m s that most of us e x p e r i e n c e in the areas of P u b l i c S p e a k i n g , C o n v e n t i o n Structure, P r o c e s s i n g Resolutions, Parliamentary P r o c e d u r e s and Facets of U n i o n A d m i n i s t r a t i o n . L S P 210 Arbitration (F,S) (1.5,0,0.5) T h i s c o u r s e , w h i c h is o p e n to students w h o have previously c o m p l e t e d L S P 110, 111, 113, or a n y other L a b o u r Law c o u r s e , will be an a d v a n c e d arbitration c o u r s e , d e a l i n g with matters s u c h a s rules of e v i d e n c e , p r o c e d u r e , s e l e c t i o n of arbitrators, arbitration powers, a n d a brief history of abitration. It will deal with g r i e v a n c e arbitration a r i s i n g out of the collective agreement. For transferability introduction. Mathematics 1" of Mathematics Mathematics 012 Trigonometry ( S U , F , S ) (1,0,0) Instructional Faculty Bentley, A.E.T., B . S c . ( U B C ) , M.A., P h . D . (Missouri) Hauschildt, P.., B . S c . (Hons) (Queen's), M . S c . ( U B C ) Rennie, R.R., B . S c , M . S c . ( B r i g h a m Y o u n g ) , P h . D . ( U B C ) T o w s o n , K.V., B . S c , M . S c . ( S F U ) Verner, R.H., B.Sc. ( U B C ) , M . S c . (E.W.S.C.), B . C . T e a c h i n g Certificate ( U B C ) Ward, P., B . S c . ( S F U ) , M . S c , E d . D . (Okla. State U.) Waterman, A., B . S c . ( U B C ) , M . S c . ( S F U ) , B . C . T e a c h i n g Certificate. C o o r d i n a t o r of M a t h e m a t i c s General Information The M a t h e m a t i c s Department offers c o u r s e s primarily at the first and s e c o n d year university level; however, there are refresher c o u r s e s or skill u p g r a d i n g c o u r s e s available. Refresher/Skill Development C o u r s e s Prerequisite: Math 011 or p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. Introduction t o the trigonometric f u n c t i o n s , t r i g o n o m e t r i c identities; inverses; triangles; vectors a n d a p p l i c a t i o n s . T h i s c o u r s e is offered o n a self-study format. For t r a n s f e r a b i l i t y introduction. T h e s e c o u r s e s are offered in the Math R e s o u r c e Centre o n a self study format. D i a g n o s t i c tests, w o r k b o o k s , video tapes and individualized instruction are available. Registration for each c o u r s e is o n g o i n g throughout the a c a d e m i c year. F o r placement within the series it is s u g g e s t e d that y o u consult with a math instructor. Post s e c o n d a r y institutions in B . C . recognize the sequence of Math 010, 011 a n d 012 as an A l g e b r a 12 equivalent. T h e s e c o u r s e s receive no transfer credit at U B C (except if c o m b i n e d with Math 110 or 108) or U.Vic, but the s e q u e n c e Math 010, 011 and 012 receives transfer credit for S F U ' s Math 100. Mathematics 009 Arithmetic ( S U , F , S ) (1,0,0) Prerequisite: N o n e . A review of the b a s i c arithmetic o p e r a t i o n s . A p p l i c a t i o n s to percentage, ratio, proportions, areas a n d v o l u m e s . T h i s is a self-study c o u r s e primarily intended for returning students w h o require a b a s i c math refresher. Mathematics 010 Elementary Algebra ( S U . F . S ) (1,0,0) Reviews and develops b a s i c a l g e b r a i c skills n e c e s s a r y in the solution of algebraic e q u a t i o n s a n d the factorization of polynomials. Introduction to analytic geometry with emphasis on straight lines. T h e c o u r s e is offered on a self-study format. 1" of S T U D E N T S P L A N N I N G T O P R O C E E D IN S C I E N C E , MATH, ECONOMICS, ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING AND FORESTRY. Comments: 1. Math 101, 102 a r e r e c o m m e n d e d by s o m e s c i e n c e departments at S F U . 2. S c i e n c e students s h o u l d c o n s i d e r taking M a t h 103 and 104 or Math 104 and 106 as an elective in their first year. STUDENTS PLANNING TO PROCEED COMMERCE PROGRAMS. IN A R T S O R Students planning to pursue a program in the Faculty of Arts, w h o wish to satisfy a o n e - y e a r s c i e n c e c o u r s e elective, normally take o n e of the following two c o u r s e combinations: Math 101 a n d 100 Math 101 a n d 102 Math 101 a n d 103 (not for S F U ) Math 103 a n d 104 (not for S F U ) M a t h 103 a n d 106 (not for S F U ) Math 104 a n d 106 (not for S F U ) Math 105 a n d 108 Math 105 a n d 110 Math 108 a n d 103 (not for S F U ) M a t h 108 a n d 100 (not for S F U ) Math 108 a n d 101 Math 110 a n d 111 Students p l a n n i n g to pursue a program in the Faculty of C o m m e r c e normally take: Prerequisite: Math 009 or p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. see "Option Mathematics T h e s e students normally take Math 110, 111 during their first year. B: Math 105 is a p r e c a l c u l u s c o u r s e at the A l g e b r a 12 level which is r e c o g n i z e d by p o s t - s e c o n d a r y institutions in B . C . as A l g e b r a 12 equivalent. It is run on a regular c l a s s r o o m format and requires a " C " grade or better in A l g e b r a 11 as a prerequisite. Math 105 receives no transfer credit at U B C (except if c o m b i n e d with Math 110 or 108) or U.Vic, but does receive transfer credit for S F U ' s M a t h 100. 1" of Entering students s h o u l d use the following two s e c t i o n s , Parts A a n d B, as g u i d e l i n e s for selecting math c o u r s e s at the first year level. Due t o the specialized needs of s o m e programs at the universities, the Math Department advises students to consult the university calendar a n d to seek g u i d a n c e from a college c o u n s e l l o r or math instructor for the appropriate c o u r s e selection. A. O p t i o n 2: M a t h e m a t i c s 105 see "Option A c a d e m i c Transfer C o u r s e s O p t i o n 1: M a t h e m a t i c s 009, 010, 011, 012 For t r a n s f e r a b i l i t y introduction. see "Option Mathematics Mathematics 011 Intermediate Algebra with Functions ( S U , F , S ) (1,0,0) Prerequisite: Math 010 or p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. T h i s c o u r s e c o n t i n u e s the d e v e l o p m e n t of the a l g e b r a i c skills i n t r o d u c e d in Math 010. Inequalities; functions, e x p o nential and logarithmic functions; systems of linear equations; analytic geometry with e m p h a s i s o n the c o n i c s e c t i o n s . T h i s c o u r s e is offered o n a self-study format. a. for transfer to U B C , one of the following combinations: Math Math Math Math 105 a n d 108 105 a n d 110 110 a n d 111 101 a n d 100 (allowable but not recommended) b. for transfer to S F U , the f o l l o w i n g are required: Math 105 (if B . C . A l g e b r a 12 not c o m p l e t e d ) and Math 108. In addition, Math 101 is a d v i s e d . F o r J o i n t H o n o u r s in B u s i n e s s A d m i n i s t r a t i o n and E c o n o m i c s : M a t h 109 is required. S t u d e n t s p l a n n i n g to study E c o n o m i c s at U B C must take M a t h 110 a n d M a t h 111. F o r the transfer status of the f o l l o w i n g c o u r s e s at the three universities refer to the transfer guide at the back of the calendar. 37 Mathematics 100 Introduction to College Mathematics (S) (3,0.1) Prerequisite: A l g e b r a 11 or Math 010. A selection of t o p i c s from set theory, l o g i c matrices linear p r o g r a m m i n g probability, o p t i m i z a t i o n t e c h n i q u e s , b u s i n e s s m a t h e m a t i c s , a n d a brief i n t r o d u c t i o n to c o m p u t e r programming. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. scientific c a l c u l a t i o n s , as well as various data p r o c e s s i n g p r o b l e m s in statistics a n d a c c o u n t i n g . P r o v i d e s a general u n d e r s t a n d i n g of c o m p u t e r s , p r i n c i p l e s of c o m p u t e r p r o g r a m m i n g a n d s p e c i f i c e x p e r i e n c e in w r i t i n g a n d executing programs. Transferable to S F U , U B C and U.Vic. Mathematics 104 Principles of Computer Programming (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: M a t h e m a t i c s 103 or p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. Not transferable to U B C if taken alone. A projects c o u r s e with projects related to c o m p u t e r structure; p r o g r a m m i n g l a n g u a g e ( P A S C A L , F O R T R A N , m a c h i n e and a s s e m b l e r ) ; algorithms; and a p p l i c a t i o n s to numerical and n o n - n u m e r i c a l p r o b l e m s . Mathematics 101 Introduction to Statistics (F,S) (3,0.1) Prerequisite: A l g e b r a 11 or Math 010. A n introduction to the l a n g u a g e ot statistics a n d s o m e statistical methods, i n c l u d i n g r a n d o m variables a n d their distribution; random sampling; normal distribution, estimation of parameters and testing hypotheses. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Mathematics 105 Pre-Calculus Mathematics (F.S) (3,0,1) Note: T h i s c o u r s e is not transferable to U B C e x c e p t if c o m b i n e d with Math 110 or 108. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U V i c . Prerequisite: A l g e b r a 11 with at least a " C " grade or M a t h 010. Mathematics 102 Statistical Methods (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Math 101 A study of important statistical m e t h o d s c o m m o n l y used in the analysis of research data, i n c l u d i n g : t-tests and their non-parametric c o m p e t i t o r s , one a n d two-way a n a l y s i s of variance, c h i - s q u a r e tests and regression a n a l y s i s . A review of algebra a n d a d i s c u s s i o n of functions, g r a p h s and trigonometry. Primarily for students who anticipate taking c a l c u l u s c o u r s e s or who wish to take an introductory c o u r s e in p h y s i c s but are weak in mathematics. For t r a n s f e r a b i l i t y introduction. see "Option 2' of Mathematics Transferable to S F U Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic Mathematics 103 Introduction to Computer Programming (F,S) (3,0,1) Mathematics 106 Introduction to Computer Programming in FORTRAN (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A n y first year Math c o u r s e w h i c h may be taken concurrently. Prerequisite: A n y first year M a t h e m a t i c s c o u r s e w h i c h may be taken c o n c u r r e n t l y . A n introduction to F O R T R A N p r o g r a m m i n g for s i m p l e scientific a p p l i c a t i o n s as well as various data p r o c e s s i n g p r o b l e m s in statistics and a c c o u n t i n g . Provides a general u n d e r s t a n d i n g of c o m p u t e r s , p r i n c i p l e s of c o m p u t e r prog r a m m i n g and s p e c i f i c e x p e r i e n c e in writing a n d e x e c u t i n g programs. Full credit will be given to only one of Math 103, Math 106 If An introduction to BASIC programming for simple both c o u r s e s are taken only one credit hour will be given for the s e c o n d c o u r s e . Transferable to S F U , U B C and U.Vic. Mathematics 108 Calculus for Business and Social Sciences I (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A l g e b r a 12 or M a t h 105 or Math 011. A brief review of algebra, functions, analytic geometry a n d vector theory. T h e derivative with a p p l i c a t i o n s to curve s k e t c h i n g , optimization, g r o w t h a n d d e c a y . T h e integral with applications Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. N o d u p l i c a t e credit will be given for M a t h 108/110. Mathematics 109 Calculus for Business and Social Sciences II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: M a t h e m a t i c s 108 F u n c t i o n s of s e v e r a l i n d e p e n d e n t v a r i a b l e s , partial derivatives extrema, Lagrange multipliers, integration t e c h n i q u e s , multiple integrals, s o m e t e c h n i q u e s for s o l v i n g differential e q u a t i o n s and difference equations. N o duplicate credit will be given for Math 109/110/230. 38 Mathematics 221 Computer Programming III (F) (3,0,1) Mathematics 110 Calculus I (F,S) (4.5,0,1.5) Prerequisite: At least a " C " s t a n d i n g Mathematics 12 or M a t h e m a t i c s 105. in A l g e b r a 12 or A brief review ot functions: trigonometry; analytic geometry; the derivative, t e c h n i q u e s of differentiation, applications of the derivative to M A X - M I N a n d related rate problems, the definite integral logarithmic a n d e x p o n e n t i a l functions. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Transfer credit will not be given for both M a t h e m a t i c s 108 and Mathematics 110. P r e i e q u i s i t e s : M a t h e m a t i c s 104 a n d M a t h e m a t i c s 110 C o n t i n u a t i o n of M a t h e m a t i c s 104 D e s i g n and i m p l e m e n tation of c o m p u t e r p r o g r a m s requiring more s o p h i s t i c a t e d techniques than those studied in Mathematics 104 Numerical techniques. Mathematics 222 Computer Programming IV (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: M a t h e m a t i c s 221 Mathematics 111 Calculus II (S) (4.5,0,1.5) Prerequisite: M a t h 110 with at least a " C - " grade. Continuation of Mathematics 221. A d v a n c e d programming t e c h n i q u e s . Structure a n d u s e of l a r g e - s c a l e c o m p u t e r systems. A study of the anti-derivative; the integral, t e c h n i q u e s of integration and applications of the integral; sequences, infinite series a n d Taylor's T h e o r e m . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. THE MATH DEPARTMENT OFFERS A FULL SECOND Y E A R U N I V E R S I T Y T R A N S F E R P R O G R A M IN M A T H S T U D E N T S P L A N N I N G T O T A K E 200 L E V E L M A T H SHOULD SEEK ADVICE FROM MATH INSTRUCTORS. Mathematics 200 Linear Algebra (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: M a t h 111 with at least a " C - " grade. A study of vector s p a c e s , linear transformation, matrices, determinants, eigenvalues, quadratic forms. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Mathematics 205 Introduction to Probability and Statistics (S) (3,0,1) Mathematics 223 Discrete Structures (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisites. M a t h e m a t i c s 104 a n d M a t h e m a t i c s 111 Introduction to sets, l o g i c , i n d u c t i o n , B o o l e a n a l g e b r a , c o m b i n a t i o n s , graphs a n d trees as applied in c o m p u t i n g . Truth tables, digital networks, permutations a n d combinations, functions a n d relations, algorithms a n d a p p p l i c a t i o n s . Mathematics 224 Numerical Computation (S) (3,0.1) Prerequisites: Mathematics 221, Mathematics 200, a n d M a t h e m a t i c s 230 C o r e q u i s i t e : M a t h e m a t i c s 235 N u m e r i c a l t e c h n i q u e s for basic mathematical p r o c e s s e s : solutions of s y s t e m s of linear equations, integration, solution of differential e q u a t i o n s , f u n c t i o n a p p r o x i m a t i o n s . M o n t e C a r l o methods, analysis of round-off errors. Note: This c o u r s e will be offered only w h e n sufficient student d e m a n d is evident during the Fall semester. Prerequisite: Math 111 with at least a " C - " grade or Math 110 a n d p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. Mathematics 230 Calculus III (F) (3,0,1) A c a l c u l u s based study of probability, investigating the elements of probability, discrete a n d c o n t i n u o u s random variables, mathematical expectation, moment generating functions. C e n t r a l Limit T h e o r e m , s a m p l i n g from normal populations. Prerequisite: Math 111 with at least a " C - " g r a d e . Math 200 s h o u l d be taken c o n c u r r e n t l y , if not already c o m p l e t e d . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Transferable t o S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Mathematics 215 Introduction to Analysis I (S) (3,0,1) Mathematics 231 Note: This c o u r s e will be offered only in the s p r i n g when sufficient student d e m a n d is evident d u r i n g the Fall semester. Prerequisite: At least a " B - " average in Math 110 a n d 111. A c o u r s e for students w h o plan to p r o c e e d in M a t h e m a t i c s L o g i c , sets, f u n c t i o n s , limits of s e q u e n c e s a n d series, introduction to continuity, the derivative, H i e m a n n Integral. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Mathematics 220 Machine and Assembly Language Programming (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: M a t h e m a t i c s 104 Computer organization and architecture; machine l a n g u a g e ; r e p r e s e n t a t i o n of d a t a , a d d r e s s i n g s c h e m e s . S y m b o l i c c o d i n g , a s s e m b l y l a n g u a g e , m a c r o s , instruction sets. Analytic geometry of three d i m e n s i o n s ; partial differentiation, applications: double and triple integrals; transformations to various coordinate s y s t e m s . Calculus IV (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Math 230 with at least a " C - " grade. Line and surface integrals; Green s T h e o r e m ; vector fields; divergence theorem: S t o k e s Theorem; applications. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Mathematics 235 Introduction to Differential Equations (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite; -Math 230 and Math 200 with at least a " C - " grade in e a c h . A n introduction to ordinary differential equations; first order e q u a t i o n s ; s e c o n d order linear e q u a t i o n s ; first order linear systems; phase plane, applications to physics, geometry and electrical circuits. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. 39 Philosophy Instructional Faculty Battersby, M., B.A. ( N . Y . U . ) , P h i l o s o p h y , P h . D . ( U B C ) B r o w n e , A:, B.A., M.A., P h . D . ( U B C ) D i x o n , J . , B.A., P h . D . ( U B C ) law be justifiably represented as authoritative, or is the real foundation of law in the p o l i c e m a n ' s holster? D o e s the State have g o o d reason for involving itself in c o m p u l s o r y p r o g r a m s of e d u c a t i o n ? T h i s is not a study in the history of political thought, and every effort is made to view p r o b l e m s f r o m c o n t e m p o r a r y perspectives. Transferable to S F U , U B C and U.Vic. General Information Philosophy 201 Political Philosophy (S) (3,0,1) All of the P h i l o s o p h y c o u r s e s offered at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e have transfer credit at every university in British C o l u m b i a . Prospective p h i l o s o p h y majors s h o u l d consult the faculty. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Philosophy 101 Introductory Philosophy (F) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. A n introduction to the p h i l o s o p h i e s of morality, politics, knowledge, a n d the invisible world, with e m p h a s i s on the relationship between law and morality; civil d i s o b e d i e n c e ; reason and p a s s i o n ; Existentialism; F e m i n i s m ; f r e e d o m a n d determinism; C o m m u n i s m ; doubt a n d certainty; the nature of reality. T h e e m p h a s i s of this c o u r s e varies from instructor to instructor, a n d prospective students s h o u l d consult the outlines of different instructors' c o u r s e s w h e n registering. Transferable to S F U , U B C and U.Vic. Philosophy 102 Introductory Philosophy (S) (3,0,1) A continuation of P h i l o s o p h y 101. Note: There is no prerequisite for this c o u r s e (one does not need c o m p l e t e d credit in P h i l o s o p h y 101 to take it). S t u d e n t s entering the C o l l e g e are w e l c o m e to begin their introduction to p h i l o s o p h y with this course. Transferable to S F U , U B C and U.Vic. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of P h i l o s o p h y 200. Philosophy 210 Metaphysics and Epistemology (F) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. A n introduction to s o m e of the traditional p r o b l e m s of m e t a p h y s i c s and e p i s t e m o l o g y . S o m e of the q u e s t i o n s c o n sidered are: Does free will exist? Is sense perception a primary or reliable s o u r c e of k n o w l e d g e ? What is the nature of c a u sality? Is materialism true? What is the nature of m i n d ? What is the relationship between mind and b o d y ? What is the scientific m e t h o d ? While this is not a c o u r s e in the history of P h i l o s o p h y , it will cover many of the c l a s s i c a l attempts to answer these questions. Transferable to U B C and S F U . Philosophy 211 Metaphysics and Epistemology (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of P h i l o s o p h y 210. Transferable to U B C a n d S F U . Philosophy 220 Philosophy in Literature (F) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. Philosophy 110 Logical Self-Defense (F.S) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. A n introduction to the basic rules of clear and rational thought. T h e student will be taught through extensive examples how to detect false r e a s o n i n g , illegitimate appeals to emotions, i n c o n s i s t e n c i e s a n d c o n t r a d i c t i o n s . T h e g o a l is to d e v e l o p our logical awareness to the point that we c a n no longer be victimized by the rhetoric of everyday life, and c a n develop our o w n arguments, with clarity a n d c o n f i d e n c e . Transferable to S F U , U B C and U.Vic. Philosophy 200 Political Philosophy (F) (3,0,1) No prerequisite. T h i s c o u r s e seeks to provide an analysis of the rationale for political institutions a n d action. S o m e of the questions c o n s i d e r e d : Are we really o b l i g e d to o b e y the law? C a n the A n e x a m i n a t i o n of the lively r e l a t i o n s h i p b e t w e e n P h i l o s o p h y a n d Literature. P h i l o s o p h i c a l theories will be a p p r o a c h e d a n d d i s c u s s e d via literary work w h i c h either e m b o d i e s the theories or g r o u n d s them in h u m a n e x p e r i e n c e . Textual s o u r c e s will range from the c l a s s i c a l G r e e k plays to Burgess' " A Clockwork Orange". Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Philosophy 221 Existentialism in Literature (S) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. T h i s c o u r s e is, in spirit, a c o n t i n u a t i o n of P h i l o s o p h y 220, but it is centred on the P h i l o s o p h y of Existentialism in Literature T h e r e will be an introductory set of lectures on E x i s t e n tialism as a p h i l o s o p h y . T e x t u a l s o u r c e s will range from D o s t o y e v s k y ' s " N o t e s F r o m the U n d e r g r o u n d " to Sartre's "Nausea". Transferable to S F U , U B C and U.Vic. Physics Instructional Faculty General Information F r e e m a n , M., B . S c . ( U B C ) , M . S c . ( C a l . . T e c h . ) , P h . D . (UBC) Henry, M.I., B.A. (Alta.), M . S c . ( U B C ) P a l f f y - M u h o r a y , P., B . A . S c , M . A . S c , P h . D . ( U B C ) All first-year p h y s i c s c o u r s e s i n c l u d e a w e e k l y laboratory period. Laboratory Supervisor S i m s o n , B., B . S c . ( S F U ) 40 2-hour T h e c o s t of the labs are i n c l u d e d in the c o u r s e tuition fee except for lab m a n u a l s a n d s o m e field trip c o s t s . For transfer status of the f o l l o w i n g c o u r s e s at S F U . U B C , or U . V i c please refer to the Transfer G u i d e at the back of the calendar. Physics 104 Principles of Physics I (F) (3,2,1) Physics 200 Heat, Kinetic T h e o r y a n d Optics (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: N o P h y s i c s prerequisite. M a t h 12, Math 100 or Math 105 is required. Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 111 or 115 and Math 111. Math 200 a n d 230 must be taken c o n c u r r e n t l y , if not already c o m p l e t e d . P h y s i c s 210 must be taken concurrently. This c o u r s e , together with P h y s i c s 105, will serve as an introduction to p h y s i c s for students with little or no b a c k ground in the subject. T h e y are intended for students not taking further studies in s c i e n c e . T o p i c s i n c l u d e m e c h a n i c s , energy, ray o p t i c s a n d heat. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Heat, temperature, the first a n d s e c o n d laws of t h e r m o d y n a m i c s , kinetic theory, a n d p h y s i c a l optics. This c o u r s e , together with P h y s i c s 201, 210 a n d 211, is required for s t u dents majoring in p h y s i c s a n d r e c o m m e n d e d for students majoring in chemistry. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Physics 105 Principles of Physics II (S) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 104 or 110. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of P h y s i c s 104, e m p h a s i z i n g electricity, rnagnetism, gravitation, relativity, light, q u a n t u m theory, a n d nuclear p h y s i c s . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Physics 201 Electrical Circuits (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 200, Math 230 a n d 200. Math 235 is a pre or corequisite. P h y s i c s 211 must be taken c o n c u r r e n t l y . T h e study of electrical and magnetic fields; f u n d a m e n t a l s of a.c. theory; L R , R C , L R C circuits; r e s o n a n c e ; m e c h a n i c a l analogs; f o r c e d a n d d a m p e d oscillatiohs. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Physics 108 Basic Physics (F) (4.5,2,1.5) Prereqisite: Math 12 or 105. Math 110 is a pre or corequisite. Physics 210 Physics Laboratory I (F) (1,3,0) The c o u r s e covers the material of P h y s i c s 110, together with those t o p i c s f r o m h i g h s c h o o l p h y s i c s n e e d e d b y a s t u dent with no previous b a c k g r o u n d in p h y s i c s . A student passing this c o u r s e s h o u l d be able to enter P h y s i c s 111 in the spring. Prerequisite: as for P h y s i c s 200, w h i c h concurrently. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Physics 110 General Physics I (F) (3,2,1) Physics 211 Physics Laboratory II (S) (1,3,0) Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 12 or P h y s i c s 11 or P h y s i c s 104; a n d Math 110 is a pre or corequisite. Prerequisite: as for P h y s i c s 2 0 1 , w h i c h concurrently. A survey of mechanics covering vectors, statics, kinematics, d y n a m i c s , energy, m o m e n t u m , rotation, gravitation, vibration and s p e c i a l relativity. A weekly three-hour lab in electron d y n a m i c s , electricity, and e l e c t r o n i c s . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Physics 220 M e c h a n i c s I (F) (3,0,1) Physics 111 General Physics II (S) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 110 or 108 or 114 a n d Math 110. M a t h 111 is a pre or corequisite. Electrical a n d magnetic fields, circuits, wave optics, a n d atomic a n d nuclear p h y s i c s . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Physics 114 Fundamental Physics I (F) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 12 or P h y s i c s 104; Math 110 is a pre or corequisite. A survey of m e c h a n i c s , i n c l u d i n g s p e c i a l relativity. T h i s c o u r s e c o v e r s material similar to P h y s i c s 110 but at a more a d v a n c e d level. T h i s c o u r s e , together with P h y s i c s 115, is particularly suitable for students g o i n g into the p h y s i c a l s c i e n c e s or e n g i n e e r i n g . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Physics 115 Fundamental Physics II (S) (3,2,1) must b e taken A w e e k l y t h r e e - h o u r l a b in m a t h e m a t i c a l electrical measurements a n d optics. methods, must be taken Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 1 1 0 o r 1 0 8 o r 1 1 4 , Math 111. Math 230 is a pre or corequisite. N e w t o n i a n m e c h a n i c s of p a r t i c l e s . T o p i c s i n c l u d e k i n e m a t i c s , v i s c o u s a n d turbulent d r a g , rocket p r o p u l s i o n , c o n s e r v a t i o n laws, a n d centrifugal a n d C o r i o l i s forces. T h i s course, together with P h y s i c s 221, is required for students majoring in p h y s i c s a n d r e c o m m e n d e d for students majoring in math or c o m p u t e r s c i e n c e . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Physics 221 M e c h a n i c s II a n d Special Relativity (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 220, Math 230 a n d 200. Math 235 is a r e c o m m e n d e d corequisite. More a d v a n c e d topics in m e c h a n i c s : application of special relativity to elementary particle creation a n d s p a c e travel, elliptical and interplanetary transfer orbits, rigid body dynamics and g y r o s c o p e s . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 114 or at least a B in P h y s i c s 108 or 110. M a t h 111 is a pre or corequisite. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of P h y s i c s 114 t o material similar t o that of P h y s i c s 111 but at a more a d v a n c e d level. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. 41 Political Science Political S c i e n c e 104 C a n a d i a n Government (F,S) (3,0,1) Instructional Faculty A s t u d y of the p r o c e s s e s , i d e o l o g i e s a n d g o v e r n m e n t structures w h i c h make u p the C a n a d i a n political reality. T h i s c o u r s e will e x a m i n e the role of the prime minister's office, the b u r e a u c r a c y , political parties, federal-provincial relations, and C a n a d i a n foreign p o l i c y . Lavalle, E . M . , B . C o m m . , L L . B . ( U B C ) , M.A. (Duke) L e i g h t o n , C . G . , B.A., M . A . (Toronto) Mier, P., B.A. ( S F U ) , M.A. (Toronto) Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Political S c i e n c e 100 A n Introduction to Political T h o u g h t - Plato to Hegel (F,S) (3,0,1) Political S c i e n c e 201 International Relations (F) (3,0,1) T h e p u r p o s e of the c o u r s e is to introduce students to the tradition of W e s t e r n political inquiry from the A n c i e n t G r e e k s to the liberal and d e m o c r a t i c revolution of the 18th C e n t u r y . Elements within this tradition will be a p p r o a c h e d from an historical a n d p h i l o s o p h i c a l perspective. Particular e m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d u p o n the critical reading of original texts a n d b a c k g r o u n d material will be presented in lectures a n d a d d i tional reading. Major t o p i c s i n c l u d e ancient a n d medieval political thought, the rise of the national state, and the ideas of d e m o c r a t i c liberalism. A study of a s p e c t s of g l o b a l conflict a n d w o r l d politics. T h e c o u r s e provides students with the b a c k g r o u n d n e c e s s a r y for an u n d e r s t a n d i n g of s o u r c e s of power, t e c h n i q u e s of w i e l d i n g influence a n d the formulation of foreign p o l i c y . T h e c o u r s e will e x a m i n e the origins of the C o l d War, Imperialism, local and global wars, detente, a n d p r o b l e m s of militarization and d i s a r m a m e n t . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Political S c i e n c e 203 International Organizations (S) (3,0,1) Political S c i e n c e 101 Contemporary Ideologies (F.S.SU) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the historical development of c o n t e m porary i d e o l o g i e s with an e x a m i n a t i o n of the ideas e x p r e s s e d in the political process. T h e c o u r s e includes a critical analysis of L i b e r a l i s m , C o n s e r v a t i s m , F a s c i s m , S o c i a l D e m o c r a c y a n d Marxism-Leninism. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Political S c i e n c e 102 Comparative Government (F,S) (3,0,1) Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. S i n c e the e m e r g e n c e of the C o n c e r t of E u r o p e in 1815, international o r g a n i z a t i o n s have played an i n c r e a s i n g l y important role in w o r l d politics. T h i s c o u r s e e x a m i n e s the history and development of international a n d regional g o v e r n mental a n d n o n - g o v e r n m e n t a l organizations w h i c h act in the international arena. S p e c i a l e m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d o n the United N a t i o n s , the North Atlantic Treaty O r g a n i z a t i o n , the Warsaw Pact, the E u r o p e a n E c o n o m i c C o m m u n i t y , a n d OPEC. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. A n introduction to the elements of government and politics in a comparative perspective. T h i s c o u r s e will take two or more political cultures a n d e x a m i n e the formal a n d informal political structures and p r o c e s s e s in e a c h . A variety of states/ countries are selected e a c h semester to use as " c a s e " studies; e.g., U . S . and Latin A m e r i c a ; Western E u r o p e a n d the Soviet U n i o n ; N e w States, O l d P r o b l e m s . A n introduction to political analysis a n d m e t h o d o l o g y . U s i n g C a n a d a as a f o c u s , students will b e c o m e familiar with the theories and tools used by political scientists to a n a l y z e problems. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. T r a n s f e r a b l e t o S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. 42 Political S c i e n c e 206 S c o p e a n d Methods: Political Analysis (S) (3,0,1) Psychology Instructional Faculty Alpert, J . G . , B . S . (New Y o r k ) , M . S c , P h . D . ( M c G i l l ) Avery, P., B . A . (York), M . E d . (Toronto) E c c l e s , E „ R . N . (St. Pauls), B.A., M.A. ( U B C ) H a w r y l k o , R., B.A. (Hunter), M . A . ( S F U ) M a c N e i l l , M „ B . A . (U. of Alberta), M . A . (Manitoba), P h . D . (Calgary) Moe, S . , B.A., M.A. (Mexico) Pareis, N., B . S c . (Rutgers), P h . D . (Texas) P s y c h o l o g y 100 introduction to P s y c h o l o g y (F.S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to introduce the b e g i n n i n g p s y c h o l o g y student to s o m e of the major c o n c e p t s a n d a p p r o a c h e s n e c essary to a n u n d e r s t a n d i n g of h u m a n behaviour from a p s y c h o l o g i c a l perspective. T o p i c s c o v e r e d i n c l u d e learning, development, motivation, e m o t i o n , stress, sexuality, p e r s o n ality theory, behaviour d i s o r d e r s . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Psychology 101 Behavioural Theory (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 100. A c o u r s e for those students w h o d e s i r e a c o m p l e t e survey of the basic areas of P s y c h o l o g y (when c o m b i n e d with P s y c h o l o g y 100), before p r o c e e d i n g t o an in-depth study of particular areas. T h e 101 c o u r s e covers s u c h t o p i c s as statistics, experimental d e s i g n , p s y c h o l o g i c a l assessment, learning theory, m e m o r y a n d c o g n i t i o n , p h y s i o l o g i c a l P s y c h o l o g y , sensation a n d p e r c e p t i o n , altered states of c o n s c i o u s n e s s , and the therapeutic p r o c e s s . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. P s y c h o l o g y 200 Social P s y c h o l o g y (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 100. P s y c h o l o g y 205 T h e P s y c h o l o g y of A g i n g (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 100. A c o u r s e d e a l i n g with the p s y c h o l o g i c a l d e v e l o p m e n t of the individual from early a d u l t h o o d to death, with e m p h a s i s on intellectual a n d personality c h a n g e s , a n d the s o c i a l c o n text of a g i n g . A s well as b e i n g e x p o s e d to basic r e s e a r c h in the area, students will be e n c o u r a g e d to d e v e l o p an e m p h a t i c u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the a g i n g p r o c e s s t h r o u g h s u c h m e a n s as c o m m u n i t y projects. (Offered in 1983). Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. P s y c h o l o g y 206 Adolescent P s y c h o l o g y (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 100. T h i s c o u r s e will e x a m i n e the research f i n d i n g s a n d theories pertaining to the development a n d behaviour of a d o l e s c e n t s . T o p i c s c o v e r e d will i n c l u d e b i o l o g i c a l a n d s e x ual maturation, personality, intelligence, motivation a n d s o c i a l issues s u c h as d e l i n q u e n c y a n d family relationships. A study of the d y n a m i c s a n d effect of s o c i a l influence o n individual human behaviour. T h e c o u r s e entails a look at s u c h topics as attitudes a n d attitude-change, g r o u p p r o c e s s e s , leadership, prejudice, impression formation, conformity, a l t r u i s m a n d interpersonal attraction. P s y c h o l o g y 220 Theory of Personality (S) (3,0,1) Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 100. Psychology 201 G r o u p Dynamics (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 100. A study of the behaviour of p e o p l e in small g r o u p s . T h i s c o u r s e provides a n intellectual a n d experiential a p p r o a c h to small g r o u p theory a n d allows the student to practice constructive interpersonal skills in a supportive, small g r o u p setting. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . P s y c h o l o g y 204 Developmental P s y c h o l o g y (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 100. A study of the c h i l d ' s d e v e l o p m e n t f r o m infancy to a d o l e s c e n c e , i n c l u d i n g the d e v e l o p m e n t of s o c i a l behaviour, personality, language a n d cognitive p r o c e s s e s . S t u d e n t s will be e n c o u r a g e d to d o research projects a n d observations. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. A study of the various theories of personality f r o m p s y c h o a n a l y t i c a l theory to learning theory. Included will be the ideas of F r e u d , R o g e r s , M a s l o w a n d others. C o n c e p t s to be c o n s i d e r e d will i n c l u d e the d e v e l o p m e n t of personality, and the structure a n d d y n a m i c s of personality. T h e c o u r s e will i n c l u d e c o n s i d e r a t i o n of theoretical p r o b l e m s , a n d students will b e c o m e familiar with empirical research in these areas. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. P s y c h o l o g y 222 A b n o r m a l P s y c h o l o g y (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 100. A study of the various models and perspectives for viewing patterns a n d treatment of a b n o r m a l behaviour. Included will be an e x a m i n a t i o n of the research as to h o w the medical m o d e l , behaviouristic s c h o o l , h u m a n i s t i c s c h o o l a n d interpersonal s c h o o l view normal a n d a b n o r m a l behaviour. T h i s c o u r s e will also f o c u s o n the historical a n d c o n t e m p o r a r y a p p r o a c h e s to treatment. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. 43 Sociology s h a p e d British C o l u m b i a from industrial society. a frontier into a m o d e r n Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Instructional Faculty G a y l e , N „ B.A. (York), M . A . (Western) G r o v e s , P. Heffron, B.A. (Toronto), P h . D . ( U B C ) Salter, R., B.A., M.A. ( N e w York State), L L . B . ( U B C ) Speier, M . , B.A. (New Y o r k ) , M.A., P h . D . (Berkeley) General Information All c o u r s e s in S o c i o l o g y are geared to help the student c o m p r e h e n d personal a n d global events in a relevant a n d meaningful way. S o c i o l o g y s h o u l d thus help the student in his/her endeavour to c o p e with o u r i n c r e a s i n g l y c o m p l e x society. A major in S o c i o l o g y leads to work in the following areas: s o c i a l work, t e a c h i n g , probation work, c r i m i n o l o g y , industrial S o c i o l o g y , c o m m u n i c a t i o n s , media, government research, a n d related areas. Students registering for S o c i o l o g y c o u r s e s s h o u l d note that there are no prerequisites for any of the c o u r s e s and that c o u r s e s c a n be taken in any order or c o m b i n a t i o n , a c c o r d i n g to student interest. T h o s e w h o intend to major s h o u l d c o m plete S o c i o l o g y 100 and 101. All 200-level c o u r s e s will provide the S i m o n Fraser transfer student with a s s i g n e d credit toward 2nd-year c o u r s e s . T h e U B C transfer student will be provided with u n a s s i g n e d credit toward a major. S o c i o l o g y 100 Social Structures (F,S) (3,0,1) T h e c o u r s e systematically covers major t o p i c s and issues of c o n c e r n to a n y o n e w h o w i s h e s to begin to understand, a n d c o m e to terms with, the m o d e r n world in a personally and' s o c i o l o g i c a l l y relevant way. T h e basic theme of the c o u r s e is that we are, to a greater extent than generally i m a g i n e d , prod u c e d , structured a n d run by the " s o c i a l m a c h i n e " . T h i s " s o c i a l m a c h i n e " c o m p r i s e s institutions s u c h as the family, religion, inequality, mass media, e d u c a t i o n as well as rules, customs, laws, etc. This c o u r s e looks at how we are influenced by this " m a c h i n e " a n d , in turn, how we react to that influence. Both S o c i o l o g y 100 a n d 101 are required for students intending to major in S o c i o l o g y at S i m o n Fraser or at U B C . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. S o c i o l o g y 210 Current Social Issues (F) (3,0,1) A study of social c o n c e r n s and cultural problems c o m m o n to current c o n d i t i o n s in the twentieth c e n t u r y in o u r society a n d in global perspectives. C l a s s i c a l s o c i o l o g i c a l c o n c e p t s will be used to analyze media c o v e r a g e a n d p o p u l a r p e r c e p tion of issues and problems. C u r r e n t issues are p l a c e d in the context of the student's daily w o r l d , a s it is h a p p e n i n g n o w — this s h o u l d develop the student's s o c i o l o g i c a l imagination. This c o u r s e c a n be taken by itself, or as a c o m p l e m e n t to S o c i o l o g y 211, S o c i o l o g y of U n d e r d e v e l o p m e n t . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. S o c i o l o g y 211 S o c i o l o g y of Under Development (S) (3,0,1) A study of. the major theories of under d e v e l o p m e n t , e m p i r i c a l studies of under d e v e l o p m e n t , s o c i a l a n d cultural r e s p o n s e s to under d e v e l o p m e n t , a n d the inter-relationship of s o c i a l institutions in a n d between the " d e v e l o p e d " a n d " u n d e r - d e v e l o p e d " societies. T h i s c o u r s e will provide students with an opportunity to better understand the s o c i a l , e c o n o m i c , a n d political c a u s e s and effects of under development. B o t h s o c i o l o g i c a l a n d " n o n - s o c i o l o g i c a l " literature o n the m e a n i n g a n d effects of " u n d e r d e v e l o p m e n t " will b e c o n s i d e r e d . T h i s c o u r s e may be taken by itself or as a c o m p l e m e n t to S o c i o l o g y 210, Current S o c i a l Issues. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . S o c i o l o g y 222 S o c i o l o g y of the Arts (F) (3,0,1) A m u s i c a l , artistic a n d s o c i o l o g i c a l study of creative e n d e a v o u r s of western civilization t h r o u g h painting, m u s i c and sculpture to c i n e m a . L e c t u r e s a r e illustrated with both pictures a n d m u s i c . T h e c o u r s e will relate the various art forms to the s o c i a l context in w h i c h they exist; h e n c e , it will develop a n u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the inter-relationships between ideas (expressed as Art), s o c i a l institutions a n d s o c i a l behaviour. S o c i o l o g y 101 C o n c e p t s of Theories of Society (S) (3,0,1) With current s o c i a l c o n d i t i o n s in m i n d , this c o u r s e analyzes the general development of s o c i o l o g i c a l thought in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. W e will look at three major a p p r o a c h e s to u n d e r s t a n d i n g society (functionalism, conflict theory, a n d s y m b o l i c interactionism) a n d e m p l o y these a p p r o a c h e s to a n a l y z e events of current interest. B o t h S o c i o l o g y 100 a n d 101 are required for students intending to major in S o c i o l o g y at S i m o n Fraser or at U B C . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. S o c i o l o g y 200 C a n a d i a n Society (F) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the study of C a n a d i a n s o c i e t y a n d culture, i n c l u d i n g a n analysis of the major C a n a d i a n institutions studied o n a national basis, with s p e c i a l e m p h a s i s o n the d y n a m i c s of c h a n g e in a multicultural, c o m p l e x society. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. S o c i o l o g y 201 British C o l u m b i a Society (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u e d s o c i o l o g i c a l a p p r o a c h to the d y n a m i c s of C a n a d i a n society with s p e c i a l e m p h a s i s on British C o l u m b i a . C l o s e attention will be given to s o c i a l movements a n d e c o n o m i c , historical, a n d cultural d e v e l o p m e n t s w h i c h have 44 ' This c o u r s e is particularly r e c o m m e n d e d as a c o m p l e m e n t t o S o c i o l o g y 223, M e d i a a n d S o c i e t y , or S o c i o l o g y 101, C o n c e p t s & T h e o r i e s of S o c i o l o g y . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. S o c i o l o g y 223 Media a n d Society (S) (3,0,1) A n intensive a n d fascinating study of the relationship between a society's c o m m u n i c a t i o n s y s t e m s as m e d i a a n d its t e c h n o l o g i c a l , e c o n o m i c , a n d political b a s e , its i d e o l o g y , its behaviour patterns a n d its cultural life. T h i s will e n c o m p a s s current forms of television, radio, m a g a z i n e s , all f o r m s of advertisement, news p r o d u c t i o n , a n d the movies. This c o u r s e is particularly r e c o m m e n d e d as a c o m p l e m e n t to S o c i o l o g y 222, S o c i o l o g y of the Arts, or S o c i o l o g y 100, S o c i a l Structures. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Spanish Spanish 200 Second Year Spanish (F) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: S p a n i s h 100/101 or p e r m i s s i o n of Instructional Faculty C o l l i n s , N . J . , B.A. ( L o n d o n ) , M.A. ( U B C ) Furstenwald, C , B.A. (Mexico) S o u z a , A . G . , B.A. ( H o n s ) , M A (UBC), Modern Languages Coordinator of Instructional A s s o c i a t e s instructor. A c o m p l e t e review of S p a n i s h g r a m m a r with s p e c i a l e m p h a s i s on problematic areas normally e n c o u n t e r e d by students of the language. T h e reading, writing a n d oral fluency of the student will be improved t h r o u g h translations, c o m p o s i t i o n s and a high degree of c o n v e r s a t i o n . A l s o , the student will be i n t r o d u c e d to H i s p a n i c Literature. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. G a c i n a . Jeannette S e w e r i n , Margarita, B.A. ( U B C ) Spanish 201 Second Year Spanish (S) (3,2,1) Prerequisites: S p a n i s h 200 or p e r m i s s i o n from the instructor. General Information A c o n t i n u a t i o n of the work of S p a n i s h 200. T h i s c o u r s e s h o u l d be taken, wherever possible, in the term following S p a n i s h 200 SFU Students who wish to p r o c e e d to S F U and to pursue further c o u r s e s in S p a n i s h are r e m i n d e d of the present equivalency standards. Elective credit will be given at S F U for all C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e S p a n i s h c o u r s e s . E x e m p t i o n from and placement in higher c o u r s e s are determined by the results of a placement test or other a s s e s s m e n t p r o c e d u r e . A s a result of the placement test, area credit may be granted w h i c h would count toward a major in S p a n i s h . C o u r s e s which do not qualify toward a major will be awarded elective credit only. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. UBC At U B C , present equivalent standards equate S p a n i s h 100 and 101 with S p a n i s h 100; S p a n i s h 200 and 201 with S p a n i s h 200. T h e student who plans to major in S p a n i s h may enter U B C ' s S p a n i s h when s/he c o m p l e t e s the C a p i l a n o c o u r s e s . Note: All c o u r s e s in S p a n i s h include a total of five a n d o n e half hours of instruction per week, m a d e up of three hours of lectures; o n e and one-half hours of laboratory practice; a n d o n e hour of c o n v e r s a t i o n a l practice with a native speaker. Native speakers of F r e n c h , G e r m a n or S p a n i s h w h o wish to take first or s e c o n d - y e a r c o u r s e s in these l a n g u a g e s must consult with the L a n g u a g e C o o r d i n a t o r first. University rules governing s u c h students differ within departments, but the L a n g u a g e C o o r d i n a t o r has c o r r e s p o n d e n c e d e a l i n g with matters relevant to credit transfer and point of entry. In order to avoid any m i s u n d e r s t a n d i n g , s u c h students are invited to d i s c u s s these p r o b l e m s with the L a n g u a g e C o o r d i n a t o r prior to enrolment. Spanish 100 First Year Spanish (F) (3,2.5,1) Prerequisites: N o n e . T h i s is a beginners' c o u r s e w h i c h offers a c o m p r e h e n s i v e introduction to the S p a n i s h l a n g u a g e . E m p h a s i s is p l a c e d on g r a m m a r and the d e v e l o p m e n t of the students' s p e a k i n g , understanding and writing skills. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Spanish 101 First Year Spanish (S) (3,2.5,1) Prerequisites: S p a n i s h 100 or p e r m i s s i o n from instructor. A continuation of the work of S p a n i s h 100, this c o u r s e s h o u l d be taken, wherever possible, in the term f o l l o w i n g S p a n i s h 100. R e c o m m e n d e d a l s o for those who are c o n s i d e r ing taking S p a n i s h 200 at a later date a n d need review work. Transferable to S F U , U B C and U . V i c . 45 Theatre Arts Theatre 200 Script a n d Stage (F) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: Theatre 101 or p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. Instructional Faculty M o o r e , D., B.F.A. (U.Vic.) M u r d o c h , W.. B.F.A. (U.Vic.) General Information T h e Theatre P r o g r a m at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e is d e s i g n e d to introduce the student to the theatre arts through c o u r s e s in acting, theatre history, a n d theatre-craft labs. It will provide training in the craft of performing a n d will prepare actors for further work in other institutions a n d acting s c h o o l s , also it will e n c o u r a g e their participation in recreational c o m m u n i t y theatre. Daytime and evening sections of most c o u r s e s are offered to allow both full-time and part-time students to take advantage of the Theatre P r o g r a m . Theatre c o u r s e s at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e have transfer credit or elective credit at British C o l u m b i a ' s major universities. Please consult Transfer G u i d e a n d instructor. Theatre 100 Acting I (F) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. « A n introduction to the craft of acting. Theatre 100 e m p h a sizes personal a n d g r o u p exploration of body a n d voice; s e n s o r y observation, a w a r e n e s s , a n d recall; mime, mask; and character a n d role creation. T h e s e areas are e x p l o r e d through improvised a n d scripted s c e n e work. T h e r e will normally be a studio p e r f o r m a n c e at the e n d of term. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Theatre 101 Acting II (S) (3,0,1) An advanced course exploring scripted drama. Role development a n d c h a r a c t e r interaction are e x p l o r e d u s i n g a variety of s c r i p t e d m a t e r i a l s t a k e n f r o m c l a s s i c a n d c o n t e m p o r a r y plays a n d u n c o n v e n t i o n a l s o u r c e s . T r a d i t i o n a l vocal a n d p h y s i c a l e x e r c i s e s will be taught to d e v e l o p a warm-up routine and expand the student's abilities. M o n o l o g u e s may also be d e v e l o p e d to prepare the student for entrance to other theatre p r o g r a m m e s a n d a u d i t i o n s . Labs: T h e theatrecrafts labs will provide b a c k g r o u n d a n d e x p e r i e n c e in the support areas of theatre, s u c h as lighting, m a k e - u p , stage m a n a g e m e n t a n d set d e s i g n . S t u d e n t s will also be instructed in the c o m p i l a t i o n of a theatrical resume and be given tips o n a u d i t i o n i n g . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Theatre 201 Rehearsal a n d Performance (S) (3,2,1) In the s e c o n d term a s h o w will be m o u n t e d as this practical c o u r s e e x p l o r e s the rehearsal a n d p r o d u c t i o n process. Development of a warm-up routine will continue while students rehearse a n d p r o d u c e the s h o w . P r e p a r i n g for the p r o d u c t i o n s is a major undertaking a n d students c a n expect to be e n g a g e d in rehearsals o u t s i d e of s c h e d u l e d class times. Labs: Students will participate in the d e s i g n , c o n s t r u c t i o n , p u b l i c i z i n g , a n d c r e w i n g of the p r o d u c t i o n . A g a i n c r e w a s s i g n m e n t s will r e q u i r e t i m e s p e n t o v e r a n d a b o v e s c h e d u l e d lab times. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Prerequisite: Theatre 100 or p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. A n exploration of P e r f o r m a n c e improvisation a n d n o n scripted theatre. Theatre 101 trains the performer in the art of improvisation a n d g r o u p creation. It e m p h a s i z e s e n s e m b l e performing, narrative skills, character relationship, a n d an u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the nature of d r a m a t i c structure. T h e r e will normally be a p u b l i c performance d u r i n g the term. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Theatre 120 Introduction to Theatre History I (F) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. A practical a p p r o a c h to the study of Theatre History. In the first term several periods from 5th century B . C . ( C l a s s i c a l Theatre) through to the 17th century will be c o v e r e d using seminars, research presentation, play readings, a n d s o m e lectures to discover e a c h era. A practical d i s c o v e r y of the c o s t u m e s , set, acting a n d writing styles will be e m p h a s i z e d . Women's Studies 192 W o m e n a n d Theatre (F or S) (3,0,1) A n introductory c o u r s e o n w o m e n in theatre both a s Characters a n d as participants. A n historical a p p r o a c h will survey the development of the female c h a r a c t e r a n d the e m e r g e n c e of w o m e n in the p r o f e s s i o n a l theatre w o r l d from early theatre t h r o u g h to the 20th century. B a s i c a c t i n g skills will be a p p l i e d to m o n o l o g u e s a n d s c e n e s t u d i e s w h i c h e x p l o r e female u n i q u e n e s s a n d the d e v e l o p m e n t of the d e v e l o p i n g stage female. A l l dramatization will be d o n e in a studio a t m o s p h e r e . T h e r e will be n o p u b l i c p e r f o r m a n c e s . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U . Not offered in 1982-83 T i a n s f e i a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Not offered in 1982/83. Theatre 121 Introduction to Theatre History II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Theatre 120 or p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. A continuation of Theatre 120, Theatre 121 utilizes similar t e c h n i q u e s to d i s c o v e r major periods from the 17th to early 20th century. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Not offered in 1982/83 46 C R E D I T - F R E E : C r e d i t free c o u r s e s in s u p p l e m e n t a r y p e r f o r m a n c e arts s u c h as m o v e m e n t , v o i c e , m a s k a n d m a k e up, will be offered to students in times c o m p a t i b l e with credit c o u r s e offerings. T h e aim of these o p t i o n a l w o r k s h o p s is to provide additional training to students w i s h i n g t o augment the e x p e r i e n c e s provided in credit offerings. P l e a s e c o n t a c t instructor for further details a n d read the C R E D I T - F R E E flyer. Women's Studies Instructional Faculty W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s offerings are taught by fully qualified instructors with experience in the field required by e a c h course. T h e s e faculty are s e c o n d e d from relevant d i s c i p l i n e s to W o m e n ' s Studies. Transfer S F U : S t u d e n t s w h o wish to pursue further c o u r s e s in W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s are advised that S F U has instituted a minor program in Women's Studies. Transfer credit has been received for W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s 104,110, 120, 122 a n d 192, a n d is being sought for 193. For further information o n transferability refer to the Transfer G u i d e at the back of the calendar. critical e x a m i n a t i o n of male a n d female c o n s c i o u s n e s s a n d the extent to w h i c h these affect a n d determine potential for h u m a n growth and freedom. Reference will be made to major p s y c h o l o g i c a l s c h o o l s of thought in terms of sexual bias. N o n - s e x i s t alternatives to present psychiatric practices will be e x p l o r e d . Transferable to S F U a n d U.Vic. Women's Studies 120 W o m e n & the Past: A n Historical Survey (S) (3,0,1) A survey of the lives of w o m e n from the ancient world to 20th C . North A m e r i c a A n u n c o v e r i n g of w o m e n ' s participation in a n d contribution to the m a k i n g of history. Private lives as well as p u b l i c a n d political activities will be studied. T h e c o u r s e will e x a m i n e reasons behind the extent t o w h i c h w o m e n have been " h i d d e n f r o m history." Transferable to S F U a n d U.Vic. Transfer credit to U B C is being applied for. Women's Studies 106 Contemporary United States W o m e n Writers (F) (3,0,1) A d i s c u s s i o n - o r i e n t e d c o u r s e intended to broaden a n d intensify the student's a w a r e n e s s of a n d a p p r e c i a t i o n of the literature being p r o d u c e d by U.S. w o m e n writers today, a n d to e x a m i n e a n d d i s c u s s the portraits of w o m e n , a n d of w o m e n ' s c i r c u m s t a n c e s revealed in theses writings, a n d to further e n c o u r a g e w o m e n interested in creative artistic p r o d u c t i o n to pursue their efforts a n d to e n c o u r a g e other w o m e n to d o the s a m e , in light of the a c h i e v e m e n t s of these w o m e n writers. Transferable to S F U . Women's Studies 122 W o m e n in Anthropology (S) (3,0,1) T h e a n t h r o p o l o g i c a l perspective applied to w o m e n in different cultures of the world: their role in e c o n o m i c , political, religious, kinship, e x p r e s s i v e s y s t e m s . E x p l o r a t i o n of the work of w o m e n anthropologists and the effect of theory on understanding w o m e n . What is the w o m a n ' s e x p e r i e n c e in cultures a n d areas s u c h as the E s k i m o s , A m a z o n jungle, Israeli kibbutz, G r e e c e , A f g h a n i s t a n , India, M e x i c o a n d Africa. M a y be offered in S p r i n g 1982. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Women's Studies 110 W o m e n a n d P s y c h o l o g y (F) (3,0,1) A p s y c h o l o g i c a l e x a m i n a t i o n of sex-role definitions, their origins, development in c h i l d h o o d a n d maintenance in adult life. T h e c o u r s e will e x a m i n e the differences in life patterns between m e n a n d w o m e n a n d the effect these have o n personality development a n d s e l f - c o n c e p t . It will i n c l u d e a T h e following W o m e n ' s Studies courses will not be offered in 82/83. A n y student w h o is interested in these c o u r s e s should contact the Women's Studies Coordinator, Humanities. W o m e n ' s Studies 101 W o m e n ' s Studies 104 W o m e n ' s Studies 192 W o m e n ' s Studies 193 W o m e n a n d Work. Contemporary English-Canadian W o m e n Writers. W o m e n a n d Theatre. W o m e n a n d Theatre. Career/Vocational Programs CAREER PROGRAMS C a r e e r p r o g r a m s prepare adults for e m p l o y m e n t in business a n d industry. A l l s e c o n d a r y s c h o o l graduates are eligible for a d m i s s i o n : those without G r a d e 12 standing may also apply and will be c o n s i d e r e d on the basis of their particular e x p e r i e n c e , maturity, ability a n d interest. T h e suggested c u r r i c u l u m for e a c h p r o g r a m i n c l u d e s required, r e c o m m e n d e d a n d elective c o u r s e s . Every attempt is made to plan a p r o g r a m of studies best suited to individual needs; however, each student must assume final responsibility for selecting h i s / h e r p r o g r a m . C o m m u n i c a t i o n s c o u r s e s form part of every P r o g r a m . T h e s e are d e s i g n e d to assist the student to write clearly a n d speak well. S u c h c o u r s e s provide the resources to back up the special talents of the graduate. In most programs " o n the-job" work e x p e r i e n c e forms part of the c u r r i c u l u m . The c o u r s e s offered in the various p r o g r a m s are under constant review to make certain that students are e x p o s e d to the latest of t e c h n i q u e s a n d skills. A d v i s o r y committees, c o m p o s e d of e m p l o y e r s in t h e b u s i n e s s , i n d u s t r i a l , professional and s o c i a l services are constantly reviewing and making r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s for all p r o g r a m s . Student C o u r s e and Work L o a d C o u r s e work a p p r o x i m a t e s 21 Vi hours per week. However, s o m e p r o g r a m s m a y require as many as 32 h o u r s a n d others as few as 16 hours per week. It is therefore strongly r e c o m m e n d e d that students not a c c e p t e m p l o y m e n t while undertaking full-time studies in any of the C a r e e r P r o g r a m s offered at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . Employment Opportunities for the Graduate A l t h o u g h e m p l o y m e n t opportunities for the graduates of career programs have to date been g o o d , the C o l l e g e is in no position to guarantee job positions for the graduates of particular career p r o g r a m s . E m p l o y m e n t opportunities are largely b a s e d o n the a d v i c e of s p e c i a l i s t A d v i s o r y C o m m i t t e e s . T h e a d v i c e provided by these c o m m i t t e e s may be tempered by rapidly changing e c o n o m i c conditions, alterations in the requirements of certifying bodies, a n d the specific needs of particular e m p l o y e e s . T h e s e c o n d i t i o n s c a n c o m p l e t e l y alter the e m p l o y m e n t possibilities for individual graduates in a very short time. Exemption Standing Students may be e x e m p t e d from certain c o u r s e s u p o n the s u c c e s s f u l d e m o n s t r a t i o n of a c q u i r e d skills a n d k n o w l e d g e . S u c h e x e m p t i o n s t a n d i n g s will be noted o n the P e r m a n e n t Studies R e c o r d . Students granted s u c h e x e m p t i o n s will have their total c o u r s e load reduced by the n u m b e r of e x e m p t e d credit h o u r s to the m a x i m u m of two c o u r s e s or six credit h o u r s per a c a d e m i c year without effect u p o n the status of the Certificate or D i p l o m a in the particular p r o g r a m . S u c h e x e m p t e d hours are not necessarily transferable to other institutions. E x e m p t i o n in e x c e s s of two c o u r s e s , or six credit hours, 48 may be a w a r d e d a student only u p o n the r e c o m m e n d a t i o n of the appropriate p . o g r a m c o o r d i n a t o r a n d the D e a n Transfer T o and From Other Institutions There is agreement a m o n g all p u b l i c B . C . C o l l e g e s to a c c e p t e a c h other's credits u p o n transfer, if a p p l i c a b l e , to a p r o g r a m given at the admitting c o l l e g e , a n d given suitable e q u i v a l e n c y . C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e reserves the right to review individual c o u r s e credit. Transfer credits are granted to students o n a d m i s s i o n for a c c e p t a b l e work d o n e at other institutions: the transfer credits reduce the total n u m b e r of credits w h i c h are required at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e for the certificate or d i p l o m a . S t u d e n t s wishing transfer credit should present suitable documentation to the Registrar's office for adjudication by the appropriate faculty. All approved transfer credits are noted on the student's Permanent Student R e c o r d . Full information on transfer of specific c o u r s e s is available from the A d m i s s i o n A d v i s o r , C o u n s e l l o r s and in the Division. A d m i s s i o n Criteria A d m i s s i o n is limited to a fixed n u m b e r e a c h year. A p p l i c a n t s will be c o n s i d e r e d on the criteria e s t a b l i s h e d by e a c h p r o g r a m area. S e e individual p r o g r a m d e s c r i p t i o n s for details. B e c a u s e many of the more s p e c i a l i z e d p r o g r a m s a n d c o u r s e s offered are u n i q u e to the p r o v i n c e there is no priority of a d m i s s i o n except that as a g u i d e l i n e a majority of the students shall be residents of the C o l l e g e region. A d m i s s i o n Dates E n r o l m e n t in s o m e P r o g r a m s may be c u r t a i l e d d u e to space and equipment limitations. C o n s e q u e n t l y , those students w h o c o n t e m p l a t e entrance are e n c o u r a g e d to apply early. A p p l i c a n t s are required to have an interview with the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r prior to a d m i s s i o n . A p p l i c a t i o n s must be received before M a r c h 1 of e a c h year in order to guarantee c o n s i d e r a t i o n for the next A c a d e m i c Year (September). A p p l i c a t i o n s received after that date will be c o n s i d e r e d if s p a c e s are available. U n s u c c e s s f u l applicants w h o wish to be c o n s i d e r e d for the next year must re-apply. Chemical and Metallurgical T e c h n o l o g y Program A r r a n g e m e n t s have been made to transfer students to B.C.I.T. (Contact the C h e m i s t r y Department for details.) Training for Business & Industry T h i s division of the c o l l e g e presents s p e c i a l i z e d training seminars, c o u r s e s a n d c o n f e r e n c e s in S u p e r v i s o r y S k i l l s , Professional Selling, Interpersonal Skills, Management T e c h n i q u e s a n d C o m p u t e r S c i e n c e for b u s i n e s s , industry a n d government o r g a n i z a t i o n s . VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e is offering Vocational P r o g r a m s and U p g r a d i n g C o u r s e s under an agreement with the Ministry of E d u c a t i o n , P r o v i n c e of British C o l u m b i a . T h e p u r p o s e of V o c a t i o n a l E d u c a t i o n is to provide c o u r s e s in b u s i n e s s , the skilled trades, service o c c u p a t i o n s a n d c o m m e r c i a l art to adults requiring s p e c i a l i z e d training as well as providing a service to e m p l o y e r s throughout the P r o v i n c e . students who wish to enrol in the c o u r s e the first time. STUDENTS MAY NOT REPEAT A COURSE MORE THAN O N C E W I T H O U T A N A P P R O V A L IN W R I T I N G F R O M THE COORDINATOR. Art Program Instructional Faculty A d v a n c e Registration - Studio Arts & Crafts Bracken, Mike, B.P.A. Art Centre (Los Angeles), Applied Design C o g s w e l l , Barry, N.D.D. (Hammersmith), R . C . A . S c u l p t u r e D e g g a n , Paul, D i p l o m a (Worthing C o . , E n g l a n d ) , S c u l p t u r e Eastcott, W a y n e , Sr. Cert. (V.S.A.), R . C . A . P r i n t m a k i n g Forster, Fred, A l b e r t a C o l l e g e of Art, Advertising Illustration J u n g i c , J o s e p h i n e , B.A., M.A. ( U B C ) , Art History Kingan, T e d , N.D.D. (Blackpool), A . T . D . ( M a n e ) , R.C.A. Teach. Cert. (Manchester), B . C . T e a c h . Cert. D r a w i n g , D e s i g n Painting Leskard, S t e p h e n , Dipl. (St. Martins, L o n d o n ) , G e n . D r a w i n g , D e s i g n , Painting Llewellyn, Marion, B.A. (Manchester), Graphic Design, Applied Design L o n g , J o h n , B . P . A . Art C e n t r e (Los A n g e l e s ) , G r a p h i c Design, Applied Design MacLagan, David, A . O . C . A . , I.D.C, F.C.A. Illustration, General Drawing M c L a r e n , D o n n a , Cert. (Sheridan C o l l e g e ) , B . H . S c . (Guelph) Pottery Marshall, David, Cert. (B.C.), S c u l p t u r e Mees, M i e n e k e , Cert. Handcraft H o u s e , W e a v i n g Molnar, Frank, D i p l . (Pennsylvania), A n a t o m y , D r a w i n g . Painting N a u m a n n , R o s e , Cert. (V.S.A.), C r e d . (Ins. A l l e n d e ) , Weaving Newton-Mason, J o h n , Dipl. (Worthing C o l . , England) Environmental D e s i g n , D e s i g n R i c h m o n d , Lesley, M.Art E d . (Western W a s h . State U..) T e a c h . Cert. ( L o n d o n ) , F a b r i c Printing Rimmer, J i m , Lettering R o s e n b e r g , A n n , B.A., M.A. (Toronto), Art History, Visual Literacy Salazar, J i m , B.A. (San J o s e State U.), S t u d i o P r o d u c t i o n Salazar, Rick, S a n J o s e State U., S t u d i o P r o d u c t i o n Stribley, Roger, C e r a m . (Birmingham), (Lund Univ. S w e d e n ) , Pottery W o o d , A l a n , N.D.D., A . T . D . (Liverpool), R . C . A . P a i n t i n g , Drawing Y a s k i n s k i , Daniel, P h o t o g r a p h y Z i m m e r m a n , AI, Art C e n t e r (Los A n g e l e s ) , A p p l i e d D e s i g n I Fall T e r m 1982 Full-Time Students: Returning to s e c o n d year of D i p l o m a P r o g r a m s Register A p r i l 12-16. Secondary School Students: Entering first year of D i p l o m a P r o g r a m s Register M a y 3 - M a y 7 All Other Diploma Program Full-Time Students: M a y 10 - M a y 28 Part-time: Returning to s e c o n d year c o u r s e s A p r i l 19 - 28 Note: A l l other part-time students may register d u r i n g the period A p r i l 19 - M a y 28 a n d will be allocated seats on M a y 31 a c c o r d i n g to a first-come, first-served waiting list. II Spring T e r m 1983 Full-Time Students: Returning to D i p l o m a P r o g r a m s November 1 - 5 M a y also register up to N o v e m b e r 12 but without priority Part-Time Students: Returning to s e c o n d a n d fourth term c o u r s e s N o v e m b e r 8 - N o v e m b e r 12 N e w part-time students may apply at mail registration in N o v e m b e r / D e c e m b e r , or in-person registration in J a n u a r y 1983. Prerequisite Prerequisites may be waived in writing by either the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r or the instructor c o n c e r n e d w h e n it is felt that a student p o s s e s s e s the ability to c o p e with the requirements of any given c o u r s e . General Description History of Art Three distinct p r o g r a m s offer a wide variety of S t u d i o Art, C o m m e r c i a l Art a n d Craft C o u r s e s . Students in the Art P r o g r a m may w i s h to c o n s i d e r the following courses offered by the A c a d e m i c Division: Fine Arts 100, Fine Arts 101. (May be taken instead of Fine Arts 104 and 105 for credit in the Art Program.) Admission and Registration Procedures Note: 1. C o m m e r c i a l A r t a p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d requirements noted in that s e c t i o n . Courses Transfer Credit refer to special 2. For the purposes of a d m i s s i o n to art c o u r s e s a full-time student means a p e r s o n of any age who take a full career P r o g r a m (which may include s o m e Art c o u r s e s a n d s o m e A c a d e m i c c o u r s e s , or exclusively Art O p t i o n courses) w h i c h , u p o n c o m p l e t i o n in o n e or two years of study, entitles the student to either a C o l l e g e Certificate or the A s s o c i a t e of Arts a n d S c i e n c e D i p l o m a , or entitles the student to seek transfer credit to other p o s t - s e c o n d a r y learning institutions w h i c h recognize C C A . P . standards for a d m i s s i o n to their programs. 3. A student is not c o n s i d e r e d as " r e g i s t e r e d " in the Art P r o g r a m until h i s / h e r Registration F o r m a n d a valid c h e q u e for the full amount of tuition fees, a n d Student f e e s a r e d e p o s i t e d , r e g i s t e r e d a n d acknowledged with and by the Program Coordinator a n d C o l l e g e Registrar's Offices. 4. Students w i s h i n g to repeat a c o u r s e : A n y student w h o has taken an art c o u r s e at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e and who has passed that c o u r s e may retake it only after all available s p a c e s have been filled by those T h e transfer g u i d e in the calendar s h o u l d be referred to regarding transferability of s p e c i f i c c o u r s e s . T h e student s h o u l d understand that a d v a n c e d standing in a n y institution is usually based on interview a n d portfolio s u b m i s s i o n , as well as credits held. 1. Studio Art Program O p e n to both full a n d part-time students. Full-time students will gain a wide variety of basic skills a n d insights in this intensive two-year p r o g r a m of studies, providing them with the firm, broad foundation they need as a basis for further study a n d an eventual career in the V i s u a l Arts. This full-time program provides e x t e n d e d s t u d i o time in P a i n t i n g , P r i n t m a k i n g a n d S c u l p t u r e with c o n c u r r e n t c o u r s e s in D r a w i n g , D e s i g n a n d Art History. A feature of the program is a weekly F o r u m where first a n d s e c o n d - y e a r students a s s e m b l e on a regular basis in order to meet a variety of professional performers in the V i s u a l Arts a n d allied fields, a n d to participate in s p e c i a l events. T h i s e x p o s u r e to other than their regular instructors will e n a b l e students to relate 49 their c o l l e g e e x p e r i e n c e s to the realities of current a n d practice in the outside w o r l d . thought Part-time students may participate in aspects of program on a more tentative or selective basis. this Note: Students w i s h i n g eventual transfer to other posts e c o n d a r y institutions are advised to c o n s u l t with faculty a n d c o u n s e l l o r s regarding current regulations and requirements prior to final c o u r s e or program selection. Associate in Arts a n d S c i e n c e Diploma Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s General Education Requirements Credit Hours Lab Hours 54 6 39 0 60 39 three of the craft d i s c i p l i n e s , a d v a n c i n g to p r o f e s s i o n a l c o m p e t e n c e . S t u d e n t s are e n c o u r a g e d to p u r s u e p e r s o n a l creative projects of both a functional or abstract nature as s o o n as basic skills are a c q u i r e d . S t u d i o a n d gallery visits are an important learning s e g m e n t of the p r o g r a m a n d students are e n c o u r a g e d to keep abreast of current c o n c e p t s a n d trends using traditional materials and new materials d e v e l o p e d by m o d e r n t e c h n o l o g y . T h o s e w h o graduate may seek e m p l o y m e n t as instructors in a variety of c o m m u n i t y art p r o g r a m s or in institutions where h a n d s - o n art c o u r s e s are used as therapy. Alternatively, they may establish t h e m s e l v e s as practising artists on either a full-time or part-time basis. T h e crafts offer ideal opportunities for individuals w i s h i n g to extend their leisure time h o r i z o n s a n d for students in other p r o g r a m s s e e k i n g electives. Associate in Arts and S c i e n c e D i p l o m a Studio Art C u r r i c u l u m Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s General Education Requirements Electives First Term F.A. 100 or F.A. 104 Art 156 Art 167 Art 150 Art 185 * C m n s 150 T h e History of Art I or Introduction to V i s u a l Literacy I 3 T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies I . . 3 Sculpture I 3 Drawing I 3 Design Concepts I 3 Basic Communications 3 0 6 3 0 0 0 18 9 3 3 3 3 3 0 6 3 0 _3_ 15 12 3 3 3 _3 0 6 3 _0 12 9 " F . A . 104 3 3 3 3 0 6 3 0 Art 267 Art 273 Art 284 " C m n s 150 Elective _3 _0 15 9 Second Term F.A. 101 or F.A. 105 Art Art Art Art 157 174 151 189 T h e History of Art II or Introduction to Visual Literacy II T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l S t u d i e s II S c u l p t u r e II Drawing II D e s i g n C o n c e p t s II Third Term F.A. 210 Art 271 Art 257 Art 262 M o d e r n Art (19th Century) T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies III S c u l p t u r e III Drawing III Fourth Term F.A. 211 Art 272 Art 265 Art 263 " C m n s 153 M o d e r n Art (20th Century) T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies IV S c u l p t u r e IV Drawing IV Communications and the Arts Credit Hours Lab Hours 60 6 _3_ 30 0 _°_ 69 30 3 3 3 3 3 _3_ 0 0 3 3 3 _3 18 12 3 3 3 3 _3_ 3 0 3 3 _TJ_ 15 9 3 3 3 3 3 _3_ 0 0 0 0 _°_ 18 3 3 3 3 3 0 0 3 0 3 _3 0 _3 18 6 Crafts C u r r i c u l u m First Term Art 154 Art 158 Art 160 Art 163 Art 168 Art 190 General Drawing I Design I F a b r i c Printing I Pottery I Weaving I Spinning and Dyeing Second Term Art Art Art Art Art 161 164 165 169 178 Fabric Printing II G e n e r a l D r a w i n g II Pottery II W e a v i n g II D e s i g n II Third Term Introduction to V i s u a l Literacy I W e a v i n g III Pottery III F a b r i c Printing III Basic Communications Fourth Term * * F . A . 105 Note: Students w i s h i n g to substitute E n g l i s h c o u r s e s for C o m m u n i c a t i o n s may d o s o o n r e q u e s t a n d in a c c o r d a n c e with c o l l e g e regulations. Art 268 Art 274 Art 285 " C m n s 153 Art 270 2. Crafts Program O p e n to both full a n d part-time students. T h e core content of this program c o n s i s t s of w e a v i n g , fabric printing a n d pottery but is s u p p o r t e d by c o u r s e s in d r a w i n g a n d d e s i g n . Students begin with instruction in basic t e c h n i q u e s in all 50 Introduction to V i s u a l Literacy II W e a v i n g IV Pottery IV F a b r i c Printing IV Communications a n d the Arts F a b r i c s for Interiors " S t u d e n t s w h o wish to substitute E n g l i s h c o u r s e s for C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 150/153 may d o s o with the p r o g r a m representative's a p p r o v a l . " " S t u d e n t s may a l s o take Fine Art 100 a n d 101 for credit. For further information please c o n s u l t Fine Arts. 3. C o m m e r i a l Art Program Portfolio Requirements O p e n to full-time students only This is a two year program to provide training for those w h o like to draw a n d enjoy developing a c o n c e p t from its b e g i n n i n g into finished c o m m u n i c a t i o n . S t u d e n t s are t r a i n e d in d e s i g n , v i s u a l imagery, m e d i a c h o i c e , t y p o g r a p h y a n d c o n c e p t u a l thinking. In short, the student b e c o m e s a problem solver. T h i s is a c o m m e r c i a l artist's function, the resolution of problems that affect the way people think, play, work, travel, s p e n d their money or c h a n g e their habits. There s h o u l d be a m i n i m u m of 12 samples of original work representing current abilities i n c l u d e d . Imaginative a n d experimental drawings in any m e d i u m are a w e l c o m e addition to the portfolio. S a m p l e s must be flat m o u n t e d , not rolled, framed or glassed. Instructors are professionals w h o take time away from their o w n careers to teach, thus the program relates to the current d e m a n d s of business and industry. Real and simulated problems are taken from initial to finished art and reproduction. Frequently guests from all levels of the profession are brought in to elevate student projects. Admission Requirements: This program requires a high level of maturity a n d integrity. Students with a year or more of life e x p e r i e n c e following high s c h o o l are usually more k n o w l e d g e a b l e a n d mature in their c h o i c e of direction a n d better prepared. However, highly motivated high s c h o o l students without this year or more of e x p e r i e n c e c a n s u c c e e d here; a n d we e n c o u r a g e those students to apply. Admission is based on a portfolio, past work and experience in related fields, general ability a n d applicant's interests. Applications and portfolios should be submitted from March 1 to April 30 of the desired entrance year. Portfolios are reviewed by an A d m i s s i o n s C o m m i t t e e a n d are a s s e s s e d on the basis of d r a w i n g , d e s i g n , colour, creativity, m e d i a variety and presentation. A p p l i c a n t s w h o s e portfolios meet the standards of the P r o g r a m are c a l l e d for interviews with the C o m m e r c i a l Art C o - o r d i n a t o r within three weeks of s u b m i s s i o n . Final d e c i s i o n s o n the m a k e - u p of the new class is made by the C o - o r d i n a t o r a n d faculty by M a y 15. U n s u c c e s s f u l a p p l i c a n t s are given the opportunity to register in the F o u n d a t i o n s of V i s u a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n s P r o g r a m a n d are a c c e p t e d on first-come basis. W e cannot accept portfolios larger than 20" x 26". C o l o u r slides or prints of any larger work may be sent. However, photographs or slides do not replace the required m i n i m u m of 12 s a m p l e s of original work. T h e applicants name and " C o m m e r c i a l Art P r o g r a m " s h o u l d be on the outside of the portfolio in large letters. If a portfolio is to be returned, send either stamps or cheque to cover the cost of return postage. Do not send any portfolios by c r o s s - c o u n t r y bus system as they are not delivered to Capilano College. Parcel Post insured or air parcel post insured is usually the best way to have portfolios sent a n d returned. Every possible care is taken, but C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e c a n n o t accept responsibility for loss or d a m a g e to an applicant's work. Associate in Arts and S c i e n c e Diploma Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s General Education Requirements Credit Hours Lab Hours 66 3 45 _0^ 69 45 3 3 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 0 3 3 _fJ_ .21 6 3 3 0 3 3 3 3 _3 0 3 0 _3 18 9 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 15 15 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 _3 15 15 C o m m e r c i a l Art C u r r i c u l u m First Term Art Art Art Art 152 154 162 175 Art 177 Art 192 ' C m n s 150 Life D r a w i n g I General Drawing I Lettering a n d T y p o g r a p h y P h o t o g r a p h y for the G r a p h i c Arts Graphic Design I Applied Design I Basic Communications . . 3 Second Term A r t 164 Art 170 Art 176 Art 179 Art 184 Art 193 G e n e r a l D r a w i n g II Studio Production I P h o t o g r a p h y for V i s u a l Communications G r a p h i c D e s i g n II Life D r a w i n g II A p p l i e d D e s i g n II Third Term Art Art Art Art Art 251 252 277 278 295 Illustration M e d i a A p p l i e d D e s i g n III Environmental Design I S t u d i o P r o d u c t i o n Ii Advertising Illustration I Fourth Term Art 253 Art 269 Art 279 Art 280 Art 298 A p p l i e d D e s i g n IV E x p e r i m e n t a l Illustration — E n v i r o n m e n t a l D e s i g n II Portfolio S t u d i o Advertising Illustration II " S t u d e n t s w h o w i s h to substitute E n g l i s h c o u r s e s for C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 150 may do so with the C o o r d i n a t o r ' s approval. 51 Foundations of Visual C o m m u n i c a t i o n Art 154 General Drawing I (F) (3,0,1) O p e n to both full a n d part-time students. This program is d e s i g n e d to provide a foundation in d r a w i n g skills, figure studies, illustration a n d painting, m e d i a a n d t e c h n i q u e s , d e s i g n principles a n d the history of art a n d design. It stresses the necessity of d e v e l o p i n g c o n s e c u t i v e l y the creative thought p r o c e s s e s a n d skills necessary for visual c o m m u n i c a t i o n . T h i s art b a s i c s program provides the d i r e c tions to prepare the student for further studies in a n y of the many p r o f e s s i o n a l l y - o r i e n t e d art fields. Individual c o u r s e s m a y be taken but priority must be given to students e n r o l l e d in the full F o u n d a t i o n s P r o g r a m . Major Program Requirements Credit Hours Lab Hours 30 6 Foundations of Visual Communication Curriculum First T e r m Art Art Art Art Art 158 152 154 159 166 Design I Life D r a w i n g I General Drawing I Location Drawing Anatomy I 3 3 3 3 _3 0 0 0 3 _0 15 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 3 0 15 3 Second Term Art Art Art Art Art 178 184 164 155 191 D e s i g n II Life D r a w i n g II G e n e r a l D r a w i n g II Mediums & Techniques — Composition and Painting Art 150 Drawing I (F) (3,0,1) A n investigation of the conceptual, technical and perceptual aspects of the drawing p r o c e s s through a wide variety of methods, materials a n d stimuli. E x p e r i e n c e s in both traditional and contemporary a p p r o a c h e s a n d c o n c e r n s , including representational, interpretive a n d experimental d r a w i n g s in appropriate media (pencil, p e n , b r u s h , markers, m i x e d media, etc.) E m p h a s i s will be o n d e v e l o p i n g the student's c o n f i d e n c e , k n o w l e d g e , g r a p h i c sensitivity a n d control of media. Art 151 Drawing II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 150. A further investigation of the c o n c e p t u a l , t e c h n i c a l a n d perceptual a s p e c t s of the d r a w i n g p r o c e s s with additional e m p h a s i s o n the c o n t r o l of media a n d personal m o d e s of expression. Art 152 Life Drawing (F) (3,0,1) T h e study of d r a w i n g from the observation of the h u m a n figure; e x e r c i s e s in d e v e l o p i n g visual p e r c e p t i o n , m e m o r y and basic d r a w i n g skills. S t u d y of the p r o p o r t i o n s of the h u m a n body. Structure a n d action d r a w i n g s with e m p h a s i s o p e m p a t h y and perception of g r a p h i c elements; instinctive, and structured d r a w i n g ; d e v e l o p i n g t h o u g h t - h a n d c o o r d i n a tion. S t u d y of line c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s in p e n c i l , p e n , c o n t e , c h a r c o a l t e c h n i q u e s . C o n t o u r , c r o s s - c o n t o u r , gesture a n d v o l u m e d r a w i n g s from draped a n d u n d r a p e d m o d e l s . Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to B.F.A. S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . 52 T h e study of primary d r a w i n g m e d i a a n d basic t e c h n i q u e s , i n c l u d i n g p e n c i l , pen a n d ink, a n d brush a n d ink. S t u d y of perspective d r a w i n g from direct o b s e r v a t i o n , printed refere n c e material, a n d the imagination. S t u d y of representational rendering t e c h n i q u e s of objects, structures, s u r f a c e s , a n d textures. L e a r n i n g to visualize in g r a p h i c terms, s y m b o l i z i n g , stylizing in terms of line a n d line characteristics. D e v e l o p i n g power of observation a n d g r a p h i c sensitivity. Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to t h e B . F . A . S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 155 Mediums and Techniques (F) (3,0,1) A c o m p a r i s o n of the a p p r o a c h of the m e d i a a n d h o w they may be used to achieve a wide variety of effects. A c o m p a r i s o n of the a p p r o a c h to d r a w i n g , painting or illustration. M e d i a to be i n c l u d e d are a variety of pencils, p e n s a n d inks, d y e s , water c o l o u r s , a c r y l i c s , eel vinyls, oils, repellants a n d c o l l a g e . Art 156 T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies I (F) (3,6,1) S t u d e n t s will alternate between P a i n t i n g a n d P r i n t m a k i n g as they investigate basic t e c h n i c a l a n d c o n c e p t u a l c o n c e r n s , both traditional a n d c o n t e m p o r a r y . T h e r e will be an e m p h a s i s o n personal m o d e s of e x p r e s s i o n as materials, p r o c e s s e s a n d ideas are dealt with through t h e m e s derived from nature, objects a n d the imagination. Individual a n d g r o u p c r i t i q u e s will be held a n d students will be provided with a b a l a n c e of studio activities and lectures, seminars and tutorials, including a weekly Forum where first a n d s e c o n d - y e a r students will meet to gain e x p o s u r e to a variety of guest s p e a k e r s , d i s c u s s i o n s a n d s p e c i a l events relating to this c o u r s e , e s p e c i a l l y c o n c e r n i n g current trends a n d activities. P e r s o n a l r e s e a r c h , gallery a n d studio visits will be a feature of this c o u r s e . Art 157 T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies II (S) (3,6,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of A r t 156, but with a b r o a d e n i n g of instruction in h a n d l i n g t e c h n i q u e s a n d materials not e n c o u n tered d u r i n g the first term. T h e r e will b e an a d d e d e m p h a s i s on the need to develop personal bodies of k n o w l e d g e through s k e t c h b o o k s , preliminary studies a n d s u p p o r t i n g material prior to attempting large-scale a n d d i m e n s i o n a l w o r k s . T h e r e will be a c o n t i n u a t i o n of the weekly F o r u m with opportunities for students to participate in d e t e r m i n i n g its content a n d structure. Art 158 Design I (F) (3,0,1) A n i n t r o d u c t i o n to the c o n c e p t s a n d p r i n c i p l e s of visual art f u n d a m e n t a l s with analytical a n d creative study of b a s i c elements of pictorial o r g a n i z a t i o n . P r o c e s s a n d nature of visual c o m m u n i c a t i o n s , form characteristics are investigated with reference t o fine arts, crafts a n d a p p l i e d arts. E x e r c i s e s in creating meaningful g r a p h i c c o m m u n i c a t i o n s o n set a n d freely c h o s e n t o p i c s will be e m p l o y e d . M e d i a will i n c l u d e p e n c i l , paint, ink, c o l l a g e materials a n d m i x e d m e d i a . Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units t o B . F . A . S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 159 Location Drawing (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will e n a b l e students to develop a selective eye a n d work effectively with a variety of d r a w i n g m e d i a . T h e student will be able to select a m e d i u m best suited for the needs of a given d r a w i n g p r o b l e m . S t u d i e s will be p r o d u c e d that a r e suitable for later development a s w o r k s in other media. T h e c o u r s e is a c o m b i n a t i o n of location a n d studio time. Art 160 Fabric Printing 1 (F) (3,3,1) E x p l o r i n g traditional printing m e t h o d s i n c l u d i n g wax resist with b r u s h , tjanting and block. T i e - d y e t e c h n i q u e s will also be e x p l o r e d u s i n g natural a n d fibre-reactive d y e s . D e s i g n t e c h n i q u e s for e a c h m e d i u m will be s t u d i e d and there will be an introduction to the history of d y e d fabrics. Art 161 Fabric Printing II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A r t 160. E x p l o r i n g paste resist t e c h n i q u e s with stencils a n d silks c r e e n printing m e t h o d s . A p p l i q u e a n d quilting t e c h n i q u e s will be used for surface d e c o r a t i o n a n d d e s i g n m e t h o d s for each m e t h o d will be e x p l a i n e d . T h e r e will be an introduction to the history of printed fabrics. Art 162 Lettering a n d T y p o g r a p h y (F) (3,0,1) Historical origins of the alphabet, n u m e r a l s a n d letter styles. P r o p o r t i o n a n d s p a c i n g . Lettering i n d i c a t i o n in p e n cil, b r u s h , c h a l k s a n d felt markers. C o m p r e h e n s i v e a n d reproduction lettering. Art 163 Pottery I (F) (3,3,1) A n introduction to basic p r o c e s s e s of pottery, i n c l u d i n g p i n c h , dug-out, coil a n d slab, elementary wheel-work, glaze theory a n d a p p l i c a t i o n , kiln l o a d i n g a n d firing. Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 164 General Drawing II (S) (3,0,1) Art 167 Sculpture I (F) (3,3,1) T h e study of f u n d a m e n t a l s of s c u l p t u r e a n d three d i m e n sional form. E x e r c i s e s in s k e t c h i n g a n d m o d e l l i n g in clay o n the basis of direct observation from the m o d e l . T h e study of three d i m e n s i o n a l form t h r o u g h the investigation of inner structure s u r f a c e a n d m a s s . A n introduction to the p r o c e s s of p l a s t e r - m o u l d m a k e u p will be a c o m p o n e n t of the c o u r s e . Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transferable units to B . F . A . S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 168 Weaving I (F) (3,3,1) A n introduction to the materials a n d equipment of w e a v i n g , i n c l u d i n g the p r o c e s s of felting. S t u d y of primitive l o o m s a n d Tapestry weaving. T h e history of weaving. Art 169 Weaving II (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 168. Introduction to the m e c h a n i c a l l o o m . T h e b a s i c weaves a n d their derivatives, pattern drafting, g a u z e a n d leno weaves. A n a p p r o a c h to texture a n d c o l o u r . G a r m e n t weaving. Art 170 Studio Production I (S) (3,3,1) A basic c o u r s e in g r a p h i c arts p r o c e s s e s for g r a p h i c d e s i g n e r s , i n c l u d i n g letterpress, gravure, l i t h o g r a p h i c a n d silkscreen r e p r o d u c t i o n . Instruction in the t e c h n o l o g y of c o l o u r r e p r o d u c t i o n by four c o l o u r p r o c e s s a n d by p r e s e p a r a t i o n . S t u d e n t s will p r o d u c e line a n d halftone negatives and perform basic negative stripping and s i l k s c r e e n printing. Field trips to printers a n d plate makers. Prerequisite: Art 154. Further exploration of d r a w i n g m e d i a and t e c h n i q u e s with an e m p h a s i s o n a m o r e individual a n d interpretive a p p r o a c h , d e v e l o p i n g themes for d r a w i n g s a i m e d at illustration a n d r e p r o d u c t i o n . S t u d y of d r a w i n g styles a n d m o d e s of g r a p h i c e x p r e s s i o n , interpretive stylization a n d distortion. D r a w i n g with pen a n d ink; w a s h e s , ink a n d b r u s h , felt markers, m i x e d media. S t u d y of mass, light a n d dark, plane, d e p t h a n d s p a c e , and their g r a p h i c representation t h r o u g h various d r a w i n g techniques. Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 165 Pottery II (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 163 Further study of wheelwork with progressively more advanced shapes and designs. A n introduction to glaze theory and the history of c e r a m i c s a r o u n d the w o r l d . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 166 Anatomy I (F) (3,0,1) Art 171 Painting I (F) (3,0,1) Investigation of the characteristics a n d possibilities of painting m e d i a t h r o u g h e x e r c i s e s a n d e x p e r i m e n t s d e a l i n g with paint chemistry, m i x i n g , a p p l i c a t i o n a n d control. D e v e l opment of k n o w l e d g e of e l e m e n t s of picture m a k i n g s u c h as f o r m , c o m p o s i t i o n a n d structure, c o l o u r , v o l u m e a n d s p a c e through projects u s i n g figurative, abstract a n d non-figurative themes. G r o u p a n d o n e - t o - o n e d i s c u s s i o n s a n d a n a l y s i s of the student's o w n objectives, p r o b l e m s regarding imagery, content, m e t h o d s , scale, m e d i a a n d materials. E x a m i n a t i o n of traditional a n d c o n t e m p o r a r y m e t h o d s a n d styles through slides, personal research, gallery a n d studio visits. Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B . F . A . S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 172 Painting II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 171. T e a c h i n g will be c o n c e n t r a t e d o n d r a w i n g the b o n e s a n d m u s c l e s to enable the students to gain insight of their f u n c tions s o they will be able to a p p l y this k n o w l e d g e in their F i n e a n d A p p l i e d Arts C o u r s e s . C o n t i n u e d experiment with new a n d traditional painting m e d i a through individual a n d g r o u p projects, investigating possibilities of m i x e d m e d i a , large scale, e n v i r o n m e n t a l a n d d i m e n s i o n a l paintings, e t c . G r o u p critiques a n d lectures, artist visitors a n d studio a n d gallery visits a n d field trips, a c c u m u l a t i o n of personal ideas a n d information in sketch b o o k s , preliminary s k e t c h e s a n d series of w o r k s . Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B . F . A . S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U a n d U B C . T h e main p u r p o s e of this d r a w i n g c o u r s e is t o teach the students to draw a n d u n d e r s t a n d the h u m a n body. 53 Art 174 Sculpture II (S) (3,3,1) prints M o s t work will be p r o d u c e d in black a n d white, with s o m e d i s c u s s i o n of the use of c o l o u r e d inks. Prerequisite: Art 167. N o t e : T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units t o the B . F . A S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Further study a n d practice of sculpture, investigating t h r e e - d i m e n s i o n a l f o r m , i n t r o d u c t i o n to w o o d c a r v i n g with emphasis on basic design concepts and individual expression. Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F A . S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 175 Photography for the G r a p h i c Arts (F) (3,0,1) B a s i c p h o t o g r a p h y with e m p h a s i s o n f u n d a m e n t a l camera a n d d a r k r o o m p r o c e d u r e s to prepare students for A r t s 176. Instruction in 3 5 m m c a m e r a operations as a n assist in g r a p h i c d e s i g n a n d illustration. Art 176 Photography for Visual Communications (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 175. Instruction in basic advertising a n d photo-illustration Creative p r o c e d u r e s in using a d v a n c e d B / W photography. Effective e x p o s u r e a n d c o m p o s i t i o n a l skills in c o l o u r film Art 177 Graphic Design I (F) (3,3,1) A n introduction to d e s i g n elements (shape, line, value, texture, colour) to demonstrate the versatility and a p p l i c a t i o n of each. E x e r c i s e s to develop a s o u n d g r a s p of design p r i n c i ples a n d to e n c o u r a g e experiment a n d d i s c o v e r y as well as how these elements work in c o m b i n a t i o n . M e d i a will include p e n c i l , paint, c o l l a g e materials a n d m i x e d m e d i a . Art 178 Design II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 158 Further study of d e s i g n principles, pictorial organization, characteristics of visual form a n d m e d i a E x t e n s i v e study of form and c o l o u r c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s as a means of e x p r e s s i o n and c o m m u n i c a t i o n of m o o d s , attitudes a n d a s s o c i a t i o n s derived from nonvisual e x p e r i e n c e s . Study of form s y m b o l i s m a n d c o n t e m p o r a r y society. Introduction t o t h r e e - d i m e n s i o n a l s p a c e a n d form. E x p e r i m e n t s with various materials a n d exploration of the principles of design as a p p l i e d to crafts, fine a n d applied arts. Note: T h i s c o u r s e c a r r i e s 1.5 transfer units to the B . F . A . S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 179 Graphic Design II (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 177. Further study of d e s i g n principles, pictorial o r g a n i z a t i o n , characteristics of visual form. C o m b i n i n g d e s i g n elements of the previous semester with the new elements of t y p o g r a p h y a n d p h o t o g r a p h y . M e d i a will i n c l u d e a w i d e variety of materials a n d an experimental and inventive a p p r o a c h will be stressed. Art 182 Printmaking I (F) (3,0,1) A f o u n d a t i o n c o u r s e for those with little or no e x p e r i e n c e A n i n t r o d u c t i o n t o the basic t e c h n i q u e s of h a r d g r o u n d , softg r o u n d , drypoint a n d aquatint. L i n o , w o o d , relief a n d m o n o 54 Art 183 Printmaking II (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of Art 182 with e m p h a s i s o n the study of black a n d white a n d c o l o u r printing m e t h o d s . S t u d y of ink formulation a n d g r i n d i n g s i n g l e a n d multiple plates a n d the c o l l o g r a p h . D i s c u s s i o n of h i s t o r i c a l a n d c o n t e m p o r a r y a p p r o a c h e s to i m a g e - m a k i n g will be o n g o i n g . Transferable t o S F U a n d U B C . Art 184 Life Drawing II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 152 Further study of d r a w i n g f r o m the direct o b s e r v a t i o n of the h u m a n figure. E x e r c i s e s in perceiving a n d g r a p h i c a l l y interpreting the elements of plane, m a s s rhythm a n d f o r m ; relating perceptual elements to d r a w i n g m e d i a . R e p o r t a g e of visual e x p e r i e n c e a n d g r a p h i c interpretation of p e r s o n a l attitudes. Investigation of more c o m p l e x d r a w i n g t e c h n i q u e s and materials. P e r c e i v i n g g r a p h i c elements in life f o r m a n d action; d r a w i n g from m e m o r y a n d imaginative reflection u p o n visual e x p e r i e n c e . Student's individual e x p e r i m e n t a t i o n with d r a w i n g materials related to effects a i m e d at. Note This c o u r s e carries 1 5 tranter S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . units to the B . F . A . Tranferable t o S F U a n d U B C . V Art 185 Design C o n c e p t s I (F) (3,0,1) A n introduction to basic d e s i g n principles a n d the p r o c e s s e s t h r o u g h w h i c h ideas m a y b e translated into effective visual imagery. T o p i c s will i n c l u d e b a s i c c o l o u r theory, m a n i p u l a t i o n of d e s i g n elements to create visual unity, s o u r c e s of imagery, stylization a n d a b s t r a c t i o n , e x p l o i tation of m e d i a characteristics, e n r i c h i n g f o r m - v o c a b u l a r y and the development of personal m o d e s of e x p r e s s i o n . Art 189 Design C o n c e p t s II (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 185. A continuation of Art 185 with a d d e d emphasis on problemsolving a n d personal m o d e s of e x p r e s s i o n . S o m e further exploration of t h r e e - d i m e n s i o n a l c o n c e r n s . A n e x t e n s i o n of c o l o u r theories into subjective h a n d l i n g . D e s i g n i n g for s p e c i f i c p r o c e s s e s or functions. Further e x p l o r a t i o n of the design p r o c e s s , as it applies to a variety of media, t e c h n i q u e s a n d d i s c i p l i n e s . At the c o n c l u s i o n of this c o u r s e students will possess a resource s k e t c h b o o k containing material for further exploitation o n a n individual basis Art 190 Spinning a n d Dyeing (F) (3,3,1) A c o u r s e in using different m e t h o d s of p r o d u c i n g yarn from a wide variety of fibres. E m p h a s i s o n the ability to d y e yarn as well as the u s e of c o l o u r a n d texture in textile production. Art 192 Applied Design I (F) (3,3,1) A n introduction to visual c o m m u n i c a t i o n a n d the role of p r o f e s s i o n a l d e s i g n e r s . D e s i g n p r i n c i p l e s , layout t e c h n i q u e s , learning tools, methods, materials and media. E m p h a s i s will be o n c o n c e p t rather than o n " c o m p r e h e n s i v e " finish. r Art 193 Applied Design II (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 177 a n d Art 192. A c o u r s e in t e c h n i q u e s relating to presentation of ideas at a p r o f e s s i o n a l level. M a k i n g rough layouts a n d tight c o m p s . Ideas evaluated against criteria e s t a b l i s h e d . taneous a n d s u s t a i n e d a p p r o a c h e s to a variety of themes derived from nature, objects a n d the imagination. S t u d e n t s s h o u l d be prepared to b e c o m e involved in o c c a s i o n a l g r o u p or set projects. Investigation of materials, c o l o u r , p r o b l e m s of pictorial structure and c o m p o s i t i o n , the art of the past a n d present. Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C Art 204 A d v a n c e d Stone Carving I (F) (3,3,1) Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . A d m i s s i o n by instructor. Art 251 Illustration Media (F) (3,3,1) A study of traditional a n d c o n t e m p o r a r y a p p r o a c h e s to stone c a r v i n g i n c l u d i n g e x p e r i e n c e with h a n d tools, a i r powered c a r v i n g g u n s and grinders, a n d electrical tools. T h e investigation of personal m o d e s of e x p r e s s i o n as related to the stone c a r v i n g p r o c e s s . E m p h a s i s o n t h r e e - d i m e n s i o n a l design c o n c e p t s , the efficient use of tools, materials a n d equipment. Students will be required to purchase their marble from the c o l l e g e . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 206 Foundry Practice I (S) (3,3,1) A d m i s s i o n by Instructor. E x p e r i e n c e in the u s e of the lost wax m e t h o d of c a s t i n g u s i n g c e r a m i c shell m o l d s . Information for d e s i g n i n g a n d operating a small f o u n d r y suitable for c a s t i n g pieces in a l u m i n u m a n d / o r bronze. Transferable to S F U . Art 216 A d v a n c e d Editioning - Intaglio a n d Relief I (F) (3,0,1) A d m i s s i o n by instructor. D e s i g n e d t o meet t h e n e e d s of the student/artist w h o . although trained as an image maker, has not matured as a printmaker o w i n g to lack of a c c e s s to suitable equipment, facilities a n d g u i d a n c e T h e student will d e v e l o p p r o c e d u r e s arising from individual needs, e n a b l i n g the p r o d u c t i o n of finished editions of prints a n d a n e x p a n s i o n of k n o w l e d g e with respect to the intaglio p r o c e s s . E x t e n d e d studio time will be a feature of this c o u r s e . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 217 A d v a n c e d Editioning - Intaglio a n d Relief II (S) (3,0,1) A d m i s s i o n by instructor. Essentially a c o n t i n u a t i o n of Art 216, this c o u r s e will concentrate o n the n e e d s of the individual w h o w i s h e s to develop personal e d i t i o n i n g p r o c e d u r e s a n d bridge the gap between the student-artist a n d the exhibiting-artist. T h e practical problems of establishing a relationship with a gallery and putting on a one-man show will be d i s c u s s e d as will other methods of g a i n i n g recognition b y appropriate a g e n c i e s . It is anticipated that practising artists a n d gallery personnel will appear as guest speakers. Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 250 Painting III (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 172. Students will be e n c o u r a g e d to be self-motivated a n d to develop towards a personal style. T h e investigation of painting media o n the basis of student interest and preference. S p o n - Prerequisite: Art 164. Art 184. T o introduce the student w h o has a c h i e v e d a c o m p e t e n t degree of d r a w i n g skills to the m e d i u m s n e c e s s a r y to illustrative t e c h n i q u e s . T h e c o u r s e d e v e l o p s t h r o u g h stages from pencil, pen & ink, ink & w a s h , water c o l o u r s a n d eel vinyl. T h e use of the illustrator's tools a n d p r o c e s s e s s u c h as repellants, air b r u s h , m i x e d media, etc.. are reviewed. Art 252 Applied Design III (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: A r t 179 a n d Art 193. T h e a p p l i c a t i o n of d e s i g n a n d rendering skills t o the development of s o l u t i o n s to print advertising E x p l o r e s c o m p a n i e s , p r o d u c t s , s e r v i c e s , c o r p o r a t e identification a n d their relationship to print advertising layouts a n d tight c o m p s p r e p a r e d for c l a s s critiques. Art 253 Applied Design IV (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite' A r t 252. A d v e r t i s i n g a g e n c y oriented. T h e interweaving of illustration, p h o t o g r a p h y , g r a p h i c s a n d television into advertising, p a c k a g i n g , a n d point of p u r c h a s e C o n s u l t a t i o n o n student portfolio. Art 255 Painting IV (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A r t 250. Further study a n d practice of painting in the m e d i u m of the student's individual c h o i c e S u s t a i n e d d e v e l o p m e n t of ideas a n d themes through s k e t c h b o o k s ; n o t e b o o k s , studies, etc D i s c u s s i o n will take p l a c e o n a o n e - t o - o n e tutorial basis M o d e l s will be available for nude a n d c o s t u m e painting. C o n t i n u i n g investigation of c o n t e m p o r a r y art a n d materials (as well as talks o n artists from the past a n d present) S t u d i o a n d gallery visits. Note. This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 257 Sculpture III (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 174. A study of c l a s s i c a l a n d m o d e r n s c u l p t u r e ; the investigation of m o d e r n sculpture forms through the student s work; experimentation a n d work in several media; metal, plastics, w o o d , c l o t h , paper, stone a n d those p r o d u c i n g both soft a n d hard t h r e e - d i m e n s i o n a l forms a n d c o n s t r u c t i o n s . Introduction to basic foundry t e c h n i q u e s i n c l u d i n g b r o n z e c a s t i n g . Introduction to marble c a r v i n g using h a n d a n d p o w e r tools. Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B F.A. S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to U B C a n d S F U 55 Art 262 Drawing III (F) (3,0,1) Art 267 Weaving III (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A r t 184. Prerequisite: A r t 169. Life d r a w i n g with e m p h a s i s on an interpretive a n d creative a p p r o a c h , study in depth of d r a w i n g t e c h n i q u e s a n d styles in reference to c o n t e m p o r a r y trends in fine a p p l i e d arts. Further e x p l o r a t i o n of g r a p h i c elements derived from observation of the h u m a n b o d y , a c t i o n a n d c h a r a c t e r to e x p a n d perception a n d control of different m e d i a in order to develop a personal style in d r a w i n g . A d v a n c e d l o o m t e c h n i q u e s : d o u b l e weave, M o o r m a n technique, painted warp, strip-weaves, Ikat. E x p l o r a t i o n s of t e c h n i q u e s with i n c r e a s i n g e m p h a s i s o n c r a f t s m a n s h i p a n d design in order to create effective wallhangings. Study of c o n t e m p o r a r y work in B . C . a n d a b r o a d . Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 263 Drawing IV (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 262. Further study and practice of interpretive and creative life d r a w i n g , i n c l u d i n g stylization a n d abstraction of human form; d e s i g n element in figurative d r a w i n g , experiments with d r a w i n g m e d i a . Individual a n d c l a s s c r i t i c i s m s , d i s c u s s i o n s and d e m o n s t r a t i o n s regarding t e c h n i q u e s and e x p e r i m e n t a tion with materials to b r o a d e n the individual's use of a wide range of materials. S t u d e n t s will be e n c o u r a g e d to be selfmotivated a n d d e v e l o p a personal style or d i r e c t i o n in their work. Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B . F . A . S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 265 Sculpture IV (S) (3,3,1) Art 268 Weaving IV (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 267. S t u d y of the evolution of n o n - l o o m p r o c e s s e s . C r e a t i n g fibrestructures with a variety of t e c h n i q u e s : c o i l i n g , c r o c h e t , plaiting, basketry a n d S p r a n g . E m p h a s i s will be o n threed i m e n s i o n a l design c o n c e p t s . Field trips to weaver studios, art galleries a n d potential work situations. Art 269 Experimental Illustration I (S) (3,3,1) • Prerequisite: A r t 251. T a k i n g the t e c h n i q u e s outlined in 251 into finished illustrations for books, magazines, murals, etc. A.further expansion of the use of m e d i u m s to include m i x e d m e d i a a n d oils. Art 270 Fabrics for Interiors (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 267, Art 284 or instructor's p e r m i s s i o n . A course to develop the aesthetic and functional properties of textiles and to become knowledgeable of weave constructions to be able to p r o d u c e fabric for w i n d o w s , walls, furniture a n d floors. Prerequisite: Art 257. A d v a n c e d p r o b l e m s in sculptural forms. S t u d e n t s will be e n c o u r a g e d to experiment in the m e d i a of their c h o i c e a n d to d e v e l o p their individual style. Field trips to galleries a n d , w h e n p o s s i b l e , to s c u l p t o r s ' studios. Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C 56 Art 271 T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies III (F) (3,6,1) Prerequisite: A r t 157. A d d e d e m p h a s i s o n personal c o n c e r n s a n d self-generated projects. In Printmaking there will be a c o n c e n t r a t i o n on the study of intaglio, relief printing, d i m e n s i o n a l prints, photographic techniques, u n - i n k e d e m b o s s i n g , etc. S p o n t a n e o u s and sustained a p p r o a c h e s to a variety of thematic c o n c e r n s derived from a broad spectrum of visual a n d cerebral stimuli will be dealt with in painting as students embark o n both individual and group projects. T h e weekly forum will continue. Art 272 T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies IV (S) (3,6,1) Prerequisite: A r t 271 Students will be e x p e c t e d to participate in p l a n n i n g their o w n areas of c o n c e n t r a t i o n a n d there will be an i n c r e a s e d e m p h a s i s o n c o n t e m p o r a r y c o n c e r n s as they exist locally, nationally a n d internationally. P r o b l e m s of c o p i n g with e x h i bitions, c o m p e t i t i o n s , dealers, galleries, etc. will b e c o v e r e d and the weekly F o r u m will continue. M o r e a d v a n c e d c o n c e p t s and techniques will be investigated a c c o r d i n g to individual a n d group needs. Art 273 Pottery III (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: A r t 165. Further e x p l o r a t i o n of pottery t e c h n i q u e s , particularly wheelwork a n d glaze materials; study of c o n t e m p o r a r y styles a n d creative c e r a m i c s . Field trips to c e r a m i c studios a n d art-galleries. Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B . F . A . S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable t o S F U a n d U B C . Art 274 Pottery IV (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 273. Art 280 Portfolio Studio (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: A r t 252, Art 278. Students will prepare portfolios a n d s a m p l e s for d i s p l a y as well as d e s i g n i n g a n d p r o d u c i n g s p e c i f i c items. Projects will be selected to capitalize o n the student's a c q u i r e d k n o w l e d g e a n d skills a n d will involve their c o n t a c t with o u t s i d e agents a n d s u p p l i e r s . T h e student will be r e s p o n s i b l e from initial c o n c e p t to finished product. Art 282 Printmaking III (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 183 or instructor's p e r m i s s i o n . A c o m p r e h e n s i v e study of intaglio a n d relief printing methods, this c o u r s e is primarily d e s i g n e d for the a d v a n c e d e t c h i n g student. Other areas that c o m e under c o n s i d e r a t i o n will i n c l u d e d i m e n s i o n a l prints, p h o t o g r a p h i c t e c h n i q u e s , uninked embossing, etc. Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B . F . A . S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 283 Printmaking IV (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A r t 282 o r instructor's p e r m i s s i o n . D e s i g n e d for the a d v a n c e d printmaking student, the main c o n c e r n will be with c o m b i n a t i o n t e c h n i q u e s b a s e d u p o n the individual's needs. T h i s c o u r s e will also help familiarize the student with print e x h i b i t i o n s , c o m p e t i t i o n s , printmaking societies, w o r k s h o p s , e t c . Increasing e m p h a s i s o n c r a f t s m a n s h i p a n d d e s i g n . A n exploration of more c o m p l e x forms, mainly m a d e o n the wheel; development of original glazes. Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B . F . A S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 277 Environmental Design I (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: A r t 164, Art 179. T h i s s e c t i o n is intended to give insight into the proc e d u r e s involved in the d e s i g n of s m a l l c o m m e r c i a l retail structures s u c h a s boutiques a n d service s h o p s in s h o p p i n g centres a n d malls. M o d e l - b u i l d i n g t e c h n i q u e s are studied as well as the use of c o l o u r in m e r c h a n d i s i n g a n d d i s p l a y . D u r i n g this s e c t i o n the e m p h a s i s is o n exterior d e s i g n . Art 278 Studio Production II (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 170. S u p e r v i s e d exploration of g r a p h i c arts a n d printing t e c h n i q u e s a n d the a p p l i c a t i o n of these to real or simulated r e p r o d u c t i o n p r o b l e m s . C o n t a c t with o u t s i d e trades a n d suppliers in the c o u r s e of c o m p l e t i n g a s s i g n m e n t s . Art 279 Environmental Design II (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: A r t 277. For the duration of this s e c t i o n the student will work o n the d e s i g n of the interior of a s h o p plus methods of presentation. T h e p s y c h o l o g y of c o l o u r in m e r c h a n d i s i n g will be c o v e r e d as well as the use of i n d o o r s i g n i n g a n d i n s i g n i a for s h o p identification. D e s i g n e r - c l i e n t relationships will be d i s c u s s e d with m e t h o d s of presentation. Art 284 Fabric Printing III (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 161. R e p e a t y a r d a g e s c r e e n p r i n t i n g t e c h n i q u e s will b e studied, using paper, wax, laquer and p h o t o g r a p h i c stencils. Blue a n d brown printing methods will be studied a l o n g with relief fabric effects s u c h a s trapunto a n d quilting. Art 285 Fabric Printing IV (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 284. Direct paint-on effects will be studied, u s i n g fibre-reactive dyes, french alcohol and disperse dyes. Three-dimensional fabric c o n s t r u c t i o n will be e x p l o r e d . Art 295 Advertising Illustration I (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 164, Art 184. A c o m p r e h e n s i v e study of c o n t e m p o r a r y illustration t e c h n i q u e s a n d materials from original c o n c e p t to final presentation. Art 298 Advertising Illustration II (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 295. Further e x p l o r a t i o n of illustration t e c h n i q u e s using a variety of m e d i u m s a n d t e c h n i q u e s with the e m p h a s i s o n actual studio w o r k i n g m e t h o d s . 57 Business Management Programs Business Management Programs Instructional Faculty B a r b a z u k , W m . , B.A., B . E d . , T e a c h i n g Certificate (Sask.) Berrington, Terry, B u s . Mgmt. 1972 ( C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ) Carter, A . W . , B . S c . (Alta.), C & G Cert. ( E n g i e l d T e c h . College, London) Fane, G r a h a m , Dipl. T e c h . ( A d m i n . M g m t . B.C.I.T.), R.I.A. ( U B C ) 1978 Farrell, G . , Dipl.T. (Fin. Mgmt., B . C . I . T ) , M . B . C . ( G e n . B u s . , S F U ) , R.I.A. Flanders, A., B . C o m m . Goyette, R o n , R.I.A. 1978 G r u e n , F., B M . ( R e n s s e l a e r P o l m Inst.), M . S c . (Waterloo) Kilian, C , B.A. ( C o l u m b i a ) , M.A. ( S F U ) K u b i c e k , R a m o n , B.A. ( C o n c o r d i a University) 1970 L a C o s t e , W . H . , D i p l o m a T e c h . , (B.C.I.T.), R.I.A. LeFlufy, R . C . L o b l a w , J . D . , B.A. (Toronto) M a c K a y , R . B . , L L . B . (Alta.), B . C o m m . ( U B C ) Marshall, J.R., D i p l o m a - O p e r a t i o n s Mgmt. (B.C.I.T.), S y s t e m s A n a l y s i s & D e s i g n ( C o l l e g e of N e w C a l e d o n i a ) M c K i e , C , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) , Pro. T e a c h i n g Certificate M e g g y , Margaret, B.A. ( U B C ) 1970 M i c h a e l s , L., B . S c , B.Ed., M . E d . (Alta.) Millar, David, B. C o m m . ( U B C ) 1973 Moseley, B., B.A., M . B . A . (Calif.) N i c h o l s , R . C , B . C o m m . ( A l t a ) , R.I.A. Norris, R., C A . (Inst, of C A . ) Oberndorf, A G . , B.S. (U. of New Haven), M.I.M. (Thunderbird G r a d . , S c h o o l of International B u s i n e s s ) O ' C o n n o r , R., B u s . A d m i n . Degree (Ryerson) Pennie, Willene, M . E d . (Western W a s h i n g t o n ) 1975 Priester, C L , F . C . B . A . (Queen's), B.A. (Sir G e o r g e William), M.A. ( U B C ) R e n n i e , R., B.S., M.S. ( B r i g h a m Y o u n g ) , P h . D . ( U B C ) Sayre, J . , B . S . B . A . (Denver), M.A. (Boston) S m y t h , W m . , B . C o m m . (Dalhousie) Taylor, M., B . S c . (Alta.) Tordoff, Peter, M . S c . (U. of N.S.W., Australia) T o w s o n , K.V., B . S c . ( S F U ) Van N o r m a n , D.L., B.A., M.A. ( U B C ) Vick, A . H . , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) W i l s o n , R o b i n , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) 1973 Y a c k n e s s , H.B., B . C o m m . ( U B C ) , M . B . A . ( S F U ) , C A . General Information T h e p r o g r a m / c o u r s e offerings of this department attempt to satisfy the f o l l o w i n g n e e d s : A . A H i g h S c h o o l graduate with 1 - 3 years b u s i n e s s e x p e r i e n c e , p l a n n i n g a career in b u s i n e s s / i n d u s t r y w h o desires a c o m p r e h e n s i v e b u s i n e s s e d u c a t i o n (2 years fulltime). B. A H i g h S c h o o l graduate with 4 - 6 years b u s i n e s s e x p e r i e n c e w h o d e s i r e s a theoretical a n d p r a c t i c a l b u s i n e s s e d u c a t i o n (2 years part-time). C . P e r s o n s with a m i n i m u m of 7 years b u s i n e s s e x p e r i e n c e in industry, government, the military or private b u s i n e s s ventures w h o desire a c o n c i s e formal b u s i n e s s e d u c a t i o n (10 month full-time). D. P e r s o n s presently e m p l o y e d in b u s i n e s s , w h o require additional formal b u s i n e s s e d u c a t i o n or u p g r a d i n g (parttime, d a y or evening). E. P e r s o n s wanting to take c o u r s e s that carry credit towards n o n - C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e certificate a n d d i p l o m a p r o g r a m s (part-time, d a y or evening). F. P e r s o n s interested in furthering their k n o w l e d g e in a particular area of b u s i n e s s (part-time, d a y or evening). These programs/courses provide y o u with a comprehensive e d u c a t i o n in basic managerial skills. T h e y have a practical foundation for those w h o wish to enter a career in b u s i n e s s or to e x p a n d their career in b u s i n e s s either as an i n d e p e n d e n t entrepreneur or as a prospective e m p l o y e e - m a n a g e r . A more detailed d e s c r i p t i o n of the p r o g r a m s / c o u r s e s f o l l o w s (refer to c o r r e s p o n d i n g s e c t i o n A - F), or c a n be o b t a i n e d by c a l l ing the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t Department at 986-1911, local 389. W h y Business at C a p i l a n o College? 1. Y o u will truly " l i v e " b u s i n e s s in o u r p r o g r a m , rather than merely " l e a r n " it. T h e majority of our faculty have full-time j o b s in b u s i n e s s in their area of s p e c i a l t y — t h e y t e a c h for us o n a part-time basis only. T h e y have the p r a c t i c a l u p to-date k n o w l e d g e that y o u require to b e a s u c c e s s in business. 2. O u r graduates get meaningful jobs q u i c k l y . In the past, 9 3 % of our graduates have j o b s in their a r e a of s p e c i a l t y within 2 months of g r a d u a t i o n . T h i s is not by a c c i d e n t . O u r p r o g r a m s have b e e n d e s i g n e d by o u r A d v i s o r y C o m m i t t e e c o n s i s t i n g of twelve b u s i n e s s p r o f e s s i o n a l s . E m p l o y e r s r e c o g n i z e the quality of these p r o g r a m s . W e , the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t Department, a r r a n g e o n c a m p u s interviews for our g r a d s a n d train t h e m in j o b s e a r c h t e c h n i q u e s . With 100 graduates per year, we c a n afford a level of service that larger institutions c a n n o t afford. 3. W e d o not lecture to g r o u p s of 200-300 students. E v e n with the extreme budget restrictions, our c l a s s s i z e for lectures a n d labs d o e s not e x c e e d 33 students. 4. A l t h o u g h we d e m a n d a great d e a l of o u r students, w e a l s o d e m a n d a n equal level of support f r o m o u r faculty a n d staff. A. T W O Y E A R F U L L TIME P R O G R A M S S e p t e m b e r e a c h year: 1. 2. 3. 4. beginning in Marketing Management Program Accounting/Financial Management Program Administrative M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m Computer Systems Management Program A C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e D i p l o m a is a w a r d e d u p o n s u c c e s s f u l c o m p l e t i o n of the program requirements (85.5 credit hours) as outlined below. Eligiblity T h e s e intensive programs require a m i n i m u m of 30 h o u r s per week in c l a s s a n d 30 h o u r s per week o u t s i d e of class. B e c a u s e of the limited s p a c e in these p r o g r a m s , interested p e r s o n s s h o u l d a p p l y by A p r i l 1st. Entry to these p r o g r a m s is based on business experience, high s c h o o l grades, maturity, interest a n d aptitude. G r a d e 12 graduation with a m i n i m u m of C+ in E n g l i s h 12 a n d a C in A l g e b r a 11 is generally required, a l t h o u g h a d m i s s i o n may be granted to mature students w h o c a n provide evidence of p r o b a b l e s u c c e s s in the p r o g r a m . Career Opportunities S u c c e s s f u l c o m p l e t i o n of this p r o g r a m will provide y o u with a wide variety of career opportunities. 1. Marketing Management T h i s particular program prepares y o u for a wide variety of c h a l l e n g i n g p o s i t i o n s requiring s p e c i a l skills in s u c h fields as retailing, b u y i n g , advertising, sales a n d marketing research. P r e v i o u s graduates have a c q u i r e d the f o l l o w i n g positions u p o n graduation: S a l e s Representative Administration Manager Property M a n a g e r Assistant Office Manager Department M a n a g e r Promotion Manager M a n u f a c t u r e r ' s Representative Real Estate Sales 2. Accounting/Financial Management S u c c e s s f u l c o m p l e t i o n of this p r o g r a m will also provide a variety of career opportunities in financial p l a n n i n g , budget preparation a n d financial c o n t r o l . S p e c i a l i s t s in a c c o u n t i n g c o m m o n l y enter middle management positions in financial a c c o u n t i n g , c o s t a c c o u n t i n g , internal audit a n d budget preparation. G r a d u a t e s will receive transfer credit for their work at the C o l l e g e towards their certification as a C . G . A . or R.I.A. G r a d u a t e s c a n expect to obtain e m p l o y m e n t in the public a n d private sector in investment, b a n k i n g , real estate a n d related industries. Previous graduates have a c q u i r e d the following positions upon graduation: C o n s u m e r T a x a t i o n Inspector Account Coordinator — V.S.E. Collection Officer Accountant Assistant M a n a g e r Project C o s t A c c o u n t a n t Financial M a n a g e r Camp Controller 1. Marketing Management Program First Term (Fall) B M 158 B M 170 B M 172 B M 175 B M 182 B M 184 C M N S 150 L A P 201 Marketing I Math of Finance Intro, to B u s i n e s s I Organizational Behaviour Systems Analysis Accounting I Business Communications Reading Dynamics Second Term (Spring) B M 159 B M 171 B M 176 B M 180 B M 185 C M N S 152 E C O N 200 Marketing II B u s i n e s s Statistics Intro, to B u s i n e s s II Intro, to Data P r o c e s s i n g A c c o u n t i n g II Report Writing Macro Economics 3. Administrative Management Third Term (Fall) This program provides a solid core of b u s i n e s s m a n a g e ment k n o w l e d g e a n d skills w h i c h c a n easily be fitted into any area of the b u s i n e s s c o m m u n i t y . T h i s option is particularly valuable for students w h o have a s p e c i a l interest in small or self-owned b u s i n e s s e s . G r a d u a t e s of this program c a n expect to find e m p l o y m e n t in s u c h diverse areas as p l a n n i n g , b a n k i n g , f i n a n c e , p r o d u c t i o n , real estate, p e r s o n n e l a n d industrial relations. P r e v i o u s graduates have a c q u i r e d the following positions u p o n graduation: BM BM BM BM BM BM Stock B r o k e r Store M a n a g e r P e r s o n n e l Officer S a l e s Representative Travel C o n s u l t a n t Assistant Store M a n a g e r Income T a x Officer M a n a g e m e n t S e r v i c e s Officer ( F . B . D . B . ) Financial P l a n n e r Administrative Officer 230 240 267 271 273 275 Salesmanship Business Law I Finance Merchandising Advertising I Marketing R e s e a r c h Fourth Term (Spring) BM BM BM BM BM BM 232 253 276 277 278 279 Transportation & Distribution L a b o u r Relations Marketing M a n a g e m e n t International Marketing Sales M a n a g e m e n t Advertising II 2. Accounting/Financial Management Program First Term (Fall) 4. Computer Systems Management T h e growth of the c o m p u t e r a n d m i c r o c o m p u t e r industry has been phenomenal during the past few years. This rapid growth has p r o d u c e d a serious shortage of qualified c o m p u ter personnel. S m a l l organizations cannot afford specialists in e a c h segment of computer application. T h e y require a person trained in systems analysis, p r o g r a m m i n g , the a p p l i cation of computers and a clear understanding of all management objectives. This program provides the student with the comprehensive training required to satisfy this relatively new business need. Previous graduates have a c q u i r e d the following positions upon graduation: Analyst P r o g r a m m e r Systems Analyst S a l e s Representative Operations Manager T e c h n i c a l Consultant BM BM BM BM 158 170 172 175 BM 182 B M 184 C M N S 150 L A P 201 Marketing I Math of F i n a n c e Intro, to B u s i n e s s I Organizational B e h a v i o u r Systems Analysis Accounting I Business Communications Reading Dynamics Second Term (Spring) B M 159 B M 171 B M 176 B M 180 B M 185 C M N S 152 E C O N 200 Marketing II B u s i n e s s Statistics Intro, to B u s i n e s s II Intro, to Data P r o c e s s i n g A c c o u n t i n g II Report Writing Macro Economics Third Term (Fall) Detailed Program of Studies T h e first three options ( M a r k e t i n g / A c c o u n t i n g / A d m i n i s tration) have a c o m m o n first year of general business studies, while the C o m p u t e r option c o n s i s t s of a two-year specialized program. BM BM BM BM BM BM 241 253 255 260 264 284 B u s i n e s s L a w II L a b o u r Relations Financial A c c o u n t i n g I Finance I Managerial A c c o u n t i n g I taxation I 59 Fourth Term (Spring) BM BM BM BM BM BM 256 261 265 274 280 285 F i n a n c i a l A c c o u n t i n g II F i n a n c e II Quantitative M e t h o d s M a n a g e r i a l A c c o u n t i n g II Auditing T a x a t i o n II 3. Administrative Management Program First Term (Fall) B M 158 Marketing I B M 170 Math of F i n a n c e B M 172 Intro, to B u s i n e s s I B M 175 Organizational Behaviour B M 180 Intro, to Data P r o c e s s i n g B M 184 Accounting I C M N S 150 B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n s Second Term (Spring) Marketing II B M 159 B u s i n e s s Statistics B M 171 Intro, to B u s i n e s s II B M 176 Systems Analysis B M 182 A c c o u n t i n g II B M 185 C M N S 152 Report Writing E C O N 200 M a c r o E c o n o m i c s Reading Dynamics L A P 201 Third Term (Fall) B M 163 B M 230 B M 275 B M 264 B M 240 B M 270 P r i n c i p l e s of S u p e r v i s i o n Salesmanship Marketing Research Managerial Accounting I Business Law I Personnel Management Fourth Term (Spring) BM BM BM BM BM 280 265 274 241 267 Auditing Quantitative M e t h o d s M a n a g e r i a l A c c o u n t i n g II B u s i n e s s L a w II Finance BM 253 Labour Relations 4. Computer Systems Management Program First Term (Fall) B M 154 B M 156 B M 172 B M 175 B M 180 B M 182 C M N S 150 P r o g r a m m i n g Stucture I Quantitative M e t h o d s I Intro, to B u s i n e s s I Organizational Behaviour Intro, to Data P r o c e s s i n g Systems Analysis I Business Communications Second Term (Spring) B M 155 B M 157 B M 160 B M 181 B M 188 B M 189 B M 190 L A P 201 P r o g r a m m i n g Structure II Quantitative M e t h o d s II Marketing " B A S I C " P r o g r a m m i n g II S y s t e m s A n a l y s i s II " C O B O L " Programming I Accounting I Reading Dynamics BM BM BM BM BM 243 244 293 295 298 Marketing Research A c c o u n t i n g II S y s t e m s Implementation I " B A S I C " P r o g r a m m i n g III Data B a s e M a n a g e m e n t S y s t e m s Fourth Term (Spring) B M 176 Intro, to B u s i n e s s II B M 206 " C O B O L " P r o g r a m m i n g III B M 230 Salesmanship B M 267 Finance B M 296 S y s t e m s Implementation II C M N S 152 Report Writing B. T W O Y E A R PART-TIME P R O G R A M S S e p t e m b e r and J a n u a r y e a c h year: . 1. 2. 3. 4. beginning in Marketing M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m Accounting/Financial Management Program Administrative M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m Computer Systems Management Program T h e s e p r o g r a m s require a m i n i m u m of 20 h o u r s per week in c l a s s and 15 hours per week outside of c l a s s . A d e s c r i p tion of these programs c a n be found a b o v e (in S e c t i o n A ) . T h e detailed c o u r s e requirements of these p r o g r a m s c a n be obtained by c a l l i n g the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t Department. B e c a u s e of the limited s p a c e in these p r o g r a m s , interested persons s h o u l d apply by M a y 1st and D e c e m b e r 1st r e s p e c tively. Entry to these p r o g r a m s is b a s e d o n h i g h s c h o o l grades, b u s i n e s s e x p e r i e n c e , maturity, interest a n d aptitude. A C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Certificate is a w a r d e d u p o n s u c c e s s f u l c o m p l e t i o n of the program requirements. C. FULL-TIME BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION (10 months) programs b e g i n n i n g in J u l y e a c h year. T h i s 10 month program is d e s i g n e d to offer a c o n c i s e b u s i n e s s training for mature students. T h i s p r o g r a m is seen as a type of "finishing p r o c e s s " where the student is provided with an opportunity to gain a clear understanding of b u s i n e s s principles a n d to refine a n d a d d to the p r a c t i c a l , o n - t h e - j o b e x p e r i e n c e that h e / s h e has previously a c q u i r e d . T h i s program a l l o w s the student to specialize in one of three areas of b u s i n e s s administration: 1. Marketing M a n a g e m e n t 2. A c c o u n t i n g / F i n a n c i a l M a n a g e m e n t 3. Administrative M a n a g e m e n t T h e unique feature of these p r o g r a m s is the credit given for military and civilian b u s i n e s s e x p e r i e n c e . In e s s e n c e , the advance credit allows o n e to take a c o m b i n a t i o n of first year a n d s e c o n d .year c o u r s e s ( p r e d o m i n a n t l y s e c o n d y e a r courses) a n d , u p o n s u c c e s s f u l c o m p l e t i o n , results in an A s s o c i a t e of Arts and S c i e n c e D i p l o m a (2 year d i p l o m a ) . Eligibility Potential students will have a m i n i m u m of 7 years business e x p e r i e n c e in i n d u s t r y , g o v e r n m e n t , e d u c a t i o n , private b u s i n e s s or the military. S i n c e enrolment in this p r o g r a m is limited, we r e c o m m e n d that y o u c o n t a c t the department by February 1st to arrange an interview with the P r o g r a m C o o r dinator. A c c e p t a n c e to this program is b a s e d o n b u s i n e s s e x p e r i e n c e , maturity, interest a n d aptitude. Career Opportunities A description of these p r o g r a m s c a n be f o u n d above in Section A. Financial Support ' Third Term (Fall) B M 205 B M 242 " C O B O L " P r o g r a m m i n g II Quantitative M e t h o d s III For a limited number of eligible students, financial support in the form of tuition a n d living e x p e n s e s is available from the C a n a d a E m p l o y m e n t a n d Immigration C e n t r e . After a c c e p - 60 t tance into the program by the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t Department of C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e , we suggest that y o u contact your local C . E . I . C . to investigate available financial support. T h e B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t Department supplies the textbooks for this program (on loan only) to all a c c e p t e d students. Detailed Program of Studies T h e B u s i n e s s Administration following three c o m p o n e n t s : P r o g r a m c o n s i s t s of the Part I - A n eight week preparatory period c o v e r i n g the months of J u l y a n d A u g u s t . Lectures will total 36 hours/week and be held between 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. T h e lectures will be c r o s s disciplinary and deal with five "introductory" topics — Introduction to B u s i n e s s , B o o k k e e p i n g , Written C o m m u nications, S p e e d R e a d i n g and B u s i n e s s M a t h e m a t i c s . Parts II and III - T h e Fall a n d S p r i n g terms will consist of 15 weeks of instruction e a c h . Lectures will total approximately 30 hours/week and may be held between 8:00 a.m. a n d 10:00 p.m. (the majority will be between 800 a.m. a n d 5:00 p.m.). In order to a l l o w for s o m e flexibility in meeting particular educational needs a n d to allow for diverse w o r k i n g backg r o u n d s , it is possible, with the approval of the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r , to substitute certain c o u r s e s in Parts II and III with other c o u r s e s offered by our department. Progress from Part I to Part II and then to Part III is dependent u p o n satisfactory performance a n d is subject to the approval of the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r . T h e required program of studies for e a c h of the options is detailed below. Part I - S u m m e r T e r m (July and August) Essentials of B o o k k e e p i n g Introduction to B u s i n e s s M a t h e m a t i c s Introduction to B u s i n e s s B u s i n e s s Writing Reading Dynamics Part II - Fall Term (September - December) Marketing Marketing I Introduction to B u s i n e s s I Accounting I Business Law I Merchandising I Advertising I Marketing R e s e a r c h Accounting/Finance Marketing I Introduction to B u s i n e s s I A c c o u n t i n g II Financial Accounting I Finance I Cost and Mgrl. Accounting I Taxation I Marketing M a n a g e m e n t Advertising II Accounting/Finance Introduction to B u s i n e s s II Introduction to Data P r o c e s s i n g Financial A c c o u n t i n g II F i n a n c e II C o s t and M g r l . A c c o u n t i n g II Auditing I T a x a t i o n II Administration Marketing II Intro, to B u s i n e s s II A c c o u n t i n g II Salesmanship I B u s i n e s s Law II F i n a n c e II Personnel Management D. PART-TIME CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M S S e p t e m b e r and J a n u a r y e a c h year: beginning in i. Provides a practical e x p o s u r e to the B a s i c Managerial Skills required in business. Students enroled in this program c o m p l e t e a series of eight c o u r s e s (two per term) over a two or three year period. W h i l e the particular s e q u e n c e of c o u r s e s is not rigid, the following s e q u e n c e is r e c o m m e n d e d : Term 1: B S M G 187: Introduction to B u s i n e s s B S M G 184: A c c o u n t i n g I Term 2: B S M G 185: A c c o u n t i n g II B S M G 175: O r g a n i z a t i o n a l Behaviour Term 3: B S M G 160: M a r k e t i n g B S M G 180: Introduction to Data P r o c e s s i n g Term 4: B S M G 267: F i n a n c e B S M G 253: L a b o u r Relations Satisfactory corhpletion of the above c o u r s e s will provide the student with a Certificate in Administrative Management (27 credit hours). ii. P r o v i d e s a p r a c t i c a l e x p o s u r e to t h e M a n a g e r i a l Marketing S k i l l s required in operating a small business. S t u d e n t s e n r o l e d in this p r o g r a m c o m p l e t e a series of twelve c o u r s e s (two per term) over a three or four year period. Term 1: B S M G 187: Introduction to B u s i n e s s B S M G 184: A c c o u n t i n g I Term 2: B S M G 185: A c c o u n t i n g II B S M G 175: O r g a n i z a t i o n a l B e h a v i o u r Term 3: B S M G 160: M a r k e t i n g B S M G 180: Introduction to Data P r o c e s s i n g Term 4: B S M G 267: F i n a n c e B S M G 253: L a b o u r Relations T e r m 5: E C O N 2 0 1 : M i c r o - E c o n o m i c T h e o r y B S M G 241. B u s i n e s s L a w II Term 6: C M N S 152: B u s i n e s s Writing B S M G 230: S a l e s m a n s h i p Administration Marketing I Introduction to B u s i n e s s I Introduction to Data P r o c e s s i n g Accounting,I — • '• L a b o u r Relations Finance I Microeconomic Theory PART III - Spring Term (January - April) Marketing Marketing II Introduction to B u s i n e s s II Introduction to Data P r o c e s s i n g A c c o u n t i n g II Salesmanship I Satisfactory c o m p l e t i o n of the above c o u r s e s will provide the student with a Certificate in Small Business Management (39 credit hours). iii. Provides a practical e x p o s u r e to the Data P r o c e s s i n g a n d B u s i n e s s skills required in the c o m p u t e r department of a small organization. S t u d e n t s enroled in this program complete a series of twelve c o u r s e s (two per term) over a three or four year period. Term 1: B S M G 187: Introduction to B u s i n e s s B S M G 184: A c c o u n t i n g I Term 2: B S M G 185: A c c o u n t i n g II B S M G 175: O r g a n i z a t i o n a l Behaviour T e r m 3: B S M G 160: M a r k e t i n g B S M G 180: Introduction to Data P r o c e s s i n g 61 Term 4: B S M G 182: S y s t e m s A n a l y s i s I B S M G 267: F i n a n c e Term 5: B S M G 181: " B A S I C " P r o g r a m m i n g II B S M G 188: S y s t e m s A n a l y s i s il Term 6: B S M G 295: " B A S I C " P r o g r a m m i n g III B S M G 293: S y s t e m s Implementation I Satisfactory c o m p l e t i o n of the a b o v e c o u r s e s will provide the student with a Certificate in Data P r o c e s s i n g (39 credit hours). Students interested in o n e of these part-time p r o g r a m s s h o u l d contact the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t Department b y A u g u s t 1st and N o v e m b e r 15th for the Fall and S p r i n g terms respectively. S e p t e m b e r a n d J a n u a r y e a c h year. T h o s e professional areas currently' r e c o g n i z i n g c o u r s e s taken at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e are: - Chartered Accountant ( C A . ) - Certified G e n e r a l A c c o u n t a n t ( C . G . A . ) - S o c i e t y of M a n a g e m e n t A c c o u n t a n t s (R.I.A.) - Institute of C h a r t e r e d S e c r e t a r i e s a n d Administrators - Certificate in M u n i c i p a l A d m i n i s t r a t i o n - A s s o c i a t e of the Trust C o m p a n i e s Institute (A.T.C.I.) - C a n a d i a n Credit U n i o n Institute P e r s o n s interested in transfer credit c o u r s e s s h o u l d call the Business Management Department for further information. E. W e offer c o u r s e s w h i c h carry credit towards n o n - C a p i i a n o C o l l e g e certificates a n d d i p l o m a p r o g r a m s b e g i n n i n g in F. P e r s o n s interested in furthering their k n o w l e d g e in a particular area of b u s i n e s s s h o u l d call the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t Department for a list of the c o u r s e offerings for S e p t e m b e r a n d J a n u a r y e a c h year. Business Management Courses T h i s c o u r s e is a c o n t i n u a t i o n of M a r k e t i n g I. It is intended to a d d m o r e depth to the b a s i c marketing k n o w l e d g e a n d e x p a n d o n the overall use of the marketing c o n c e p t in today's competitive environment. Field trips a n d student projects will form part of the content of this c o u r s e . Business Management 154 Programming Structure I (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e i n t r o d u c e s s t u d e n t s to p r o g r a m m i n g methods; the various p r o g r a m m i n g a i d s ; a n d the standard t e c h n i q u e s for b u s i n e s s p r o g r a m m i n g a p p l i c a t i o n s . Business Management 155 Programming Structure II (S) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e is an e x t e n s i o n of B M 154, P r o g r a m m i n g Structure I, a n d covers the more c o m p l e x t e c h n i q u e s of b u s i n e s s p r o g r a m m i n g . S t r i c t a d h e r e n c e to s t a n d a r d p r o g r a m structures will enable students t o more effectively apply themselves in the a d v a n c e d C O B O L a n d B A S I C programming courses. Business Management 156 Quantitative Methods I (F) (3,0,1) Business Management 160 Marketing (F.S) (3,0,1) Familiarization with all the basic C a n a d i a n marketing c o n c e p t s and their roles within the total C a n a d i a n e c o n o m y and the individual firm. E m p h a s i s will b e o n c o n s u m e r product marketing, a l t h o u g h s o m e industrial marketing c o n c e p t s will be d i s c u s s e d . S t u d e n t s will be e n c o u r a g e d to actively participate in g r o u p a n d c l a s s d i s c u s s i o n s o n marketing p r o b l e m s a n d opportunities related to p r o d u c t p l a n n i n g , r e s e a r c h , p l a n n i n g , p r o m o t i o n a n d distribution systems. M e r c h a n d i z i n g , a d v e r t i s i n g a n d s a l e s m a n s h i p will also be i n c l u d e d in the overview of the marketing p r i n c i p l e s and their practical a p p r o a c h . Business Management 163 Principles of Supervision a n d Leadership (F) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e develops a strong mathematical foundation o n w h i c h to build quantitative analytical skills a n d to study in particular, basic mathematics of f i n a n c e c o n c e p t s i n c l u d i n g retail operations, s i m p l e a n d c o m p o u n d interest, annuities and d i s c o u n t e d c a s h flow. S t u d y of h u m a n e l e m e n t s in o r g a n i z a t i o n s , with e m p h a s i s on g r o u p behaviour C o n c e p t s in p e r s u a s i o n , g u i d a n c e a n d understanding of the individual within the g r o u p . A p p l i c a tions of h u m a n relations management, i.e. leadership, power, authority, g r o u p d y n a m i c s , formal a n d informal o r g a n i z a t i o n , c o m m u n i c a t i o n s , conflict a n d the introduction of c h a n g e . Business Management 157 Quantitative Methods II (S) (3,0,1) Business Management 164 Retail Mathematics (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e familiarizes the student with a variety of basic statistical methods. It i n t r o d u c e s the student t o the c o n c e p t s of b u s i n e s s d e c i s i o n - m a k i n g in the face of certainty a n d uncertainty, e n c o u r a g i n g the student to write c o m p u t e r software. T h i s c o u r s e p r o v i d e s a pratical k n o w l e d g e of the mathematical m e t h o d s utilized in retail o p e r a t i o n s . S t u d e n t s will d e v e l o p the ability to efficiently solve various types of p r o b l e m s relevant to retailing. Business Management 158 Marketing t (F.S) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the C a n a d i a n marketing e n v i r o n m e n t and marketing institutions. A detailed study to e n a b l e the student to u n d e r s t a n d the realistic, practical w o r k i n g s a n d f u n c t i o n s of p r o d u c t p l a n n i n g , p r o m o t i o n , market r e s e a r c h , selection of trade c h a n n e l s , m e r c h a n d i s i n g , advertising a n d s a l e s m a n s h i p with e m p h a s i s o n b o t h c o n s u m e r a n d industrial g o o d s a n d services. Business Management 165 Essentials of B o o k k e e p i n g I ( F . S U ) (3,0,1) A n introductory course designed to cover basic terminology, t e c h n i q u e s a n d a p p l i c a t i o n s of a c c o u n t i n g , i n c l u d i n g the theory a n d practice of k e e p i n g adequate r e c o r d s ; u s e of special journals: controlling a c c o u n t s a n d s u b s i d i a r y ledgers; periodic adjustments, c l o s i n g p r o c e d u r e s a n d preparation of financial statements. Business Management 159 Marketing II (F,S) (3,0,1) Business Management 166 Introduction T o Business Mathematics (SU) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 158: M a r k e t i n g I or by p e r m i s s i o n of the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r . T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d t o assist s t u d e n t s in d e v e l o p i n g the b a s i c skills a n d c o n c e p t s of quantitative a n a l y s i s relating 62 to b u s i n e s s a n d personal finance. T o p i c s c o v e r e d i n c l u d e : P r o b l e m a n a l y s i s , elementary a l g e b r a , basic arithmetic a n d mathematics, a n d calculator o p e r a t i o n . Business Management 169 A c c o u n t i n g Fundamentals (S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e d i s c u s s e s the w a y s in w h i c h a c c o u n t i n g systems are d e v e l o p e d and a p p l i e d to retailing b u s i n e s s e s . In addition, the techniques used t o apply a c c o u n t i n g information to management d e c i s i o n s are t h o r o u g h l y c o v e r e d . Business Management 170 Mathematics of Business a n d Finance (F) (4.5,0,1.5) A review of fundamental a l g e b r a i c o p e r a t i o n s ; ratios, p r o p o r t i o n s a n d percent; mathematics of managerial p l a n ning; discounts, markups, margins, selling price, mark-downs; s i m p l e interest, c o m p o u n d interest, d i s c o u n t i n g negotiable instruments, installment p u r c h a s e s ; annuities, s i n k i n g funds, amortization tables; depreciation; investment b o n d s . Business Management 171 A p p l i e d Business Statistics (S) (4.5,0,1.5) A n e x a m i n a t i o n of f r e q u e n c y distributions, averages, index numbers; probability, linear correlation reliability and sampling. Transferable to U.Vic. Business Management 172 Introduction to Business I (F,S) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the basic nature of b u s i n e s s p r o b l e m s a n d to the administrative p r o c e s s involved in h a n d l i n g t h e m . Study a n d d i s c u s s i o n of actual b u s i n e s s situations s e l e c t e d to illustrate typical p r o b l e m s met in industry requiring managerial a n a l y s i s , d e c i s i o n a n d a c t i o n . Transferable to S F U a n d U . V i c . Business Management 175 Organizational Behaviour (F,S) (3,0,1) T h e f o c u s of this c o u r s e is o n h u m a n b e h a v i o u r within organizations. Students will actively participate in role playing and other simulated activities d e a l i n g with organizational and personal factors that influence different types of work behaviour, s p e c i f i c t o p i c s s u c h a s motivation, leadership, c h a n g e within o r g a n i z a t i o n , a n d formal a n d informal o r g a n i z ations will be e x p l o r e d . to the solution of p r o b l e m s a n d tasks in the mathematical a n d b u s i n e s s a p p l i c a t i o n areas. Transferable to U B C arid U.Vic. Business Management 176 Introduction to Business II (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 172, or by written p e r m i s s i o n of the Instructor a n d / o r C o o r d i n a t o r . A n orientation t o the nature of b u s i n e s s in the private enterprise s y s t e m , with e m p h a s i s o n the role a n d interaction of the three levels of government with b u s i n e s s ; the role of f i n a n c i a l intermediaries a n d the C a p i t a l Market in influencing the behaviour of firms; a n d the financial f u n c t i o n s of management. Note: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 172 a n d B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 175 taken together receive 3 semester h,ours c r e d i t s in B u s i n e s s at S F U . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U a n d U . V i c . Business Management 180 Introduction to Data P r o c e s s i n g (F,S) (3,0,1) Provides a basic understanding of important E D P concepts, t e r m i n o l o g y a n d t e c h n i q u e s used in b u s i n e s s . P r o v i d e s a general orientation to the c o m p u t e r — what it is, h o w it functions, and what it c a n a n d cannot d o . Provides an understanding of the " B A S I C " P r o g r a m m i n g L a n g u a g e as it relates Business Management 181 " B A S I C " P r o g r a m m i n g II (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 180 or by written permiss i o n of the Instructor or C o o r d i n a t o r . T h i s c o u r s e is an extension of B M 180 strengthening the student's k n o w l e d g e of p r o g r a m m i n g in the " B A S I C " prog r a m m i n g l a n g u a g e to s o l v e b u s i n e s s p r o b l e m s . A r e a s of study include: program flowcharts program o r g a n i z a t i o n , table h a n d l i n g t e c h n i q u e s , file m a i n t e n a n c e , d i s k file organizations, a c c e s s m e t h o d s , a n d p r o g r a m m i n g efficiently. Business Management 182 Systems Analysis I (F,S) (3,0,1) P r o v i d e s a basic u n d e r s t a n d i n g of s y s t e m c o n c e p t s i n c l u d i n g the life-cycle a n d the c o n c e p t of a b u s i n e s s as a n information s y s t e m . Introduces the skills that are the w o r k i n g tools of s y s t e m s a n a l y s i s i n c l u d i n g form d e s i g n , c o d i n g , c h a r t i n g , f l o w c h a r t i n g a n d written verbal c o m m u n i c a t i o n . P r o v i d e s detailed u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the four life-cycle phases (Study, D e s i g n . D e v e l o p m e n t a n d O p e r a t i o n ) t h r o u g h their a p p l i c a t i o n in a detailed c o n t i n u o u s c a s e study. P r o v i d e s a n u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the l o g i c a l a p p r o a c h to s o l v i n g a p r o b l e m . 63 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184 Account' I ( r s i (4.5,0,1.5) An . • p'inciples a n d p r o c e d u r e s i n c i u d m y m e l o a d i n g of transactions, a n d adjustments in basic a c c o u n t i n g records. T h e student will prepare financial statements for the proprietorship a n d will study, in detail, the accounting and reporting of cash, accounts receivable, m e r c h a n d i s e inventory a n d long-lived assets. Transferable to S F U , U.Vic., a n d U B C . B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 185 A c c o u n t i n g Ii (F,S) (4.5,0,1.5) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184 o r b y p e r m i s s i o n of the C o o r d i n a t o r . A c o n t i n u a t i o n of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184. A n a l y s i s of funds flows, both c a s h a n d w o r k i n g capital. M a n a g e m e n t uses of a c c o u n t i n g ; c a s h budgeting, forecasting, profit p l a n n i n g , a n d responsibility a c c o u n t i n g . A c c o u n t i n g for manufacturing operations. Note: W h e n both B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184 a n d 185 a r e c o m p l e t e d , they receive 3 semester credit in B u s i n e s s at S F U and 1.5 hours credit for C o m m e r c e 151 at U B C Transferable t o S F U , U B C . B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 188 S y s t e m s A n a l y s i s II (S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e a p p l i e s the various t e c h n i q u e s learned in B M 182, S y s t e m s A n a l y s i s I, to g e n e r a l b u s i n e s s p r o b l e m s , providing the practical experience necessary for the s u c c e s s f u l implementation of a b u s i n e s s s y s t e m . B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 189 " C O B O L " P r o g r a m m i n g I (S) (3,0,1) P r o v i d e s the student with a practical training in t h e o r g a n i z a t i o n a n d w r i t i n g of p r o g r a m s i n t h e C O B O L language. T o p i c s include: p r o g r a m o r g a n i z a t i o n , program flow-charts, program instructions, compilation, desk checking and debugging. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 190 A c c o u n t i n g I (S) (4.5,0,1.5) A n introduction to b a s i c a c c o u n t i n g p r i n c i p l e s a n d p r o c e d u r e s i n c l u d i n g the r e c o r d i n g of t r a n s a c t i o n s a n d adjustments i n b a s i c a c c o u n t i n g r e c o r d s . T h e student will prepare financial statements f o r the proprietorship a n d will study i n detail t h e a c c o u n t i n g a n d reporting of c a s h , a c c o u n t s receivable, m e r c h a n d i s e inventory a n d long-lived assets utilizing m i c r o - c o m p u t e r s . B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 186 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 205 Retail M a n a g e m e n t Information S y s t e m s (S) (3,01) " C O B O L " P r o g r a m m i n g II (F) (3,0,1) S i m i l a r in b a s i c content t o B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 182, T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to introduce student to general b u s i n e s s s y s t e m s a n d methods. S p e c i f i c stress will b e p l a c e d on the retail b u s i n e s s s y s t e m s - inventory c o n t r o l , e t c . T h i s c o u r s e is a n extension of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 189, strengthening t h e k n o w l e d g e of C O B O L . A r e a s of study i n c l u d e table h a n d l i n g t e c h n i q u e s , master file updates, file maintenance, program instructions related t o disk file handling techniques a n d programming for efficient execution. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 187 Introduction to B u s i n e s s ( F , S , S U ) (3,0,1) (This c o u r s e Is a c o n d e n s a t i o n of the theoretical a s p e c t s of Business Management 172 a n d Business Management 176.) In this c o u r s e the five key tasks in m a n a g i n g an enterprise, i.e., P l a n n i n g , A q u i s i t i o n of R e s o u r c e s , O r g a n i z a t i o n , A c t i v a tion, a n d C o n t r o l are e x p l a i n e d . In addition, the k e y o r g a n i z ational functions of M a r k e t i n g , P r o d u c t i o n , F i n a n c e a n d P e r s o n n e l are covered. T h e c o u r s e is essentially a n overview of the theoretical framework of the task management. 64 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 206 " C O B O L " P r o g r a m m i n g III (S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e is a n e x t e n s i o n of B M 189 a n d B M 205. It b a s i c a l l y c o n s i s t s of preparing 12 c o m p l e x p r o g r a m s utilizing the C O B O L language. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 210 Small B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t ( F , S ) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e offers students a s p e c i a l opportunity to d e v e l o p skills a n d c o n c e p t s in areas of " S m a l l B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t " where they r e c o g n i z e s p e c i f i c , personal needs. T h e y will learn down-to-earth t e c h n i q u e s for d e a l i n g with many of the multiplicity of d e m a n d s placed u p o n the manager of a small business. Further, there will be a significant opportunity for students t o s h a p e the e m p h a s i s of this d y n a m i c set of m i n i - c o u r s e s . After a three t o four s e s s i o n survey of s u c h issues as S m a l l B u s i n e s s S u c c e s s a n d Failure, M e t h o d s a n d F o r m s of O r g a n i z a t i o n , P u r c h a s e of F r a n c h i s e s a n d G o i n g C o n c e r n s ; t o p i c a l e m p h a s i s will be determined by the class. T o p i c s will be selected from the following areas: 1. C a n a d i a n S m a l l B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 2. Financial M a n a g e m e n t for S m a l l B u s i n e s s 3. C a s h M a n a g e m e n t for S m a l l B u s i n e s s 4. B u d g e t s a n d the S m a l l B u s i n e s s 5. C r e d i t G r a n t i n g a n d the S m a l l B u s i n e s s 6. Y o u r Bank M a n a g e r a n d the S m a l l B u s i n e s s 7. T a x a t i o n for C a n a d i a n S m a l l B u s i n e s s 8. C o m m e r c i a l L a w for C a n a d i a n S m a l l B u s i n e s s . 9. G o v e r n m e n t a n d the S m a l l B u s i n e s s 10. E l e c t r o n i c Data P r o c e s s i n g for the S m a l l B u s i n e s s Business Management 243 Marketing Research (F) (1.5,0,.5) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d as an introductory c o u r s e in the b a s i c s of marketing r e s e a r c h , aligned with Quantitative M e t h o d s III. It will indicate the m e t h o d s of m a k i n g the most effective use of marketing research. T h r o u g h s o m e practical applications of a research project the student will learn the elements of research d e s i g n , basic m e t h o d s of c o l l e c t i n g data, a n a l y s i s a n d reporting. T h e student will gain a k n o w l e d g e in the p r o c e d u r e s a n d a p p l i c a t i o n s of C a n a d i a n and A m e r i c a n r e s e a r c h . Business Management 244 A c c o u n t i n g II (F) (4.5,0,1.5) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 190. A n a l y s i s of funds flows, both c a s h a n d w o r k i n g capital. M a n a g e m e n t uses of a c c o u n t i n g ; c a s h budgeting, f o r e c a s t i n g , profit p l a n n i n g , a n d responsibility a c c o u n t i n g . A c c o u n t i n g for manufacturing operations. Business Management 253 Management Responsibility in L a b o u r Relations Business Management 230 Salesmanship (F,S) (3,0,1) A n introduction to professional selling. C o m m u n i c a t i o n i n c l u d i n g effective listening, p r o b i n g , p r o b l e m finding a n d s o l v i n g a n d creativity will b e c o v e r e d . S p e c i f i c t e c h n i q u e s of professional s e l l i n g i n c l u d i n g p r o s p e c t i n g , qualifying and c o n t r a c t i n g prospects. T h e c o u r s e will also cover, in depth, the organization a n d m a n a g e m e n t of sales activities. (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of management's responsibility a n d role in present day labour relations. T o p i c s i n c l u d e history of u n i o n i s m , contemporary unionism, B.C. Labour C o d e a n d Collective Bargaining. Business Management 255 Financial A c c o u n t i n g I (F) (3,0,1) Business Management 232 Transportation a n d Distribution (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184/185 or b y p e r m i s s i o n P r o v i d e s a b a s i c u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the C a n a d i a n T r a n s portation a n d Distribution s y s t e m a n d its role within the total marketing c o n c e p t . V a r i o u s a s p e c t s of w a r e h o u s i n g , p r o d u c t p r o t e c t i o n , s e v e r i t y a n d c o s t e f f e c t i v e n e s s of Transportation a n d Distribution s y s t e m s will be e m p h a s i z e d . Student projects, field trips a n d audiovisual presentations will be utilized as instructional methods. T h i s c o u r s e studies the theories u n d e r l y i n g financial statement presentations, a n d is a logical c o n t i n u a t i o n a n d reinforcement of the material covered in Business Management 184/185. T h e c o u r s e e n c o m p a s s e s the study of F i n a n c i a l A c c o u n t i n g at the intermediate level. Business Management 240 Business Law I (F,S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will e m p h a s i z e the a p p l i c a t i o n of legal principles to b u s i n e s s relationships t h r o u g h the study of C o u r t d e c i s i o n s (case law), hypothetical fact situations, a n d legislation. T h e areas of study to be particularly c o v e r e d a r e the L a w of C o n t r a c t , the S a l e of G o o d s A c t a n d C o n s u m e r P r o t e c t i o n , S e c u r e d T r a n s a c t i o n s and C r e d i t o r s R i g h t s , a n d A g e n c y a n d Partnership. of the C o o r d i n a t o r . Transferable to S F U . Business Management 256 Financial A c c o u n t i n g II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 255. T h i s c o u r s e is a logical s e q u e l to B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 255 in that it studies current d e v e l o p m e n t s in financial a c c o u n t i n g a n d their effects o n financial statement p r e s e n tation. T h e c o u r s e e n c o m p a s s e s the s t u d y of F i n a n c i a l A c c o u n t i n g at a level b e y o n d B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 255. Transferable t o S F U . Business Management 241 Business Law II (F,S) (3,0,1) Business Management 260 Finance I (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will e m p h a s i z e the a p p l i c a t i o n of legal p r i n c i p l e s to b u s i n e s s relationships t h r o u g h the study of C o u r t d e c i s i o n s (case law) a n d respective legislation. T h e areas of study to be particularly c o v e r e d are the L a w of Partnership, C o m p a n y L a w a n d the B . C . C o m p a n i e s A c t , Torts a n d Insurance, a n d Real Property. Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184 a n d 185. Business Management 242 Quantitative Methods III (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e reviews a n d applies s a m p l i n g t e c h n i q u e s to m a k i n g inferences about p o p u l a t i o n s . A p p l i c a t i o n s will relate to Marketing R e s e a r c h a n d Statistical Quality C o n t r o l . B u s i n e s s risk a n d uncertainty. F i n a n c i a l m e a s u r e m e n t s , ratio a n a l y s i s , a n n u a l rate of return, net present value, internal rate of return; A n n u a l c o s t , p a y - b a c k period. A n t i c i p a t i n g financial needs of the firm. T a x c o n s i d e r a t i o n s . C a s e studies c o v e r i n g f i n a n c i a l p r o b l e m s will form a major part of this course. Business Management 261 F i n a n c e II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 260. 65 A c q u i r i n g financial r e s o u r c e s , cost of capital, internal f i n a n c i n g , allocating financial r e s o u r c e s within the firm, leverage a n d liquidity, a d m i n i s t e r i n g c i r c u l a t i n g capital, financial a s p e c t s of mergers a n d take-overs. C a s e studies will form an integral part of this c o u r s e . Business Management 263 A d v a n c e d Data Processing (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 180. This c o u r e s is a n e x t e n s i o n of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 180. Areas of study i n c l u d e the m e a s u r e m e n t s a n d c o s t s of resources, the criteria for establishing s p e c i f i c a t i o n s , the criteria for evaluating resources, the r e s o u r c e s available o n the West C o a s t , installing a c o m p u t e r s y s t e m a n d m a n a g i n g the c o m p u t e r s y s t e m . Business Management 273 Advertising I (F) (3,0,1) T o e x a m i n e the C a n a d i a n a n d A m e r i c a n advertising industry from both m i c r o a n d m a c r o perspectives. T o e n a b l e the student to g r a s p the b a s i c theoretical a n d p r a c t i c a l a p p r o a c h e s to advertising. T o provide an insight into the various a s p e c t s of advertising history, creativity, c o m m u n i cation systems, media c h o i c e a n d other functions. T h i s is not a c o u r s e o n d e s i g n i n g , creating a n d preparing s p e c i f i c types of advertising, but is meant to serve as a n overview of what advertising is and how it relates to other marketing c o n c e p t s and o p e r a t i o n s . Business Management 274 Cost a n d Managerial A c c o u n t i n g II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 265. Business Management 264 Cost a n d Managerial A c c o u n t i n g I (F) (4.5,0,1.5) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184/185 or by written p e r m i s s i o n of the Instructor a n d / o r C o o r d i n a t o r . D e c i s i o n - m a k i n g a n d p l a n n i n g in o r g a n i z a t i o n s using accounting tools. The nature of accounting controls. C o m m o n control methods. M e a s u r e s of management performance. The role of the management cost accountant. Business Management 265 Quantitative Methods (F.S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 170/171 or by written permission of the Instructor a n d / o r C o o r d i n a t o r . Quantitative tools in use in modern management. Inventory models, E O Q , buffer levels and lead times, project p l a n n i n g , P E R T , linear regression as a forecasting tool, linear p r o g r a m ming as an optimization technique. Business Management 267 Finance (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 176. The c o u r s e will cover a practical a p p r o a c h to finance with marketing c o n s i d e r a t i o n s . T h e s c o p e a n d nature of financial management, risk/return tradeoffs, ratio analysis, profit p l a n n i n g a n d control, financial needs of firm, cost of capital, capital allocation a n d budgeting, lease f i n a n c i n g , international financial management, d e c i s i o n s of r e o r g a n i z a tion a n d bankruptcy. C a s e studies will form an integral part of this c o u r s e . Business Management 270 Personnel Management (F,S) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e will e x p l o r e management skills development in the p e r s o n n e l field. Heavy e m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d o n providing the student with practical tools a n d e x p e r i e n c e s in s u c h interviewing "areas as recruitment, s e l e c t i o n , p l a c e ment of p e r s o n n e l , j o b d e s c r i p t i o n s a n d a n a l y s i s , training and performance a p p r a i s a l , w a g e a n d salary administration, union management relations, etc. Business Management 271 Merchandising (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will a c q u a i n t the student with an overview of both retailing a n d m e r c h a n d i s i n g operations in today's competitive market. D i s c u s s i o n will c o v e r the types of retailing establishments, a n a l y s i s of a trading area, site l o c a t i o n , store layout a n d d e s i g n , with a n e m p h a s i s on c h a n g i n g life-styles and c o n s u m e r d e m a n d patterns. In a d d i tion, students will be exposed to a wide range of merchandising techniques a n d strategies covering many c o r p o r a t i o n s a n d c o m m o d i t i e s . T h e c o u r s e will include the u s e of guest lecturers, a n d field trips to e m p h a s i z e the practical a s p e c t s of the subject. 66 A more indepth study of subjects c o v e r e d in B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 264. C o s t determination for m a n u f a c t u r i n g operations, Planning and Cost C o n t r o l Systems, Performance Evaluation M e t h o d s , Strategic D e c i s i o n M a k i n g M e t h o d s . Business Management 275 Marketing Research (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 158. T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d as an introductory c o u r s e in the basics of marketing research It will indicate the methods of making the most effective use of marketing research. T h r o u g h s o m e practical a p p l i c a t i o n s of a research project the student will learn the elements of research d e s i g n , basic methods of c o l l e c t i n g data, analysis a n d reporting. T h e student will gain a k n o w l e d g e in the p r o c e d u r e s and a p p l i c a t i o n s of C a n a d i a n and A m e r i c a n research. Business Management 276 Marketing Management (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 158/159. This c o u r s e introduces the student to the a p p r o a c h e s a n d p r o b l e m s of the marketing management d e c i s i o n m a k i n g under the influence of c o n t r o l l a b l e a n d u n c o n t r o l l a b l e conditions. Marketing strategy a n d planning, buyer behaviour, distribution strategy, product strategy and integrated programs will be studied. Business Management 277 International Marketing (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of the m e c h a n i c s of international trade, foreign e x c h a n g e rates, tariffs, etc. P r o d u c t - d i s t r i b u t i o n - p r o m o t i o n mixes for export markets of C a n a d i a n industry with e m p h a s i s o n P a c i f i c R i m a n d U . S . A . market I n f l u e n c e s . A d a p t i n g d o m e s t i c marketing t e c h n i q u e s to foreign c o n d i t i o n s . Business Management 278 Sales Management (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 230. T h e s c o p e of this c o u r s e i n c l u d e s all of the activities w h i c h the p e r s o n in c h a r g e of an outside sales force is likely to encounter. M o r e s p e c i f i c a l l y it c o v e r s sales o r g a n i z a t i o n , operations, planning, analysis and evaluation, and salesmanship techniques. Business Management 279 Advertising II (S) (3,0,1) A s a f o l l o w - u p t o A d v e r t i s i n g I this c o u r s e will offer the students an opportunity to create and present a full advertising c a m p a i g n for an operating c o m p a n y . A team a p p r o a c h will be used to create an advertising a g e n c y environment with s u c h areas as research, creative media, a n d a c c o u n t s u p e r vision being studied a n d portrayed. W h i l e not a prerequisite, A d v e r t i s i n g I is r e c o m m e n d e d to fully u n d e r s t a n d the c o u r s e content a n d p r o g r a m . Business Management 280 Auditing I (F.S) (1.5.0,.5) C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 150 Basic C o m m u n i c a t i o n s (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 185. D e v e l o p m e n t of writing and s p e a k i n g skills with material largely related to s p e c i f i c career g o a l s . Extensive practice in improving E n g l i s h b a s i c s , n u m e r o u s writing a s s i g n m e n t s , and at least o n e s p o k e n presentation. T h i s c o u r s e covers auditing p r o c e d u r e s for intangibles, proprietorship, financial statement preparation, the audit report, l e g a l r e q u i r e m e n t s , a u d i t p r o c e d u r e s for s m a l l b u s i n e s s e s , share capital a n d c h a n g e s in surplus. Business Management 284 Taxation I (F) (3,0,1) C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 152 Report Writing (S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e is the first part of a two part c o u r s e a n d is c o n c e r n e d with the c o m p u t a t i o n of i n c o m e , for tax p u r p o s e s , from the four basic i n c o m e s o u r c e s — e m p l o y m e n t , b u s i n e s s , investments a n d capital gains. R e s e a r c h i n g , o r g a n i z i n g a n d presenting information by means of b u s i n e s s a n d t e c h n i c a l reports. Attention to g r a p h i c s , style a n d report format. S p o k e n presentations using a u d i o v i s u a l aids are required. Business Management 285 Taxation II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 284. , T h i s c o u r s e c o n t i n u e s from the prerequisite c o u r s e . T a x a b l e i n c o m e is c o m p u t e d and the federal and provincial i n c o m e taxes are c a l c u l a t e d . C o r p o r a t e s u r p l u s distributions, trusts a n d partnerships, international i n c o m e a n d administration are also e x a m i n e d . E c o n o m i c s 200 Principles of M a c r o e c o n o m i c T h e o r y (S) (3,0,1) T h e formal K e y n e s i a n theory of national i n c o m e determination a n d s o m e c o n t e m p o r a r y c r i t i q u e s of this theory are c o n s i d e r e d . Included is the study of the p o s s i b l e c a u s e s of and s o l u t i o n s to u n e m p l o y m e n t and inflation a n d the importance of international trade. G o v e r n m e n t fiscal and monetary policies are e x a m i n e d in detail. Business Management 293 Systems Analysis a n d Application II (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 182. T h i s c o u r s e is a n e x t e n s i o n of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 182 furthering the student's ability to a n a l y z e the managerial requirements of information s y s t e m s . It provides a practical e x p e r i e n c e in the detailed d e s i g n of o n - l i n e s y s t e m s for business applications. Topics include on-line concepts, security, audit controls, file m a n a g e m e n t , s c r e e n d e s i g n a n d system d o c u m e n t a t i o n . L A P 201 Reading D y n a m i c s (F,S,S) (1.5,0,.5) T h e a i m of this c o u r s e is to provide students with the reading skills essential to efficient f u n c t i o n i n g within both college and business communities. Reading speed and c o m p r e h e n s i o n will be improved through a c o m b i n a t i o n of lectures a n d practice s e s s i o n s . Business Management 295 " B A S I C " Programming III (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 181. This c o u r s e is an extension of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 181, strengthening the k n o w l e d g e of B A S I C . A r e a s of study i n c l u d e disk file organizations, s c r e e n formatting, a c c e s s methods, file maintenance a n d file reorganization. Business Management 296 Management Information Systems (S) (4.5,1,1.5) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 292; 295; 293 T h i s c o u r s e brings together the various computer c o n c e p t s that have been studied in the previous three semesters. It involves an indepth c o m p u t e r study of a c o m p a n y situation. T o p i c s include integrated information systems, integrated data bases, controls, distributed processing, feasibility studies, systems development phases, a n d project m a n a g e ment c o n c e p t s Business Management 298 Data Systems Management (F) (3,0,1) This course will focus on data structures and data management t e c h n i q u e s with e m p h a s i s o n the practical a p p l i c a t i o n of data base m e t h o d o l o g y . T o p i c s will include data structure types, index-sequential a c c e s s methods and s u c h data base t o p i c s a s elements of a data base, f u n c t i o n s of data base administration, data integrity, data security, data dictionaries, and Q u e r y facilities. Design c o n s i d e r a t i o n s will a l s o be d i s c u s s e d a n d labs will concentrate o n creating a c c e s s i n g (both programatically a n d Query) a n d restructuring data bases. 67 Communications Department C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 154 C o m m u n i c a t i o n s in Recreation (S) (3,0,1) Writing a n d s p e e c h related to O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n Management: reports, m e m o r a n d u m s , press releases, articles and briefs. S p o k e n presentations are required. Instructional Faculty C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 155 C o b l e y , J . , B . A . ( B r i g h a m Y o u n g ) , M.A. ( U B C ) Goldberg, G . , B.A. (McGill), M.A. (UBC) Kilian, C , B.A. (Columbia), M.A. (SFU) K u b i c e k , Ft., B . A . (Sir G e o r g e W i l l i a m s ) , M . A . ( S F U ) R e i d , B., B . A . (Alberta) W i t t m a n , M . , B . A . (Toronto), M . A . ( U B C ) C o m m u n i c a t i o n s in Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n General (S) (3,0,1) Effective verbal a n d non-verbal c o m m u n i c a t i o n , a n d the writing of letters, reports a n d briefs. S p o k e n presentations are required. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 156 Information Media R e s o u r c e s C o m m u n i c a t i o n s (S) (3,0,1) T h e C o m m u n i c a t i o n s Department of C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e has the b r o a d objective of p r o v i d i n g students in the C a r e e r / V o c a t i o n a l P r o g r a m s with c o m p e t e n c e in t h e u s e of t h e E n g l i s h l a n g u a g e a n d in m e d i a c o m m u n i c a t i o n s . B a s i c t e c h n i c a l writing, r e s e a r c h papers, s p o k e n p r e s e n tations, b u s i n e s s reports, press reports, a n d briefs are s o m e of the t o p i c s studied in a c o m m u n i c a t i o n s c o u r s e . - C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 150 B a s i c C o m m u n i c a t i o n s (F,S) (3,0,1) Development of writing a n d s p e a k i n g skills, with material largely related to s p e c i f i c career g o a l s . Extensive practice in improving E n g l i s h b a s i c s , n u m e r o u s writing a s s i g n m e n t s , and at least o n e s p o k e n presentation. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 151 B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n s (F,S) (3,0,1) T h e b a s i c s of b u s i n e s s writing: r e s u m e s , m e m o r a n d u m s , business letters, a n d reports. D e v e l o p m e n t of suitable styles for different b u s i n e s s p u r p o s e s . A t least o n e s p o k e n presentation. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 152 Report Writing (F,S) (3,0,1) R e s e a r c h i n g , o r g a n i z i n g , a n d presenting information for business a n d t e c h n i c a l reports. Attention to g r a p h i c s , style, and report format. S p o k e n presentations using a u d i o v i s u a l aids a r e required. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 153 C o m m u n i c a t i o n s a n d the Arts (S) (3,0,1) T h e u s e of language in c o m b i n a t i o n with g r a p h i c a n d other arts. Attention to g r a p h i c s a n d l a n g u a g e used in advertising a n d p r o p a g a n d a . S p o k e n presentations using a u d i o visual aids are required. 68 Writing and speaking skills related to the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s student. Emphasis o n interviewing techniques, story-boarding, a n d adaptive writing. S p o k e n presentations are required. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 170 P u b l i c S p e a k i n g (F,S) (3,0,1) R e s e a r c h i n g , o r g a n i z i n g , a n d presenting different kinds of s p e e c h e s . Attention to v o i c e training, non-verbal c o m m u n i c a t i o n , a n d p u b l i c s p e a k i n g in various contexts. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 180 B a s i c J o u r n a l i s m I (F) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the gathering, writing a n d editing of news material for print m e d i a . C o u r s e content i n c l u d e s s p e cific requirements of various types of newswriting; acceptable newswriting style; analysis of local, national, a n d world news. Students must have g o o d writing skills and be able to type at least 30 w o r d s per minute. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 181 B a s i c J o u r n a l i s m II (S) (3,0,1) A c o n s o l i d a t i o n a n d elaboration of material c o v e r e d in C M N S 180. Prerequisite: s u c c e s s f u l c o m p l e t i o n of C M N S 180 or p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 190 M a g a z i n e Article Writing (F,S) (3,0,1) R e s e a r c h i n g a n d writing articles for p u b l i c a t i o n in n e w s m e d i a a n d m a g a z i n e s , e s p e c i a l l y "trade" and special-interest periodicals A n a l y s i s of m a g a z i n e readership, t e c h n i q u e s of research a n d interviewing, the current market for articles a n d d e v e l o p m e n t of an effective prose style. Students will write three articles in suitable format, a n d submit them f o r p u b l i c a t i o n in e s t a b l i s h e d p e r i o d i c a l s . Health and Human Services For more information and application forms, contact the C a r e e r s Office, 986-1911, L o c a l 390. Associate in Arts and S c i e n c e Diploma Instructional Faculty Adler, M.T., B.A. (Toronto), M . S . W . ( U B C ) A n n e , R., D i p l . E . C . E . (Ryerson) Art T h e r a p y (Toronto) B r o w n , J . , B . S c , H . E c (Man.), P . G . (Van. Gen.) C l a r k , J . , R . N . (Regina G e n e r a l Hospital), T e a c h i n g D i p l . (Sask.) K u l i c h , B., Orff T e a c h e r ' s Certificate (Toronto) D i p l . E . C . E . (Copenhagen) Rawsthorne, M., B . H . E . ( U B C ) Rennie, L . J . , B . S c , D i p l . E . C . E . ( B r i g h a m Y o u n g ) Warrell, E . M . , D i p l . P h y s . E d . (Liverpool), M . E d . (Western W a s h . State) W o r m a n , E., B.A., D i p l . C h i l d S t u d y (Toronto), C o o r d i n a t o r Early C h i l d h o o d Education Program Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n is a two year program b a s e d o n the C o m p e t e n c i e s in Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n d e v e l o p e d by the Ministry of E d u c a t i o n , M a r c h 1979. O n c o m p l e tion of the four terms of the p r o g r a m , the student will have demonstrated achievement of the Level II C o m p e t e n c i e s . U p o n fulfilment of 500 hours work e x p e r i e n c e required by the Provincial C h i l d C a r e Facilities L i c e n s i n g B o a r d , graduates will be qualified to be in charge of a centre for y o u n g children. T h e program concentrates on the study of h u m a n development and the foundations a n d p h i l o s o p h y of Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n . A n interrelated series of c o u r s e s f o c u s i n g o n the c h i l d from 18 months to 6 years, permits detailed study of program o r g a n i z a t i o n , c u r r i c u l u m content a n d g u i d a n c e methods. Other areas of study include health, nutrition, first aid, family-life, the exceptional c h i l d , parentteacher relationships a n d the administration of p r e s c h o o l centres. T h e o r y and practice are c l o s e l y related throughout the program, as students s p e n d regular periods e a c h term observing and paticipating in the C o l l e g e Day C a r e C e n t r e and other p r e s c h o o l s under the supervision of C o l l e g e instructors. E a c h student has one field work placement in a S p e c i a l E d u c a t i o n P r o g r a m and one in an " U n d e r T h r e e " P r o g r a m , as well as 3 placements in regular 3 - 5 year o l d programs. C o u r s e s are presented in a manner w h i c h promotes active student participation through labs, practical demonstrations, reports, projects a n d g e n e r a l d i s c u s s i o n . C o n s i d e r a b l e responsibility is given students, e n a b l i n g them to develop their creativity, i n d e p e n d e n c e a n d c o m p e t e n c e . A p p l i c a n t s who apply by M a r c h will be invited to an information meeting at w h i c h interviews will be arranged. A p p l i c a t i o n s received after that date will be c o n s i d e r e d IF space permits. A p p l i c a n t s are required to present a m e d i c a l report on a form supplied by the C o l l e g e , plus e v i d e n c e of a b s e n c e of active tuberculosis. A p p l i c a n t s who have previously taken Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n c o u r s e s elsewhere may submit a record of these c o u r s e s for consideration for crddit towards the C o l l e g e Diploma. Individual c o u r s e s may be taken if s p a c e permits, with the written permission of the c o u r s e C o o r d i n a t o r . 375 6 18 6 30 61.5 36 First Term C m n s . 150 E d u c a t i o n 152 E d u c a t i o n 154 Education 155* E d u c a t i o n 364 1. Early Childhood Education Program - 2 years 2. Early Childhood Education Upgrading - part-time 3. Working with the Developmentally Handicapped - part-time 4. Homemaker Program - 15 weeks 5. Homemaker Program - part-time 6. Long Term Care Aide Program - 16 weeks 7. Registered Nurses Refresher Program - 15 w e e k s Lab Hours Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s General Education Requirements Applied Theory - Practicum General Information T h e Health a n d H u m a n S e r v i c e s Department offers the following programs: Credit Hours Basic C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 3 Program Development I . . 3 Health and First A i d 3 Human Growth and Development I 3 Applied Theory Practicum I 3 15 2 6 8 Second Term E d u c a t i o n 151 E d u c a t i o n 153 E d u c a t i o n 156 E d u c a t i o n 164 E d u c a t i o n 365 E d u c a t i o n 366 L a n g u a g e Arts Program Development II H u m a n G r o w t h and Development I Nutrition Applied Theory P r a c t i c u m II Applied Theory P r a c t i c u m III 3 3 2 3 3 3 6 3 _6 18 14 Third Term E d u c a t i o n 157 E d u c a t i o n 250 E d u c a t i o n 262 E d u c a t i o n 268 E d u c a t i o n 367 T h e C h i l d a n d Family Life Program Development III Special Education I Interpersonal relations in teaching Applied Theory P r a c t i c u m IV 1.5 3 3 2 3 3 _6 13.5 8 Fourth Term C m n s . 155 E d u c a t i o n 252 E d u c a t i o n 264 E d u c a t i o n 368 C o m m u n i c a t i o n s in Early Childhood Education . . . Program Development IV Preschool Administration I Applied Theory Practicum V 3 3 3 6 6 15 6 " E d u c a t i o n 155 H u m a n G r o w t h and Development I must be taken prior to or concurrently with E d u c a t i o n 152. Early C h i l d h o o d Education Upgrading Program This is a part-time program d e s i g n e d for persons who already hold E . C . E . qualifications (are registered with the C h i l d C a r e Facilities L i c e n s i n g Board) and have e x p e r i e n c e w o r k i n g in a centre for p r e - s c h o o l c h i l d r e n . T h e s e a d v a n c e d level c o u r s e s are p l a n n e d to update a n d extend k n o w l e d g e , awareness a n d skills u s i n g as a f o c u s the e x p e r i e n c e , p r o b lems and questions of the participants. C o u r s e outlines have been prepared in accordance with Level II of the Competencies in Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n (Ministry of E d u c a t i o n , M a r c h 1979). 69 C o u r s e s will be offered o n a rotating basis in the evenings. A few of the c o u r s e s are also available in the day time as part of the two year E . C . E . D i p l o m a p r o g r a m . Students m a y enrol in a single c o u r s e or c o m p l e t e the p r o g r a m for a C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Certificate. There is no prescribed order in w h i c h c o u r s e s s h o u l d be taken, but students are requested to c o n suit with the program C o o r d i n a t o r before registering for A d v a n c e d P r a c t i c u m or Individual Project. G r a d u a t e s of s o m e E . C . E . P r o g r a m s will already have credit for s o m e of the c o u r s e s . For information about the course(s) offered in a particular semester, or to make an appointment, call the P r o g r a m C o o r dinator, 986-1911, local 361. A b r o c h u r e will be mailed o n request. Early C h i l d h o o d Education Upgrading Program Requirements Capilano College Certificate E d u c a t i o n 154 E d u c a t i o n 157 E d u c a t i o n 164 E d u c a t i o n 253 E d u c a t i o n 255 E d u c a t i o n 262 E d u c a t i o n 265 E d u c a t i o n 269 E d u c a t i o n 271 E d u c a t i o n 368 Health a n d First A i d T h e C h i l d a n d Family Life Nutrition A d v a n c e d P r o g r a m P l a n n i n g for the Preschool Centre Curriculum Enrichment Special Education A d m i n i s t r a t i o n II Interpersonal S k i l l s II Individual Project A p p l i e d Theory • P r a c t i c u m V Working with the Developmentally Handicapped Part-Time Programs This part-time p r o g r a m is d e s i g n e d for p e r s o n s w h o are qualified in Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n in a related field i.e. T e a c h i n g . N u r s i n g , S o c i a l Work A i d . C h i l d C a r e Worker etc. w h o have h a d s o m e e x p e r i e n c e w o r k i n g with c h i l d r e n , and w h o wish to work with the developmentally h a n d i c a p p e d . The program will cover infancy through a d u l t h o o d Education Courses Education 151 Language Arts (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: E d u c a t i o n 152 or by written p e r m i s s i o n of the Program Coordinator. The f o c u s of this c o u r s e is o n the development of listening skills a n d oral language. E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d o n the teacher's role in implementing appropriate language activities to meet the particular needs of individual c h i l d r e n , i n c l u d i n g the E S L c h i l d . C o n s i d e r a t i o n will be given to the criteria for selection of literature for the p r e s c h o o l c h i l d . T e c h n i q u e s for presenting stories a n d poetry will be d e v e l o p e d . Education 152 Program Development I (F) (3,2,1) A n introduction to the planning a n d development of p r o g r a m s for p r e - s c h o o l centres with a major f o c u s o n D a y C a r e . B a s i c play activities a n d routines will be d i s c u s s e d with attention to their contribution to the development of the c h i l d , materials required a n d teaching methods. P r i n c i p l e s a n d methods of g u i d a n c e will be studied. W e e k l y lab s e s s i o n s provide direct involvement with materials. Education 153 Program Development II (S) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: E d u c a t i o n 152 a n d 155. Further study of program p l a n n i n g a n d development with particular reference to day care. Writing program goals a n d 70 O n c o m p l e t i o n of the p r o g r a m the graduate will be qualified for s u c h p o s i t i o n s as: S u p e r v i s o r y teacher in pres c h o o l s for c h i l d r e n with special needs (with prior E . C . E . qualifications), residential c o u n s e l l o r in a g r o u p h o m e , Assistant in a V o c a t i o n a l T r a i n i n g P r o g r a m . C h i l d C a r e Worker, Family S u p p o r t Worker. T h e c o u r s e s will be offered o n a rotating basis in the evening. A few of the c o u r s e s are also available in the day time as part of the two year Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n P r o g r a m . Students may enter the p r o g r a m at the b e g i n n i n g of any term, a s there is n o p r e s c r i b e d order in w h i c h c o u r s e s must be taken. However students are requested to c o n s u l t with the Program C o o r d i n a t o r before registering for Practicum (Applied Theory) or Individual Project A n e x e m p t i o n c a n be granted for equivalent c o u r s e s taken previously. A d m i s s i o n requirements i n c l u d e a n interview with the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r , a n d d o c u m e n t a t i o n of the prerequisite qualification as stated above For a b r o c h u r e e x p l a i n i n g the entire p r o g r a m , information about the course(s) offered e a c h term, or to make an a p p o i n t ment, call 986-1911, local 361 Working with the Developmentally Program Requirements Capilano College Certificate E d u c a t i o n 155 and 156 E d u c a t i o n 157 E d u c a t i o n 262 E d u c a t i o n 263 E d u c a t i o n 265 E d u c a t i o n 269 E d u c a t i o n 271 E d u c a t i o n 275 E d u c a t i o n 368 Handicapped or equivalent c o u r s e work in Developmental Psychology T h e C h i l d a n d Family Life or equivalent S p e c i a l E d u c a t i o n I or equivalent S p e c i a l E d u c a t i o n II A d m i n i s t r a t i o n II Interpersonal S k i l l s II Individual Project P r o g r a m P l a n n i n g for the D e v e l o p m e n t a l l y Handicapped Applied Theory - Practicum V activity plans will be e m p h a s i z e d . Attention will be given to meeting the needs of the individual c h i l d i n c l u d i n g the new c h i l d to the p r o g r a m , appropriate g u i d a n c e m'ethods for the c h i l d w h o is withdrawn, aggressive, etc. L a b s e s s i o n s provide further involvement with materials a n d activities. Education 154 Health a n d First A i d (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to familiarize students with s o m e of the c o m m o n c h i l d h o o d illnesses. Particular e m p h a s i s is p l a c e d o n the m a n a g e m e n t of the y o u n g c h i l d with a health p r o b l e m in a p r e s c h o o l setting T h e c o u r s e studies preventive health measures a n d first a i d p r a c t i c e s a n d p r o c e d u r e s . O n s u c c e s s f u l c o m p l e t i o n of the c o u r s e the student will receive a St J o h n s A m b u l a n c e Safety O r i e n t e d First A i d Certificate. Education 155 H u m a n Growth a n d Development I (F) (3,0,1) The first half of a two-part s e q u e n c e . A study of h u m a n growth a n d development from birth to the e n d of the pres c h o o l years. A n introductory study of theories, p r i n c i p l e s of development a n d c h i i d study t e c h n i q u e s . Education 156 H u m a n Growth a n d Development II (S) (3,0,1) Preiequisite: E d u c a t i o n 155. A continuation of E d u c a t i o n 155 following the preschooler through the middle years of c h i l d h o o d , a d o l e s c e n c e a n d l a u n c h i n g into a d u l t h o o d . Education 157 T h e C h i l d a n d Family Life (F) (1.5,0,1) A s o c i o l o g i c a l perspective o n family life in our culture a n d others, f o c u s i n g o n c h i l d h o o d s o c i a l i z a t i o n a n d tne factors affecting it: s o c i o - e c o n o m i c c o n d i t i o n s , cultural values a n d ideology ethnic a n d racial origins. C o n s i d e r a t i o n will be given to the f u n c t i o n s of family, family lifestyles, roles, routines, a n d limits a n d the role of the p r e s c h o o l teacher as a r e s o u r c e t o the family Education 164 Nutrition (S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e introduces the student to the b a s i c nutrients a n d their role in h u m a n p h y s i o l o g y , a n d the s p e c i a l requirements of the y o u n g child for optimum health. T h e s e c o n d part of the c o u r s e deals with the preparation of foods and s n a c k s for preschoolers, menu planning for day care facilities, food storage a n d food sanitation. Education 250 Program Development III (F) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: E d u c a t i o n 153 a n d E d u c a t i o n 156 or by written p e r m i s s i o n of the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r A detailed look at c h i l d r e n ' s early c o n c e p t development in s c i e n c e , s o c i a l studies and mathematics. S t u d e n t s will work o n individual and g r o u p presentations of materials, activities a n d e x p e r i e n c e s for the y o u n g c h i l d . E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d o n the integration of these with other c u r r i c u l u m areas to achieve a b a l a n c e d , f l o w i n g , creative p r o g r a m Included is a w e e k e n d field trip early in the term a n d weekly lab experiences. Education 252 Program Development IV (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: E d u c a t i o n 153 and E d u c a t i o n 156 or by written p e r m i s s i o n of the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r . A c o u r s e w h i c h c o m b i n e s theory a n d participation in Art, M u s i c a n d M o v e m e n t for y o u n g c h i l d r e n . T h e c o u r s e integrates a n d extends the e x p e r i e n c e a n d k n o w l e d g e g a i n e d in previous c o u r s e s . Implementation of activity plans will be required as the student furthers her/his t e a c h i n g skills. Education 253 A d v a n c e d Program Planning for the Preschool Centre (S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e in w h i c h the participants are e n c o u r a g e d t o use their o w n w o r k . e x p e r i e n c e s as a starting point for a new look at the structure and c o m p o n e n t s of the p r o g r a m in a centre for y o u n g c h i l d r e n , a n d to extend their c o m p e t e n c y in goal setting, c u r r i c u l u m p l a n n i n g (including routines) g u i d a n c e a n d evaluation Participants will be actively involved in projects a n d d i s c u s s i o n . Education 262 Special Education (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite E d u c a t i o n 153 and E d u c a t i o n 156 or by written p e r m i s s i o n of the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r . A c o u r s e w h o s e major g o a l s will be introduction to a n d general study of s p e c i a l n e e d s of c h i l d r e n in order that the student may increase her/his abilities to identify a n d work with e x c e p t i o n a l p r e s c h o o l c h i l d r e n in regular or special programs E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d o n c o m m u n i t y facilities serving e x c e p t i o n a l c h i l d r e n and a p p l i c a t i o n will be made to the gifted d e v e l o p m e n t a l l y - d e l a y e d , n e u r o l o g i c a l l y h a n d i c a p p e d , e m o t i o n a l l y disturbed a n d m u l t i - h a n d i c a p p e d c h i l d . Education 263 Special Education II (F) (3,0,1) This is a c o u r s e w h i c h will provide the student with an opportunity to e x a m i n e a n d evaluate current i s s u e s related to w o r k i n g with the developmentally h a n d i c a p p e d . T o p i c s c o v e r e d will i n c l u d e p h a r m a c o l o g y , integration of the special needs p e r s o n into a regular setting, interacting with parents of the s p e c i a l needs individual, a s s e s s m e n t , a d v o c a c y etc. A s e l e c t i o n of current literature will b e e x a m i n e d . Education 264 Administration I (S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to acquaint the student with the administrative f u n c t i o n s n e c e s s a r y to e n s u r e the effective operation of a program for y o u n g c h i l d r e n . T o p i c s c o v e r e d will include: licensing regulations, procedures for setting u p a centre, working with a B o a r d of Directors, developing policies a n d p r o c e d u r e s , budget p l a n n i n g , hiring a n d d i s m i s s i n g staff, writing job descriptions, staff relationships, r e c o r d k e e p i n g . A s s i g n m e n t s will f o c u s o n practical a p p l i c a t i o n s a n d the development of a resource m a n u a l . Education 265 Administration II With reference to centres for y o u n g c h i l d r e n a n d to p r o g r a m s serving individuals w h o are h a n d i c a p p e d , this c o u r s e will identify basic administrative functions w h i c h are n e c e s s a r y for effective o n g o i n g operation of the centre. Participants will draw from their e x p e r i e n c e to identify the various facets of the Director's role, and the skills required to carry out these tasks. S t u d e n t s will extend their ability to analyze, plan, organize, supervise a n d evaluate. Education 268 Interpersonal Relationships in Teaching (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: E d u c a t i o n 153 a n d E d u c a t i o n 156 or by written p e r m i s s i o n of the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r . A n e x a m i n a t i o n of the role of the p r e s c h o o l teacher in establishing meaningful relationships with parents, colleagues a n d c o m m u n i t y representatives. S p e c i f i c c o m m u n i c a t i o n skills will be d e v e l o p e d through the g r o u p p r o c e s s , role play, and interviewing t e c h n i q u e s . C o m m u n i t y resources a n d referral p r o c e d u r e s will a l s o b e studied. Education 269 Interpersonal Relationships II (F) (3,0,1) A n a d v a n c e d c o u r s e w h i c h is p l a n n e d to help the participants identify a n d demonstrate effective methods of establishing a n d d e v e l o p i n g a mutually supportive relationship between h o m e a n d centre. S t u d e n t s will b e actively involved in extending their c o m m u n i c a t i o n skills and problem solving abilities. T h e c o u r s e will rely heavily o n the work e x p e r i e n c e a n d questions of the participants. Education 271 Individual Project (F,S) (3,0,1) In c o n s u l t a t i o n with t h e instructor the student will undertake an in-depth study of a program or an area of individual development relative to the s p e c i a l needs p e r s o n or personal interest of the student. Education 255 C u r r i c u l u m Enrichment (F) (3,0,1) In this c o u r s e participants will have an opportunity through participation, d i s c u s s i o n a n d the use of resources to extend their "repertoire" of c u r r i c u l u m activities in s u c h areas as M u s i c a n d Movement, C o o k i n g in the C l a s s r o o m , M a t h e m a tics games a n d m u c h more. S p e c i f i c areas i n c l u d e d c a n be modified in a c c o r d a n c e with the interests of class members. Education 364 A p p l i e d T h e o r y - Practicum I (F) (3,6,2) Prerequisite: T a k e n c o n c u r r e n t l y with E d u c a t i o n 152 or by written p e r m i s s i o n of the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r . T h e first of • 5 part s e q u e n c e of c o u r s e s in w h i c h the 71 student relates a c l a s s r o o m theory to its p r a c t i c a l a p p l i c a t i o n through d i s c u s s i o n , observation a n d participation in a pres c h o o l program. T h i s c o u r s e has t w o a s p e c t s a) A n awareness of recording methods a n d the development of skill in objectively o b s e r v i n g a n d r e c o r d i n g the behaviour of y o u n g children b) a practicum period of one full week in the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e D a y C a r e Centre, participating in the program under the direct g u i d a n c e of a teacher. Education 365 - 367* Applied Theory - Practicum II - IV (F,S) (3,6,2) This is a series of three c o u r s e s , in w h i c h c l a s s r o o m d i s c u s s i o n a n d s u p e r v i s e d participation in a program for y o u n g children c o m b i n e to enable the student to develop increasing c o m p e t e n c e in w o r k i n g as part of a t e a c h i n g team, p l a n n i n g , implementing a n d evaluating program activities, a n d interacting with children a n d their parents. In e a c h c o u r s e the student has a block field work placement of 5 weeks, 4 full days per week. A s s i g n m e n t s are d e s i g n e d to facilitate the translation of theory into practice a n d t o further d e v e l o p the students' ability to observe a n d record children's behaviour. Education 368* Applied Theory - Practicum V (S) (6,6,2) Protection — the need for h o m e safety, c o n t r o l l i n g c o m m o n hazards, p r o v i d i n g sanitation, i m p l e m e n t i n g c l e a n ing p r o c e d u r e s , maintaining a p p r o v e d p e r s o n a l standards of hygiene a n d meeting c o m m o n e m e r g e n c i e s . Nutrition and Meal Management — the provision of adequate nutrition for clients of all ages a n d stages, ethnic backgrounds, a n d socio-economic conditions. Growth and Development — the u n d e r s t a n d i n g of individ u a l s at various stages of g r o w t h a n d development a n d the appropriate helping a p p r o a c h e s required in meeting b a s i c needs. Communication — the a p p l i c a t i o n of the basic p r i n c i p l e s of c o m m u n i c a t i o n to effective p e r f o r m a n c e o n the job. Health — the d e v e l o p m e n t of k n o w l e d g e a n d skills n e c e s s a r y to assist clients to maintain the activities of daily living. G r a d u a t e s receive a P r o v i n c i a l l y r e c o g n i z e d Certificate of C o m p e t e n c e in the H o m e m a k e r P r o g r a m . C E I C a n d M H R financial a s s i s t a n c e may be available for eligible adults. Part-Time Evening Program T h e full-time c o u r s e is divided into 4 units e a c h of 15 w e e k s . T h e equivalent of the full-time p r o g r a m is a c h i e v e d by c o m p l e t i n g all 4 units. C l a s s e s are held 1 night a week, 6:30 p.m. - 9:30 p.m. This is a c o u r s e for students w h o are c o m p l e t i n g Level II of the C o m p e t e n c i e s in Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n . A 5 week block p r a c t i c u m placement is c o o r d i n a t e d with c l a s s r o o m d i s c u s s i o n , tutorials a n d a s s i g n m e n t s . S t u d e n t s e n r o l e d in w o r k i n g with the D e v e l o p m e n t a l l y H a n d i c a p p e d a n d the E . C . E . U p g r a d i n g P r o g r a m work c l o s e l y with the instructor to set up their o w n p e r s o n a l goals, plan a m e t h o d to achieve these a n d then implement this plan in a centre w h i c h may b e the student's o w n w o r k p l a c e . Admission Requirements "Note:Students in the 2 year Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n P r o g r a m will have o n e placement in a S p e c i a l E d u c a tion P r o g r a m , o n e in an " U n d e r 3 " P r o g r a m a n d t w o in regular 3-5 year o l d programs, a n d a n additional p r a c t i c u m in o n e of the above. F o r c o u r s e c o m m e n c e m e n t dates, information call 986-1911, local 390. 1. Desire to work with people. 2. G o o d p h y s i c a l a n d mental health (a m e d i c a l certificate a n d chest X-ray are necessary) 3. Ability to c o m m u n i c a t e effectively in written a n d s p o k e n English. 4. M i n i m u m a g e 19. applications, a n d Long Term Care Aide Program Homemaker Program Full-time Day Program This 15 week full-time program qualifies the student to work under p r o f e s s i o n a l supervision as a m e m b e r of a Health C a r e T e a m providing c a r e to individuals a n d families in their o w n h o m e s , in institutions, a n d g r o u p h o m e s . T h e L o n g T e r m C a r e P r o g r a m begun by the Ministry of Health in J a n u a r y 1978 has resulted in an e v e r - g r o w i n g need for people with this training to fill both full a n d part-time positions with public a g e n c i e s a n d private c o m p a n i e s . J o b opportunities are excellent. Training includes: 1. individual a n d g r o u p practice of d e m o n s t r a t e d skills 2. supervised field work with local a g e n c i e s 3. supervised p r a c t i c u m a s s i g n m e n t s in selected c o m m u n i t y homes 4. visits to c o m m u n i t y health a n d rehabilitation a g e n c i e s a n d institutions. Course Content Job Orientation — the e m p l o y m e n t market. Occupational Development — the role a n d f u n c t i o n of the homemaker. 72 T h i s 16-week full time p r o g r a m qualifies the student to work in extended care, intermediate care a n d personal c a r e settings as an A i d e to other health p r o f e s s i o n a l s . T h i s c o u r s e M A Y b e offered in 1982/83, subject t o f u n d i n g . Training includes: 1. L o n g T e r m A i d T h e o r y a. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s a n d H u m a n R e l a t i o n s b. Individual a n d Family G r o w t h a n d D e v e l o p m e n t c. E m p l o y e e R e s p o n s i b i l i t i e s d. I n d e p e n d e n c e a n d C a r e in Activities of Daily L i v i n g 2. P r a c t i c e in s u p e r v i s e d laboratory setting. 3. P r a c t i c u m in supervised c l i n i c a l settings. A d m i s s i o n requirements: 1. Desire to care for people in a L o n g T e r m C a r e facility 2. G o o d p h y s i c a l a n d mental health (a m e d i c a l certificate and chest X-ray are n e c e s s a r y ) . \ 3. Ability to c o m m u n i c a t e effectively in written a n d s p o k e n English. 4. M i n i m u m a g e 19 For c o u r s e c o m m e n c e m e n t dates, information, call 986-1911, L o c a l 390. applications, and C E I C a n d M H R financial a s s i s t a n c e may be available for eligible adults. Registered Nurses Refresher Program T h i s is a 15-week full-time program that prepares nurses for return to active practice after being absent from the profession for a period of time. T r a i n i n g will take place in the facilities of L i o n ' s G a t e Hospital a n d will c o n s i s t of approximately 50% c l a s s r o o m and 50% c l i n i c a l e x p e r i e n c e . Interested a p p l i c a n t s are requested to apply in writing and include: A p p l y to: C o o r d i n a t o r of Health P r o g r a m s Capilano College 2055 P u r c e l l W a y North Vancouver V 7 J 3H5 F i n a n c i a l a s s i s t a n c e may be available for eligible adults t h r o u g h C a n a d a E m p l o y m e n t a n d Immigration C o m m i s s i o n . C o n t a c t the local C . E . I . C . office for information. For c o u r s e c o m m e n c e m e n t dates, information, call 986-1911 L o c a l 390. applications, and Credit Hours Lab Hours 1. date of graduation 2. current B . C . registration status a n d n u m b e r 3. resume of training and work e x p e r i e n c e Media Resources Program First Term C m n s . 150 M e d i a 152 Instructional Faculty Azaroff, P., B.A. ( H e b . U . Israel) B i z z o c c h i , J . V . , B.A. ( M i c h i g a n ) , T e a c h i n g C e r t . (Sec.) (Michigan) Blitstein, G . , B.A. (California) C o o k , R.D., B.A. (Toronto), A . A . S . , M e d i a S p e c . Cert. (Capilano College) Kellington, T.P., A.A.S., Media Spec. Cert. (Capilano College) L y n c h , N., B.A. (Western Ontario), M.A. ( U B C ) S i m p s o n , M., B.A. ( U B C ) T h o m p s o n , P., B.A. (Stanford), M . E d . (Minnesota) General Information T h e M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m trains students for the g r o w i n g opportunities in using intermediate-level m e d i a t e c h n o l o g i e s in all forms of e d u c a t i o n a n d training. T h e c o r e program involves p r o d u c t i o n training in basic a n d a d v a n c e d p h o t o g r a p h y , g r a p h i c s , a u d i o , film, slide-tape, m u l t i - m e d i a , a n d television. A l l students are trained in the b a s i c t e c h n i c a l a n d aesthetic skills in these m e d i a a n d c o m p l e t e finished p r o d u c t i o n s in them. In addition the program i n c l u d e s c o u r s e s in learning theory, r e s o u r c e centres a n d libraries, b a s i c e l e c t r o n i c systems, micro-computers, c o m m u n i c a t i o n s and free-lancing. A s s i g n m e n t s a n d c o u r s e s f o c u s o n the types of needs now being e x p r e s s e d in the m e d i a field. P r a c t i c u m s o c c u p y m u c h of the student's time in the fourth term. T h e program is oriented toward e d u c a t i o n a l institutions at all levels, s o c i a l a g e n c i e s , c o m m u n i t y m e d i a a n d journalism as well as industry. W o r k opportunities in this field i n c l u d e p r o d u c t i o n , distribution, training for m e d i a skills a n d social animation roles. T h e p r o g r a m c o n s i s t s of four terms of study and begins each year in the Fall T e r m . • A p p l i c a t i o n forms are available f r o m the department. A p p l i c a t i o n s are a c c e p t e d starting in J a n u a r y a n d are dealt with o n a 'first c o m e ' basis. Interviews are c o n d u c t e d until the class is filled. T h e r e are no interviews in J u n e a n d J u l y . Associate in Arts a n d S c i e n c e Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements 82.5 9 91.5 M e d i a 189 Studio Lab Hours 30 30 3 3 6 1.5 3 3 6 3 3 25.5 6 Second Term M e d i a 151 M e d i a 153 M e d i a 155 C m n s . 156 M e d i a 171 M e d i a 182 M e d i a 174 M e d i a 172 M e d i a 185 G r a p h i c s for M u l t i - m e d i a Productions 3 Film A n i m a t i o n 3 M e d i a A p p l i c a t i o n s II 3 Media Resources Communications 1.5 S m a l l Format T e l e v i s i o n . 3 Advanced Audio Production 3 A u d i o T e c h n o l o g y II 1.5 Video Technology 1.5 Advanced Photography . . 3 _3 22.5 9 6 3 3 3 3 3 6 3 3 21 12 3 3 Third Term M e d i a 253 M e d i a 254 M e d i a 260 M e d i a 271 M e d i a 272 Filmmaking M e d i a A p p l i c a t i o n s III Slide-tape Productions Educational Television Systems Video Technology ... Fourth Term M e d i a 256 M e d i a 301 M e d i a 302 M e d i a 303 M e d i a 263 Diploma Credit Hours M e d i a 154 M e d i a 173 M e d i a 181 M e d i a 183 Basic Communications . . . G r a p h i c s for the M e d i a Specialist Media Applications I Audio Technology I Basic Audio Production .. Theory & Applications Of P h o t o g r a p h y Production Research Methods M e d i a 304 M e d i a 305 M e d i a 306 C m n s . 159 Learning Resources Centres S p e c i a l Instructional Aids Instructional M e d i a Productions T h e M e d i a S p e c i a l i s t in Education and Training .. Technical A p p l i c a t i o n s IV C o m p u t e r s in Education . . . F r e e l a n c i n g in M e d i a Medianalysis Media Resources Communications 3 3 3 6 3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 22.5 3 73 Option C o u r s e s Each term the department will offer a limited number of courses that are open to college students and community members not enroled full-time in the Media Resources Program. These courses carry college credit and may be applied towards a Capilano College Diploma. In general, these courses are numbered Media 050 to Media 081 Check the timetable to see which ones will be offered in a given term. Media 051 Video Studies (F,S) (1.5,0,.5) (Open) An introduction to the role of video in a variety of community situations. Students will study the effect of TV on our society and look at other uses for video in affecting change. Media 052 Small Format Media Studies (F,S) (1.5,0,.5) (Open) The uses of small format educational media will be explored in this course. Filmstrips, slide tape, still photography and other media will be discussed and analyzed. Media 053 Film Studies (F) (3,0,1) (Open) A study of contemporary and historical films. The lectures, discussions, and assignments will be based on films shown in the class and on selected readings in film history, criticism, and history. This course is for students not enroled full-time in the Media Resources Program. Media 059 Audio Applications (F,S) (1.5,0,.5) (Open) A course designed for people who wish to make more effective use of their tape recorders and who wish to learn simple editing procedures. Media 064 Film Usage (S) (1.5,0,.5) (Open) A course in film making for amateur film makers. The class will cover film aesthetics and techniques for beginners. Topics include camera work, editing, titling, use of sound, and choice of equipment. Students to use their own equipment and supplies Media 070 Basic Photography - O p e n L a b (F,S) (3,0,1) (Open) A practical and lecture course in beginning photography similar to Media 072. This course will provide open access to laboratory times in place of structured laboratory instruction. Not for students enroled full-time in the Media Resources Program. Media 071 A d v a n c e d Photography - O p e n L a b (F,S) (3,0,1) (Open) A practical and lecture course in advanced photography similar to Media 073. This course will provide open access to laboratory times in place of structured laboratory instruction. Not for students enroled full-time in the Media Resources Program. Media 072 B a s i c Photography (SU) (3,3,1) (Open) A practical and lecture course in beginning photography. Similar to Media 183, this course is not for students enroled full-time in the Media Resources Program. Media 073 A d v a n c e d Photography ( S U ) (3,3,1) (Open) A practical and lecture course in advanced photography. Similar to Media 185, this course is for students not enroled full-time in the Media Resources Program. Media 060 G r a p h i c Applications ( F , S , S U ) (1.5,0,.5) (Open) Media 074 Basic Film Making (SU) (3,3,1) (Open) The use of graphics as it applies to media production. Lettering, silkscreening and other forms of graphics will be studied as they apply to media such as film, TV, slide tape, overhead transparencies. A practical and lecture course in film making, similar to Media 253. This course is not for students enroled full-time in the Media Resources Program. Media 061 Slide-tape Productions (F,S,SU) (1.5,0,.5) (Open) Media 075 Basic Film Making - Open Lab (F,S) (3,0,1) (Open) A course designed for people wishing to improve their present skill in slide tape productions. Students will produce a slide tape using their own slides and sound tracks. A practical and lecture course in cinematography, similar to Media 253. but more limited in scope and depth of coverage. This course will provide access to production facilities rather than structured laboratory instruction. Not for students enroled full-time in the Media Resources Program. Media 062 Photographic Usage (S) (3,0,1) (Open) An introduction for beginning photographers. The course will cover such topics as exposure, depth of field, treatment of motion, choice of lenses, basic lighting, creativity in photography, and purchasing of equipment. Participants to supply their own cameras and supplies. This course is for students not enroled full-time in the Media Resources Program. Media 063 Advanced Photographic Usage (S) (3,0,1) (Open) A course in advanced photography for experienced photographers. In a given term the class might centre on free lance photography, creative photography, photojournalism, or other advanced topics Students to use their own equipment. This course is for students not enroled full-time in the Media Resources Program. 74 Media 081 Basic A u d i o Production ( S U ) (3,0,1) (Open) An introduction to the basics of audio production techniques for students not enroled in the Media Resources Program. Major Program Requirements Media 151 Graphics for Multi-Media Productions (S) (3,0,1) A course in audiovisual graphics to produce graphics appropriate for use in slide-tape shows, animated films, etc. Media 152 G r a p h i c s for the Media Specialist (F) (3,0,1) Media 172 Video T e c h n o l o g y A n i n t r o d u c t i o n to the e q u i p m e n t a n d t e c h n i q u e s used by the graphic designer in media productions. Most of the c o u r s e is devoted to studio a s s i g n m e n t s , involving layout a n d typography, photography, silkscreen and overhead transparencies and their application to media p r o d u c t i o n . A n i n t r o d u c t i o n t o video s y s t e m s , i n c l u d i n g a history of video t e c h n o l o g y , c o m p o n e n t s of a c o m p l e t e video s y s t e m , a n d a c o m p a r i s o n of different formats. Media 153 Film Animation (S) (3,0,1) A n introduction to film animation t e c h n i q u e s u s i n g S u p e r 8 film, basic motion picture c a m e r a and studio lighting t e c h niques in lectures, d e m o n s t r a t i o n s and w o r k s h o p e x e r c i s e s , i n c l u d i n g a wide range of film a n i m a t i o n media; d r a w i n g o n film; bleaching; table t o p animation; cutouts; c a m e r a a n i m a tion of g r a p h i c s and p h o t o g r a p h s ; titling a n d basic animation cell t e c h n i q u e s . Media 154 Media Applications (F) (6,0,2) A n i n t r o d u c t i o n t o the e d u c a t i o n a l a n d s o c i a l uses of media. E m p h a s i s will be o n projects involving basic media, photography, graphics, transparencies, etc. Media 155 Media Applications II (S) (3,0,1) Intermediate c o u r s e in the educational a n d social uses media. Introduction to theories of learning, c o m m u n i c a t i o n systems, a n d educational a p p l i c a t i o n s . Media 171 Small Format Television (S) (3,0,1) Introduction in television p r o d u c t i o n . T h e c o u r s e will centre o n uses of the half-inch portable " r o v e r " s y s t e m . Media 173 Audio Technology (S) (1.5,0,.5) I (F) (1.5,0,.5) A n introduction to e l e c t r o n i c s e m p h a s i z i n g potential a p p l i c a t i o n in u n d e r s t a n d i n g a n d maintaining basic a u d i o equipment. Included in the c o u r s e are a survey a n d history of a u d i o technology, a n examination of tape recorders, speakers and m i c r o p h o n e s and c o n s i d e r a t i o n for various c o m p o n e n t s of m u s i c a n d location s o u n d reinforcement a n d r e c o r d i n g . Media 174 Audio Technology II (S) (1.5,0,.5) A continuation of a u d i o systems examination, with priority given to the care, m a i n t e n a n c e a n d t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g of all forms of a u d i o equipment. T h e practical a p p l i c a t i o n of test equipment, critical analysis of test reports and product s p e c i fications a n d an introduction to other basic equipment are also presented. Media 181 Basic A u d i o Production (F) (3,3,1) A n introduction to b a s i c p r o d u c t i o n t e c h n i q u e s for e d u c a t i o n a l materials. E m p h a s i s will be o n interviewing, scripting, d u b b i n g , editing, a n d mixing. T h e c o u r s e will also c o v e r the p r o p e r o p e r a t i o n of m i c r o p h o n e s , tape r e c o r d e r s a n d d u b / m i x facilities. Media 182 A d v a n c e d A u d i o Production (S) (3,0,1) A practical a n d lecture c o u r s e c o v e r i n g d o c u m e n t a r i e s , d r a m a , satire, dramatization, m u s i c r e c o r d i n g a n d s p e c i a l learning formats. S o m e of the work will involve the department's p r o d u c t i o n studio Media 183 Theory a n d Applications of Photographic Production (F) (6,3,2) A b e g i n n i n g c o u r s e in p h o t o g r a p h i c theory a n d practice, e x a m i n i n g basic p r i n c i p l e s of c a m e r a operation; e x p o s u r e ; d e v e l o p i n g a n d printing. The application of photographic techniques, with emphasis on c o m b i n i n g shot s e q u e n c e s to tell a story, as well as editing, layout a n d presentation. Media 189 Specialist R e s e a r c h a n d b a c k g r o u n d t e c h n i q u e s for m e d i a p r o d u c tions. T h e role of the m e d i a specialist in c o n s u l t a t i o n with clients a n d content experts in interviewing, a n d in utilizing libraries, n e w s p a p e r s a n d other s o u r c e s of material. Media 253 Film Making (F) (6,3,2) A n introduction to basic motion picture p r o d u c t i o n ; c a m e r a ; film stock, lighting; e x p o s u r e c o n t r o l s ; lenses a n d perspectives; c a m e r a movement; pictorial a n d directional continuity; editing, titling, s c r i p t i n g , with e m p h a s i s u p o n film as a g r a p h i c m e d i u m . A p r o d u c t i o n c o u r s e e m p h a s i z i n g c o n tinuity, dramatic a n d e d u c a t i o n a l films, utilizing S u p e r 8 equipment. Media 254 Media Applications III (F) (3,3,1) Further work in uses a n d a p p l i c a t i o n s of m e d i a in a field setting. T h e role of t h e R e s o u r c e C e n t r e in a n institution. Media 256 Learning Resources Centre (S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e in w h i c h the student will p r o d u c e a plan of an a u d i o v i s u a l r e s o u r c e in relation to the d e v e l o p i n g c o n c e p t of total learning r e s o u r c e s services. Media 260 Audiovisual G r a p h i c s (F) (3,3,1) A basic c o u r s e in the principles of g r a p h i c information a n d preparation of graphic materials for c l a s s r o o m instructional purposes, film or television p r o d u c t i o n s , i n c l u d i n g w o r k s h o p a s s i g n m e n t s with c o l o u r t o n e t e c h n i q u e s ; p h o t o g r a p h i c p a s t e - u p a n d r e d u c t i o n t e c h n i q u e s ; t h e p r o d u c t i o n of diagrams; basic d i s p l a y a n d flow charts. Media 263 Technical Applications IV (S) (1.5,0,.5) D e s i g n i n g of s y s t e m s for m e d i a p r o d u c t i o n a n d delivery. Includes budgeting a n d p u r c h a s i n g of e q u i p m e n t s y s t e m s , a c c o m m o d a t i o n of s y s t e m s , d e s i g n i n g t o institutional n e e d s and resources, a n d interfacing of different types of systems. Media 271 Educational Television Systems (F) (6,3,2) A production c o u r s e in medium format television, including portable W a n d 1" videotape equipment, s i n g l e - c a m e r a productions, d o c u m e n t a r i e s , a n d full studio p r o d u c t i o n s . T r a i n i n g i n c l u d e s c a m e r a work, d i r e c t i n g a n d s w i t c h i n g , lighting, editing, g r a p h i c s , telecine. 76 (F) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of video s y s t e m s with a n e m p h a s i s o n colour, the practical a p p l i c a t i o n of test equipment, s y s t e m s d e s i g n , a n d a look into the future of video t e c h n o l o g y . Media 301 Specialized Media 185 A d v a n c e d Photography (S) (3,3,1) Research Methods for the Media (S) (3,0,1) Media 272 Video T e c h n o l o g y Instructional A i d s (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: C o m p l e t i o n of the s p e c i a l t y c o u r s e s in the first year of the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m . A n a d v a n c e d c o u r s e in the p l a n n i n g a n d preparation of special g r a p h i c and instructional a i d s for c l a s s r o o m , film a n d T V p r o d u c t i o n s , a s well a s the study of p r o d u c t i o n t e c h niques, colourtone production and other display media. A field p r a c t i c u m c o u r s e involving one o r more major a s s i g n m e n t s . Media 302 Instructional Media Productions (S) (6,0,2) Prerequisite: C o m p l e t i o n of specialty c o u r s e s in the first y e a r of the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m . A n advanced course in media productions, including audio, slide, tape, film, v.t.r. a n d e.t.v. as these relate to e d u c a t i o n a l a n d training needs, with p r o d u c t i o n styles for s p e c i f i c needs and a u d i e n c e s . A field p r a c t i c u m c o u r s e involving o n e or more a s s i g n m e n t s . Media 303 T h e Media Specialist in Education a n d Training (S) (3,8,1) Prerequisite: C o m p l e t i o n of specialty c o u r s e s in the first year of the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m . A c o u r s e c o n c e r n e d with the uses of m e d i a for motivation, triggers, information t r a n s m i s s i o n , emotive learning a n d selfawareness; the relationship of the M e d i a S p e c i a l i s t to e d u cation in g e n e r a l , with e m p h a s i s o n the tasks c o n f r o n t i n g him. A field p r a c t i c u m c o u r s e involving o n e o r m o r e major assignments. Media 304 Computers in Education (S) (1.5,0,.5) A theoretical a n d h a n d s - o n i n t r o d u c t i o n to the u s e of c o m p u t e r s in e d u c a t i o n . S t u d e n t s will learn the set-up, operation a n d elementary programming of m i c r o - c o m p u t e r systems. T h e c o u r s e will c o n s i d e r t h e different t y p e s of c o m p u t e r - a s s i s t e d instruction ( C A I ) b e i n g u s e d , a n d the b a s i c s of d e s i g n a n d evaluation of C A I p r o g r a m s T h e potentials for linking c o m p u t e r s with other m e d i a will be examined. Media 305 Freelancing (S) (1.5,0,.5) A n introduction to many of the skills n e e d e d to survive in the e v e r - g r o w i n g , even competitive w o r l d of A u d i o v i s u a l p r o d u c t i o n . S o m e of the areas to be reviewed a r e f i n a n c i a l , legal, marketing, portfolio preparation a n d d e v e l o p i n g clientele. Media 306 Medianalysis (S) (1.5,0,.5) A n introductory critical a n a l y s i s of mass a n d alternative media — radio, T V , newspapers, magazines, records a n d other software — from a number of different perspectives, i n c l u d i n g production techniques, s o c i a l impact, influences o n the media, historical and t e c h n o l o g i c a l development, evolution of m e d i a sophistication a n d potential future role of media in society. T h e c o u r s e prerequisite is o n e a n d a half years of m e d i a p r o d u c t i o n a n d familiarity with m e d i a terminology. Music Instructional Faculty A r d i e l , F., C o m m e r c i a l Guitarist, C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c P r o g r a m Beatty, B., B.Sc. (Phys. Ther.), C P A . Teacher's Cert. (McGill), Music Therapy Program Bohna, N., B.Mus. ( U B C ) , Voice Boyle, G . , Percussion Branter, D „ B . M u s . , M . M u s . (Indiana), C l a s s i c a l / C o m m e r c i a l Woodwinds B r o w n , D., S t r i n g s B u r k e , K., B . A . (Antioch), M u s i c T h e r a p y C o o r d i n a t o r C a v a d a s , A . , Strings C e r n a u s k a s , K., D i p l o m a ( S a l z b u r g ) , B . M u s . ( T o r o n t o ) , Classical Woodwinds Clark, D., B . M u s . ( U B C ) , C o m m e r c i a l B r a s s C o x , G . , B . M u s . (Eastman), C l a s s i c a l W o o d w i n d s Daniels, P., B . M u s . ( U B C ) , M . M u s . (Julliard), C l a s s i c a l Woodwinds Doyle, R., C o m m e r c i a l P i a n o D u n a w a y , B., B.A. (Western W a s h i n g t o n ) , Strings F a l l s , L., A . R . C . T . ( T o r o n t o ) , B . M u s . , M . M u s . ( U B C ) , University Transfer P r o g r a m Feingold, S . , B.A. (Hons.) English ( S F U ) , C o m m e r c i a l Program Grayson, J . , M.A. Communications (SFU), Music Therapy Program G u n n , S., C o m m e r c i a l P r o g r a m . G u r r , R., M u s i c T h e r a p y G u i t a r H i g h a m , P., B.A. (Alta.), L . R . A . M . (Royal A c a d e m y , L o n d o n ) , M . M u s . (Alta.), C l a s s i c a l Guitar H u n t s m a n , E., P h . D . (Washington), M u s i c T h e r a p y P r o g r a m Inman, S., M.A. (Calif.), M u s i c T h e r a p y P r o g r a m Keenlyside, T., B.Mus. ( U B C ) , C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c Program King, S., B.Mus. (UBC), Commercial Music Program K o b y l a n s k y , K., B . M u s . , M . M u s . ( U B C ) , U n i v e r s i t y North S h o r e F a m i l y S e r v i c e s Sup: Gillian Taylor Pearson Hospital Sup: Julie McFerron Riverview H o s p i t a l S u p : S u s a n W o , M.T. Sunnyhill Hospital S u p : M a r i a n n e M o s e r , M T. U B C Extended Care S u p : D o r e e n A l e x a n d e r , M.T. U B C Health S c i e n c e s D a y C a r e S u p : S t e p h e n N i k l e v a , M.T. Valleyview H o s p i t a l S u p : K a y T h o m p s o n , M.T. V . G . H . Health Unit for C h i l d r e n Sup: Sharie Scheske Woodlands School S u p : David C r e i g h t o n General Information C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e offers three programs: the C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c P r o g r a m , the M u s i c T h e r a p y P r o g r a m a n d the M u s i c Transfer P r o g r a m . M o s t c o u r s e s are o p e n to part-time students. Commercial Music Program T h i s p r o g r a m offers the a s p i r i n g j a z z / c o m m e r c i a l m u s i c i a n or vocalist a n in-depth g r o u n d i n g in h i s / h e r field. T o e n s u r e a practical e d u c a t i o n , the program offers a c h o i c e of s p e c i a l i z e d areas of study. T w o year A s s o c i a t e in Arts a n d S c i e n c e D i p l o m a s are offered with options in Instrumental Performance, Vocal Performance, Arranging/Composition a n d G e n e r a l M u s i c A o n e year Certificate p r o g r a m is available for individuals w i s h i n g to pursue the field of S o n g Writing. M o s t C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c c o u r s e s carry transfer credit towards a B a c h e l o r of M u s i c degree in J a z z at the University of Western W a s h i n g t o n . Transfer C o o r d i n a t o r K u k u r u d z a , I., C o m m e r c i a l Guitarist, C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c Program Lenhart, R., Cert., D i p l o m a (Prague), Strings McMaster, N., B.A. ( U B C ) , Diploma, Music Therapy (Nordoff & R o b b i n s ) , M.T.A., M u s i c T h e r a p y P r o g r a m Moffitt, E., B . M u s . ( M c G i l l ) , D i p l o m a , M u s i c T h e r a p y ( C a p i l a n o ) , M.T.A., M u s i c T h e r a p y P r o g r a m Ramsbottom, G., Classical Woodwinds Reveley, M., B.Mus. ( U B C ) , C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c C o o r d i n a t o r R o s e m a r i n , F.. B.A. ( M c G i l l ) , B . M u s . ( U . of C a l g a r y ) , Prof. T e a c h i n g Cert. ( U B C ) , Strings. S i m p s o n , J . , B.Mus. ( U B C ) , University Transfer P r o g r a m S l e m o n , P., B . A . (Toronto), B . S c , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , M . M . A . ( M c G i l l ) , University Transfer P r o g r a m T h o m p s o n , R., A . A . (Douglas), C o m m e r c i a l G u i t a r W a t s o n , B., A . T . C . M . Cert., V o i c e W h i t i n g , J „ L . T . C . L . / F . T . C . L . (Trinity), C l a s s i c a l P i a n o Wikjord, B., P e r c u s s i o n W o l d , A . , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , A . R . C . T . (Toronto), C o m m e r c i a l Music Program Worst, R., C o m m e r c i a l Bass S t u d e n t s c o n s i d e r i n g entry s h o u l d contact the M u s i c Department to d i s c u s s e n t r a n c e requirements. Music Therapy Practicum Placements and Supervisors S t u d e n t s not ready to enter the d i p l o m a p r o g r a m will be a d v i s e d as to appropriate c o u r s e w o r k . A l l students entering the C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c P r o g r a m on a fulltime b a s i s will enrol in all of the b a s i c c o r e m u s i c c o u r s e s and select an additional six credit hours of study per semester to fulfill their o p t i o n requirements. A total of 72 credit hours is required for g r a d u a t i o n . S t u d e n t s entering the C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c P r o g r a m m a y substitute appropriate a u d i o p r o d u c t i o n c o u r s e s for m u s i c electives after consultation with the c o o r d i n a t o r . Guitarists enroling in instrumental p e r f o r m a n c e may substitute both the guitar reading w o r k s h o p a n d guitar e n s e m b l e for their e n s e m b l e requirements. Students may select a 1.5 credit hour m u s i c elective to replace their c o r e c l a s s p i a n o requirements u p o n s u c c e s s f u l c o m p l e t i o n of a piano p r o f i c i e n c y test. A l l s t u d e n t s in i n s t r u m e n t a l p e r f o r m a n c e , v o c a l p e r f o r m a n c e a n d a r r a n g i n g / c o m p o s i t i o n options will be e x p e c t e d to give a graduation recital in the last semester of their attendance of at least o n e half h o u r in length. B o b Berwick Preschool Sup: Wanda Justice C h o w n Adult Day Care Centre S u p : B r o o k e Morris G e r m a n C a n a d i a n Rest H o m e S u p : J e r e m i e Knott, M.T. G . F . S t r o n g Rehabilitation C e n t r e Sup: Madelon Schouten Kettle F r i e n d s h i p S o c i e t y Sup: Suzanne Jean Oakridge School Sup: Alan Hasle 77 Core Curriculum Vocal Performance Credit Hours First Term Music Music Music Music Music Music 114 140 184 130 103 170 Class Piano Private M u s i c Instruction Sight/Ear Ensemble Comm. Harmony I History J a z z 1-5 1.8 3 3 1-6 1-5 ••• 115 141 185 131 104 105 Class Piano Private M u s i c Instruction Sight/Ear Ensemble C o m m . H a r m o n y II Orchestration M u s i c 132 M u s i c 134 1-5 1.6 3 3 1-5 1-5 Vocal Group Rep. I Solo Voice Rep. I M u s i c Electives Second Term M u s i c 133 M u s i c 135 12 Second Term Music Music Music Music Music Music First Term V o c a l G r o u p R e p . II S o l o V o i c e R e p . II M u s i c Electives Third Term M u s i c 232 M u s i c 234 V o c a l G r o u p R e p . Ill S o l o V o i c e R e p . Ill M u s i c Electives 12 Third Term Music Music Music Music Music Music 214 240 284 230 203 171 Fourth Term Class Piano Private M u s i c Instruction Sight/Ear Ensemble C o m m . H a r m o n y III History of P o p 1-5 15 3 3 15 1-5 M u s i c 233 M u s i c 235 V o c a l G r o u p R e p . IV S o l o V o i c e R e p . IV M u s i c Electives G r a d Recital 12 Fourth Term Music Music Music Music Music Music 215 241 285 231 204 260 Arranging/Composition Class Piano Private M u s i c Instruction Sight/Ear Ensemble C o m m . H a r m o n y IV C o m m . Relations 1 5 15 3 3 1-5 1-5 First Term M u s i c 106 Traditional Harmony & Composition I M u s i c Electives 12 Second Term Commerical Music Options M u s i c 107 Instrumental Performance M u s i c 172 Traditional Harmony & C o m p o s i t i o n II Arranging I M u s i c Electives Credit First Term M u s i c 194 M u s i c 180 M u s i c 188 Hours Repertoire I Improvisation I Improvisation E n s e m b l e I 3 1.5 1.5 6 Third Term M u s i c 206 M u s i c 272 M u s i c 205 Second Term M u s i c 195 M u s i c 181 M u s i c 189 Repertoire II Improvisation II Improvisation E n s e m b l e II 3 1.6 1.5 2 Fourth Term M u s i c 207 M u s i c 273 Third Term M u s i c 294 M u s i c 280 M u s i c 288 Repertoire III Improvisation III Improvisation E n s e m b l e III 3 1.5 1.5 C o m p o s i t i o n III A r r a n g i n g II O r c h e s t r a t i o n II M u s i c Electives C o m p o s i t i o n IV A r r a n g i n g III M u s i c Electives G r a d Recital General Music ~6~ First Term Fourth Term M u s i c 295 M u s i c 281 M u s i c 289 Repertoire IV Improvisation IV Improvisation E n s e m b l e IV G r a d Recital 3 1.5 1.5 Music electives Music Electives Music Electives Music Electives Second Term Third Term 6 Fourth Term 78 Third Term Songwriting - One Year Diploma Credit H o u r s First Term M u s i c 173 History of P o p M u s i c Electives 1-8 4.5 6 Second Term M u s i c 270 Songwriting M u s i c Electives 1.8 4.5 E n g l i s h 200 M u s i c 200 M u s i c 230 M u s i c 110 M u s i c 210 M u s i c 220 M u s i c 240 M u s i c 214 Elective Literature to 1660 Theory V Ensemble C l a s s Strings Class Woodwinds History III Private M u s i c Instruction . . Class Piano C h o s e n in c o n s u l t a t i o n with the C o o r d i n a t o r 6 M u s i c 190/1 & 290/1 may be substituted for M u s i c 140/1 in the C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c P r o g r a m only. S e e registration p r o c e d u r e printed after M u s i c Transfer Program. Music Transfer Program T h i s p r o g r a m is d e s i g n e d for students w h o desire to g o on to a B . M u s . degree program at a C a n a d i a n university. A l l c o u r s e s in this program carry transfer to the M u s i c Department of U B C . Transferability has a l s o b e e n a r r a n g e d with the Faculty of M u s i c at the University of Victoria. T h e p r o g r a m c o n s i s t s of a liberal arts e d u c a t i o n a n d s p e c i a l i z e d m u s i c training, i n c l u d i n g theory, history a n d a p p l i e d music. S o m e c o u r s e s also carry transferability into the Faculty of E d u c a t i o n at U B C . In addition students desiring to transfer into the Faculty of A r t s with a major in m u s i c may take M u s i c 100/101 a n d M u s i c 120/1 in their first year, a n d M u s i c 200/1 a n d 220/1 in their s e c o n d year. M u s i c Transfer students will be advised to take the S i g h t s i n g i n g / E a r T r a i n i n g c o u r s e ( M U 184/185) d e p e n d i n g o n the results of their theory placement test. Associate in Arts and Science Diploma Credit Hours Lab Hours 60 24 4 84 4 First Term English A n y transferable English course History I Ensemble Private M u s i c Instruction . . ClassStrings Class Woodwinds Class Piano T h e o r y III C h o s e n in c o n s u l t a t i o n with the C o o r d i n a t o r M u s i c 120 M u s i c 130 M u s i c 140 M u s i c 110 M u s i c 210 M u s i c 114 M u s i c 100 Elective 3 3 3 1.5 3 15 3 M u s i c 121 M u s i c 131 M u s i c 141 M u s i c 111 M u s i c 211 M u s i c 115 M u s i c 101 Elective A n y transferable English course History II Ensemble Private M u s i c Instruction .. ClassStrings Class Woodwinds Class Piano T h e o r y IV C h o s e n in c o n s u l t a t i o n with the C o o r d i n a t o r 3 1 Fourth Term E n g l i s h 201 M u s i c 201 M u s i c 231 M u s i c 111 M u s i c 211 M u s i c 221 M u s i c 241 M u s i c 215 Elective o r Literature s i n c e 1660 T h e o r y VI Ensemble Class Strings Class Woodwinds History VI Private M u s i c Instruction . . Class Piano C h o s e n in c o n s u l t a t i o n with the C o o r d i n a t o r 3 3 3 3 3 1.5 1.8 1 3 21~~ 1 Both the c o m m e r c i a l a n d m u s i c transfer p r o g r a m s offer students e n r o l e d in other C o l l e g e programs a c o n t i n u i n g e d u c a t i o n in m u s i c a n d elective credit. N u m e r o u s m u s i c c o u r s e s are available to part-time students. A l l a p p l i c a n t s for either the C a r e e r or the M L S I C Transfer p r o g r a m s must d o the f o l l o w i n g : 1. C o m p l y with general a d m i s s i o n requirements of C a p i l a n o College. 2. Participate in a private interview with the C o o r d i n a t o r of M u s i c a n d / o r P r o g r a m Instructor. 3. Write a theory placement e x a m i n a t i o n . 4. P l a y an audition o n their major instrument. 5. T a k e an E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t Test. 6. Students are advised to take a hearing test a n d submit the results to the department. A u d i t i o n s will involve the presentation of a short prepared piece a n d a d e m o n s t r a t i o n of the student's instrumental t e c h n i q u e a n d sightreading ability. R e t u r n i n g c o m m e r c i a l m u s i c students may pre-register during the month of A p r i l . N e w full-time students d e m o n strating sufficient instrument a n d / o r theoretical a c c o m p l i s h ment in their placement test a n d audition may pre-register d u r i n g M a y and A u g u s t to e n s u r e their full enrolment. Parttime c o m m e r c i a l students may register during in-person registration. M u s i c transfer students may register at any time. 1 A l l interviews, auditions a n d placement tests will be held in M a y a n d A u g u s t of 1981. Interested persons are a s k e d to p h o n e the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e M u s i c Department, 986-1911, for further information. 1 Music Therapy Program Second Term ' 1 3 21 English 3 3 1.5 1.5 21 Note: T h o s e students w h o w i s h to enter T h e o r y 200 s h o u l d k n o w the R u d i m e n t s of T h e o r y ( M u s i c 010). Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s General Education Requirements 3 3 3 M u s i c therapists u s e the creative p r o c e s s inherent in musical participation to assist individuals a n d g r o u p s to function better mentally, p h y s i c a l l y a n d e m o t i o n a l l y . M u s i c therapists work with d e e p e m o t i o n s in s p e c i a l therapeutic p r o g r a m s , run exercise a n d d a n c e p r o g r a m s , lead c h o i r s or instrumental e n s e m b l e s . P r o g r a m graduates work o n treatment teams in hospitals, c l i n i c s , b o a r d i n g h o m e s , c o m m u n i t y service o r g a n i z a t i o n s a n d for s c h o o l boards. 3 3 3 1.5 3 1.8 3 1 3 21 1 T h i s field is new a n d e x p a n d i n g into all areas of the health field. T h e salary s c a l e is equivalent to other therapy specialities. G r a d u a t e s c o m p l e t e the first stage of the C a n a d i a n A s s o c i a t i o n for M u s i c T h e r a p y a c c r e d i t a t i o n process. 79 The M u s i c T h e r a p y P r o g r a m i n c l u d e ^ a c a d e m i c a n d experiential c o u r s e w o r k . S t u d e n t s e x p l o r e their values, beliefs, feelings a n d s e l f - c o n c e p t s while they e x a m i n e the many meanings a n d c o m p o n e n t s of m u s i c from a r o u n d the world. Students are trained to be health field c l i n i c i a n s . Music therapists d a n c e r s a n d artists. learn to b e e x p r e s s i v e m u s i c i a n s , C o n t i n u a t i o n in the p r o g r a m a n d granting of the Arts a n d S c i e n c e d i p l o m a will be contingent u p o n demonstration of an adequate level of p e r s o n a l , a c a d e m i c a n d c l i n i c a l skills as jointly evaluated e a c h semester by the student, m u s i c therapy faculty a n d field supervisors. All students entering M u s i c T h e r a p y must: 1 2 3. 4. 5. 6. 7 8. C o m p l y with the general c o l l e g e entrance requirements. Participate in a n interview with the M u s i c T h e r a p y Coordinator. Play an audition o n his/her c o n c e n t r a t i o n instrument and demonstrate both t e c h n i q u e a n d repertoire of a G r a d e 7 T o r o n t o C o n s e r v a t o r y level (or equivalent) together with m u s i c a l sensitivity T a k e a theory placement test and demonstrate a g r a s p of tonal harmony. Have s u c c e s s f u l l y c o m p l e t e d a c o u r s e in introductory psychology. Have s o m e e x p e r i e n c e with (or e x p o s u r e to) people with special needs. This program requires an unusually high level of maturity and integrity. S t u d e n t s with a year or more of life e x p e r i e n c e f o l l o w i n g high s c h o o l are usually more knowlp able i r d mature in their c h o i c e of direction and ' "e: Adn. 3 held in A p r i l a n d May. Associate in Arts a n d S c i e n c e Diploma M u s i c T h e r a p y 261 M u s i c 241 M u s i c T h e r a p y 291 M u s i c T h e r a p y 264 Elective M u s i c T h e r a p y IV Private M u s i c Instruction P r a c t i c u m IV C l i n i c a l Orientation C h o s e n in c o n s u l t a t i o n with the c o o r d i n a t o r 3 1.5 6 3 3 16.5 Music 010 Theory I (F) (3,1,1) A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to teach m u s i c rudiments i n c l u d i n g : the staff, the clefs, notes a n d rests, major a n d m i n o r s c a l e s , intervals a n d c h o r d s . Ear training will i n c l u d e r e c o g n i t i o n of all intervals — m e l o d i c a l l y a n d h a r m o n i c a l l y — major, minor, a u g m e n t e d a n d d i m i n i s h e d triads. Sight s i n g i n g will e n c o m pass e x a m p l e s in d u p l e and triple metre in major a n d minor keys using stepwise a n d disjunct m e l o d i c m o t i o n . M u s i c 011 T h e o r y II (S) (3,1,1) Prerequisite: M u s i c 010. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 010. Transferable t o S F U . Music 030 Beginning Ensemble (F) (3,0,1) E n s e m b l e e x p e r i e n c e for those students not yet ready to enter M u s i c 100. S e e M u s i c 130. Credit Hours Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s General Education Requirements Semester 4 M u s i c 031 58.5 12 Beginning Ensemble 70.5 S e e also M u s i c 130. II (S) (3,0,1) C o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 030. Semester 1 M u s i c T h e r a p y 150 M u s i c T h e r a p y 160 M u s i c 140 T h e Influence of M u s i c Music Therapy I Private M u s i c Instruction Music Improvisation 1.5 Practicum I Intervention in C h i l d Development 6 180 M u s i c T h e r a p y 190 M u s i c T h e r a p y 170 — 3 3 1.5 3 18 Semester 2 M u s i c T h e r a p y 180 M u s i c T h e r a p y 151 M u s i c T h e r a p y 161 M u s i c 141 M u s i c T h e r a p y 191 P s y c h 222 Interpersonal S k i l l s for Music Therapy T h e Influence of M u s i c M u s i c T h e r a p y II Private M u s i c Instruction P r a c t i c u m II Abnormal Psychology — 1.5 3 3 1.5 6 3 M u s i c T h e r a p y III Private M u s i c Instruction — P r a c t i c u m III M u s i c a n d the Creative Arts . Group Dynamics C h o s e n in c o n s u l t a t i o n with the c o o r d i n a t o r (3,2,1) Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Music 101 T h e o r y IV (S) (3,2,1) 3 1.5 6 1.5 3 Prerequisite: M u s i c 100. 3 18 80 (F) A penetrating study of the main b u i l d i n g b l o c k s of m u s i c — m e l o d i c m o t i o n a n d rhythm. T h r o u g h p e r f o r m a n c e a n d analysis of w o r k s of Palestrina a n d L a s s u s a n d attempts at c o m p o s i t i o n using their language, a k n o w l e d g e of m o d e s , rhythmic usage, a n d m e l o d i c intervallic structures is g a i n e d . T h i s sets the basis for writing 2 v o i c e c o n t r a p u n t a l m u s i c without the necessity of a study of the F u x i a n c o n c e p t of s p e c i e s counterpoint. T w o part writing will be attempted during the s e c o n d half of the semester. Ear training will be e m p h a s i z e d d u r i n g the c o u r s e . 18 Semester 3 M u s i c T h e r a p y 260 M u s i c 240 M u s i c T h e r a p y 290 M u s i c T h e r a p y 250 P s y c h 201 Elective Music 100 T h e o r y III A continuation of the work of M u s i c 100 with concentration on 2, 3 and 4 part contrapuntal writing. Detailed examination of cadential patterns, s u s p e n s i o n usage, a n d h o m o p h o n i c m u s i c will be undertaken. E a r training will be e m p h a s i z e d during the c o u r s e . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . M u s i c 115 Piano C l a s s (S) (1.5,2..5) M u s i c 103 C o m m e r c i a l H a r m o n y I (F) (1.5,0,.5) Prerequisite: M u s i c 010 or a w o r k i n g k n o w l e d g e of m u s i c rudiments (scales, intervals, triads) A practical look at m e l o d i c / h a r m o n i c relationships in tonal m u s i c . Includes study of the overtone series, intervals, scales, m o d e s , c h o r d s y m b o l s , diatonic triads, root motion, R o m a n numeral analysis, principles of c h o r d p r o g r e s s i o n , inversions, linear h a r m o n i c continuity, f u n c t i o n a l h a r m o n i c analysis, m e l o d i c analysis a n d c h o r d scales. A continuation of M u s i c 114. In a d d i t i o n , keyboard s e q u e n c e s , a r p e g g i o s , a n d major scales are i n t r o d u c e d a l o n g with e a s y o r i g i n a l repertoire. Transferable to U B C a n d U.Vic. Music 116 Guitar/Bass Sight Reading W o r k s h o p I (F) (1.5,0,0) A n a p p r o a c h to s i n g l e note reading d e v e l o p e d for guitar and bass players. S t u d y of p h r a s i n g , appropriate position usage, a n d drill in rhythms a n d sight r e a d i n g . Music 104 C o m m e r c i a l H a r m o n y II (S) (1.5,0..5) Prerequisite: C o m m e r c i a l H a r m o n y I C o n t i n u e d exploration of c h o r d progression a n d melody, i n c l u d i n g : 7th c h o r d s , s e c o n d a r y d o m i n a n t s , c h o r d patterns, passing d i m i n i s h e d c h o r d s , m i n o r k e y c h o r d p r o g r e s s i o n , s u b d o m i n a n t minor in major keys, c h o r d scales. Music 117 Guitar/Bass Sight Reading Workshop II (S) (1.5,0,0) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of W o r k s h o p I. M u s i c 105 Orchestration I (S) (1.5,0,0) S t u d e n t s will undertake the study of s c o r e preparation, basic m u s i c a l terms a n d articulations, a n d writing for the rhythm s e c t i o n instruments. M u s i c 106 Traditional Harmony & Composition T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Prerequisite: T o be taken c o n c u r r e n t l y with C o m m e r c i a l H a r m o n y I, Music 121 History II (S) (3,0,1) A study of m u s i c history from Dufay to M o n t e v e r d i . A c o u r s e oriented t o those interested in d e v e l o p i n g their abilities in c o m p o s i n g a n d a r r a n g i n g . A study of traditional principles of v o i c e leading for c h o r a l e textures with triadic h a r m o n y a n d melody writing. T r a n s f e r a b l e t o S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Music 130 Ensemble I (F) (3,0,1) M u s i c 030, 031, 130, 131, 230, 231 all have three s e c t i o n s . II (S) (1.5,0,.5) Prerequisite: C o m p o s i t i o n I. T o b e taken c o n c u r r e n t l y with C o m m e r c i a l H a r m o n y II. Includes the study of v o i c e l e a d i n g through 7th a n d altered c h o r d s , tune writing in p o p - r o c k style, a n a l y s i s of popular m u s i c . Music 110 Class Strings (F) (3,2,1) A practical study of the violin family. Transferable to U B C a n d U.Vic. Music 111 C l a s s Strings (S) (3,2,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 110. Transferable to U B C a n d U.Vic. Music 114 Piano C l a s s (F) (1.5,2,.5) This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d for students w h o wish to learn b a s i c k e y b o a r d s k i l l s . R e a d i n g , i m p r o v i s a t i o n , transposition and h a r m o n i z a t i o n are the skills d e v e l o p e d d u r i n g this c o u r s e and the three s u b s e q u e n t levels. T h e o r e t i c a l c o n c e p t s are a p p l i e d at the k e y b o a r d a n d i n c l u d e d i a t o n i c triads a n d sevenths of the major key, all major, minor a n d modal tetrac h o r d s . A weekly lab reviews material c o v e r e d in class. Students c a n practise o n the department's p i a n o s . T r a n s f e r a b l e to U B C a n d U . V i c . A study of m u s i c a l history from the time of ancient G r e e c e to Dufay. I (F) (1.5,0,.5) Music 107 Traditional Harmony & C o m p o s i t i o n Music 120 History I (F) (3,0,1) Section 1 - Choir A n exploration through five centuries of choral music from the R e n a i s s a n c e to the present. Opportunities for s i n g i n g without a c c o m p a n i m e n t (a capella), with p i a n o , with rhythm section a n d / o r with c o m p l e t e s y m p h o n y orchestra. Particular attention will be paid to pitch, rhythm, d i c t i o n , a n d balance. P e r f o r m a n c e before an a u d i e n c e will be the culminating event of the semester. Section 2 - Orchestra Rehearsal and performance of concert repertoire. String players will be a c c e p t e d without audition. W i n d players must contact the M u s i c Department at least one week before classes c o m m e n c e to arrange for a n audition. P e r s o n s w i n n i n g a position t h r o u g h audition will b e a l l o w e d to register. Section 3 - Swing Choir Music 131 Ensemble II (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 130. Music 132 Vocal G r o u p Repertoire I (F) (1.5,0,0) T h i s c o u r s e will d e v e l o p the ability of vocalists to function as part of a small vocal e n s e m b l e in jazz a n d p o p styles. C o u r s e content i n c l u d e s : g r o u p instruction in p h r a s i n g , interpretation, b l e n d a n d t u n i n g ; style a n a l y s i s of v o c a l g r o u p s ; m e m o r i z a t i o n of vocal material; p e r f o r m a n c e in various p o p group styles with a n d without rhythm accompaniment. 81 M u s i c 133 M u s i c 164 V o c a l G r o u p Repertoire II (S) (1.5,0,0) Piano C l a s s (F) (1.5,0,0) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of V o c a l G r o u p Repertoire I instruction. M u s i c 134 S o l o V o i c e Repertoire I (F) (1.5,0,0) A course w h i c h develops t h e abilities needed f o r s u c c e s s f u l s o l o vocal performance. C o u r s e content i n c l u d e s : style a n a l y s i s , m i k e t e c h n i q u e , d e v e l o p m e n t of s t a g e p r e s e n c e , s o l o p e r f o r m a n c e in various styles with a c c o m p a n i m e n t , m e m o r i z a t i o n of a n u m b e r of s o n g s . G r o u p lessons for those students without previous m u s i c theory k n o w l e d g e . Students will learn to read m u s i c a n d a c q u i r e basic pianistic skills. M u s i c 165 Piano C l a s s (S) (1.5,0,0) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 164. M u s i c 170 M u s i c 135 S o l o V o i c e Repertoire II (S) (1.5,0,0) History of J a z z (F) (1.5,0,.5) A survey of jazz t h r o u g h styles a n d stylists f r o m its roots in A f r i c a to the present. A continuation of S o l o V o i c e Repertoire I instruction. M u s i c 172 Guitar/Bass Ensembles Arranging T h e s e c o u r s e s a r e devoted to i m p r o v i n g reading a n d interpretation skills in jazz a n d rock idioms. S p e c i a l e m p h a s i s will be given to d e v e l o p i n g students' ability to " s w i n g " a n d to play the c o m p l e x rhythms of today's m u s i c . A study techniques. M u s i c 136 Guitar E n s e m b l e of four part block harmonization arranging I (F) (1.5,0,0) P e r f o r m a n c e in a n " A l l G u i t a r " e n s e m b l e f o r t h e development of sight reading a n d p h r a s i n g abilities. Guitar E n s e m b l e II (S) (1.5,0,0) M u s i c 180 A s Guitar E n s e m b l e I. M u s i c 140 Private M u s i c Instruction (F) (1.5,0,.5) A c o u r s e primarily d e s i g n e d t o permit the student to pursue in-depth study of his/her own music specialty. Students will be expected to s h o w progress at the b e g i n n i n g a n d at the end of the term f o r the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e M u s i c Faculty in order to assist the evaluation by m u s i c faculty in c o n j u n c t i o n with the private m u s i c teacher. T h e c o u r s e c o n s i s t s of weekly hour lessons. Transferable to U B C a n d U.Vic. M u s i c 140, 141, 240, 241 all have 12 sections. 1. C o m m e r c i a l G u i t a r / B a s s 2. Strings 3. V o i c e 4. C l a s s i c a l G u i t a r 5. C l a s s i c a l P i a n o 6. C o m m e r c i a l P i a n o 7. M u s i c T h e r a p y P i a n o 8. C l a s s i c a l W i n d s 9. C o m m e r c i a l W i n d s 10. M u s i c T h e r a p y G u i t a r 11. C o m p o s i t i o n 12. P e r c u s s i o n M u s i c 181 Improvisation (S) (1.5,0,.5) A continuation of M u s i c 180. This semester will be devoted to analysis of c h o r d p r o g r e s s i o n s a n d more a d v a n c e d chordscale analysis. At the e n d of this semester, students s h o u l d have the basic theoretical k n o w l e d g e n e c e s s a r y t o a n a l y s e and learn to improvise o n a n y " s t a n d a r d " jazz tune. Sightsinging/Ear • T r a i n i n g (F) (3,0,1) Aural and sight training concentrating o n melodic, rhythmic dictation a n d s i g h t s i n g i n g . M u s i c 185 / y"^ M u s i c 141 Private M u s i c Instruction (S) (1.5,0,.5) Transferable to U B C a n d U.Vic. Improvisation (F) (1.5,0,.5) S e c t i o n 1: M u s i c T h e r a p y . S e c t i o n 2: C o m m e r c i a l music. T h i s s e c t i o n by audition only. A c o u r s e to teach the basics of improvisation o n c h o r d c h a n g e s . T h e first s e m e s t e r will b e devoted to rhythmic concepts, basic c h o r d - s c a l e relationships and development of technical e x e r c i s e s f o r b a s i c c h o r d progressions. M u s i c 184 Note: This c o u r s e is available to those students enroled in 15 credit hours of m u s i c c u r r i c u l u m . T h o s e students with less than 15 credit hours of m u s i c c u r r i c u l u m a n d w h o desire credit for M u s i c 140 must consult the M u s i c C o o r d i n a t o r prior to registration. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 140 M u s i c 173 History of P o p u l a r M u s i c (F) (1.5,0,0) A survey of popular m u s i c styles of the 20th century. M u s i c 137 82 I (S) (1.5,0,0) P r e r e q u i s i t e : C o m m e r c i a l H a r m o n y I, t o b e t a k e n c o n c u r r e n t l y with C o m m e r c i a l H a r m o n y II a n d O r c h e s t r a t i o n I. Sightsinging/Ear T r a i n i n g (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 184. M u s i c 188 Improvisation E n s e m b l e (F) (1.5,0,.5) T o b e taken with M u s i c 180. P r a c t i c a l e x p e r i e n c e in a s m a l l g r o u p situation. S t u d e n t s will play tunes b a s e d o n c h o r d p r o g r e s s i o n studied in M u s i c 180. B y audition only. M u s i c 189 Improvisation E n s e m b l e (S) (1.5,0,.5) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 188. M u s i c 190 Private Music Instruction - Secondary Instrument (F) (1.5,0,-5) T h i s c o u r s e c o n s i s t s of weekly half-hour lessons o n the student's s e c o n d a r y instrument. S t u d e n t s will be e x p e c t e d to s h o w p r o g r e s s at the e n d of the term for the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e M u s i c Faculty. M u s i c 190, 191, 290, 291 all have 12 s e c t i o n s : 1. C o m m e r c i a l G u i t a r / B a s s 2. S t r i n g s 3. V o i c e 4. C l a s s i c a l G u i t a r 5. C l a s s i c a l P i a n o 6. C o m m e r c i a l P i a n o 7. M u s i c T h e r a p y P i a n o 8. C l a s s i c a l W i n d s 9. C o m m e r c i a l W i n d s 10. M u s i c T h e r a p y Guitar 11. C o m p o s i t i o n 12. P e r c u s s i o n M u s i c 191 Private Music Instruction — Secondary Instrument (S) (1.5,0,.5) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 190. J a z z a n d C o m m e r c i a l Repertoire Prerequisite: A d e q u a t e sight reading a n d t e c h n i c a l ability with c h o s e n instrument o r v o i c e . T h e s e are flexible c o u r s e s , o p e n to students in the c o m m e r c i a l program w h o wish t o gain e x p e r i e n c e in r e h e a r s a l t e c h n i q u e s a n d p e r f o r m a n c e . S t u d e n t s will rehearse under s u p e r v i s i o n a s v o c a l i s t s or instrumentalists, individually or in small g r o u p s . Music 194 Repertoire I (F) (3,0,1) For all instruments, requirements i n c l u d e four hours of rehearsal a week plus a n u m b e r of p e r f o r m a n c e s . M u s i c 195 Repertoire II (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of Repertoire I. Music 200 Theory V (F) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: M u s i c 101 or M u s i c 0 1 1 . A study of m u s i c from c a . 1600 to c a . 1800. A study of h a r m o n y ; triads, n o n - h a r m o n i c materials, d o m i n a n t seventh and derivatives, s e c o n d a r y d o m i n a n t s , s i m p l e m o d u l a t i o n . Elementary forms, analysis of 17th and 18th century literature S i g h t s i n g i n g , m e l o d i c rhythmic, a n d h a r m o n i c dictation. K e y b o a r d harmony; playing of c a d e n c e types, m o d u l a t i o n to c l o s e l y related keys, realization of elementary figures bass. Music 203 C o m m e r c i a l H a r m o n y III (F) (1.5,0,.5) Prerequisite: C o m m e r c i a l H a r m o n y II C o n t i n u e d e x p l o r a t i o n of c h o r d p r o g r e s s i o n and melody, i n c l u d i n g : a n a l y s i s of popular c h o r d p r o g r e s s i o n , m o d a l harmony, m i x e d m o d e c h o r d p r o g r e s s i o n , a u g m e n t e d 6th c h o r d s , t o n i c i z a t i o n , three p r o p o s i t i o n s in t o n i c i z a t i o n , c h o r d s c a l e s / h a r m o n i c e x t e n s i o n s , turn a r o u n d s , c o r r e c t i o n of standard p r o g r e s s i o n s . M u s i c 204 C o m m e r c i a l Harmony IV (S) (1.5,0,.5) Prerequisite: C o m m e r i c a l H a r m o n y III C o n t i n u e d e x p l o r a t i o n of c h o r d p r o g r e s s i o n a n d m e l o d y i n c l u d i n g : line c l i c h e s , analysis of m o d e r n jazz c h o r d progression, internal elaboration tonicization, deceptive tonicization, organpoint equal division of the octave, parallel harmony, m o d a l jazz c h o r d p r o g r e s s i o n , 70's jazz theory of modal areas. Music 205 Orchestration II (F) (1.5,0,0) O r c h e s t r a t i o n for brass, s a x o p h o n e s , w o o d w i n d s , v o i c e s and strings. Music 206 C o m p o s i t i o n III (F) (1.5,0,.5) Prerequisite: C o m p o s i t i o n II, to be taken c o n c u r r e n t l y with C o m m e r c i a l H a r m o n y III. S t u d y i n c l u d e s : the c o m p o s i t i o n of jazz a n d p o p style melodies o n standard c h o r d p r o g r e s s i o n s , analysis of jazz a n d p o p u l a r t o n e s / a c a p e l l a vocal m u s i c . Four part w o r k i n g of H a r m o n y III material, s e q u e n c e s , m o d u l a t i o n t e c h n i q u e s , r e h a r m o n i z a t i o n of standard c h o r d p r o g r e s s i o n s , motivic development. Music 207 C o m p o s i t i o n IV (S) (1.5,0,.5) Prerequisite: C o m p o s i t i o n III, to be taken with C o m m e r c i a l H a r m o n y IV. concurrently S t u d y i n c l u d e s : c y c l e h a r m o n i z a t i o n , c h r o m a t i c harmony, c o m p o s i t i o n of jazz tunes in m o d a l , m o d a l / t o n a l h a r m o n i c styles a n d u s i n g linear d e v i c e s a n d m o d a l areas, c o m p o s i t i o n of four part a c a p e l l a m u s i c . Music 210 C l a s s Woodwinds (F) (3,2,1) A practical study of the w o o d w i n d family. Transferable to U B C a n d U.Vic. M u s i c 211 C l a s s Woodwinds (S) (3,2,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 210. Transferable t o U B C a n d U . V i c . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Music 201 T h e o r y VI (S) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: M u s i c 200. A study of m u s i c f r o m c a . 1800 to the d i s s o l u t i o n of tonality. C h r o m a t i c h a r m o n y a n d an introduction to 20th century t e c h n i q u e s . E x t e n d e d f o r m s a n d analysis of 19th a n d early 20th century literature. K e y b o a r d harmony; i m p r o v i s a tion, figured bass in b a r o q u e style. Sight s i n g i n g a n d dictation. Transferable to: S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. M u s i c 214 Piano C l a s s (F) (1.5,2,-5) For students w h o have taken M u s i c 115 or have h a d previous k e y b o a r d e x p e r i e n c e . Students are i n t r o d u c e d to c o m m o n idiomatic a c c o m p a n i m e n t patterns as well as 4-part c h o r a l e studies, k e y b o a r d s e q u e n c e s , minor s c a l e s a n d chords. B a s i c keyboard techniques are e m p h a s i z e d including relaxation, t o u c h , rotation, weight transfer and their musical application in s i m p l e repertoire. T h e lab hour is utilized to d e v e l o p sight-reading skills at the k e y b o a r d . Transferable to U B C . 83 M u s i c 215 M u s i c 236 Piano C l a s s (S) (1.5,2,.5) Guitar E n s e m b l e III A continuation of M u s i c 214 with i n c r e a s e d c o m p l e x i t y of repertoire a n d technique. (F) (1.5,0,0) A s G u i t a r E n s e m b l e I ( M u s i c 136). M u s i c 237 Transferable to U B C . Guitar E n s e m b l e IV (S) (1.5,0,0) M u s i c 216 Guitar/Bass (F) Sight Reading Workshop III (1.5,0,0) A continuation of W o r k s h o p II. M u s i c 240 Private M u s i c Instruction (F) (1.5,0,-5) M u s i c 217 G u i t a r / B a s s Sight (S) Reading Workshop IV (1.5,0,0) A continuation of W o r k s h o p i l l . A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 141. Transferable to U B C a n d U.Vic. M u s i c 241 Private M u s i c Instruction (S) (1.5,0,.5) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 240. M u s i c 220 History III A s G u i t a r E n s e m b l e I ( M u s i c 136). (F) (3,0,1) Transferable to U B C a n d U.Vic. This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d as a c o m p l e m e n t a r y study both for M u s i c a n d G e n e r a l Arts students. T h e m u s i c from C a v a l l i to Mozart will be e x a m i n e d e m p h a s i z i n g aural recognition of the evolution of m u s i c a l style. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. M u s i c 221 M u s i c 260 Commercial A n interesting c o u r s e w h i c h is d e s i g n e d as a c o m p l e m e n tary study both for M u s i c a n d G e n e r a l A r t s students. T h i s c o u r s e will e x a m i n e m u s i c from B e e t h o v e n to the present day. T h e e m p h a s i s will b e o n a n aural recognition of the evolution of m u s i c a l style and its relationship to its historical context Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. S o n g Writing (S) (1.5,0,0) Prerequisite: Commercial Harmony instructor. M u s i c 230 III I o r p e r m i s s i o n of A n investigation of the t e c h n i q u e s a n d roles of lyrics a n d lyric writing for popular s o n g styles. M u s i c 272 Arranging II (F) (1.5,0,0) P r e r e q u i s i t e : A r r a n g i n g I, t a k e n c o n c u r r e n t l y C o m m e r c i a l H a r m o n y III a n d O r c h e s t r a t i o n II. (F) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 131. S e e also M u s i c 130. M u s i c 231 Ensemble in M u s i c (S) (1.5,0,.5) M u s i c 270 History IV (S) (3,0,1) Ensemble Relations A c o u r s e involving a s p e c t s of the m u s i c industry i n c l u d i n g stage presentation, c o p y r i g h t , c o n t r a c t s , performing rights o r g a n i z a t i o n s a n d the r e c o r d i n g industry. with A c o n t i n u a t i o n a n d e x p a n s i o n of t h e s e c t i o n writing t e c h n i q u e s b e g u n in A r r a n g i n g I, plus a study of two a n d three part writing. IV (S) (3,0,1) A continuation of M u s i c 230. S e e a l s o M u s i c 130. M u s i c 232 V o c a l G r o u p Repertoire III (F) (1.5,0,0) Prerequisite: S i g h t s i n g i n g ability; higher level of performance abilities. A continuation of V o c a l G r o u p Repertoire II instruction with more e m p h a s i s o n individual c o n t r i b u t i o n a n d responsibility for rehearsal a n d studio recording labs. M u s i c 273 Arranging III (S) (3,0,0) Prerequisites: A r r a n g i n g II, O r c h e s t r a t i o n I & II, taken c o n c u r r e n t l y with C o m m e r c i a l H a r m o n y IV. C o u r s e content includes: advanced chord voicing c o n c e p t s , b a c k g r o u n d writing, linear writing t e c h n i q u e s , a r r a n g i n g projects for various instrumental v o c a l a n d rhythm s e c t i o n c o m b i n a t i o n s , a n d s t u d i o r e c o r d i n g labs. M u s i c 280 M u s i c 233 Improvisation (F) (1.5,0,.5) V o c a l G r o u p Repertoire IV (S) (1.5,0,0) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 181. S t u d e n t s must a u d i t i o n . A c o n t i n u a t i o n of V o c a l G r o u p Repertoire III instruction. M u s i c 281 Improvisation (S) (1.5,0,.5) M u s i c 234 S o l o V o i c e Repertoire III (F) (1.5,0,0) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of S o l o V o i c e Repertoire II instruction plus memorization of a fixed n u m b e r of s o n g s , a c c u m u l a t i o n of a book of rhythm a c c o m p a n i m e n t charts to all s o n g s required, studio r e c o r d i n g labs, vocal improvisation. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 280. M u s i c 284 Sightsinging/Ear M u s i c 235 M u s i c 285 S o l o V o i c e Repertoire IV (S) (1.5,0,0) Sightsinging/Ear A c o n t i n u a t i o n of S o l o V o i c e R e p e r t o i r e III instruction. 84 T r a i n i n g (F) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 185. T r a i n i n g (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 284. Music 288 Improvisation Ensemble (F) (1.5,0,.5) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 189. Students must audition for this c o u r s e . Music 289 Improvisation Ensemble (S) (1.5,0,.5) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 288. Music 290 Private Music Instruction - Secondary Instrument (F) (1.5,0,.5) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 191. S e e a l s o M u s i c 190. Music 291 Private Music Instruction - Secondary Instrument (S) (1.5,0,.5) Music Therapy 170 Music Intervention in Child Development (F) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e will survey therapeutic intervention in c h i l d development, stressing the role of the e x p r e s s i v e arts as a therapeutic medium. C o n n e c t i o n s will be sought between m u s i c a n d current studies in language, motor, cognitive a n d social development. Music Therapy 180 Interpersonal Skills for Music Therapists (F) (1.5,0,0) T h i s c o u r s e will a c q u a i n t students with several skill areas which are relevant to M u s i c Therapy, particularly c o m m u n i c a tion skills and observation skills. C o m m u n i c a t i o n skills will i n c l u d e behaviour d e s c r i p t i o n , perception c h e c k i n g , p a r a phrasing a n d description of feeling. O b s e r v a t i o n skills will include group interaction, interviewing and small group exercises. Both theory and practice will be i n c l u d e d . A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 290. S e e a l s o M u s i c 190. Music Therapy 190 Practicum I (F) (6,0,2) Music 294 Repertoire III (F) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of Repertoire II. Music 295 Repertoire IV (S) (3,0,1) A continuation of Repertoire III. T h i s is the first of a four part p r a c t i c u m s e q u e n c e . T h e student will attend one c l i n i c a l , s c h o o l or c o m m u n i t y setting; and will observe clients and staff there, as well as d e s i g n i n g , leading a n d d o c u m e n t i n g m u s i c therapy s e s s i o n s , in c o n s u l tation with a staff supervisor. Weekly seminars are provided to clarify a n d e x p a n d r e s o u r c e s available out in the field. Music Therapy 191 Practicum II (S) (6,0,2) MUSIC THERAPY COURSES Music Therapy 150 The Influence of Music (F) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e will provide an introduction to the world's major musical cultures, with c o n c e n t r a t i o n o n the healing and therapeutic aspects of these m u s i c s . S p e c i a l attention will be paid to the p s y c h o p h y s i c s of aural perception and to the a s s e s s m e n t of the evocative powers of music. Extensive use will be made of m u s i c r e c o r d e d throughout the world along with film and video tape illustrations of these approaches to music. Music Therapy 151 The Influence of Music (S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will concentrate on a more detailed analysis and e x p a n s i o n of material c o v e r e d in M u s i c T h e r a p y 150. S o u n d recordings, film and video tapes will provide c o l o u r f u l illustrations of the subject matter under study. Music Therapy 160 Music Therapy I (F) (3,0,0) T h i s c o u r s e will introduce students to the c o n c e p t a n d e x p e r i e n c e of m u s i c therapy and its relationship to movement therapy, art therapy, p s y c h o d r a m a , a n d other therapies in general. A brief history of m u s i c therapy will be studied. Brain functions a n d the creative p r o c e s s will be explored a l o n g with a n experiential study of the s p e c i f i c opportunities m u s i c brings to the therapeutic environment. Music Therapy 161 Music Therapy II (S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e presents an overview of c o n t e m p o r a r y styles of m u s i c therapy used in a variety of settings. S t u d e n t s will be e n c o u r a g e d to explore their r e s o u r c e s a n d values in order to d e v e l o p their own style. T h e student participates as a student therapist in o n e centre 80 hours Weekly s e m i n a r s throughout the term. Refer to M u s i c T h e r a p y 190. Music Therapy 250 Music Through the Creative Arts (F) (1.5.0,.5) This c o u r s e will acquaint students with creative arts w h i c h can be used therapeutically in c o n j u n c t i o n with m u s i c , with an e m p h a s i s on movement for various age groups. T h e c o u r s e will be experiential. D i s c u s s i o n s will explore p o s s i b l e goals a n d e x t e n s i o n s of the activities presented in c l a s s Music Therapy 260 Music Therapy III (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will provide e x p e r i e n c e and analysis of m u s i c therapy techniques appropriate to a range of clincial settings T h e analysis will develop the e x p o s u r e to b a s i c therapeutic models. Students will be o b s e r v i n g t e c h n i q u e s used by the instructor and by e a c h other in the class setting. Music Therapy 261 Music Therapy IV (S) (3,0,1) This course will develop the professional skills of observing, recording a n d reporting m u s i c therapy activities. It will also e x a m i n e the possible relationships of a m u s i c therapist to staff organization in existing treatment centres and to local r e s o u r c e s in the c o m m u n i t y . Music Therapy 264 Clinical Orientations (S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will provide the students with practical skills and k n o w l e d g e of the p h y s i c a l aspects of therapy required to function effectively in a variety of hospital a n d clinical settings. C o u r s e content will include basic k n o w l e d g e in anatomy a n d p h y s i o l o g y related to s p e c i f i c h a n d i c a p s ; a c q u a i n t a n c e with basic terms c o m m o n l y in use in psychiatric a n d medical facilities; and a review of drugs and their effects. 85 Music Therapy 270 Designing Music Therapy Activities (S) (1.5,0..5) Music Therapy 290 Practicum III (F) (6,0,2) In d e s i g n i n g m u s i c therapy activities, the student t/vill learn to identify the nature of s p e c i f i c g r o u p s a n d their i n d i vidual members, to c h o o s e suitable c h a l l e n g e s , structure a n d materials, a n d the d e g r e e of therapist intervention, a n d then to observe and a n a l y z e g r o u p r e s p o n s e s , to evaluate both the d e s i g n a n d e x e c u t i o n of their activities, a n d to identify c o r r e c t i o n s a n d i n d i c a t i o n s for s u b s e q u e n t activities. T h e student participates as a student therapist in o n e centre. 80 hours. W e e k l y s e m i n a r s t h r o u g h o u t the term. Refer to M u s i c T h e r a p y 190. Music Therapy 291 Practicum IV (S) (6,0,2) T h e student participates a s a student therapist in o n e centre. 80 h o u r s . W e e k l y s e m i n a r s t h r o u g h o u t the term. Refer to M u s i c T h e r a p y 190. Office Administration Division Legal Secretary Program M e d i c a l Office Assistant P r o g r a m M e d i c a l Office Assistant Upgrading P r o g r a m W o r d P r o c e s s i n g Programs ADMINISTRATIVE SPECIALIST Instructional Faculty Part-Time Evening Program Baker, Leslie, L L . B . ( U B C ) , T e a c h i n g Cert. ( S F U ) Blaney, Diane Brown, Wendy, L a b Supervisor Brown, William, R.A. Bury. N a n c y . B . A . ( U B C ) , A C I , B O T C o o r d i n a t o r Clark, D o r i s , L a b S u p e r v i s o r C o c h r a n . Valerie, C o o r d i n a t o r Legai A s s i s t a n t P r o g r a m C r a g g , Marion, B.A. L a w (Durham). T e a c h i n g Cert. ( U B C ) , Coordinator, Legal Stenographer Program D u M o u l i n . A n t h o n y . B.A., L L . B . ( U B C ) D o w n i e , Margot Freund. Shirley, Division C h a i r p e r s o n Hammond, Donna K a s s a m , N u r d i n , L . L . M (Yale) Kiss, Andrea, B.Ed. ( U B C ) Kyle. Robert, B . A . (Portland) Lees, Yetta, M B A ( S F U ) Little. Diane, R . N . (St. P a u l ' s ) , P . H . N . ( U B C ) Ludgate, A n n e , I.D. ( U B C ) Mathews, Patricia May. G a r y , B.A , L L . B . ( U B C ) McCandless, Carol, B.A. (SFU), M.A. (UBC) McPhedran. Louise, Lab Supervisor Phillips, D o n n a Piekaar, Maureen, B.A. (SFU), Coordinator Medical Office Assistant P r o g r a m Plant, Lila, I.D. ( U B C ) Salusbury, Pamela S e w a r d . Mary, B S . A . (St. F r a n c i s Xavier A n t i g o n i s h , N.S.), B . E d . (Halifax) Smart, L y n n , I.D. ( U B C ) , Coordinator, Secretarial P r o g r a m S m i t h , Betsy, B.A., Prof. T e a c h i n g Cert. ( U B C ) S p i c e r , Larry. B C o m m . , Prof T e a c h i n g Cert ( U B C ) Stewart, Walter, B . A . ( S F U ) Thirkell, Lillian, L a b S u p e r v i s o r Tilley, W a n d a , B . E d . ( U B C ) , M.A. ( S F U ) Vickars, Karin, B.Ed. ( U B C ) Waugh, Gerrie, B.A. (Reading), M.A. ( U B C ) , Standard Teaching Credentials (UK) White, A n n e . L a b S u p e r v i s o r T h i s series of evening c o u r s e s is d e s i g n e d as an u p g r a d i n g program for people w h o are currently working as clerk-typists, b o o k k e e p e r s , or general secretaries w h o w i s h to prepare themselves for a more r e s p o n s i b l e p o s i t i o n . T h e p r o g r a m will e m p h a s i z e training in the administrative, s u p e r v i s o r y a n d managerial functions of b u s i n e s s enterprises. It will also ideally suit the needs of t h o s e c a n d i d a t e s p r e p a r i n g to write the Certified P r o f e s s i o n a l S e c r e t a r y e x a m i n a t i o n s . Students e n r o l e d in this p r o g r a m c o m p l e t e a series of eight c o u r s e s or 24 credits over a m i n i m u m of four semesters. It is anticipated that two e v e n i n g c o u r s e s will be offered e a c h term. S t u d e n t s may, however, enrol in daytime s e c t i o n s of required c o u r s e s , if s p a c e is available. Satisfactory c o m p l e t i o n of the requirer' c o u r s e s will earn the student a n Administrative S e c r e t a r y Certificate from Capilano College. Prerequisites: T y p i n g - 60 w p m . S h o r t h a n d - 80 w p m a n d / o r d i c t a t y p i n g e x p e r i e n c e . At least two years general office e x p e r i e n c e or at the discretion of the C o o r d i n a t o r . W h i l e the particular s e q u e n c e of c o u r s e s is not rigid, the following are required: Credit Hours Term 1: Business M a n a g e m e n t 187 Office T r a i n i n g 270 Introduction to Business Executive Office Procedures I 3 3 Term 2: Business M a n a g e m e n t 240 Office Business Law 3 T r a i n i n g 257 Office A d m i n i s t r a t i o n 3 Term 3: General Information The Office Administration training t h r o u g h the f o l l o w i n g D i v i s i o n offers programs- Administrative Specialist Business Office Training Legal Assistant Studies Option Legal Assistant Studies Program 86 business Business M a n a g e m e n t 180 Office T r a i n i n g 271 Introduction to Data Processing Executive Office P r o c e d u r e s II 3 3 Term 4: Business M a n a g e m e n t 177 Elective Contemporary Accounting Issues 3 3 BUSINESS OFFICE TRAINING P R O G R A M T h e B u s i n e s s Office T r a i n i n g p r o g r a m is d e s i g n e d to train students in basic office skills as well as to introduce them to the m o d e r n t e c h n o l o g y and equipment increasingly used in today's offices._ T h e r e are three o p t i o n s within the p r o g r a m : clerk typist, stenographer, and b o o k k e e p i n g . T r a i n i n g in the s p e c i a l i z e d c o u r s e s of these o p t i o n s begins in the s e c o n d month of the program. T h e p r o g r a m c o n s i s t s of two levels - a basic level a n d an a d v a n c e d level, both of w h i c h are four months in duration. A p p l i c a n t s for this program s h o u l d c o n t a c t the O f f i c e A d m i n i s t r a t i o n D i v i s i o n for a d m i s s i o n information This program has intakes in S e p t e m b e r . J a n u a r y a n d M a y . Business Office Training Program Outline Level I — Business Office Training 102 Typing I Basic Skills v MONTH 3 4 X X X X X X SUBJECT 1 2 Business English 1 X Typing 1 X Math/Machines X X Record Keeping X X Students will learn basic skill of typewriting u s i n g correct t e c h n i q u e s to a c q u i r e s p e e d and a c c u r a c y . T h e c o u r s e is also d e s i g n e d to instruct the student in the current b u s i n e s s styles of presenting typewritten material, a n d the correct methods of a c h i e v i n g these styles. Filing X X O n e Write x X B o o k k e e p i n g 1 ( B o o k k e e p i n g o p t i o n only) X x X S h o r t h a n d 1 ( S t e n o g r a p h e r option only) X X X Level II — A d v a n c e d S k i l l s MONTH SUBJECT 5 6 7 8 B u s i n e s s E n g l i s h II X X X X T y p i n g II X X X X Office P r o c e d u r e s X X X X E D P and the Office W o r k e r X Payroll (optional for clerk-typists a n d s t e n o g r a p h e r s : mandatory for bookkeepers) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of B O T 102. Business Office Training 104 Filing T h e c o u r s e c o n s i s t s of instruction in four basic filing methods: alphabetic, subject, numeric a n d g e o g r a p h i c , with e m p h a s i s on repeated practice for s p e e d and a c c u r a c y . T h e c o u r s e will i n c l u d e information o n c o n t r o l of office files, a n d g o o d records management practices. Business Office Training 105 Office Procedures T h i s is an i n t r o d u c t i o n to p r o c e d u r e s c o m m o n to a business office Students will gain k n o w l e d g e in h a n d l i n g i n c o m i n g and o u t g o i n g mail, operating a Telex, a n d correct telephone and receptionist t e c h n i q u e s . X Personal F i n a n c e Business Office Training 103 Typing II Business Office Training 106 X Machine Transcription ( B o o k k e e p e r s exempt) Machine Transcription X X D i c t a T y p i n g ( B o o k k e e p e r s exempt) X X B o o k k e e p i n g II X X X X S h o r t h a n d II X X X X Business Office Training 100 Business English I A c o n t i n u a t i o n of B O T 111, D i c t a T y p i n g . Business Office Training 107 Record Keeping This c o u r s e will i n t r o d u c e basic b u s i n e s s r e c o r d s a n d record k e e p i n g a n d will explain standard p r o c e d u r e s used in r e c o r d i n g financial transactions, i.e. petty c a s h , sales, p u r c h a s e s and stock records. Business Office Training 108 Bookkeeping I T h e c o u r s e will f a m i l i a r i z e s t u d e n t s with b u s i n e s s c o m m u n i c a t i o n s with e m p h a s i s o n s p e l l i n g , p u n c t u a t i o n , and grammar In a d d i t i o n , a c o m p o n e n t o n c a r e e r d e v e l o p m e n t a n d creative job s e a r c h will e n a b l e students to use their training effectively. T h e student will a c q u i r e a s o l i d g r o u n d i n g in the d o u b l e entry s y s t e m of b o o k k e e p i n g , with e m p h a s i s p l a c e d o n correct a n a l y s i s , a c c u r a c y , a n d t h o r o u g h n e s s , as well as on attitudes of p r o f e s s i o n a l i s m and i n d e p e n d e n c e In addition, the student will b e c o m e a c q u a i n t e d with t e c h n i q u e s required for use of a m i n i - c o m p u t e r . Business Office Training 101 Business English II Business Office Training 109 Bookkeeping II A c o n t i n u a t i o n of B O T 100. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of B O T 108, B o o k k e e p i n g I. 87 Business Office Training Math/Machines 110 Communications written E n g l i s h . — development of skills in oral a n d Directed Work Experience — c l a s s e s students work at a job for one week. cancelled and T h i s c o u r s e will instruct students in the use of the electronic calculator as a tool for s o l v i n g arithmetical p r o b l e m s in b u s i n e s s so that students may better understand the operation of the calculator. A review of the basic arithmetic functions will be undertaken, a n d in order to operate the calculator efficiently, the t o u c h system will be taught. Legal Assistant Studies Business Office Training Dicta-Typing This is a part-time e v e n i n g p r o g r a m d e s i g n e d for students with at least two years legal e x p e r i e n c e , w h o are presently w o r k i n g in a law office 111 S t u d e n t s will d e v e l o p m a c h i n e t r a n s c r i p t i o n s k i l l s . S p e c i f i c a l l y , students will learn to operate efficiently the Lanier-Edisette transcriber, review systematically points of grammar, p u n c t u a t i o n , s p e l l i n g and transcription style, a n d transcribe mailable letters. Business Office Training Shorthand I 113 The c o u r s e will trace the development and structure of the G r e g g system of s h o r t h a n d , a n d develop the student's expertise in the writing of this s y s t e m . Information meetings for our S e p t e m b e r ' a n d J a n u a r y terms are held throughout the year. F o r further a d m i s s i o n information contact the Office A d m i n i s t r a t i o n D i v i s i o n . Option A l t h o u g h s o m e p r o c e d u r a l c o u r s e s are s u g g e s t e d , the e m p h a s i s in the Legal A s s i s t a n t S t u d i e s O p t i o n is o n p r o v i d i n g students with a t h o r o u g h g r a s p of the theoretical aspects of the practice of law and practices within the legal office. C o u r s e s may be taken in any order and individuals are e n c o u r a g e d to adopt a p r o g r a m that meets their s p e c i f i c interests a n d requirements. P r o g r a m s must be a p p r o v e d by the C o o r d i n a t o r . Students must provide e v i d e n c e that they have legal office e x p e r i e n c e before being admitted. Legal Assistant Studies Option Outline: C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Certificate Business Office Training Shorthand II 114 Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s Recommended Courses 18 credit h o u r s 21 credit h o u r s A continuation of B O T 113. Credit Required Courses Business Office Training 115 Electronic Data Processing and the Office Worker T h i s c o u r s e will give students s o m e familiarity with c o m p u t e r terms and f u n c t i o n s and provide a b a c k g r o u n d for the "hands o n " data entry portion of the c o u r s e . Business Office Training 116 O n e Write This system was d e s i g n e d for use by individuals having minimal k n o w l e d g e of record keeping. U s i n g actual b u s i n e s s forms, students will prepare records for the A c c o u n t s Receivable, A c c o u n t s P a y a b l e and P a y r o l l c o m p o n e n t s of the s y s t e m . Business Office Training 117 Payroll A study of a payroll s y s t e m , i n c l u d i n g the preparation of b a s i c payroll, general ledger a c c o u n t s relating to payroll transactions, and government reports relating to payroll. Business Office Training Personal Finance 118 This c o u r s e will give students a b r o a d e r depth of k n o w l e d g e a b o u t f i n a n c i a l matters s o that they m a y understand and better control the financial aspects of their personal lives. CAREER ALTERNATIVES PROGRAM The C a r e e r Alternatives P r o g r a m is a four month part-time non-credit p r o g r a m . T h e p r o g r a m provides an opportunity for students to assess their current lifestyles a n d set g o a l s based on their individual skills a n d interests. Participants will get information about training programs; employment options; c o m m u n i t y resources and other a g e n c i e s w h i c h may assist them in making vocational d e c i s i o n s . Hours 2 - 100 level E n g l i s h c o u r s e s or Communications L G A S 150/151 Introduction to the Study of L a w I & II L G A S 170 Legal R e s e a r c h L G A S 180 Contracts I 6 6 3 _3 18 " P l u s 21 credits to be taken from the various Legal A s s i s t a n t Studies c o u r s e s that are offered in the e v e n i n g p r o g r a m LEGAL ASSISTANT STUDIES PROGRAM T h e g r a d u a t e s of this p r o g r a m have s t u d i e d legal theory and p r o c e d u r e s and c a n apply this k n o w l e d g e to assist legal practitioners. Legal A s s i s t a n t s will be w o r k i n g in a professional environment, directly or i n d e p e n d e n t l y , under the supervision of a Barrister/Solicitor. S i n c e one of the functions of a Legal Assistant is to relieve the lawyer of many routine legal and administrative responsibilities, students prepare legal d o c u m e n t s in a c c o r d a n c e with the S u p r e m e C o u r t Rules and various Statutes, carry out investigations a n d interview witnesses, handle legal c o r r e s p o n d e n c e and act in a s u p p o r t ive capacity with the law firm or legal department. In c o m p l i cated legal matters a legal assistant may work directly with the lawyer, but in many cases i n d e p e n d e n t judgement is required. P r o g r a m requirements: Students are e x p e c t e d to maintain a " B " average throughout the P r o g r a m . A " B " grade is usually 80% and up in procedural c o u r s e s a n d 70% in theory c o u r s e s . In order to receive the A s s o c i a t e of Arts and S c i e n c e D i p l o m a , students must c o m p l e t e a six month work study p r a c t i c u m in relevant legal work. The students should begin their practicum at the end of their fourth term. Entry into the program is in the Fall term only. For further admission information please contact the Office Administration Division. Career Alternatives Program Outline: Legal Assistant Studies Program Requirements Career Development Seminar — i n c r e a s e d c o n f i d e n c e and self-awareness; job and training information, resume and interview t e c h n i q u e s . Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s Recommended courses 88 58.5 credit hours 21 credit h o u r s 79.5 credit hours LEGAL ASSISTANT Major Program Requirement Courses All c o u r s e s offered in the first two terms are required c o u r s e s . In addition students must take four terms of E n g l i s h a n d / o r C o m m u n i c a t i o n s , L G A S 170 - L e g a l R e s e a r c h , L G A S 180 - Contracts I. These courses are a total of 58.5 credit hours. Note: L G A S = Legal Assistant S t u d i e s Credit First Term Hours C M N S 150 L G A S 150 L G A S 152 L G A S 153 L G A S 154 L G A S 157 L G A S 161 L G A S 176 O F T R 252 Basic Communications Introduction to Legal S t u d i e s I . . . B a s i c Litigation P r o c e d u r e s I Basic Corporate Procedures I L a n d Registry S y s t e m Wills a n d Probate P r o c e d u r e s I . . . Legislative P r o c e s s Legal O f f i c e P r o c e d u r e s I Interpersonal S k i l l s & Organizational Psychology 3 3 3 1.5 1.5 1.5 3 3 3 22.5 Credit Second Term C M N S 150 C M N S 152 L G A S 151 o r L G A S 155 L G A S 167 L G A S 162 L G A S 163 L G A S 177 L G A S 179 Business Communications T e c h n i c a l Report Writing Introduction to the S t u d y of L a w II Conveyancing & Mortgaging I Wills a n d Probate P r o c e d u r e s II Litigation P r o c e d u r e s II C o r p o r a t e P r o c e d u r e s II L e g a l Office P r o c e d u r e s II L e g a l Interviewing Hours 3 3 3 1.5 1.5 3 1.5 1.5 3 .. 21 STUDIES C O U R S E S Legal Assistant Studies 150 Introduction to the Study of Law I (F) (3,0,1) Introduction to legal c o n c e p t s a n d legal r e a s o n i n g . It will cover the historical development of legal institutions a n d the principles of c o m m o n law a n d equity, the interpretation of statutes, the doctrine of analysis of the s y s t e m ; its strengths and w e a k n e s s e s . Transferable to S F U . Legal Assistant Studies 151* Introduction to the Study of Law II (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of Legal Assistant S t u d i e s 150 a n d an introduction to private law. T h e areas c o v e r e d will include law of c o n t r a c t s , sale of g o o d s , partnership a n d c o m p a n y law. A l t h o u g h s o m e statutes will be c o n s i d e r e d , e m p h a s i s will be o n c a s e law a n d current development in the law. The development of the laws of negligence through various court d e c i s i o n s will be d i s c u s s e d . T h e c o u r s e will also cover s o m e a s p e c t s of procedure, b a s i c rules of evidence, c a p a c i t y and status of parties. Transferable to S F U . Legal Assistant Studies 152 Basic Litigation I (F) (3,0,.5) Introduction t o the court p r o c e d u r e s in S m a l l C l a i m s , C o u n t y a n d S u p r e m e C o u r t s of B . C . T h e c o u r s e will cover p r o c e d u r e s in pre-trial preparation, the preparation of d o c u ments, the u s e of p r e c e d e n t s in S m a l l C l a i m s , C o u n t y a n d Supreme Courts. Legal Assistant Studies 153 Basic Corporate Procedures I (F) (1.5,0,.5) Third and Fourth Terms In the T h i r d a n d Fourth terms students will take an additional 30 credits a n d c o u r s e s will be offered from the following: Credit Hours English L G A S 159 L G A S 160 L G A S 165 L G A S 172 L G A S 180 L G A S 181 L G A S 252 L G A S 253 L G A S 255 L G A S 256 L G A S 257 L G A S 258 L G A S 266 L G A S 268 L G A S 270 T w o first year E n g l i s h c o u r s e s (required) A c c o u n t i n g for the L e g a l Assistant Legal T h e o r y C o n v e y a n c i n g a n d M o r t g a g i n g II Legal D o c u m e n t s Contracts I C o n t r a c t s II Torts Company Law Real Property i Family L a w I Estate L a w Criminal Procedures Family L a w II Criminal Law Labour Law 6 . 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Summer Term L G A S 170 L G A S 199 Legal R e s e a r c h Practicum 3 6 Students w h o cannot take Legal Assistant S t u d i e s 170 o n a Saturday m o r n i n g the months of M a y a n d J u n e between the s e c o n d a n d third terms will have t o take this c o u r s e d u r i n g May a n d J u n e after they c o m p l e t e their fourth term. A n examination of the B . C . C o m p a n i e s Act a n d the various d o c u m e n t s that a legal assistant must be familiar with in order to incorporate a c o m p a n y a n d attend t o routine filings a n d resolutions. R e c o r d s office requirements, annual proceedings, preparing share certificates a n d registration will a l s o be covered. > Legal Assistant Studies 154 Land Registry System (F) (1.5,0,.5) History a n d e x a m i n a t i o n of the L a n d Registry S y s t e m in B.C., L a n d Titles Act requirements, d o c u m e n t s used in registration, the nature a n d effect of transfers a n d c h a r g e s a n d search p r o c e e d i n g s will a l s o be c o v e r e d . Legal Assistant Studies 155 C o n v e y a n c i n g a n d Mortgaging I (S) (1.5,0,.5) Prerequisite: L e g a l Assistant S t u d i e s 154. This c o u r s e covers interim agreements, L a n d Titles A c t requirements and p r o c e d u r e s , d o c u m e n t s a n d forms used in c o n v e y i n g title a n d registering various c h a r g e s . E m p h a s i s will be o n preparing a c c e p t a b l e d o c u m e n t s , transfers of title, m o r t g a g e s , a g r e e m e n t s for sale a n d n e c e s s a r y related forms. Legal Assistant Studies 157 Wills a n d Probate Procedures (F) (1.5,0,.5) A n e x a m i n a t i o n of the Wills A c t , Probate Fees A c t , a n d Administration Act. Students will prepare the necessary d o c u ments to obtain Letters Probate a n d Letters of A d m i n i s t r a t i o n in the S u p r e m e C o u r t of B . C . 89 Legal Assistant Studies 159 A c c o u n t i n g for the Legal Assistant (F) (3,0,1) Provides the student with k n o w l e d g e of basic a c c o u n t i n g principles. T h r o u g h lectures a n d p r o b l e m solving labs the student will gain an u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the a c c o u n t i n g c y c l e ; be able to analyze financial statements, reports and budgets. E m p h a s i s is o n the interpretation a n d analysis of a c c o u n t i n g data, not the practice of k e e p i n g b o o k s . Legal Assistant Studies 160 Legal T h e o r y (F,S) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the major theories of law, the nature of legal obligation, and the relationship between law and m o r a l ity. A l t h o u g h it is a c o u r s e in legal p h i l o s o p h y the p r i n c i p a l studies will be d i s c u s s e d in the context of s u c h practical issues as d e f e n d i n g the guilty, o b e y i n g immoral laws, legislating morals, penal reform, law and social c h a n g e s , and the use and abuse of legal technicalities. T h e e m p h a s i s will be o n the role the legal system plays in o u r society. Legal Assistant Studies 161 Legislative P r o c e s s I (S) (3,0,.5) A n a l y s i s of the relationship between legislative a n d administrative tribunals a n d the courts; the nature and limits of executive legislative a n d judicial power; articulation of government p o l i c y in statutory form, translation of p u b l i c p o l i c y into legislation a n d legal p r o b l e m s in implementing legislated policy. T h e British North A m e r i c a A c t will also be d i s c u s s e d as the basis of legislative power. Legal Assistant Studies 162 m e t h o d o l o g y of legal research a n d will i n c l u d e f u n c t i o n s s u c h a s reading briefs a n d legal d o c u m e n t s ; u s i n g e n c y c l o pediae, a n n o t a t e d reports, law reviews, c a s e c o m m e n t s ; locating d e c i s i o n s a n d preparing m e m o r a n d a of law. Legal Assistant Studies 172 Legal D o c u m e n t s (F,S) (3,0,1) C o u r s e work i n c l u d e s the drafting of agreements, c l a i m s and d e f e n c e s in litigation p r o c e e d i n g s , a n d a study of the rules of statutory interpretation. E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d o n d e v e l o p i n g a general style, rather than obtaining a detailed k n o w l e d g e of s p e c i f i c law. L e g a l Assistant Studies 176 Legal Office P r o c e d u r e s I (F) (3,0,1) P r a c t i c a l information about t h e o r g a n i z a t i o n of legal offices. Instruction in t i m e k e e p i n g a n d a c c o u n t i n g s y s t e m s , use of transcripts, legal briefs, use of a law library, library i n d e x i n g , filing a n d c o m m u n i c a t i o n s s y s t e m s , u s e of data p r o c e s s i n g equipment in the law office, ethical r e s p o n s i b i l ities, legal t e r m i n o l o g y and other p r o c e d u r e s particular to the legal p r o f e s s i o n . Legal Assistant Studies 177 Legal Office P r o c e d u r e s II (S) (1.5,0,-5) Prerequisite: Legal Assistant S t u d i e s 176. A n e x a m i n a t i o n of office m a c h i n e s , a n e x a m i n a t i o n of b o o k k e e p i n g a n d a c c o u n t i n g s y s t e m s for a law office i n c l u d ing trust a c c o u n t s ; use of office e q u i p m e n t and relating c o s t s of m a c h i n e r y a n d services; time m a n a g e m e n t , a n d dictation skills. Litigation P r o c e d u r e s II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Legal Assistant Studies 152. This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d for Legal A s s i s t a n t s assisting in a litigation practice. S u p r e m e C o u r t R u l e s will be studied in detail from the beginning of a process to enforcing judgements. Legal Assistant Studies 163 Corporate P r o c e d u r e s (S) (1.5,0,-5) Prerequisite: Legal Assistant S t u d i e s 153. This is a c o n t i n u a t i o n of Legal S t u d i e s 153 a n d will look at c o m p a n i e s , societies a n d various problems e n c o u n t e r e d in a corporate records office. Students with legal office experience in this field may c h a l l e n g e the prerequisite. Legal Assistant Studies 165 Legal Assistant Studies 179 Legal Interviewing (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will give an u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the role of t h e L e g a l A s s i s t a n t a n d of t h e p r o c e s s of legal interviewing. Students will a c q u i r e skills in c o n d u c t i n g various types of interviews a n d preparing minutes of e v i d e n c e . Legal Assistant Studies 180* Contracts I (F) (3,0,1) C o v e r s major a s p e c t s of the law of contracts. S t u d e n t s will be made aware of how law in general a n d the law of c o n t r a c t s in particular fits into the overall pattern of society, a n d its pursuits. T o this e n d students will d i s c u s s critically i n the class law, a s well a s the p r i n c i p l e s of contract law. C o n v e y a n c i n g a n d Mortgaging II (F) (3,0,1) L e g a l Assistant Studies 181 Prerequisite: Legal Assistant S t u d i e s 154 a n d 155. Contracts II (S) (3,0,1) A continuation of Legal Assistant Studies 154 and 155 with a more intensive a n d in-depth a p p r o a c h to L a n d Registry d o c u m e n t s a n d difficult title c o n v e y a n c e s , statements of adjustment, and reconciliation. E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d o n client a p p r o a c h , preparation of d o c u m e n t s , fee structure, transfer and mortgaging of equities, power of attorney, s u b right to p u r c h a s e strata titles, transfers a n d d i s c h a r g e s . Prerequisite: Legal S t u d i e s 180. Legal Assistant Studies 167 Wills a n d Probate II (S) (1.5,0,-5) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of Legal Assistant S t u d i e s 180. T o p i c s c o v e r e d will i n c l u d e s p e c i a l types of c o n t r a c t s s u c h a s a g e n c y , bailment a n d i n s u r a n c e ; credit t r a n s a c t i o n s s u c h a s chattel mortgages, c o n d i t i o n a l sales, a n d partnership a n d c o m p a n y law. Legal Assistant Studies 182* Collection and Foreclosure Proceedings (F,S) . (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Legal Assistant S t u d i e s 157. The law of wills, succession, intestate succession, principles of probate a n d administration of estates a n d m i s c e l l a n e o u s estate problems will be covered. Students with work experience in this area may c h a l l e n g e the prerequisite. Discusses the principles, practice, a n d information gathering p r o c e d u r e s n e c e s s a r y to prepare d o c u m e n t a t i o n required in matters of f o r e c l o s u r e s a n d c o l l e c t i o n s . S t u d e n t s will practice d r a w i n g the various p l e a d i n g s involved in the above i n c l u d i n g e x e c u t i o n p r o c e e d i n g s . Legal Assistant Studies 170 Legal Assistant Studies 199 Legal R e s e a r c h ( S U ) (3,0,1) Career P r a c t i c u m ( F , S , S U ) Provides the Legal Assistant with the t e c h n i q u e s a n d 90 (6,1,1) This is the work portion of the C a r e e r P r a c t i c u m a n d c o n s i s t s of six months in a law firm. S t u d e n t s will be assisted by the instructor in finding a p r a c t i c u m , but it is the student's responsibility to obtain a p r a c t i c u m p o s i t i o n . comellability a n d witnesses. T h i s c o u r s e will receive three general elective credits at S F U . Legal Assistant Studies 252* Torts (F,S) (3,0,1) Legal Assistant Studies 270* Labour Law (F,S) (3,0,1) A n introductory study of "torts" — the protection of personal interest f r o m interference a n d t h e w a y in w h i c h t h e courts meet this need in a c h a n g i n g society. P r i n c i p a l t o p i c s to be studied are: intentional torts, n e g l i g e n c e , strict liability, defamation a n d n u i s a n c e , c o n c e p t s of standard of care, causality, duty a n d remoteness. S t u d e n t s will be required to pre-read cases for d i s c u s s i o n in the class. U n i o n - M a n a g e m e n t relations; the collective b a r g a i n i n g p r o c e s s ; arbitration a n d c o n c i l i a t i o n p r o c e d u r e s . T h e c o u r s e includes detailed c o n s i d e r a t i o n of the B . C . L a b o u r C o d e a n d a study of d e c i s i o n s of the B . C . L a b o u r Relations B o a r d . Legal Assistant Studies 253* C o m p a n y Law (F,S) (3,0,1) T h e law relating to administrative tribunals in C a n a d a . T h e rules of natural justice will b e e x a m i n e d . E m p h a s i s will be o n provincial administrative tribunals. T h e Workers Compensation Act, the G.A.I.N. Act, the Residential Tenancy Act, the Labour Code a n d the Unemployment Insurance Act will be s t u d i e d . S t u d e n t s will be required to pre-read c a s e s for class d i s c u s s i o n . Prerequisite: Legal Assistant S t u d i e s 153 a n d 163. T h e law relating to c o r p o r a t i o n s a n d partnerships in C a n a d a ; historical formation, structure a n d reorganization of a c o r p o r a t i o n ; authority a n d fiduciary obligation of m a n a g e ment; legal c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s ; rights a n d duties of officers, directors a n d s h a r e h o l d e r s . S t u d e n t s w h o have e x p e r i e n c e in this field m a y c h a l l e n g e the prerequisite. Legal Assistant Studies 255* Real Property (F,S) (3,0,1) Transferable to S F U . Legal Assistant Studies 271 Administrative L a w (F,S) (3,0,1) Note: C o u r s e s marked with an asterisk are to be taken b y people with other formal legal c o u r s e s or two years work e x p e r i e n c e in a related field. S e e P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r for further information. LEGAL SECRETARY PROGRAM Prerequisite: Legal Assistant S t u d i e s 165. T h e e x a c t i n g field of law offers excellent career o p p o r t u nities for students graduating as legal s t e n o g r a p h e r s . T h e c o m m o n law relating to real property a s m o d i f i e d b y legislation. T h e L a n d Titles A c t a n d T h e C o n v e y a n c i n g a n d Law of Property A c t will b e studied in this c o u r s e u s i n g the case analysis methods. T h i s 8 m o n t h v o c a t i o n a l p r o g r a m c o v e r s three main categories of information: c o u r s e s w h i c h provide a f u n d a mental u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the legal system in B . C . ; s h o r t h a n d a n d t y p i n g ; a n d legal office p r o c e d u r e s . Students having work experience in this field may challenge the prerequisite. Part-time c o u r s e s are available. F o r information regarding prerequisites a n d a d m i s s i o n p r o c e d u r e s contact the Office Administration Division. Legal Assistant Studies 256* Family Law (F,S) (3,0,1) C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e P r o g r a m C o m p l e t i o n Certificate is granted u p o n s u c c e s s f u l c o m p l e t i o n of 44 credits. Law a n d the family, marriage a n d its d i s s o l u t i o n ; rights and duties of s p o u s e s a n d parents; the law in respect to c h i l d care; c u s t o d y ; a c c e s s , g u a r d i a n s h i p a d o p t i o n ; the role of Family C o u r t , J u v e n i l e C o u r t a n d h u m a n r e s o u r c e a g e n c i e s will b e c o v e r e d . T h e various legislation in this area will be e x a m i n e d with s p e c i a l e m p h a s i s o n the D i v o r c e A c t a n d the Family R e l a t i o n s A c t . Legal Assistant Studies 257* Estate Law (F,S) (3,0,1) A c o n s i d e r a t i o n of a d v a n c e d p r o c e e d i n g s relating to Estates a n d Property interests of d e c e a s e d a n d incompetent persons i n c l u d i n g related litigatious matters. Legal Assistant Studies 258* Criminal Procedures (F) (3,0,1) A n e x a m i n a t i o n of the C r i m i n a l C o d e , theory of c r i m i n a l responsibility; legal elements of a c r i m e ; c r i m i n a l p r o c e d u r e ; the law respecting the use of force, rules of evidence, c o n f e s s i o n ; identification p r o c e d u r e s a n d s e n t e n c i n g . T h i s c o u r s e will receive three general elective credits at S F U . Transferable t o S F U . Legal Assistant Studies 268* Criminal Law (S) (3,0,1) Substantial e l e m e n t s of s e l e c t e d c r i m i n a l offences a n d c o n s i d e r a t i o n of the rules of e v i d e n c e . Particular subjects include the nature of real a n d circumstantial evidence, burden of proof, hearsay, c o n f e s s i o n a n d a d m i s s i o n , c o m p e t e n c e , First Term Courses L G S T 105 L G S T 110 L G S T 113 L G S T 114 L G S T 116 L G S T 118 C M N S 150 Typing Skill and Speed Development Basic Corporate Procedures I — B a s i c C o r p o r a t e P r o c e d u r e s II Wills a n d P r o b a t e P r o c e d u r e s Legal Office Procedures I Directed W o r k E x p e r i e n c e Communications T y p i n g a n d S h o r t h a n d c o u r s e s will be a s s i g n e d a c c o r d i n g to the student's present level Credits 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 1.0 3.0 7.5 20.5 Second Term Courses L G S T 106 LGST LGST LGST LGST 107 109 111 112 L G S T 115 L G S T 117 L G S T 119 C M N S 151 Typing Skill and Speed D e v e l o p m e n t II Machine Transcription B a s i c Litigation I L a n d Registry S y s t e m Basic Conveyance and Mortgage Procedures B a s i c Litigation II L e g a l O f f i c e P r o c e d u r e s II Directed Work Experience Business Communications A d d i t i o n a l T y p i n g a n d S h o r t h a n d credits will be a s s i g n e d a c c o r d i n g to the student's level 1.5 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 1.0 3.0 6.0 23.5 91 L E G A L S T E N O G R A P H E R TRAINING C O U R S E S Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 110 B a s i c C o r p o r a t e P r o c e d u r e s I (F) (1.5,0,.5) Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 100 Production T y p i n g I (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: typing s p e e d of 50 w p m . E m p h a s i s is p l a c e d u p o n d e v e l o p i n g a professional a n d practical a p p r o a c h to typing p r o b l e m s with a m i n i m u m of supervision. Students are given timed production assignments and acceptable work standards are stressed. A n examination of the B . C . C o m p a n i e s A c t and the various d o c u m e n t s that a legal assistant or secretary must b e familiar with in order to incorporate a c o m p a n y a n d attend to routine filings a n d resolutions. R e c o r d s , office requirements, a n n u a l p r o c e e d i n g s , preparing share certificates a n d registration, etc. will also be c o v e r e d . Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 111 Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 101 L a n d Registry S y s t e m (F) (1.5,0,.5) P r o d u c t i o n T y p i n g II (S) (3,0,1) History a n d e x a m i n a t i o n of the land registry s y s t e m in B . C . L a n d Registry A c t requirements, d o c u m e n t s n e c e s s a r y for registration; the nature a n d effect of transfers a n d c h a r g e s ; s e a r c h p r o c e d u r e s will be c o v e r e d . Prerequisite: L G S T 100 (see above). P r o d u c t i o n p r o b l e m s of a more c o m p l e x nature will be introduced. Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 112 Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 102 B a s i c C o n v e y a n c e a n d Mortgage P r o c e d u r e s B e g i n n i n g S h o r t h a n d (F) (4.5,0,1.5) (S) (1.5,0,.5) B e g i n n i n g study of a n alphabetic, G r e g g or P i t m a n shorthand system with e m p h a s i s o n a p p l i c a t i o n of theory and development of s p e e d utilizing high frequency v o c a b u lary. S u c c e s s f u l students s h o u l d be able to take dictation at 80 w p m after c o m p l e t i n g o n e term. T h i s c o u r s e requires a n additional 1.5 hours of lab time per week. Prerequisite: Legal S t u d i e s 111. T h i s c o u r s e covers interim agreements, L a n d Registry A c t requirements, p r o c e d u r e s , d o c u m e n t s , f o r m s involved in c o n v e y i n g title a n d registering various c h a r g e s . E m p h a s i s will b e o n preparing a c c e p t a b l e d o c u m e n t s , d e e d s of l a n d , mortgages, agreements for sale a n d n e c e s s a r y related f o r m s . Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 103 S h o r t h a n d S p e e d Development I (F,S) (3,0,1) Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 113 Prerequisite: Office T r a i n i n g 170 o r a s h o r t h a n d s p e e d of 80 w p m . B a s i c C o r p o r a t e P r o c e d u r e s II (S) (1.5,0,.5) C o n t i n u a t i o n of s p e e d development a l o n g with theory review, i n c r e a s e d vocabulary, dictation of familiar a n d unfamiliar material a i m i n g at 90% a c c u r a c y in transcription. Continuation Training 110. Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 104 Wills a n d Probate P r o c e d u r e s (F) (1.5,0,.5) Prerequisite: L G S T 110. of w o r k begun in L e g a l Stenographer Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 114 S h o r t h a n d S p e e d Development II (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Office T r a i n i n g 174 o r a s h o r t h a n d s p e e d of 80 w p m . C o n t i n u a t i o n of s p e e d development with 95% a c c u r a c y in transcription, i n c r e a s e d vocabulary, dictation of familiar a n d unfamiliar material. E m p h a s i s will b e p l a c e d o n reinforcing theory. A n e x a m i n a t i o n of the Wills A c t , Probate Fees A c t , a n d Administration Act. Students will prepare the necessary d o c u ments to obtain Letters Probate a n d Letters of A d m i n i s t r a t i o n in the S u p r e m e C o u r t of B . C . Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 115 B a s i c Litigation II (S) (1.5,0,.5) Prerequisite: Legal S t u d i e s 109. Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 105 T y p i n g Skill a n d S p e e d Development I (F,S) (1.5,0,.5) Continuation Training 109. of work begun in Legal Stenographer R e m e d i a l drills, power drills, short a n d sustained timed writings to increase s p e e d a n d a c c u r a c y in typewriting. L e g a l S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 116 Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 106 A c o u r s e to prepare legal s t e n o g r a p h e r students f o r positions in law offices. Instruction in time k e e p i n g a n d a c c o u n t i n g s y s t e m s , u s e of transcribers, legal briefs, u s e of law library, library i n d e x i n g , u s e of data p r o c e s s i n g e q u i p ment in the law office, ethical responsibilities, legal t e r m i n o l ogy, filing, a n d other p r o c e d u r e s particular to the p r o f e s s i o n . T y p i n g Skill a n d S p e e d Development II (F,S) (1.5,0,.5) C o n t i n u a t i o n of L G S T 105. Legal Office P r o c e d u r e s I (F) (3,0,1) Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 107 M a c h i n e T r a n s c r i p t i o n (F,S) (3,1.5,1) Prerequisite: T y p i n g s p e e d of 40 w p m . Legal m a c h i n e transcription. P r a c t i c e in t r a n s c r i b i n g forms, letters a n d reports from Lanier dictation equipment. This c o u r s e entails a mandatory 1.5 lab hours. Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 117 Legal Office P r o c e d u r e s II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 116. A n i n t r o d u c t i o n to b o o k k e e p i n g a n d a n e x a m i n a t i o n of b o o k k e e p i n g a n d a c c o u n t i n g s y s t e m s for a law office i n c l u d i n g trust a c c o u n t s . Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 109 B a s i c Litigation I (F) (1.5,0,.5) Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 118 Introduction to the court p r o c e d u r e s in S m a l l C l a i m s , C o u n t y a n d S u p r e m e C o u r t s of B . C . T h e c o u r s e will c o v e r p r o c e d u r e s in pre-trial preparation, the preparation of d o c u ments, the u s e of p r e c e d e n t s in S m a l l C l a i m s , C o u n t y a n d Supreme Courts. Directed Work E x p e r i e n c e (F) (1,30,2) 92 In-term work e x p e r i e n c e involving a p p r o x i m a t e l y eight lecture hours a n d at least 30 h o u r s of related office e x p e r i e n c e in the field. A l s o c o v e r e d is the resume, j o b a p p l i c a t i o n , cover letter a n d interview. Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 119 M e d i c a l Office Assistant 100 Directed Work E x p e r i e n c e (S) (1,30,2) T y p i n g II (F,S) (4.5,0,1.5) In-term work e x p e r i e n c e involving three lecture hours a n d at least 30 hours of related office e x p e r i e n c e in the legal field. Prerequisite: t y p i n g s p e e d of 45 w p m . S p e e d development a n d a c c u r a c y in typewriting with e m p h a s i s o n p r o d u c t i o n , c o m p o s i t i o n of letters a n d letter styles a n d extensive practice in typing various office forms. MEDICAL OFFICE ASSISTANT UPGRADING M e d i c a l Office Assistant 101 PROGRAM T y p i n g Skill a n d S p e e d Development (Proposed) (Part-time evening) T h i s program is d e s i g n e d as a n u p - g r a d i n g program for those people w h o are currently w o r k i n g in hospitals, c l i n i c s , or m e d i c a l offices a n d have g a i n e d at least o n e year's e x p e r i e n c e as a m e d i c a l receptionist, secretary o r assistant. T h e p r o g r a m is d e s i g n e d f o r t h o s e w h o w i s h to u p g r a d e their c l i n i c a l , clerical o r interpersonal skills. F o l l o w i n g satisfactory c o m p l e t i o n of required c o u r s e s a C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e certificate will b e a w a r d e d . F o r further information contact the Office A d m i n i s t r a t i o n D i v i s i o n . I (F) (1.5,0,.5) R e m e d i a l drills, power drills, short a n d sustained timed writings to increase s p e e d a n d a c c u r a c y in typewriting. M e d i c a l Office Assistant 102 T y p i n g Skill a n d S p e e d Development (S) II (1.5,0,.5) C o n t i n u a t i o n of M O A 101. M e d i c a l Office Assistant 103 M a c h i n e T r a n s c r i p t i o n (F.S) (3,3,1) MEDICAL OFFICE ASSISTANT PROGRAM Graduates from this 8 month program receive employment in m e d i c a l offices a n d as well in a diverse n u m b e r of hospital settings. A l l applicants will have the opportunity t o meet with the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r prior to registration to assess whether or not they have personal qualities a n d clerical skills n e c e s sary to be a s u c c e s s f u l M e d i c a l Office Assistant. Part-time c o u r s e s are a l s o available please contact the coordinator for n e c e s s a r y prerequisite information. For additional a d m i s s i o n information contact the Office Administration D i v i s i o n . Note: M O A = M e d i c a l Office Assistant Prerequisite: T y p i n g s p e e d of 40 w p m . M e d i c a l m a c h i n e transcription. P r a c t i c e in t r a n s c r i b i n g forms, letters a n d reports from Lanier dictation equipment. This c o u r s e entails a mandatory 3 lab hours. M e d i c a l Office Assistant 105 M e d i c a l Office P r o c e d u r e s (F,S) (3,0,1) T h i s is an introduction to office p r o c e d u r e s c o m m o n to general m e d i c a l offices a n d hospitals S t u d e n t s will gain expertise in m a k i n g a p p o i n t m e n t s ; k e e p i n g m e d i c a l records; keeping financial records; billing; dealing with patients, etc. Students will also b e c o m e familiar with the professional ethics of the p a r a - m e d i c a l . M e d i c a l Office Assistant 106 First Term C M N S 157 M O A 100 M O A 101 M O A 105 M O A 107 M O A 109 M O A 111 M O A 114 Communications T y p i n g II Typing Speed Development M e d i c a l Office Procedures I Introduction to Health C a r e I Anatomy and Physiology I Medical Terminology I Directed Work Experience Credit Hours Lab Hours 3 4.5 6 M O A 108 M O A 110 M O A 112 M O A 113 M O A 115 M e d i c a l Office Assistant 107 Introduction to Health C a r e (F,S) (3,0,1) Students will learn about c l i n i c a l p r o c e d u r e s pertinent to the doctor's office a n d the hospital setting. T h e c o u r s e includes general information about p h y s i c a l a n d mental health; m e d i c a t i o n s a n d health p r o d u c t s . S t u d e n t s will also learn how to use a n d maintain m e d i c a l office equipment. Half the time is spent o n First A i d , a n d students will receive a Standard First A i d Certificate u p o n c o m p l e t i o n of this phase of the c o u r s e . 3 3 3 3 1 6 Second Term M O A 103 M O A 106 C o n t i n u a t i o n of M O A 105. 1-5 22 M O A 102 M e d i c a l Office P r o c e d u r e s (F,S) (3,0,1) M e d i c a l Office Assistant 108 Introduction to Health C a r e (F.S) (3,0,1) C o n t i n u a t i o n of M O A 107. Typing Skill a n d Speed Development Machine Transcription M e d i c a l Office P r o c e d u r e s II Introduction to Health C a r e II Anatomy and P h y s i o l o g y II M e d i c a l T e r m i n o l o g y II Interpersonal Skills and Organizational Psychology Directed Work Experience 15 3 M e d i c a l Office Assistant 109 3 A n a t o m y a n d P h y s i o l o g y I (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of the structure, f u n c t i o n a n d inter-relationships of the o r g a n i c s y s t e m s of the b o d y . C o m m o n m e d i c a l d i s orders, operative p r o c e d u r e s and related terminology will be studied in c o n j u n c t i o n with the systems. 3 3 3 3 M e d i c a l Office Assistant 110 A n a t o m y a n d P h y s i o l o g y II (F,S) (3,0,1) C o n t i n u a t i o n of the work begun in M O A 109. 3 M e d i c a l Office Assistant 111 1 20.5 Individual c o u r s e d e s c r i p t i o n s are listed below. 3 M e d i c a l T e r m i n o l o g y I (F,S) (3,0,1) A n introduction to G r e e k a n d Latin prefixes, suffixes, roots and c o m b i n i n g forms c o m m o n to m e d i c a l terminology. 93 Medical Office Assistant 112 Medical Terminology II (F,S) (3,0,1) Word Processing Career Certificate Program Continuation and reinforcement of terminology in M O A 111. Medical Office Assistant 113 Interpersonal Skills a n d Organizational Psychology (F,S) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to provide students with basic p s y c h o l o g i c a l c o n c e p t s a n d e x p e r i e n c e in several skill areas important in b u s i n e s s . It includes practice in relating, assertion, feedback and problem solving skills. Other topics include small group behaviour, verbal and non-verbal c o m m u n i c a t i o n ; d y n a m i c s of personality; leadership styles; supervisory difficulties a n d conflict resolution. A n experiential a p p r o a c h allows the student to practice constructive interpersonal skills in a supportive setting. The Word Processing C a r e e r Certificate Program is a four month, full time program. The student will receive training on s c r e e n e d text-editors as well as related equipment. Major Program Requirements 19.5 Required Courses C m n s 150 Oftr 164 Oftr 181 Oftr 186 Oftr 187 Oftr 252 Communications Production Typing Machine Transcription Office Technology W o r d Processing Interpersonal Skills & Organizational Psychology Word Experience Oftr 300 Medical Office Assistant 114 Directed Work Experience (F) (1,30,2) In-term e x p e r i e n c e involving approximately eight lecture hours and at least 30 hours of related office e x p e r i e n c e in the field. A l s o covered is the resume, j o b a p p l i c a t i o n , c o v e r letter a n d interview. Medical Office Assistant 115 Directed Work Experience (S) (1,30,2) 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 1.5 19.5 Office Training 164 Production T y p i n g (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: T y p i n g s p e e d of 5 0 w p m . In-term work e x p e r i e n c e involving three lecture hours a n d at least 30 hours of related office e x p e r i e n c e in the field. E m p h a s i s is p l a c e d u p o n d e v e l o p i n g a p r o f e s s i o n a l a n d practical a p p r o a c h to typing p r o b l e m s with a m i n i m u m of supervision. Students are given timed production assignments a n d a c c e p t a b l e work standards are stressed. WORD PROCESSING PROGRAMS Word Processing Trainee Certificate Program Office Training 186 Office T e c h n o l o g y (F) (3,1.5,1) The W o r d Processing Trainee Certificate Program is a seven week program designed to provide the student with an understanding of the c o n c e p t s and practical applications of word processing and provides the student with the ability to operate word proc e s s i n g equipment. Program Requirements' 4.5 This c o u r s e will acquaint students with office p r o c e d u r e s a n d m a n a g e m e n t s y s t e m s . T i m e m a n a g e m e n t , meetings, image of the firm, reception and t e l e p h o n e manners, a n d the office environment as it relates to morale a n d efficiency will be c o v e r e d . C u r r e n t m o d e l s of basic office equipment will be demonstrated, i n c l u d i n g word p r o c e s s i n g , printing a n d duplicating m a c h i n e s . Students will be provided with the opportunity to investigate, in depth, the operation of a selected Required Course W D P R 100 Basic Operator Training W D P R 101 Language Arts and Machine Transcription 3.0 1.5 4.5 W o r d Processing Program C o u r s e Descriptions W o r d Processing 100 Basic Operator Training (3,4,1) W o r d P r o c e s s i n g O p e r a t o r T r a i n i n g is a seven week c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to provide the student with a mastery of basic record a n d playback operations o n both blind a n d visual word p r o c e s s o r s . T h e student will also be i n t r o d u c e d to word p r o c e s s i n g terminology and b a s i c word p r o c e s s i n g c o n c e p t s a n d theories. W o r d Processing 101 Language Arts a n d Machine Transcription (1.5,2,.5) This course provides the student with the language arts and m a c h i n e transcription skills necessary for the entry-level position of associate c o r r e s p o n d e n c e secretary. S t u d e n t s will learn the correct use of punctuation, capitalization a n d abbreviation. T h e y will also a c q u i r e skills in proofreading, verifying, a n d editing. 94 business office. Office Training 187 W o r d Processing (F,S) (3,1.5,.5) W o r d P r o c e s s i n g — the transformation of ideas into typewritten or printed form — has a l w a y s been a major f u n c t i o n of a secretary. T h i s c o u r s e will acquaint the student with the c o n c e p t s of w o r d p r o c e s s i n g a n d introduce the student to s p e c i a l terms, language, a n d the o p e r a t i o n of W P e q u i p m e n t resulting in more efficient p r o d u c t i o n of written, v e r b a l , o r r e c o r d e d information. Office Training 252 Interpersonal Skills a n d Organizational P s y c h o l o g y (F,S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to p r o v i d e students with basic p s y c h o l o g i c a l c o n c e p t s a n d e x p e r i e n c e In several skill areas important in b u s i n e s s . It i n c l u d e s p r a c t i c e in relating, a s s e r tion, feedback and problem solving skills. Other topics include small group behaviour, verbal and non-verbal c o m m u n i c a t i o n ; d y n a m i c s of personality; leadership styles; supervisory difficulties a n d conflict resolution. A n experiential a p p r o a c h allows the student to practice constructive interpersonal skills in a supportive setting. Office Training 300 Directed Work Experience (F) (1,30,2) In-term work e x p e r i e n c e involving approximately eight lecture hours a n d at least 30 hours of related office e x p e r i e n c e in the field. A l s o c o v e r e d is the resume, job a p p l i c a t i o n , cover letter a n d interview. Word Processing Administrative Support Upgrading . T h i s program e n a b l e s a p e r s o n who is e m p l o y e d to u p g r a d e skills a n d theory in word p r o c e s s i n g over a two year period. Advanced Administrative Support Training in Word Processing This 8 month program includes all c o u r s e s in levels I a n d II plus word p r o c e s s i n g m a n a g e m e n t / s u p e r v i s i o n . A p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d have two years work e x p e r i e n c e or one years training in a r e c o g n i z e d b u s i n e s s office training program. Students must have 50 w p m t y p i n g s p e e d , transcription skills and g o o d B u s i n e s s E n g l i s h skills. Outdoor Recreation Programs Instructional Faculty B a s h a m , D.F. Berta, J . L , D i p l o m a , O u t d o o r R e c . Mgt. & Wilderness Leadership (Capilano College) C a n o e Sport, B . C . Instructor B r o w n , T., B . S c . (Bristol) B o g d a n , A., D i p l o m a , O u t d o o r R e c . Mgt. ( C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ) B o y d e , J . E . , B.A. ( S F U ) , C . A . N . S . I . , C a n o e Sport B . C . Instructor's Certificate B o y d e , P., R . N . , C . P . R . Instructor, W i l d e r n e s s First A i d Instructor B o w e r i n g , L., B . E d . ( U B C ) B r a a k s m a , T., W i l d e r n e s s L e a d e r s h i p C e r t . ( C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ) , C a n o e Sport Instructor Cert., C . A . N . S . I . C a n n i n g , Janet, B . S c . ( U B C ) Carter, S., B . S c . B i o l o g y & K i n e s i o l o g y ( S F U ) , M . E d . A d u l t Education (UBC) Chester, N e i l , B . E d . (Sask.) B.A. (P.E.) (Sask.) M . P . E . ( U B C ) C h r i s t e n s e n , A., C . P . R . Instructor, R . L . S . S . Examiner, 96 Wilderness First A i d Instructor, B . C . R . C . A . Instructor, Wilderness L e a d e r s h i p Cert. O u t d o o r Recreation Mgmt Dipl. ( C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ) C r e e r , B., B . E d . ( U B C ) C a n o e S p o r t B . C . I n s t r u c t o r s Cert. C o o k , A . G . A . ( S F U ) , M . P h i l . (Cambridge) D e S c a l l y , F., Instructor M o u n t a i n e e r i n g Griffiths, R., O . N . C . (England). C A N S . I . , A s s o c . Mount G u i d e Cert., H e a d Instructor, O u t d o o r Pursuits P r o g r a m H a t c h a r d , J . , D i p l o m a , O u t d o o r R e c . Mgt. ( C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ) Wilderness L e a d e r s h i p Cert. ( C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ) C a n o e Sport (British C o l u m b i a ) Instructor Cert., C . A . N . S . I . Hills, S., R . N . E x e r c i s e M a n a g e m e n t Cert., B.C.I.T. H o b b s , E., D i p l o m a , O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n M a n a g e m e n t (Capilano College) C a n o e Sport B . C . Instructor's Certificate J e l e n s k y , M., St. J o h n ' s A m b u l a n c e Instructor, Wilderness First A i d Instructor, C . P . R . Instructor M a c i n t o s h , B., B.Ed., S e c o n d a r y Major P.E., National Level Four Off Track Official Cert., National Track a n d Field C o a c h Level 3 Cert. MacKay, J . , B . H e c , M.Sc. (UBC) Melville, S., C a n o e Sport B . C . Instructor's Certificate S c h m i d t , L , B . E d . , M . E d . , P h . D . (Alta.) S m i t h , C , B . S c . ( O r e g o n State), M . C . P . A . Cert. C a n a d i a n Athletic Therapist, Cert. Canadian Physiotherapy Association Stevens, D., D i p l . O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n Mgt., W i l d e r n e s s L e a d e r s h i p Cert. ( C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ) C a n o e Sport Instructors C e r t . , St. J o h n ' s A m b u l a n c e I n s t r u c t o r s C e r t . C . A . N . S . I . , C . S . A . T o u r Leaders Cert. Stewart, G . , B . S c . K i n e s i o l o g y , M . S c . K i n e s i o l o g y (SFU) Taunton, C , B.Sc. Kinesiology, M.Sc. Kinesiology (SFU) Urquhart, T., Dipl. O u t d o o r Recreation Management (Capilano C o l l e g e ) C . A . N . S . I . C a n o e S p o r t B . C . Instructor's Cert., W i l d e r n e s s L e a d e r s h i p Cert. Vajda-Janyk, A., B.Sc. Kinesiology (SFU), M.Sc. Recreation (U. ot B r u s s e l s ) , H e a d Instructor, L e i s u r e L e a d e r s h i p Programs Webster, W „ B.A. (Central W a s h i n g t o n ) M . S c . (Oregon) W e s m a n , S . , Cert. Ballet for C h i l d r e n , Cert. G y m n a s t i c s for C h i l d r e n , H e a d C o a c h G y m n a s t i c s T e a m s , W o r k s h o p s in related fields at U B C a n d I.W.C.A. White, B . P . , B.A., M.A. ( S F U ) , C o o r d i n a t o r Wright, R., W i l d e r n e s s P h o t o g r a p h y skills development program a n d will be required to pay an additional levy to c o v e r partial c o s t s of e q u i p m e n t , field trips, a n d skills development courses. In the fieldwork courses, student attitude a n d leadership c a p a c i t y will be taken into a c c o u n t in the instructor's evaluation profile. S p e c i a l i z e d interest areas in the program i n c l u d e parks a n d recreation area management, ski area management, leadership a n d prog r a m m i n g , a n d environmental e d u c a t i o n . Students acquire w o r k i n g skills in s p e c i a l i z e d areas d u r i n g their p r a c t i c u m placements. A c c e s s to the other departmental programs is a v a i l a b l e to q u a l i f i e d O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n M a n a g e m e n t students. A p p l i c a n t s for the O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m s h o u l d familiarize themselves with the f o l l o w i n g a d m i s s i o n requirements: 1. A r r a n g e an interview with the C o o r d i n a t o r of the program. (Interviews are held throughout the year.) 2. In o r d e r to be c o n s i d e r e d for the p r o g r a m , a p p l i c a n t s must be at least nineteen years of age at the date of entry into the p r o g r a m . 3. A p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d have g o o d reading a n d writing skills and must be physically fit. General Information O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n is p l a y i n g a n i n c r e a s i n g l y important role in the s o c i a l a n d e c o n o m i c life of British C o l u m b i a . A n increase in available leisure time a n d p u b l i c interest in the preservation of natural areas have i n c r e a s e d the n e e d for qualified, well-trained graduates c a p a b l e of p l a n n i n g a n d directing recreation programs, facilities and teaching outdoor activity skills. T h e O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n department offers a full-time career training d i p l o m a p r o g r a m , plus four s p e c i a l i z e d u p g r a d i n g certificate p r o g r a m s for w o r k i n g professionals a n d volunteers. The department also has an advanced expedition program available for graduates and for those with h i g h levels of experience a n d skills c o m p e t e n c e . U p g r a d i n g programs are divided into two streams: Outdoor Pursuits (Wilderness Leadership and Adventure and C h a l l e n g e Training) and L e i s u r e Leadership (Fitness Leadership a n d Leisure Lifestyling). A l l e n q u i r i e s s h o u l d be d i r e c t e d R e c r e a t i o n Department, L o c a l 391. to the Outdoor 4. After the interview, the C o o r d i n a t o r of the O u t d o o r Recreation Management Program will request the following documentation: a. At least two letters of reference b. H i g h s c h o o l or P o s t - S e c o n d a r y e d u c a t i o n transcripts c. A letter of a p p l i c a t i o n , i n c l u d i n g a resume of past experiences Note: A doctor's certification of health will be required of all a c c e p t e d c a n d i d a t e s prior to a d m i s s i o n . Associates in Arts and Science Credit Hours Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s General Education Requirements The Capilano College Recreation Management Program trains P a r a - P r o f e s s i o n a l s to work effectively in a variety of o u t d o o r recreation e m p l o y m e n t situations. R e s o u r c e and facility m a n a g e m e n t job opportunities exist in P r o v i n c i a l and M u n i c i p a l Park and R e c r e a t i o n a g e n c i e s and in ski areas. L e a d e r s h i p , instructional a n d p r o g r a m m i n g job opportunities exist in a variety of c o m m u n i t y , c o m m e r c i a l and government agencies. T h e program will provide the graduate with skills required to plan a n d operate g o o d o u t d o o r recreation programs a n d to manage facilities and recreational land and water resources. S k i l l s in summer, winter, and aquatic wilderness leadership will be developed in the skills development courses. E m p h a s i s is placed o n e x p e r i e n c e in the field situation. T h e program c o m m e n c e s with a seven day b a c k p a c k i n g expedition w h i c h serves as a lab for c l a s s r o o m work. Other trips are p l a c e d throughout the program. E a c h student's particular p r o g r a m c o n c e n t r a t i o n will be d e c i d e d in c o n s u l t a t i o n with the coordinator. Flexibility in the s e c o n d year of the program enables students to specialize in their areas of interest. 59 _6_ 65 Lab Hours 15 15 First Term C m n s 150 Recreation 152 R e c r e a t i o n 140 O u t d o o r Recreation Management Program Diploma Recreation 160 Recreation 161 Recreation 166 Basic Communications . . Introduction to O u t d o o r Recreation R e c r e a t i o n Delivery Systems P h y s i c a l Fitness in Theory and Practice — Wilderness Backpacking I Environmental Education 3 3 3 3 3 _6_ 21 Second Term C m n s 154 R e c r e a t i o n 151 Recreation 153 Recreation 157 R e c r e a t i o n 141 R e c r e a t i o n 159 R e c r e a t i o n 163 R e c r e a t i o n 164 C o m m u n i c a t i o n s in Recreation Outdoor Recreation Environments Work, L e i s u r e a n d Society Skills Development Outdoor Recreation Programming Outdoor Recreation Administration W i l d e r n e s s First A i d I . . . Nordic Skiing I 3 3 3 1.5 3 3 3 3 22.5 Students will be required to take first aid as part of their 97 Third Term Nordic Skiing R e c r e a t i o n 178 Recreation 180 R e c r e a t i o n 190 Recreation 250 Recreation 240 Recreation 259 Recreation 263 Recreation 167 R e c r e a t i o n 171 H u m a n R e l a t i o n s in Recreation Fitness L e a d e r s h i p (Optional) Leisure Counselling (Optional) Outdoor Recreation Ecology Outdoor Recreation Administration S k i l l s Development W i l d e r n e s s First A i d II (Optional) K a y a k i n g I (Optional) . . . Mountaineering I (Optional) 3 3 3 2 3 1.5 . 3 3 3 3 13.5 Fourth Term Recreation 255 Outdoor Recreation Practicum T h e W i l d e r n e s s N o r d i c P r o g r a m is s p e c i f i c a l l y d e s i g n e d to deal with the winter wilderness environment a n d activity skills required d u r i n g this s e a s o n . C o m f o r t a n d safety is dependent not only u p o n the individual's ability to c o p e with the winter environment but also with skill efficiency. Canoeing 3 5 9 9 Note: Students will e n r o l for R e c r e a t i o n 178, 250, 254 a n d 259 and at least one of the above options. Other options outside the department may be arranged in consultation with the C o o r d i n a t o r . O u t d o o r Pursuits Programs Wilderness Leadership Program T h e W i l d e r n e s s L e a d e r s h i p P r o g r a m is d e s i g n e d to meet the p h y s i c a l , s o c i a l a n d a e s t h e t i c n e e d s for p e r s o n a l development. T h i s development will be a c h i e v e d t h r o u g h involvement with low-impact, environmentally sensitive outdoor activities. A strong commitment to these outdoor activities will be expected. T h e program thus e n c o u r a g e s the integration of lifestyle a n d recreational activities in a manner w h i c h promotes environmental integrity a n d realistic h u m a n needs. The program s e e k s to e d u c a t e those w h o wish to serve as skilled leaders in w i l d e r n e s s a n d s e m i - w i l d e r n e s s recreation. C a n o e i n g , b a c k p a c k i n g a n d n o r d i c s k i i n g are the major a c t i vities taught. Field e x p e r i e n c e is given priority. O u t d o o r safety is e m p h a s i z e d with instruction in m a n a g e m e n t of e m e r g e n c i e s , in safe a n d r e s p o n s i b l e activity program development, a n d in preventative safety. A s e c o n d major e m p h a s i s is on the e n c o u r a g e m e n t of wise, ethical behaviour in natural environments, with the a d d e d responsibility for students to pass these attitudes o n to other w i l d e r n e s s users. T h e g o a l of the W i l d e r n e s s L e a d e r s h i p P r o g r a m is to provide a means by w h i c h individuals realize w i l d e r n e s s leadership roles with c o n f i d e n c e and a s e n s e of responsibility a n d safety. T h r o u g h activity-oriented c o u r s e s that d e m a n d a high level of fitness, the program p r o m o t e s the development of well-trained instructors who are willing a n d c a p a b l e of s h a r i n g information a n d of d e m o n s t r a t i n g s o u n d leadership in the outdoors. S k i l l s c a n o n l y be o b t a i n e d t h r o u g h practice; the program therefore e n c o u r a g e s the a c q u i s i t i o n of o u t d o o r skills t h r o u g h practical e x p e r i e n c e . Students will enrol in o n e c o u r s e per term, a n d must s u c c e s s f u l l y c o m p l e t e e a c h c o u r s e in o r d e r to c o n t i n u e in the p r o g r a m . S t u d e n t s must also obtain a " B " g r a d e or better in order to progress to the next c o u r s e . It is n e c e s s a r y that activity skills a n d leadership qualities be h i g h in o u t d o o r activities w h e r e leaders are r e s p o n s i b l e for p e o p l e ' s lives. A student receiving a " C " grade may repeat the c o u r s e or s h o w p r o f i c i e n c y in that activity during the following appropriate term before c o n t i n u i n g in the program. T h i s must be arranged with the c o n s e n t of the program C o o r d i n a t o r a n d the C o u r s e Instructor. Students must be adult (19 years of a g e and older). A n additional fee is c h a r g e d for e a c h c o u r s e to cover field trips a n d equipment c o s t s . 98 T h e W i l d e r n e s s C a n o e i n g P r o g r a m is s u m m e r oriented, dealing specifically with wilderness, skills of c a n o e i n g o n lakes a n d rivers. E m p h a s i s is p l a c e d u p o n the a c q u i s i t i o n of risk management t e c h n i q u e s a n d the evolution of e n v i r o n mentally s o u n d c a n o e i n g ethics. S k i l l s and t e c h n i q u e s t a u g h t are b a s e d u p o n p r o g r e s s i o n s d e s i g n e d by t h e Recreational C a n o e i n g A s s o c i a t i o n (R.C.A.) a n d the C a n a d i a n Recreational C a n o e i n g A s s o c i a t i o n ( C . R . C . A . ) . Backpacking T h e W i l d e r n e s s B a c k p a c k i n g p r o g r a m is d e s i g n e d to train wilderness leaders for the recreational g r o u p activities of s u m m e r hiking a n d b a c k p a c k i n g . E m p h a s i s is p l a c e d o n the s k i l l s in p r e - t r i p o r g a n i z a t i o n , preventative safety, a n d w o r k i n g with g r o u p s . S p e c i a l topic areas will i n c l u d e legal liability a n d moral responsibility. Wilderness Leadership Wilderness Nordic Skiing Option Capilano College Certificate Major R e q u i r e m e n t s Credit Hours 15 Wilderness Nordic Skiing Option First Term R e c r e a t i o n 161 R e c r e a t i o n 163 R e c r e a t i o n 164 Wilderness Backpacking I W i l d e r n e s s First A i d I Wilderness Nordic Skiing I 3 3 3 Second Term R e c r e a t i o n 263 W i l d e r n e s s First A i d II 3 R e c r e a t i o n 264 W i l d e r n e s s N o r d i c S k i i n g II 3 Wilderness Canoeing Option Capilano College Certificate Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s First Term 15 R e c r e a t i o n 161 R e c r e a t i o n 162 R e c r e a t i o n 163 Wilderness Backpacking I Wilderness Canoeing I W i l d e r n e s s First A i d I 3 3 3 W i l d e r n e s s C a n o e i n g II W i l d e r n e s s First A i d II 3 3 Second Term R e c r e a t i o n 262 Recreation 263 Wilderness Backpacking Option Capilano College Certificate Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s 12 Wilderness Backpacking Option First Term R e c r e a t i o n 161 Recreation 163 Wilderness Backpacking I W i l d e r n e s s First A i d I 3 3 W i l d e r n e s s B a c k p a c k i n g II W i l d e r n e s s First A i d II 3 3 Second Term R e c r e a t i o n 261 R e c r e a t i o n 263 Adventure a n d C h a l l e n g e T r a i n i n g P r o g r a m (A.C.T.) T h e Adventure and C h a l l e n g e Training P r o g r a m provides training in M o u n t a i n e e r i n g a n d K a y a k i n g for individuals w h o w i s h to d e v e l o p their t e c h n i c a l skills, leadership c o m p e t e n c y , Mountaineering Option a n d e m e r g e n c y r e s p o n s e capabilities t o w a r d s a n instructional level. T h e goal of the program is to provide thorough skills instruction to permit graduates to lead intermediate level m o u n t a i n e e r i n g or k a y a k i n g e x p e r i e n c e s in a safe a n d confident manner. Field trips are s c h e d u l e d on w e e k e n d s a n d lectures are in the evening. First Term R e c r e a t i o n 163 R e c r e a t i o n 171 W i l d e r n e s s First A i d I Mountaineering I 3 3 W i l d e r n e s s First A i d II M o u n t a i n e e r i n g II 3 3 Second Term T h e A . C . T . program f o c u s e s o n two technically c o m p l e x c h a l l e n g e activities requiring significant personal c o m m i t ment for initial p a r t i c i p a t i o n . W h i l e e m p h a s i z i n g s k i l l s development, the p r o g r a m provides s t r o n g environmental a n d personal awareness c o m p o n e n t s . M o u n t a i n touring a n d c l i m b i n g expeditions, a n d o c e a n , river, a n d lake touring by kayak provide a context for environmental interpretation. Students e n r o l i n g in the s e c o n d year mountaineering c o u r s e s h o u l d expect to c o m m i t up to two w e e k s in the s u m m e r term for an e x p e d i t i o n . R e c r e a t i o n 263 R e c r e a t i o n 271 Students will e n r o l in o n e c o u r s e per term, a n d must s u c c e s s f u l l y c o m p l e t e e a c h c o u r s e in order to c o n t i n u e in the p r o g r a m . A high level of p r o f i c i e n c y is required in outd o o r pursuits where leaders are responsible for people's lives. Students must obtain at least a " B - " grade to progress to the next course. A student receiving a " C " grade may repeat the c o u r s e or s h o w p r o f i c i e n c y in that activity d u r i n g the following appropriate term, before c o n t i n u i n g in the program. T h i s must be a r r a n g e d with the c o n s e n t of the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r and the c o u r s e instructor. 1. Fitness Leadership Students must be adult (19 years of age and older). A n additional fee is c h a r g e d for e a c h c o u r s e to c o v e r equipment c o s t s and field trips. Kayaking T h e k a y a k i n g p r o g r a m is s u m m e r o r i e n t e d a n d is d e s i g n e d to d e v e l o p k a y a k i n g skills o n rivers a n d o c e a n . E m p h a s i s is p l a c e d u p o n a c q u i s i t i o n of paddling skills, risk management techniques, and sound leadership and environment e t h i c s . S a f e t y a n d enjoyment are dependent u p o n an individual's ability to h a n d l e extreme c o n d i t i o n s w h i c h in turn is dependent u p o n leadership and skills efficiency. O p p o r t u n i t y is p r o v i d e d for the d e v e l o p m e n t of s u c h skills a n d leadership potential. Expedition Program T h e O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n Department provides the o p p o r tunity for graduates to participate in major e x p e d i t i o n s . Details are available from the c o o r d i n a t o r . Leisure Leadership Programs Program T h e Fitness L e a d e r s h i p P r o g r a m is an u p g r a d i n g program to train Fitness Instructors for p r o f e s s i o n a l a n d volunteer work in e x e r c i s e management or fitness p r o g r a m s . It is d e s i g n e d for the individual w h o s e a i m s have b e e n or will be in the p r o m o t i o n a n d / o r e x e c u t i o n of " e x e r c i s e m a n a g e m e n t " or " f i t n e s s " p r o g r a m s , c o m i n g from c o m m u n i t y g r o u p s or the schools. T h e c o u r s e format provides the n e c e s s a r y theoretical a n d practical information n e c e s s a r y for the practitioner to a d m i n ister a health oriented fitness p r o g r a m . A n e m p h a s i s will be placed on the practical application of the theoretical knowledge required. T h e program is offered evenings and w e e k e n d s over four (4) c o l l e g e semesters a n d must be taken in sequential order. A p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d be in g o o d health and in g o o d p h y s i c a l c o n d i t i o n as most c o u r s e s involve physical activity. A p p l i cants must be adult (19 years a n d older). C l a s s size will be limited. Individual c o u r s e s may be taken, but priority must be given to those students e n r o l e d in the full Fitness L e a d e r s h i p Program. Fitness Leadership Credit Capilano College Certificate Mountaineering T h e m o u n t a i n e e r i n g program is d e s i g n e d to d e v e l o p c l i m b i n g skills in rock, s n o w and glacial travel. E m p h a s i s will a l s o be p l a c e d on s o u n d environmental ethics related to a l p i n e travel, risk m a n a g e m e n t t e c h n i q u e s a n d leadership s k i l l s . C o m f o r t a n d safety are d e p e n d e n t u p o n the individual's ability to h a n d l e extreme c o n d i t i o n s w h i c h in turn is dependent u p o n skills a n d leadership efficiency. Adventure and C h a l l e n g e Training ( A . C . T . ) Kayaking Option Capilano College Certificate Credit Hours Major Requirements 12 Kayaking Option First Term R e c r e a t i o n 163 R e c r e a t i o n 167 Hours Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s W i l d e r n e s s First A i d I Kayaking I 3 3 First A i d II K a y a k i n g II 3 3 ; First Semester R e c r e a t i o n 180 15 Credit Hours Fitness L e a d e r s h i p Lab Hours 3 Second Semester R e c r e a t i o n 181 Endurance R e c r e a t i o n 182 R e c r e a t i o n 183 Recreation 184 R e c r e a t i o n 185 (Running) E x e r c i s e to M u s i c Strength F i t n e s s Athletic Injuries F i t n e s s for C h i l d r e n Activities 1 1 1 1 1 (3) Third Semester R e c r e a t i o n 186 R e c r e a t i o n 187 R e c r e a t i o n 188 R e c r e a t i o n 189 Aquatic Fitness P r o g r a m s Fitness for S e n i o r s Nutrition Pre- & Post-Natal Exercises 1 1 1 1 (3) Second Term R e c r e a t i o n 263 R e c r e a t i o n 267 Mountaineering Option Capilano College Certificate Major Requirements . Note: Students will c h o o s e six (6) of the above nine (9) activity c o u r s e s over the 2nd a n d 3rd semesters. E a c h activity c o u r s e will consist of 10 - 1 5 hours of instruction a n d will be offered o n a w e e k l y basis for six w e e k s or as a weekend workshop. Credit Hours Fourth Semester 12 R e c r e a t i o n 280 Fitness L e a d e r s h i p 6 99 O n e evening a week, 1.5 h o u r s lab, 1.5 hours lecture for 13 weeks. M i n i m u m of 25 h o u r s p r a c t i c u m experience. Students may challenge c o u r s e s in this program or receive credit for courses of a like nature at other institutions or agencies. T h e s e c o u r s e s will be reviewed by the program's head instructor before a d v a n c e credit is issued. 2. T h e Leisure Lifestyling Certificate Program A Lifestyle C o u n s e l l i n g S k i l l s P r o g r a m for field w o r k i n g professionals c o n c e r n e d with healthful management of leisure time, this p r o g r a m s e e k s t o provide training in L e i s u r e C o u n s e l l i n g t e c h n i q u e s f o r p r a c t i t i o n e r s in R e c r e a t i o n , S c h o o l s , industrial a n d c o m m e r c i a l p r o g r a m s , a n d s o c i a l a n d n e i g h b o u r h o o d services. The program provides both a theoretical base a n d a n experiential opportunity to develop a n d apply Leisure C o u n s e l l i n g skills for particular client needs. E a c h student will have the opportunity t o apply L e i s u r e C o u n s e l l i n g skills to the particular d e m a n d s of their w o r k i n g environment. T h e program is d e s i g n e d as an u p g r a d i n g certificate p r o g r a m for w o r k i n g professionals. C o u r s e s are offered at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e L y n n m o u r C a m p u s one evening per week, 1.5 hours lecture, 1.5 hour's lab. Additional special one-day seminars will also be held o n weekends where appropriate. There will be a strong e m p h a s i s on participation and personal skills development. T h e p r o g r a m c o m m e n c e s in S e p t e m b e r and c o n c l u d e s the following M a y / J u n e with a field p r o g r a m development p r a c t i c u m . A p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d have a proven ability to act in a leadership c a p a c i t y in the particular vocational or avocational field in which they wish to apply leisure counselling techniques. A limited number of seats will be available to applicants from C o l l e g e a n d University R e c r e a t i o n p r o g r a m s . Leisure Lifestyling Recreation 151 T h e O u t d o o r Environment (S) (3,2,1) A c o n c e n t r a t i o n o n the b a s i c s of weather a n d climate, a n d how weather affects o u t d o o r recreation activities. M o u n t a i n Weather a n d personal f o r e c a s t i n g will be dealt with in detail. T h e c o u r s e will also f o c u s o n the interpretation of the e n v i ronment from t o p o g r a p h i c m a p s a n d aerial p h o t o g r a p h s , e m p h a s i z i n g recreation m a p d e s i g n . Recreation 152 Introduction to O u t d o o r Recreation (F) (3,0,1) A brief historical overview of the development of recreation. Nature and s c o p e of o u t d o o r recreation in relation to m o d e r n leisure, nature of s u p p l y a n d d e m a n d , d e m a n d a n a l y s i s as a p l a n n i n g t o o l , c o n c e p t s a n d p h i l o s o p h i e s of parks m a n a g e ment, o u t d o o r recreation resource p e r c e p t i o n , p s y c h o l o g i c a l nature of o u t d o o r recreation, e x p e r i e n c e a n d behaviour, . o u t d o o r recreation legislation, c a r r y i n g c a p a c i t i e s of w i l d lands, land u s e conflict, multiple u s e p o l i c i e s , inventory techniques. Recreation 153 Leisure Issues (S) (3,0,1) Overview of the functional roles of work a n d leisure in various cultural contexts. E v o l u t i o n of leisure b e h a v i o u r in western society, the protestant work ethic, utilitarianism, lifestyle-based variation in work and leisure, modern c o n c e p t s of work a n d leisure, nature of stress, s o c i o l o g i c a l a n d p s y c h o l o g i c a l perspectives in work a n d leisure, current trends in leisure, p r o g n o s t i c a t i o n s for the future. Recreation 157 Skills Development (S) (1.5,3,.5) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d t o b r o a d e n students' e x i s t i n g p r o f i c i e n c i e s in o u t d o o r recreation skills, to develop leadership capabilities, safety c o n s c i o u s n e s s in wilderness settings, a n d e c o l o g i c a l a p p r e c i a t i o n of winter wilderness. Credit Capilano College Certificate Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s Hours .• 12 First Semester Recreation 190 Recreation 153 3 3 Leisure C o u n s e l l i n g S k i l l s 3 Transferable to S F U . Leisure Applications 3 Wilderness B a c k p a c k i n g Third Semester R e c r e a t i o n 291 Recreation 161 Recreation 140 O u t d o o r Recreation Delivery Systems (S) (3,0,1) T h e c o u r s e will deal with the structure of delivery s y s t e m s and the p h y s i c a l facilities w h i c h operate t o deal with these delivery s y s t e m s . A l t h o u g h the c o u r s e will include a general overview in these t o p i c s , there will be an e m p h a s i s p l a c e d o n o u t d o o r s y s t e m s a n d facilities. Recreation 141 O u t d o o r Recreation Program Planning (S) (3,3,2) T h i s c o u r s e will e x p l o r e the p r o g r a m planning function in o u t d o o r recreation. T o p i c s will i n c l u d e : the p r o b l e m s of planning p r o g r a m s in existing delivery s y s t e m s , s e e k i n g w a y s to s o l v e these present p r o b l e m s , n e w p h i l o s o p h i e s to c o n s i d e r in p r o g r a m m i n g , a n d s e e k i n g alternative a n d new m e t h o d s of p r o g r a m p l a n n i n g in o u t d o o r recreation. 100 A n overview of the constituents of physical fitness in w h i c h the f o l l o w i n g t o p i c s are dealt with. W h a t is p h y s i c a l fitness? What are its p h y s i o l o g i c a l determinants? H o w c a n p h y s i c a l fitness be a c h i e v e d a n d m a i n t a i n e d ? Weight c o n t r o l , p h y s i o logical c h a n g e s resulting from training a n d e x e r c i s e , tests for p h y s i c a l fitness, d e s i g n i n g fitness p r o g r a m s . Leisure Counselling W o r k , Leisure, a n d S o c i e t y S e c o n d Semester Recreation 290 Recreation 160 Physical Fitness in Theory and Practice (F) (3,0,1) I (SU,F) (3,0,1) A n i n t r o d u c t i o n to the skills of s u m m e r h i k i n g a n d c a m p crafts in w i l d e r n e s s areas. E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d o n leadership d e v e l o p m e n t in o r g a n i z a t i o n , safety a n d g r o u p a s s e s s m e n t . T o p i c s will i n c l u d e a c c e s s t o w i l d e r n e s s areas, equipment, survival skills, trip p l a n n i n g a n d o r g a n i z a t i o n , navigation, c a m p crafts, hiking o n difficult terrain, a n d w i l d e r n e s s e c o l o g y . C o n s i d e r a t i o n will be g i v e n t o the p r o b lems of w o r k i n g with g r o u p s , particularly in terms of budget limitations a n d improvising e q u i p m e n t . Recreation 162 Wilderness C a n o e i n g I ( S U ) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the skills, t e c h n i q u e s a n d k n o w l e d g e of basic p a d d l i n g in o p e n c a n o e s . T h i s c o u r s e i n c l u d e s instruction in p r o p e r h a n d l i n g of e q u i p m e n t ; p a d d l i n g skills in grades of water up to a n d i n c l u d i n g g r a d e 2, practice a n d rescue, t r a c k i n g , lining, p o r t a g i n g , river reading, c a n o e camping and teaching. Leadership techniques and canoeing skills will be stressed throughout the course. U p o n completion of C a n o e I students will be given the opportunity to take the Flat Water instructors e x a m from B . C . R . C . A . Recreation 163 Wilderness First A i d I (F,S) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e incorporates the basic principles of First A i d with the s p e c i a l i z e d needs of the o u t d o o r leader. T h e c o u r s e i n c l u d e s C . P . R , i m p r o v e d t e c h n i q u e s , a n d the use of metallic splints in a d d i t i o n to the content of a standard first aid c o u r s e . S p e c i a l attention will also be given to the t o p i c s of hypothermia a n d hyperthermia. S k i l l levels developed will reflect St. J o h n A m b u l a n c e c o u r s e content. Recreation 164 Wilderness Nordic Skiing I (S) (3,0,1) T h i s is a n introductory c o u r s e d e s i g n e d t o give students an initial e x p o s u r e to winter e n v i r o n m e n t s o n c r o s s - c o u n t r y skis The c o u r s e i n c l u d e s both a lecture and a field trip series with e m p h a s i s o n o u t d o o r activity. L e c t u r e t o p i c s a r e o n equipment, w a x i n g , c l o t h i n g , g e o g r a p h i c features, fitness, nutrition a n d safety. S k i l l levels will reflect C . A . N . S . I . a n d C . S . A . material content. Recreation 166 Environmental Education T h i s c o u r s e is d e v o t e d entirely to i m p r o v i n g skills in rock c l i m b i n g , risk management a n d leadership. Lectures a n d field trips will be in the format. S k i l l s will i n c l u d e leading c l i m b s to grade 5.6, a d v a n c e d c h o c k s t o n e placement, alternative belay a n d rappel systems, and basic rescue techniques. Students will be introduced to further leadership techniques required to run c l u b outings a n d rock s c h o o l s . Recreation 178 H u m a n Relations in Recreation (F) (3,0,1) T o p i c s i n c l u d e H u m a n R e l a t i o n s in M a n a g e m e n t . M a n a g e m e n t Styles, T i m e M a n a g e m e n t , the L e a d e r s h i p R o l e , P e r s o n n e l M a n a g e m e n t , a n d C i t i z e n Involvement. Recreation 180 Fitness Leadership (F,S) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e is designed to c o m b i n e technical and practical information necessary to run a fitness program. T h e accent will be o n practical a p p l i c a t i o n of the t e c h n i c a l k n o w l e d g e acquired. Transferable to S F U . (F) (6,4,3) A n introduction to the p h i l o s o p h i e s a n d c o n c e p t s of environmental education a n d experiential education. Students are e n c o u r a g e d to develop a questioning attitude in reviewing individual and group response to contemporary environmental p h e n o m e n a B a s e l i n e interpretive skills are promoted w h i c h include s u c h features of the British C o l u m b i a l a n d s c a p e as flora and fauna, geology, geomorphology and urban conditions. Students will be expected to learn to interpret landscapes a n d identify main l a n d s c a p e c o m p o n e n t s . Recreation 167 Kayaking I ( S U , F ) (3,0,1) A n i n t r o d u c t i o n to the n e c e s s a r y skills, t e c h n i q u e s , a n d k n o w l e d g e required for basic kayak p a d d l i n g . Lecture t o p i c s cover c l o t h i n g a n d equipment, h y d r a u l i c s and navigation for o c e a n a n d river travel, s p e c i a l i z e d first a i d , a n d leadership styles P r a c t i c a l skills a c q u i r e d are a p p l i c a b l e to k a y a k i n g o n lakes and o c e a n s a n d o n rivers of up to grade three difficulty. They i n c l u d e strokes, rescues, instructional a n d leadership p r o g r e s s i o n s , a n d t e c h n i q u e s for instructing people with special needs. Recreation 170 Wilderness Recreation (F) (3,0,1) Note: This c o u r s e is o p e n to the public. A n introductory c o u r s e in w i l d e r n e s s recreation, d e s i g n e d as an overview of the c o m p o n e n t s w h i c h make for a safe a n d c o m f o r t a b l e e x p e r i e n c e in a w i l d e r n e s s area at different s e a s o n s of the year for different activities. T h e c o u r s e d i s c u s s e s the inter-relationship of people's needs a n d the environment. G e n e r a l t o p i c s will i n c l u d e leadership, n a v i g a tion, general g e o g r a p h y , first aid a n d ethics W i l d e r n e s s activities will i n c l u d e b a c k p a c k i n g , c a m p i n g , c a n o e i n g a n d c r o s s - c o u n t r y s k i i n g . P r e v i o u s e x p e r i e n c e in the activities is not necessary. Recreation 171 Mountaineering I ( S U ) (3,0,1) T h e course will cover basic principles of equipment, safety, glacier travel a n d c l i m b i n g o n rock, i c e and snow. A l t h o u g h the c o u r s e is primarily d e s i g n e d for the beginner, it is flexible e n o u g h to cater to people w i s h i n g t o improve their skills b e y o n d the novice level. Lectures are in the evening, a n d field experiences o n w e e k e n d s . Recreation 172 Rock C l i m b i n g (F) (6,5,1) Prerequisite: Student will be e x p e c t e d to have d o n e s o m e rock c l i m b i n g prior to taking this c o u r s e . Recreation 181 Endurance Activities (Running) (F) (1,0,.33) This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to provide fitness instructors with information pertaining to the organization and management of running programs. T h r o u g h t e c h n i c a l , practical a n d d i s c u s s i o n s e s s i o n s , students s h o u l d gain the information and c o n f i d e n c e to motivate a n d c o u n s e l others w h o are involved in or about to begin a running p r o g r a m . Recreation 182 Exercise to Music (F) (1,0,-33) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d for fitn&ss instructors w h o w i s h to incorporate the use of m u s i c into their fitness p r o g r a m s . This will be a c h i e v e d by p h y s i c a l involvement in a fitness c l a s s where m u s i c is used a n d by presentation and d i s c u s s i o n in the c l a s s r o o m . Recreation 183 Strength Fitness (F) (1,0,-33) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to provide fitness instructors, teachers and c o a c h e s with the knowledge and skills necessary to d e s i g n safe and effective strength training programs. T h e c o u r s e will f o c u s o n strength training p r o g r a m s for general fitness a n d for preparation for sports a n d recreational activities. Recreation 184 Athletic Injuries (F) (1,0,-33) This course is designed to give fitness instructors knowledge a n d information o n prevention, identification a n d treatment of injuries c o m m o n to extra curricular activities. T h e c o u r s e will contain both theoretical a n d practical material. Recreation 185 Fitness for Children (F) (1,0,.33) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to give the fitness instructor the k n o w l e d g e a n d skills n e c e s s a r y to administer a safe a n d motivating fitness program for c h i l d r e n . E m p h a s i s will be given to practical skills a c q u i s i t i o n . Recreation 186 Aquatic Fitness Program (S) (1,0,.33) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to provide fitness instructors a n d others w o r k i n g in a q u a t i c s with the k n o w l e d g e a n d skills n e c e s s a r y to develop a variety of safe a n d effective fitness programs in the aquatic setting. T h e course deals with exercise p r o g r a m s both in the water a n d o n the pool deck. 101 Recreation 187 Fitness for Seniors (S) (1,0..33) This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d for fitness instructors w h o wish to gain knowledge and experience in designing and implementing fitness programs for senior citizens. T h e c o u r s e will c o n t a i n both theoretical a n d practical material. Recreation 262 Recreation 188 Wilderness Canoeing II (SU) (3,0,1) Nutrition (S) (1,0,.33) This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to give fitness instructors b a s i c knowledge of nutrition. Emphasis will be placed on tbe relationship between nutrition principles a n d p h y s i c a l activity. Recreation 189 Pre & Post Natal Exercises (S) (1,0, 33) This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to give the fitness Instructor k n o w l e d g e a n d skills in c o n d u c t i n g e x e r c i s e programs torw o m e n in both the pre a n d post natal c o n d i t i o n . E m p h a s i s will be o n theory. It is strongly r e c o m m e n d e d that students have taken R e c r e a t i o n 182 — E x e r c i s e to M u s i c , prior to this bourse. Recreation 190 Leisure Counselling (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will provide training in leisure c o u n s e l l i n g for practitioners in the area of recreation, c l a s s r o o m t e a c h i n g , s o c i a l a n d n e i g h b o u r h o o d services, s c h o o l c o u n s e l l i n g a n d retirement and pre-retirement p l a n n i n g . T h e e m p h a s i s will be upon the application of c o u n s e l l i n g strategies in the leisure and recreation field. Recreation 240 Outdoor Recreation Administration (F) (3,0,1) Note: T h i s c o u r s e is o p e n to recreation practitioners in the field. A study of general b u s i n e s s practices in the operation of various outdoor recreation facilities, s u c h as record keeping, budgeting, accounting, purchasing, advertising and c o n c e s s i o n agreements, liabilities, laws a n d statutes g o v e r n i n g parks a n d recreation a g e n c i e s . Recreation 250 Outdoor Recreation E c o l o g y Prerequisite: W i l d e r n e s s C a n o e i n g I. T h i s c o u r s e is a review a n d addition to the C a n o e i n g I material. T h e additions i n c l u d e : c a n o e c o n s t r u c t i o n a n d repair, c a n o e history and evolution of the a b o r i g i n a l c a n o e s , tandem a n d s o l o moving water skills, a n d c a n o e p o l i n g . T h e c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to further develop paddling skills, personal experience, teaching ability a n d leadership t e c h n i q u e s . W h e r e a p p l i c a b l e the standards a n d instruction will b e from R . C . A and the C a n a d i a n R e c r e a t i o n a l C a n o e i n g A s s o c i a t i o n . Recreation 263 Wilderness First Aid II (F.S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: W i l d e r n e s s First A i d I. This c o u r s e reviews the material presented in W i l d e r n e s s First A i d I, with e m p h a s i s o n i n c r e a s e d p r o f i c i e n c y u n d e r c o n d i t i o n s of isolation, where m e d i c a l a s s i s t a n c e is distant a n d where there are e v a c u a t i o n p r o b l e m s . A heavy e m p h a s i s is p l a c e d o n practical p r o b l e m solving w h i c h relates to both s u m m e r a n d winter o u t d o o r activities a n d settings. Recreation 264 Wilderness Nordic Skiing II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: W i l d e r n e s s N o r d i c S k i i n g I or equivalent. T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to further e x p e r i e n c e , awareness, k n o w l e d g e a n d activity skills initiated in W i l d e r n e s s N o r d i c S k i i n g I. E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d u p o n the a c q u i s i t i o n of t e c h n i q u e s for t e a c h i n g t h e skills of c r o s s - c o u n t r y s k i i n g in a g r o u p situation a n d ski t o u r i n g t e c h n i q u e s for multi-day trips. T h i s c o u r s e will a i s o deal with safe winter travel a n d winter survival. Recreation 267 Kayaking Ii (SU) (3,0,1) (F) (3,2,1) A study of plant a n d animal e c o l o g y , land-man relationships, c o n s e r v a t i o n theories a n d e c o l o g i c a l p r i n c i p l e s a s a basis to recreation land management. Recreation 255 Outdoor Recreation Practicum (S) (9,0.3) The p r a c t i c u m is d e s i g n e d to integrate c l a s s r o o m theory with w o r k i n g e x p e r i e n c e in the field. S t u d e n t s will arrange with the faculty S u p e r v i s o r to s p e n d three months in an a c c e p t a b l e a g e n c y placement a n d will b e r e s p o n s i b l e t o a specific a g e n c y supervisor. Students will be provided with terms of reference for the p r a c t i c u m e x p e r i e n c e . S t u d e n t work p e r f o r m a n c e a n d potential will b e evaluated by the faculty a n d a g e n c y supervisor. Recreation 259 Skills Development (F) (1.5,3,5) T o develop s p e c i a l i z e d skills related to the student's e m p l o y m e n t goals. Students will u p g r a d e skills in wilderness p h o t o g r a p h y , display d e s i g n , b r o c h u r e d e s i g n , layout, a n d g r a p h i c arts. Recreation 261 Wilderness Backpacking II (SU) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: W i l d e r n e s s B a c k p a c k i n g I. T h e c o u r s e objective is to further involve students with wilderness b a c k p a c k i n g skills in an a t m o s p h e r e of safety, 102 enjoyment a n d environmental u n d e r s t a n d i n g . E m p h a s i s will be directed towards the development of leadership experience as it applies to individual and group requirements in wilderness settings. S p e c i a l attention will be f o c u s e d o n m o u n t a i n e e r i n g skills, interpretive studies, a n d g e o l o g y . Other t o p i c s will include first a i d and.survival skills. Intermediate to a d v a n c e d white water t e c h n i q u e , kayak touring o n rivers, lakes, a n d o n the o c e a n . Major trip planning. C a n o e Sport B . C . instructors a n d instructional format will be used throughout the c o u r s e . Note. A n additional fee will be levied to cover field trip expenses. Recreation 271 Mountaineering II (SU) (3.0,1) Prerequisite: M o u n t a i n e e r i n g I, Federation of M o u n t a i n C l u b s B a s i c M o u n t a i n e e r i n g c o u r s e , equivalent training a n d e x p e r i e n c e a c c e p t a b l e to Instructor. S t u d e n t s s h o u l d e x p e c t to take a skills test prior to c o u r s e c o m m e n c e m e n t . T h e c o u r s e will deal with the p r i n c i p l e s a n d t e c h n i q u e s of M o u n t a i n e e r i n g leadership up to a n d i n c l u d i n g a n intermediate levei o n both s n o w a n d ice, a n d o n rock. Note: A n additional fee will be ievied to c o v e r field e x p e n s e s . Recreation 280 Fitness Leadership (S) (6,0,1) This course is designed to explain in detail the physiological, p h y s i c a l a n d s o c i a l factors involved in the preparation of p e r s o n s interested in the area of fitness leadership. T h e howto-do-it aspect of being a fitness instructor will be emphasized. This c o u r s e will also include a 25 hour p r a c t i c u m over three months. T h e practicum will be in an activity of the student's c h o i c e a n d under the s u p e r v i s o n of the c o u r s e instructor. Recreation 291 Leisure Applications (SU) (3,0,1) Recreation 290 Leisure Counselling Skills (S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will provide the student with interpersonal skills, self-evaluation t e c h n i q u e s , and leisure c o u n s e l l i n g p r o c e d u r e s needed to do leisure lifestyling s e s s i o n s . U n d e r the g u i d a n c e of the c o u r s e instructor a n d a g e n c y supervisor, students will be e x p e c t e d to d e s i g n and implement a leisure lifestyling program in an appropriate a g e n c y . T h e p r a c t i c u m will serve to establish student c o m p e t e n c y in realigning c o u r s e c o n c e p t s and t e c h n i q u e s to meet the special needs of particular client g r o u p s . First Term Credits Sections Retail Merchandising Program C m n s 150 Communications Textiles I Manufacturer's Workshop I P r i n c i p l e s of Colour & Design Sales Promotion Marketing I M a n a g e m e n t Presentation Skills R M 151 R M 176 Instructional Faculty R M 158 Best, E., B . S c . M . S c . (Man.) B u n y a n , S . , Interior D e s i g n D i p l o m a , M o u n t R o y a l C o l l e g e , Calgary, Alta. Clark, f t , B . H . E . ( B . C . ) , T.T. D i p l . (B.C.) G w o z d , S. D i p l . B.C.I.T. M a r k e t i n g Hall, E „ D i p l . A . D . (St. Martin's S c h o o l of Art), Art T e a c h e r s ' Cert. ( G o l d s m i t h ' s C o l l e g e of L o n d o n ) K e r s h a w , P., F.C.I , (Hallin's C o l l e g e . M a n c h e s t e r Polytechnical College) Kilian, C , B.A. ( C o l u m b i a ) M.A. (S.F.U.) M a c K a y , R.B., L L . B . (Alta.) B . C o m m . (B.C.) M i c h a e l s , L , B . S c , B . E d . , M . E d . (Alta.) Oberndorf, A . G . , B . S . ( U . of N e w h a v e n ) N.I.M. ( T h u n d e r b i r d G r a d ) ( S c h o o l of International B u s i n e s s ) Podolak, P., Cert. (Mark Foys, S y d n e y , Australia) Spicer, L , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) Taylor, M., B . S c , (Alta.) W i l s o n , R., B . C o m m . (B.C.) R M 156 B M 158 R M 161 1 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 _3_ _2 21 11 3 3 1 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 2 21 9 3 1 3 3 3 1 ' 1 1 3 1 3 1 1 Second Term R M 172 R M 174 R M 177 Textiles II F a s h i o n Survey Manufacturer's W o r k s h o p II Consumerism Creative Advertising Production Retail M a t h e m a t i c s Salesmanship R M 150 R M 153 B S M G 164 B S M G 230 'Summer 1_ 1982 R M 164 C o - o p Industry Experience Third Term General Information T h e Retail M e r c h a n d i s i n g P r o g r a m prepares students for e m p l o y m e n t in the retail industry. T h e p r o g r a m provides the student with the opportunity for c o n c e n t r a t e d study in many facets of retailing, with a f o c u s o n the creative a s p e c t s of the industry. A p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d have s o m e retail or experience prior to entering the p r o g r a m . 3 3 B S M G 159 B S M G 271 R M 265 R M 272 B S M G 273 retail-related B S M G 169 G r a d u a t e s of the program s h o u l d be eligible for c a r e e r s as assistant buyers, store m a n a g e r s , major store management trainees, sales representatives, sales promotors a n d sales managers. Students who have had equivalent p o s t - s e c o n d a r y c o u r s e s may make arrangements with the c o o r d i n a t o r to Substitute c o u r s e s in lieu of required c o u r s e s . A fourth hour is made available in e a c h c o u r s e for student/instructor contact. Eight-four (84) credits are required to graduate. F o r m s to apply for transfer credits from other institutes are available f r o m the Registrar's office. Marketing II Retail M e r c h a n d i s i n g Career Readiness Independent Store Management Lab I P r i n c i p l e s of Advertising Accounting • Fundamentals 3 1 18 6 3 1 3 1 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 21 7 Fourth Term R M 259 R M 273 B S M G 163 R M 257 R M 264 B S M G 186 M o r e information c o n c e r n i n g a p p l i c a t i o n to the program can be obtained from the C a r e e r s Office, 986-1911, L o c a l 390. P r i n c i p l e s of B u y i n g Independent Store M a n a g e m e n t II P r i n c i p l e s of Leadership & Supervision V i s u a l Presentation F a s h i o n Interiors Introduction to Retail Computer System Elective — O p e n S e c t i o n s • . Retail Merchandising Courses First Term Associate in Arts and Science Diploma Credit A s s o c i a t e in Arts a n d S c i e n c e D i p l o m a Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s General Education Requirements 81 3_ 84 RM 151 Textiles I (F) (3,0,1) A n introductory study of textile fabrics a n d the textile industry. A survey of the development a n d use of fashion fabrics i n c l u d i n g fibre identification a n d characteristics, p r o d u c t i o n a n d testing methods. 103 R M 156 Sales Promotion (F) (3,0,1) A fashion overview o n p r o m o t i o n from a study of personal self-promotion to the larger w o r l d of p r o m o t i n g retailing. T h e e m p h a s i s in class will be o n d e v e l o p i n g c o n f i d e n c e a n d expertise on promoting products and ideas for industry which will include aspects and b a s i c s of advertising, media, writing skills, trade s h o w p r o d u c t i o n and promotion of the gift s h o p operated by students. R M 158 Principles of C o l o u r & Design (F) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the c o n c e p t s of c o l o u r and d e s i g n as they are used in F a s h i o n Illustration. A p p l i c a t i o n of the principles of graphic c o m p o s i t i o n , basic form a n d shape, c o l o u r theory and visual c o m m u n i c a t i o n s , impact on fashion related themes a n d subjects through instruction, field trips, individual d e s i g n a n d analysis. R M 176 Manufacturer's Workshop I (F) (3,0,1) B a s i c principles a n d t e c h n i q u e s of garment d e s i g n a n d p r o d u c t i o n , involvement with original d e s i g n , pattern-making and garment c o n s t r u c t i o n , development of skill in s o l v i n g fitting p r o b l e m s Market survey of d e s i g n a n d c o n s t r u c t i o n standards P l a n n i n g a n d operating p r o c e d u r e s of a c l o t h i n g manufacturer from design practice through to merchandising of lines. R M 161 Management Presentation Skills (F) (3,0,1) B u s i n e s s s k i l l s will b e d e v e l o p e d in t r a i n i n g f o r management a n d supervisory positions. P u b l i c s p e a k i n g , report writing, c h a i r i n g meetings a n d m a n a g e m e n t c o m m u n i c a t i o n skills will be d e v e l o p e d . Business Management 158 Marketing I (F) (3,0,1) T h e objective of this c o u r s e is to e x a m i n e the role of marketing in the retail industry. E m p h a s i s is p l a c e d o n the marketing p r o b l e m - s o l v i n g and d e c i s i o n - m a k i n g required by a firm's executives. It f o c u s e s o n the a c c e p t a n c e of the marketing c o n c e p t — a p h i l o s o p h y s t r e s s i n g the need for a marketing rather than p r o d u c t i o n orientation. It e x a m i n e s four elements of m a n a g e m e n t — its product, price s y s t e m , c h a n n e l s of distribution structure a n d p r o m o t i o n a l activities. O u t s i d e field work will be required in order to a c q u a i n t the student with practical b u s i n e s s a p p l i c a t i o n s of the theoretical teaching. R M 174 Fashion Survey (S) (3,0,1) A n historical e x a m i n a t i o n of c l o t h i n g , a r c h i t e c t u r e a n d interior d e s i g n as related to the c o n t e m p o r a r y w o r l d . R M 177 Manufacturer's W o r k s h o p II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: R M 176 or written p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of individual d e s i g n i n g a n d d e v e l o p m e n t of g a r m e n t s , c o m p a r i s o n of c o n s t r u c t i o n t e c h n i q u e s a n d d e s i g n in relation to retail value: d i s c u s s i o n of current d e s i g n a n d designers. Presentation of lines of c l o t h i n g by teams will be j u d g e d by industry p r o f e s s i o n a l s at e n d of term. R M 150 C o n s u m e r i s m (S) (3,0,1) A study of the c o n s u m e r ' s d e c i s i o n - m a k i n g p r o c e s s ; d e v e l o p m e n t s in the b a s i c s of c o n s u m e r credit, a n d the art of s u c c e s s f u l b u y m a n s h i p . S t u d e n t s will undertake g r o u p research and presentations a n d individual consumer research projects. Business Management 164 Retail Mathematics (S) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the practical skills required to a c h i e v e a b a s i c level of s u c c e s s in the retail industry. B a n k reconciliations, invoice a n d billing techniques, markup c a l c u l a t i o n s a n d interest rates a r e a few e x a m p l e s of areas studied. Business Management 230 Salesmanship (S) (3,0,1) T h e basic theory b e h i n d s u c c e s s f u l selling will be e x a m i n e d , a n d practical t e c h n i q u e s e x p l o r e d . Interviews of p r o f e s s i o n a l s a l e s p e o p l e will be required. S u m m e r 1983 R M 164 C o - o p Industry Experience ( S U ) (3,0,1) A l l students will receive a s s i s t a n c e from the department in o b t a i n i n g s u m m e r e m p l o y m e n t (paid for by industry) in a retail or retail-related b u s i n e s s . P l a c e m e n t will be a r r a n g e d in the s p r i n g by the department. 3 c r e d i t s will b e a c q u i r e d , providing the student receives a satisfactory rating from the employer. Third Term Second Term Business Management 159 Marketing II (F) (3,0,1) R M 153 Creative Advertising Production (S) (3,0,1) A n e m p h a s i s is p l a c e d o n the practical a p p l i c a t i o n of advertising principles through d e v e l o p i n g p r o d u c t i o n skills. C o p y w r i t i n g , layout, d e s i g n a n d illustrative t e c h n i q u e s will be taught. R M 172 Textiles II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: T e x t i l e s I o r written p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. T o develop a more s o p h i s t i c a t e d body of k n o w l e d g e on textiles. S t u d e n t s will a c c u m u l a t e c o m p l e t e sets of g l o s s a r y and information files, a n d will more t h o r o u g h l y test, d e m o n strate a n d r e s e a r c h fabrics. C a s e s t u d i e s a n d d i s c u s s i o n g r o u p s will form an important part of e d u c a t i o n a l e x p e r i e n c e . 104 A further in-depth look at the marketing industry. A n e m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d o n practical marketing projects, w o r k i n g with industry to assist in the solution of marketing problems. Business Management 273 Principles of Advertising (F) (3,0,1) A n e x a m i n a t i o n of t h e t h e o r y b e h i n d s u c c e s s f u l advertising p r o g r a m s . A practical a p p l i c a t i o n a l s o in the w o r k i n g s of the creative a g e n c y , a n d students will be e x p o s e d to the different t e c h n i q u e s in d e v e l o p i n g skills in this vital field. Business Management 169 A c c o u n t i n g Fundamentals (F) (3,0,1) A study of a c c o u n t i n g as seen through the e y e s of m a n a g e m e n t . F i n a n c i a l statement a n a l y s i s a n d a c c o u n t i n g m e t h o d s will be e x a m i n e d . S t u d e n t s will obtain practical e x p e r i e n c e through maintaining the Gift S h o p financial b o o k s with the instructor's s u p e r v i s i o n . Business Management 271 Fashion Merchandising (F) (3,0,1) S t u d e n t s will achieve a b a s i c u n d e r s t a n d i n g of types of retail outlets and their o r g a n i z a t i o n . R o l e s of store m a n a g e ment will be studied a n d the c a s e study m e t h o d will be frequently utilized. P r i c i n g strategies, l o c a t i o n , store layouts, competitive strategies a n d s h o p p i n g centres will be e x a m i n e d and the visual m e r c h a n d i s i n g t e c h n i q u e s of the s u c c e s s f u l merchandiser. R M 272 Independent Store Management I, II (F,S) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e is a practical application of the M e r c h a n d i s i n g courses. T h e instructor will provide the basic management structure of the Retail M e r c h a n d i s i n g " D o w n S o u t h Gift S h o p " store activities weekly. T h e students will a c t a s store m a n a g e r s in: C o n t r o l , Staff T r a i n i n g , B u y i n g a n d Display a n d P r o m o t i o n . Students will be entirely r e s p o n s i b l e for operating the store and all those activities a n d managerial responsibilities in operating a s u c c e s s f u l retail store. in retailing. S u b j e c t s c o v e r e d include c a r e e r p l a n n i n g a n d situational management; power affiliation a n d achievement drives; c o n t i n g e n c y m o d e l s of leadership; resolving conflicts; o r g a n i z i n g p r o j e c t a n d task f o r c e t e a m s ; i n t e r v i e w i n g applicants; active listening; productivity a n d the quality of w o r k i n g life; environmental c o n c e r n s , ethics a n d s o c i a l responsibility. It will provide a n insight into t h e daily p r o b l e m s a supervisor faces — h u m a n , t e c h n i c a l a n d personal. 1 R M 264 Fashion Interiors (S) (3,0,1) F a s h i o n Interiors t e a c h e s the f u n d a m e n t a l s of interior d e s i g n as they relate t o the m e r c h a n d i s i n g of f a s h i o n . S t u d e n t s d e s i g n a store u s i n g the floor plan, renderings, c h o i c e of fabric, selection of c o l o u r s a n d texture to s h o w c a s e the f a s h i o n m e r c h a n d i s e . A l l interior d e s i g n c o m p o n e n t s are d i s c u s s e d as an e x t e n s i o n of the fashion w o r l d . R M 273 Independent Store M a n a g e m e n t II (S) (3,0,1) See Third Term R M 265 Career Readiness (F) (3,0,1) R M 257 Visual Presentation (S) (3,0,1) T h e objective of this c o u r s e is to provide the student with practical skills for s u c c e s s f u l j o b s e a r c h . T h e students will r e s e a r c h several p r o f e s s i o n a l s in the retail industry, a n d will s p e n d a brief p e r i o d with a p r o f e s s i o n a l (during work). F o c u s will be o n r e s u m e writing, interview skill development a n d other career related skills. P r a c t i c a l t e c h n i q u e s a n d theory of visually presenting merchandise: w i n d o w displays, interior displays, m a n n e q u i n s and m e r c h a n d i s i n g of fixtures. Fourth T e r m R M 259 Principles of Buying (S) (3,0,1) A study of the principles of b u y i n g a n d selling of retail g o o d s , study of m e r c h a n d i s i n g f u n c t i o n s s u c h as inventory control, w o r k i n g with s u p p l i e r s , d e v e l o p i n g assortments, a n d buyer responsibilities. Business Management 186 Introduction to Retail C o m p u t e r Systems (S) (3,0,1) A theoretical a n d " h a n d s o n " approach to the i m p l e m e n t a t i o n of c o m p u t e r s in the retail industry. Elective T h e student is provided the opportunity to select any 3 credit c o u r s e offered at the c o l l e g e (with c o o r d i n a t o r ' s approval). T h e c o u r s e s e l e c t e d must have a p o s i t i o n available to the student, as enrolment is limited in many c o u r s e s . Business Management 163 Principles of Leadership a n d Supervision (S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e covers all aspects of supervisory management Vocational Pre-Employment and Upgrading Programs Requirements for Admission A p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d have an interest a n d desire for a career in the B u i l d i n g S u p p l y Industry. T h e r e is a m i n i m u m e d u c a t i o n a l prerequisite of G r a d e 10, with G r a d e 12 being preferred. T h e f o l l o w i n g p r o g r a m s m a y be offered in 1982/83, subject t o f u n d i n g . F o r further information telephone the C a r e e r / V o c a t i o n a l Office (986-1911 L o c a l 390). Classes A p p l i c a n t s to these p r o g r a m s m a y wish to contact their local C a n a d a E m p l o y m e n t a n d Immigration C e n t r e for c o u n s e l l i n g a n d financial a s s i s t a n c e . 2. 1. Building Material a n d S u p p l y Worker It is the a i m of this p r o g r a m to provide individuals with the b a s i c s k i l l s a n d k n o w l e d g e prerequisite t o o b t a i n i n g a b e g i n n i n g career position in the b u i l d i n g industry. General Information There are five main areas of study: material handling skills, b u i l d i n g material fundamentals, c u s t o m e r service skills, b a s i c e m p l o y m e n t skills, a n d j o b safety skills. A " B a s i c Lift T r u c k O p e r a t o r " Certificate c o u l d be obtained by s u c c e s s f u l l y c o m p l e t i n g that section of the c o u r s e . Metric s i z i n g a n d Imperial/metric c o n v e r s i o n s will b e basic to the c o u r s e . Five d a y s per week for o n e term (4 months). Building Construction — 10 months T h i s p r o g r a m will provide an introduction t o the b u i l d i n g trades. General Information: Basic instruction in tools and materials, trade mathematics, concrete fittings and frames, rough framing, blueprint reading, roof framing a n d stair p l a n n i n g is offered. C l a s s e s are held o n a full-time basis. Requirements for Admission G r a d e 10, with G r a d e 12 preferred. G o o d health. 3. Heavy Equipment Operator — 1 month S p e c i a l i z e d p r o g r a m s are offered providing instruction in 105 the operation of various p i e c e s of heavy e q u i p m e n t ( L o g L o a d e r , B u l l d o z e r s , G r a d e r s , etc.). T h e particular c o u r s e s offered vary from year to year, d e p e n d i n g u p o n the n e e d s of local industry. Please p h o n e for current details. 4. Applied Landscape Horticulture — 6 months Instructional Faculty: principles that receive e m p h a s i s are basic a n d lasting; they are principles that participants will a p p l y in b u s i n e s s . T e c h niques a n d skills include practices to a d o p t a n d p r a c t i c e s to a v o i d . 6. Small Engine Repair — 5 months Koskitalo, Les, P h . D . Agriculture — Plant Sciences, U B C , 1970 W e l s h , R o b , D i p l o m a in L a n d s c a p i n g , B . C . l . T . T h i s program provides p r e - e m p l o y m e n t training that e q u i p s the graduate with the n e c e s s a r y theory a n d s k i l l s to s u c c e s s f u l l y work at the repair a n d m a i n t e n a n c e of s m a l l engines. T h e program is d e s i g n e d to provide individuals with the basic skills and k n o w l e d g e prerequisite to b e g i n n i n g a career in four primary areas of the l a n d s c a p e industry. General Information a. b. c. d. L a n d s c a p e a n d G r o u n d s Installation Landscape and Grounds Maintenance Interior L a n d s c a p i n g Retail G a r d e n C e n t r e O p e r a t i o n s T h i s full-time p r o g r a m is offered over 5 m o n t h s . D u r i n g this period safety, use of tools, o x y - a c e t l y n e w e l d i n g , e n g i n e theory a n d d i a g n o s i s , b a s i c trade m a t h e m a t i c s a n d metrics a n d b u s i n e s s management are taught. Requirements for Admission General Information A p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d have an interest a n d desire for a career in the B u i l d i n g S u p p l y Industry. T h e main areas of study include: plant materials, plant nutrition, soils, c o n c e p t s of d e s i g n , pesticides, equipment maintenance and operation, a n d b u s i n e s s practices. 7. Waiter/Waitress T r a i n i n g — 2-3 weeks T h e r e is a strong e m p h a s i s o n participation a n d skills development in s u c h a s p e c t s as: site preparation, planting techniques, lawn installation, plant p r u n i n g a n d g r o u n d s maintenance. T h i s p r o g r a m is d e s i g n e d to provide short term t r a i n i n g for individuals to be e m p l o y e d in the hospitality industry. T h e p r o g r a m i n c l u d e s s u c h t o p i c s a s sanitation, safety, preparation, selling a n d o r d e r i n g , serving of f o o d a n d beverages, c a s h p r o c e d u r e s . Students are prepared for the provincial government pesticide examinations leading to certification in the Pesticide Dispenser a n d Landscape and Garden Applicator categories. 8. D u e to the intense a n d practical nature of the p r o g r a m , regular full-time attendance is crucial. Classes: 9:00 a.m. - 4:00 p.m. daily, five d a y s per week. The program c o m m e n c e s in late September, and c o n c l u d e s in late M a r c h . Admission Requirements Applicants should have an interest and desire for a career in the l a n d s c a p e industry, a n d also an interest in w o r k i n g outdoors. T h e r e is a m i n i m u m e d u c a t i o n prerequisite of G r a d e 10, with G r a d e 12 preferred. P r o s p e c t i v e students s h o u l d contact the c o o r d i n a t o r to arrange for a n interview. 5. Retail Sales Training — 2 weeks T h e Program is designed as a primary course for individuals who look forward to selling careers with large or small established firms — or on their o w n . T h e participants will learn a c o m b i n a t i o n of principles, t e c h n i q u e s a n d skills. T h e Programs and Courses for Special Needs T h e r e are many adults in the c o l l e g e region w h o s e e d u c a t i o n a l needs are not met by the credit or credit free p r o g r a m s or c o u r s e s leading to c o l l e g e certification. A c c o r d ingly the C o l l e g e offers a n u m b e r of other c o u r s e s a n d p r o g r a m s w h i c h meet these s p e c i a l n e e d s . S u c h programs a n d c o u r s e s c a n be o r g a n i z e d in r e s p o n s e to c o m m u n i t y request to begin at a n y time of the year. T h o s e offered in 1982-83 include: Preparatory and S p e c i a l N e e d Programs C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e offers the f o l l o w i n g s p e c i a l p r o g r a m s to help meet the varied needs of all students in its region: 1. B a s i c S k i l l s in M a t h / E n g l i s h / S c i e n c e — see page 2. C o l l e g e Preparatory c o u r s e s in M a t h e m a t i c s (Math 009012) see page 3. C o l l e g e Preparatory C o u r s e s in E n g l i s h ( E n g l i s h 010) see page 106 Drafting C o r e p r o g r a m in drafting skills (6 months) a n d further specialization in s p e c i f i c o p t i o n s (up to 4 months). P l e a s e p h o n e for details. 9. General M e c h a n i c s — 9 months C o r e program in m e c h a n i c s . Will prepare a student to enter automotive, heavy duty or d i e s e l m e c h a n i c s at the apprentice level. Requirements for Admission G r a d e 12 a n d aptitude for m e c h a n i c s . 10. Welding — 7 months C o r e p r o g r a m that will provide student with the n e c e s s a r y theory a n d training to e n a b l e h i m / h e r to qualify for a " C " ticket u p o n c o m p l e t i o n of work e x p e r i e n c e . A d d i t i o n a l u p g r a d i n g c o u r s e s to the " B " and " A " level m a y be available. Please p h o n e for details. 4. C o l l e g e Preparatory c o u r s e s in C h e m i s t r y ( C h e m i s t r y 030) see page 5. E n g l i s h as a S e c o n d L a n g u a g e — see p a g e 6. L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m s — see page 7. Alternative C a r e e r T r a i n i n g for the D i s a b l e d — see p a g e 8. C a r e e r Alternatives for W o m e n — see page BASIC TRAINING FOR SKILLS D E V E L O P M E N T Instructional Faculty A t h a i d e , D.J.A., B . S c , H o n o u r s ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c . ( U B C ) , B . C . T e a c h e r ' s Certificate B a n k s , J . L . , B . S c . (Hons.) ( S F U ) Bannister, J . , B.A., B . S . W . ( U B C ) , D i p l . of E d . (Oxford) M.Ed. (Toronto), B . C . Teacher's Certificate, Nfld. T e a c h e r ' s Certificate B r o w n , Shirley, B . E d . ( U B C ) , B . C . T e a c h e r ' s Certificate C a i r n s , M . C . , B . S c . (Mathematics), ( C a l g a r y ) , A l t a . T e a c h e r ' s Cert. C h a m b e r l i n , R., Standard Certificate (B.C.) Duvall, J . E . , B.A. ( U B C ) , D i p l . E d . (Sask.) Futterman, E., B . S c . (California, Berkley) H i n d , J „ B.A. (1st C l a s s H o n o u r s ) ( S F U ) , M.A. ( U B C ) Programs: H o d g s o n , P., B . A . ( H o n o u r s ) , B . E d . (Queen's) Irvine, R.F., T e a c h e r ' s Certificate, S a s k . & B . C . , B.A. ( S F U ) P a s s , J . , B.A. ( U B C ) , B . C . T e a c h e r ' s Certificate Ramsay, Frank, B . S c . ( M c G i l l ) Rawsthorne, M., B . H . E c . ( U B C ) S c h m i d t , K.A., O n t a r i o T e a c h e r ' s Certificate, S o c i a l S e r v i c e s D i p l o m a (Ryerson) Southerst, J . , B.A., B . E d . ( U B C ) , B . C . T e a c h e r ' s Certificate S p e n c e r , L.A., B.A. ( S F U ) , B . C . T e a c h e r ' s Certificate T h o m l i n s o n , A . G . , B.A., M . S c . ( U B C ) , B . C . T e a c h e r ' s Certificate Y o u n g , D.E., B.A. ( S F U ) , S . R . N . ( L o n d o n ) , S . C . M . (Scotland), Diploma T . N . (London) T h e B.T.S.D. program provides an opportunity for students to gain the equivalent of grades 6, 8, 10 or 12 in E n g l i s h , M a t h e m a t i c s a n d the S c i e n c e s . C o m p l e t i o n of the program increases e m p l o y m e n t opportunities a n d qualifies for entry into further e d u c a t i o n a n d / o r training programs. T h e c o m pletion of B . T . S . D . d o e s not entitle students to a formal high s c h o o l d i p l o m a . T h e program may be f o l l o w e d full-time or part-time, d a y or evening. T h e average time required for c o m p l e t i o n of a level is six months, but students are e n c o u r a g e d to c o m p l e t e their work in as short a time as p o s s i b l e . D u r i n g the first month, the student's abilities, interests, g o a l s a n d previous e d u c a t i o n a l e x p e r i e n c e s are a s s e s s e d to determine w h i c h of the four levels is attainable by the student. A l l applicants are interviewed before entering the p r o g r a m to determine their educational needs a n d current a c a d e m i c abilities. A p p l i c a n t s must be 17 years of a g e or over, a n d out of s c h o o l for at least o n e year. A p p l i c a n t s are normally admitted at the b e g i n n i n g of e a c h month a n d are advised to apply at least three months before they w i s h to enter the p r o g r a m . In s o m e c a s e s , C a n a d a E m p l o y m e n t a n d Immigration offers financial support for full-time students. A p p l i c a n t s are a d v i s e d to contact their local C E I C office. R e g u l a r attendance is c r u c i a l a n d students are e x p e c t e d attend all classes in which they are enroled. P o o r attendance may be g r o u n d s for d i s c o n t i n u a t i o n in the p r o g r a m . C A R E E R TRAINING FOR Skills T h i s is a two h o u r c l a s s M o n d a y to F r i d a y a n d will be repeated every two months with a new g r o u p of students. T h e c o u r s e will c o n s i s t of training in the areas of: — Library a n d L e i s u r e T i m e C h o i c e — Time and Money Management — Transportation into the C i t y — Nutrition a n d Meal P l a n n i n g A w e e k l y field trip will be a s p e c i a l feature of the p r o g r a m . ACTP General Information ALTERNATIVE DISABLED A C T P 001 Independent Living 002 Alternative Career Planning T h i s is a three h o u r c l a s s M o n d a y to Friday, f o u r m o n t h s l o n g . S t u d e n t s will be registered as s p a c e b e c o m e s available. T h i s pre-vocational training c o u r s e will be of interest to students a n x i o u s to d e v e l o p a variety of e m p l o y a b l e skills. T h e f o c u s will be o n a c a d e m i c u p g r a d i n g a n d j o b - r e a d i n e s s training for the market place a n d will attempt to prepare the student for competitive e m p l o y m e n t in the c o m m u n i t y . For further information contact Capilano College (986-1911, local 421) ENGLISH AS A S E C O N D LANGUAGE Instructional Faculty Acosta, J o a n , B.A. (California), E.S.L. Certificate (San Francisco State) A i t k e n , K e n n e t h , B.A. ( U B C ) Bannister, Elizabeth, B.Ed. ( U B C ) , Teaching Diploma (Birmingham) B o r d e w i c k , J o l e n e , B . S c . E d . (Idaho), P r o f e s s i o n a l T e a c h i n g Certificate ( S F U ) Collins, N i c h o l a s , B.A. (London), M.A., A d v a n c e d Professional T e a c h i n g Certificate ( U B C ) , C o o r d i n a t o r Fry, M a r l e n e , B . E d . ( U B C ) G l a s s , R i c h a r d , B.A. (California), M.A. (Southern California), P h . D . (Washington) K u b i c e k , R a m o n , B.A. (Sir G e o r g e W i l l i a m s ) , M . A . ( S F U ) R e n e s , L a u r a , B.A., M.A. (Toronto), T . E . S . L . Certificate ( G e o r g e Brown) T o o r , Baljeet, B.A. ( S F U ) THE Instructional Faculty B o r d e w i c k , J o l e n e , B.S.(Ed.), P . D . P . ( S F U ) K i r k b y , D o n , B . E d . (Winnipeg) S c h m i d t , Katharine, T e a c h e r ' s Cert., S o c i a l S e r v i c e s C e r t . Ryerson Polytechnical S p e n c e r , L i n d a , B.A. ( S F U ) , T e a c h i n g C e r t . G e n e r a l Information T h i s p r o g r a m was d e v e l o p e d in c o n s u l t a t i o n with the North S h o r e A s s o c i a t i o n for the Mentally H a n d i c a p p e d a n d the N o r t h V a n c o u v e r S c h o o l B o a r d in o r d e r to serve the needs of l e a r n i n g d i s a b l e d adults in the C o l l e g e region. It offers the opportunity for competitive e m p l o y m e n t training a n d independent living skills d e v e l o p m e n t a n d i n c l u d e s work p l a c e m e n t s in the c o m m u n i t i e s . General Information For students with a first l a n g u a g e other than E n g l i s h , the C o l l e g e offers a variety of c o u r s e s to help t h e m a c h i e v e the level of c o m p e t e n c y in E n g l i s h that they desire. T o qualify for these c o u r s e s a potential student M U S T be either a L a n d e d Immigrant or a C a n a d i a n c i t i z e n . A l l a s p e c t s of the language are c o v e r e d — s p e a k i n g , reading a n d writing at the B e g i n n e r , Intermediate a n d A d v a n c e d levels. T h e c o u r s e s are presented in three c a t e g o r i e s — part-time e v e n i n g , full-time day and A c a d e m i c Preparatory. A n E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t T e s t result o r the Instructor's permission is required to enrol in the A c a d e m i c Preparatory course. C o u r s e s are not transferable to university. E n g l i s h as a S e c o n d L a n g u a g e may be studied on a fulltime b a s i s , but registration for individual c o u r s e s is also possible. In s o m e cases, C a n a d a E m p l o y m e n t a n d Immigration offers financial support for full-time students. A p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d c o n t a c t their local C E I C office for more information. For further information, call 986-1911 local 414. 107 E.S.L.B. L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m 011 English as a S e c o n d L a n g u a g e — Beginner Level (F,S) R e a d i n g W o r k s h o p s ( F , S , S U ) (0,0,2) E.S.L.I. T h r o u g h a series of intensive reading w o r k s h o p s , students learn a n d practice essential reading t e c h n i q u e s . T h e s e workshops are designed to increase reading speed a n d comprehension. E n g l i s h as a S e c o n d L a n g u a g e — Intermediate Level (F,S) E.S.L.A. t E n g l i s h as a S e c o n d L a n g u a g e — A d v a n c e d Level (F,S) T h e above c o u r s e s c o n c e n t r a t e o n s p e a k i n g E n g l i s h , however, they d o have a reading a n d writing c o m p o n e n t . Instruction is offered o n three different levels — B e g i n n e r , Intermediate a n d A d v a n c e d . Please contact the Department f o r more information at 986-1911, local 414. E . S . L . 091 English as a S e c o n d L a n g u a g e (F,S) (3,0,1) Note: This c o u r s e is not transferable to university. A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to provide the student, w h o s e first language is not E n g l i s h , with verbal a n d written skills in E n g l i s h . T h e c o u r s e will p r o c e e d with the patterns set b y the students' needs, generally beginning with a review of b a s i c s . Included in the c o u r s e of study are: reading a n d oral c o m p r e h e n s i o n , s e n t e n c e structure, paragraphs a n d short essays, c o m p o s i t i o n , vocabulary, dictations, spelling a n d verbal c o m m u n i c a t i o n . T h i s c o u r s e i n c l u d e s c o n v e r s a t i o n c l a s s e s a n d language lab e x e r c i c e s . In the V o c a b u l a r y Development w o r k s h o p , students will acquire a methodology for systematically developing an effective v o c a b u l a r y . A s well, efforts will be m a d e to provide students with s o m e of the t e r m i n o l o g y a p p r o p r i a t e t o their fields of study. L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m 013 Spelling Improvement ( F , S , S U ) (0,0,1.5) T h e S p e l l i n g Improvement w o r k s h o p series will assist students in a n a l y z i n g the strengths a n d w e a k n e s s e s of their spelling ability. T h e r e will b e s o m e d i s c u s s i o n of c o m m o n error patterns, m n e m o n i c strategies a n d traditional s p e l l i n g rules. Students will receive a high d e g r e e of individual attention a n d will have a c c e s s to a taped s p e l l i n g p r o g r a m . L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m 014 C o n c e p t u a l B l o c k b u s t i n g ( F , S , S U ) (0,0,2) In these w o r k s h o p s , students will p r a c t i c e the strategies of defining a n d solving p r o b l e m s . Participants will " b l o c k bust" ideas a n d solve p r o b l e m s in g r o u p s to help define a n d clarify the thinking p r o c e s s e s . Creative t h i n k i n g will be encouraged. L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m 015 E . S . L . 099 English as a S e c o n d L a n g u a g e (F,S) (3,0,1) Note: This c o u r s e is not transferable to university. Prerequisite: Written p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor. T h i s c o u r s e is similar t o E n g l i s h 091 e x c e p t that the student s h o u l d have a higher level of ability in the E n g l i s h language, a n d the stress of study will be o n writing, d i s c u s s i o n a n d e x p r e s s i o n of ideas. liivfetsei L ' i L " ' ' E . S . L . 092 L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m 012 V o c a b u l a r y D e v e l o p m e n t ( F , S , S U ) (0,0,2) •(•-"] i \ • it 1 English as a Second Language Note: This c o u r s e is not transferable to university. Prerequisite: Written permission of the instructor. This c o u r s e i n c l u d e s essay writing, dictation, punctuation a n d the study of various principles of E n g l i s h syntax. Writing the C o l l e g e E s s a y ( F . S . S U ) (0,0,2) In this w o r k s h o p series, students will receive a brief i n t r o d u c t i o n - t o the a p p r o a c h , format a n d m e t h o d of the research paper. A library orientation, a note-taking m e t h o d , a n d topic development will b e d i s c u s s e d . L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e 016 C o m m u n i c a t i o n Skills ( F , S , S U ) (0,0,2) T h e aim of this w o r k s h o p will be to e n h a n c e d i s c u s s i o n skills through attention to s u c h factors a s c o n c i s e e x p r e s s i o n , non-verbal communication, and self image. L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m 017 T h i n k i n g with Clarity ( F , S , S U ) (0,0,2) T h e main e m p h a s i s of this w o r k s h o p will be o n providing an introduction to logical thinking. L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m 018 M n e m o n i c Strategies ( F , S , S u ) (0,0,2) LEARNING ASSISTANCE C O U R S E S In addition to its services as a resource centre (see p. ), the L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e C e n t r e offers daytime, w e e k e n d , a n d evening w o r k s h o p s and courses. For specific times and dates, contact the C e n t r e at L y n n m o u r C a m p u s , S q u a m i s h , o r Sechelt. Participants will learn to a p p l y major m e m o r y s y s t e m s t o improve a c a d e m i c performance. T h e r e will be s o m e evaluation of individual learning styles. T e c h n i q u e s will b e i n t r o d u c e d for r e m e m b e r i n g n u m b e r s , l a n g u a g e s , appointments, e x a m i n a t i o n material a n d s p e e c h e s . L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m 090 R e a d i n g Skills ( F , S , S U ) (0,0,2) C o u r s e s in L y n n m o u r L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m 010 L e a r n i n g a n d Study Skills W o r k s h o p s ( F , S , S U ) (0,0,2) E a c h w o r k s h o p series c o n s i s t s of six hours of instruction and d i s c u s s i o n . L e a r n i n g a n d S t u d y S k i l l s W o r k s h o p t o p i c s include time management, note-taking, d i s c u s s i o n skills, c o n c e n t r a t i o n building, e x a m i n a t i o n t e c h n i q u e s a n d essay writing. 108 T h e a i m of this preparatory c o u r s e is to improve reading c o m p r e h e n s i o n s o that students will b e better able to participate in other c o l l e g e c o u r s e s . L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m 201 R e a d i n g D y n a m i c s ( F , S , S U ) (1.5,0,.5) T h i s c o u r s e a i m s to improve reading s p e e d a n d c o m p r e h e n s i o n . T h e learning a n d practising of basic reading t e c h n i q u e s assists students in b e c o m i n g versatile, effective readers. c. C o m p l e t i o n of three or fewer T y p e 1 transfer Transfer Guide 1982-1983 credit c o u r s e s in S . A . (9 hours or less) will warrant a department e x e m p t i o n of one semester hour per c o u r s e . For further information please c o n s u l t the Department of S o c i o l o g y a n d A n t h r o p o l o g y or the Director of A d m i s s i o n s T h i s transfer g u i d e is p r o v i d e d as a c o n v e n i e n c e to the student and is correct at the time of printing. Information on any c o u r s e s not listed c a n be obtained from the department c o n c e r n e d . C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e a s s u m e s no responsibility for articulation c h a n g e s made at the universities w h i c h invalidate this guide. S t u d e n t s s h o u l d be aware w h e n u s i n g the g u i d e that C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e a n d S i m o n Fraser University are on a semester s y s t e m . T h e University of British C o l u m b i a and the University of V i c t o r i a are o n a yearly s y s t e m . T h i s will a c c o u n t for the apparent d i s c r e p a n c y in transfer credits. N O T E : IV2 units at the University of British C o l u m b i a or the University of V i c t o r i a is equal to 3 or 4.5 C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e credit h o u r s (see C o l l e g e C a l e n d a r under c o u r s e d e s c r i p t i o n for correct credits). Similarly, if two C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e c o u r s e s are required, 3 units at the University of British C o l u m b i a or the University of V i c t o r i a c o u l d e q u a l 6 or 9 credit hours at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . F o r e x a m p l e , P s y c h o l o g y 100 and 101 (three credit hours each) w o u l d equal 3 units at the University of British C o l u m b i a . T h i s transfer guide is accurate as of F e b r u a r y 17th, 1982. If further or updated information is required, please contact one of C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ' s c o u n s e l l o r s (986-1911, local 298) or the institution that y o u wish to transfer to. S I M O N F R A S E R UNIVERSITY, Admissions Office at S F U . #2 - U N I V E R S I T Y O F BRITISH C O L U M B I A : A R T S t u d e n t s p l a n n i n g to enter the p r o g r a m leading to a B.A. degree with a major in Fine Arts s h o u l d normally apply after four semesters. W h e r e Art (History a n d / o r Studio) c o u r s e s are not available at the C o l l e g e attended, transfer f o l l o w i n g o n l y two semesters w o u l d be advisable. S t u d e n t s p l a n n i n g to enter the Studio program leading to the B.F.A. degree s h o u l d normally a p p l y to the university f o l l o w i n g two semesters. A p p l i c a n t s with four semesters will be c o n s i d e r e d . T h e m a x i m u m credit p o s s i b l e for studio c o u r s e s for a student w h o has c o m p l e t e d First Y e a r will be three units Fine A r t s 181. A student w h o has c o m p l e t e d S e c o n d Y e a r ( B . F . A . only) will be a l l o w e d a further six units of credit in studio c o u r s e s to c o r r e s p o n d to a s e l e c t i o n from Fine Arts 281 -290. S t u d e n t s a p p l y i n g for the B . F . A . are r e m i n d e d that a d m i s s i o n to the p r o g r a m is by selection b a s e d on standing a n d c o u r s e s and an a s s e s s m e n t of a folio of art work. T h e year of a d m i s sion whether s e c o n d or third year will be at the d i s c r e t i o n of the Department. T h e s e l e c t i o n committee to s c r e e n a p p l i c a n t s will meet early in A p r i l prior to the s e s s i o n to w h i c h a p p l i c a t i o n will be made. A p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d c o n t a c t the Department of F i n e A r t s by mid M a r c h to obtain the n e c e s s a r y information o n a p p l i cation p r o c e d u r e Late a p p l i c a n t s for the B.F.A. p r o g r a m will be c o n s i d e r e d at registration time if p l a c e s are still available. 291-3224 #3 - S I M O N F R A S E R U N I V E R S I T Y : FRENCH, G E R M A N AND SPANISH Registrar's Office 228-2844 UNIVERSITY OF VICTORIA 477-6911 a. E x e m p t i o n from Department of L a n g u a g e s , Literatures a n d L i n g u i s t i c s ( D L L L ) c o u r s e s will normally be given d e p e n d i n g u p o n the results of a p l a c e m e n t test or other assessment procedure prior to registration in the student's first D L L L c o u r s e . F o r further information c o n s u l t the language division c o n c e r n e d . UNIVERSITY O F BRITISH C O L U M B I A , VANCOUVER COMMUNITY COLLEGE ( L A N G A R A ) Registrar's Office BRITISH C O L U M B I A INSTITUTE O F TECHNOLOGY 324-5294 434-5734 CERTIFIED G E N E R A L A C C O U N T A N T S (or see the C o o r d i n a t o r of the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ) 732-1211 SOCIETY OF M A N A G E M E N T A C C O U N T A N T S (or see the C o o r d i n a t o r of the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ) 687-5891 INSTITUTE OF C H A R T E R E D A C C O U N T A N T S (or see the C o o r d i n a t o r of the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ) 681-3264 FOOTNOTES: #1 - S I M O N F R A S E R U N I V E R S I T Y : ANTHROPOLOGY & SOCIOLOGY A student w h o has completed 60 semester hours of college transferable credit, and elects a major in the Department of S o c i o l o g y a n d A n t h r o p o l o g y at S i m o n Fraser University, will receive the following exemptions: a. C o m p l e t i o n of five T y p e 1 transfer credit c o u r s e s in S . A . (15 hours) will be judged as satisfying the S o c i o l o g y and A n t h r o p o l o g y Department lower division requirement of five c o u r s e s (20 hours), providing that program prerequisites are being fulfilled. b. C o m p l e t i o n of four T y p e 1 transfer credit c o u r s e s in S . A . (12 hours) will be judged as c o m p l e t i o n of four S o c i o l o g y a n d A n t h r o p o l o g y lower division c o u r s e s (16 hours), providing that program prerequisites are being fulfilled. S u c h students will be required to take o n e additional S . A . lower division c o u r s e at S F U in order to c o m p l e t e lower division requirements. b. O n l y those c o u r s e s w h i c h qualify a student for e x e m p t i o n from an S F U c o u r s e as a result of the placement test will count as T y p e 2 credit a n d be allowed to count toward major requirements in D L L L . O t h e r c o u r s e s will be given T y p e 3 credit and may only be used for elective credit. c. Students with prior k n o w l e d g e of the l a n g u a g e are required to consult with the Division c o n c e r n e d for p l a c e ment prior to or at registration. Native speakers or students w h o received their s e c o n d a r y e d u c a t i o n in a C h i n e s e , F r e n c h , G e r m a n , H i n d i , R u s s i a n , S p a n i s h , or S w a h i l i s p e a k i n g c o u n t r y will not normally be admitted to a language c o u r s e in that particular language between 100 and 300 inclusive. d. Total transfer and c o u r s e c h a l l e n g e credit in basic language c o u r s e s may not e x c e e d the limits given below: F r e n c h language - 13 semester hours G e r m a n language - 14 semester h o u r s R u s s i a n language - 12 semester h o u r s S p a n i s h language - 14 semester hours Literature c o u r s e s may be taken in addition to these limits. Students interested in c o u r s e c h a l l e n g e s h o u l d consult the Department of L a n g u a g e s , Literatures a n d L i n g u i s t i c s . #4 - S I M O N F R A S E R U N I V E R S I T Y : MATHEMATICS a. Students w h o intend to register in C o m p u t i n g S c i e n c e m a y b e required to write a p l a c e m e n t e x a m i n a t i o n prior to registration. T h e results of the e x a m i n a t i o n w o u l d determine in w h i c h level of the p r o g r a m the student s h o u l d c o m m e n c e studies. F o r further information c o n s u l t the 109 C o m p u t i n g S c i e n c e P r o g r a m t h r o u g h the Faculty of Interdisciplinary Studies. Students w h o have c o m p l e t e d work w h i c h transfer as C M P T 103 (3) may receive credit for an additional c o u r s e w h i c h w o u l d normally also transfer as C M P T 103 (3) if the c o u r s e is in a different language. C r e d i t in s u c h c a s e s will be C M P T 104 (1). If there are any questions, please consult the C o m p u t i n g S c i e n c e P r o g r a m . Transfer Guide 1982-1983 Capilano College Simon Fraser University University of British Columbia University of Victoria Anthropology (IVi) (1st or 2nd year) Anthropology (Vh) (1st or 2nd year) Anthropology 200 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Anthropology (1%) (1st or 2nd year) Anthropology 240 (Vh) Anthropology (TVj) Anthropology (IVj) Anthropology (1Vj) (2nd year) Anthropology (Vk) Transfers with 121 Transfers with 120 Anthropology 100 (3) Anthropology 100 (3) ANTHROPOLOGY Anthropology 120 Anthropology 121 Anthropology 120 & 121 Anthropology 120 & Women's Studies 122 Anthropology 121 & Women's Studies 122 Anthropology 123 Anthropology 124 Anthropology 200 Anthropology 202 Anthropology 204 Anthropology 249 S.A. (3) (100 division) S.A (3) (100 division) S.A. 170 (3). S.A. (3) S.A. 170 (3). S.A. (3) or S.A. 170 (3), Women's Studies 200 (3) S.A. 170 (3), S.A. (3) or S.A. 170 (3), Women's Studies 200 (3) Archaeology 101 (3) Archaeology 131 (3) S.A. (3) (200 division) S.A. (3) (200 division) * S.A. 203 (3) S.A. (3) Anthropology 100 (3) Anthropology 240 (IV?) Anthropology 100 (Vh) part credit Anthropology (200 level) (1 ) Anthropology (200 level) (IVi) Anthropology (200 level) (1Vi) Anthropology (200 level) (Vh) ' r 2 FOR FURTHER INFORMATION ON ANTHROPOLOGY SEE 1. PAGE ? ART Art 152. 154. 158. 164. 166. 167. 171. 172. 174. 178. 182. 183. Any one course is equivalent to Visual Art (Studio) (3) 184 Art 163. 165. 204 206 216. 217 Art 250. 255. 257 . 262. 263. 265. 273. 274. 282. 283 Any one course is equivalent to Visual Art (Studio) (3) Any one course is equivalent to Visual Art (Studio) (3) Any two courses are equivalent to Fine Arts 181 (3) -. • Any four of these courses may correspond to the required selection from Fine Arts 281-290 (6) (credit only in 2nd year B.F.A. Program) FOR FURTHER INFORMATION ON ART SEE 2. PAGE 109 BIOLOGY Biology 100 Kinesiology (100 level) (3) Biology 101 Bioscience (3) Biology 104 Biology 105 Biology 104 & 105 Bioscience 101 (3) Bioscience 102 (3)These courses transfer separately. See indiyidual numbers. Bioscience 101 (3)* Bioscience 102 (3)- Biology 110 Biology 111 Biology 110 & 111 Biology 150 Biology 151 Biology 150 & 151 110 - Biology (1":) (no credit in Life Science Departments) Biology (1') (when accompanied Eliochemistry 200 [Vh) by Organic Chemistry) 'ransfers with 221 rransfers with 221 rransfers with 220 Transfers with 220 Microbiology 200 (3) Microbiology 200 (3) Transfers with 176 Business (3) Transfers with 185 Transfers with 184 Business 222 (3) Business (2) Business (3) Business (3) 1 Commerce (1%) Commerce [Vh) Transfers with 185 Transfers with 184 Commerce 151 (1%) Statistics (100 level) (Vh) Transfers with 176 Commerce 190 (1%) Computer Science (100 level) (1V) Commerce 151 (Vh) Commerce 253 (1%) 2 Computer Science 275 (1%) CHEMISTRY Chemistry 104 Chemistry 105 Chemistry 104 & 105 Chemistry 108 Chemistry 108 & 111 Chemistry 110 Chemistry 111 Chemistry 110 & 111 Chemistry 200 Chemistry 201 Chemistry 200 & 201 Chemistry 204 Chemistry 205 Chemistry 204 & 205 Chemistry (3) Chemistry (3) Completion of both 104 & 105 exempts students from SFU 104, 105, 115. Transfers with 105 Transfers with 104 Chemistry 103 (3) Transfers with 111 Chemistry 104 (3) (exempts from Chemistry 115) Chemistry 120 (3) These courses transfer separately See individual courses. Transfers with 111 Chemistry 104 (3) (exempts from Chemistry 115) Transfers with 110 Chemistry 105 (3) These courses transfer separately. Chemistry 120 (3) See individual courses Chemistry 251 (3) (exempts from I Transfers with 201 Chemistry 256. Will be required to take SFU 251 if "D" obtained in 200.) Chemistry 252 (3) (Will be require!i Transfers with 200 to take SFU 252 if "D" obtained in 201.) These courses transfer separately See individual numbers. Chemistry 261 (3) (exempts from Chemistry 117) Chemistry (3) These courses transfer separately . See individual numbers. Transfers with 105 Transfers with 104 Chemistry 120 (3) ("A" required for entry to 224, "C" required for 230, consult department for entry to 233.) Transfers with 111 Chemistry 124 (3) Transfers with 111 Transfers.with 110 Chemistry 124 (3) Transfers with 201 Transfers with 200 Chemistry 230 (3) Chemistry 230 (3) Transfers with 205 Chemistry (200 level) (1%) Transfers with 204 Chemistry 205 (3) ' Chemistry (200 level) (IV2) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. COMMUNICATIONS Communications 150 & 156 Communications (3) 111 Capilano College Simon Fraser University University of British Columbia University of Victoria ECONOMICS Economics 100 Economics 101 Economics 100 & 101 Economics 120 Economics 121 Economics 200 Economics 100 (3) Economics 101 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Economics 150 (3) Economics 152 (3) Economics 205 (3) Economics 201 Economics 200 (3) Economics 100, 120, 121 Economics 200 & 201 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Economics (1%) Economics (100 level) (Vh) Economics (Vh) Economics (100 level) (1M«) These courses transfer separately. Economics (3) See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. Any two: Economics 100 (3) See individual numbers. (maximum: 3 units of credit) Economics (1%) Economics (100 level) (V/i) Economics (1%) Economics (100 level) (Vk) Economics (l'/i) (transfer students Economics 202 (1%) taking Economics 100 at UBC may not also obtain transfer credit for one of Economics 200 & 201.) Economics (Vh) (transfer students Economics 201 (1%) taking Economics 100 at UBC may not also obtain transfer credit for one of Economics 200 & 201.) Economics 100 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. ENGLISH English 010 English 100 English 100 or 102, 104. 105, 106, 108 nglish •glish English io„ English 106 English 105 & 106 P i r English 108 English 190 English 191 English 190 & 191 English 200 English 201 English 200 & 201 English 202 English 203 English 202 & 203 English 204 English 205 English 204 & 205 English 206 English 212 English 213 English 212 & 213 English 215 English 216 English 290 English 291 112 English (3) English (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. English 212 (3) ' *< (31 -C if $ English 103 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. English 101 or 102 or 103 or English (3) English (3) English (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual courses See English 100 or 102 listing Any two: English 100 (3) See English 100 or 102 listing. See English 100 or 102 listing. See English 100 or 102 listing. See English 100 or 102 listing. See English 100 or 102 listing. English 115 (IV2) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. English 115 (Vh) English 121 (1%) English 122 [Vh) English 122 (Vh) English (100 level) (3) See English 100 or 102 listing. English (100 level) (1%) Transfers with 191 Transfers with 190 Transfers with 191 Transfers with 190 1 l a n a i c i a wun J3U Creative Writing 202 (3) (permission Creative Writing 100 (3) to enter senior courses in Creative Writing subject to assessment of recent writing by UBC department) Transfers with 201 Transfers with 201 English (3) (exempts from English 204 or 205) English 206 (3) Transfers with 200 Transfers with 200 These courses transfer separately. English 201 (3) English 200 (3) See individual courses. English 221 (3) Transfers with 203 English (200 level) (lift) English 221 (3) or English (3) Transfers with 202 English (200 level) (1%) These courses transfer separately. English 202 (3) English 238 (3) See individual courses. English 222 (3) Transfers with 205 Transfers with 205 English 222 (3) or English (3) Transfers with 204 Transfers with 204 These courses transfer separately. English (3) (second year literature) | English 203 (3) See individual courses. English (3) English 206 (1%) English (200 level) (1%) English (3) Transfers with 213 English (200 level) (Vh) English (3) Transfers with 212 English (200 level) (V/2) These courses transfer separately. English (3) (second year literature) These courses transfer separately. See individual courses. See individual numbers. English (3) English (1V ) (2nd year) English (200 level) (Vh) English 102 (3) or English (3) English (1%) (2nd year) English (200 level) (1%) English (3) . Arts (1%) Creative Writing 201 (T/2) (part credit) English (3) Arts (V/2) Creative Writing 202 (Vh) (part credit) 2 Capilano College | s mon Fraser University Itt liverslty of British Columbia U liverslty of Victoria FINE ARTS ransfers with 101 1 ransfers with 101 * rt History (3) ransfers with 100 1 ransfers with 100 rt History (3) ' ine Arts 125 (3) \ istory in Art 120 (3) M hese courses transfer separately. F See individual numbers, I Wt (100 level) (1%) wis (3) ] ransfers with 105 I ransfers with 104 i Ut (100 level) (1%) Wis (3) ' 1'hese courses transfer separately. hese courses transfer separately. 1 See individual numbers. ine Arts 171 (3) See individual numbers. F History in Art (200 level) (Vh) "ransfers with 201 \rt History (3) History in Art (200 level) (1%) ' "ransfers with 200 \rt History (3) rhese courses transfer separately. -ine Arts (3) (students may not take rhese courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Fine Arts 365 for credit.) See individual numbers. Transfers with 211 Fine Arts (1%) (Not to be counted Art History (3) toward the major) Transfers with 210 Fine Arts (Vk) (Not to be counted Art History (3) toward the major.) History in Art 260 (3) These courses transfer separately. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. See individual numbers. Transfers with 251 Fine Arts (1%) Visual Art (3) Transfers with 250 Fine Arts (1Vi) Visual Art (3) These courses transfer separately. History in Art (200 level) (1%) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. See individual numbers. T Fine Arts 100 Fine Arts 101 Fine Arts 100 & 101 Fine Arts 104 Fine Arts 105Fine Arts 104 & 105 Fine Arts 200 Fine Arts 201 Fine Arts 200 & 201 Fine Arts 210 Fine Arts 211 Fine Arts 210 & 211 Fine Arts 250 Fine Arts 251 Fine Arts 250 & 251 T 1 FRENCH French 100 French 101 French 100 & 101 French 102 & 103 French 106 French 108 French 110 & 111 French 160 & 161 French 202 & 203 French 210 & 211 French 260 & 261 French 290 & 291 French (Vh) French (1%) French 105 (3) For information on the transferability French 110 (3) of any one of the following French courses see footnote 3 (page 109 French 110 (3) French 120 (3) French (3) (1st year) French 120 (3) French 202 (3) French 115 (3) French 215 (3) Transfers with 101 Transfers with 100 French 100 (3) French 160 (3) 1 Geography 102 (1%) Geography (3) Geography (1%) Geography (3) Geography (1%) Geography 263 (3) Geography 103 (Vh) Geography 262 (3) Geography (Vh) Geography (3) Geography 200 (Vh) Geography 141 (3) These courses transfer separately. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. See individual numbers. Geography 200 & 201 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Transfers with 114 Geography 111 (3) Transfers with 112 Physical Geography (3) Geography 101 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Geography 201 (1%) Geography 121 (3) Geography (1%) Geography (3) These courses transfer separately These courses transfer separately See individual numbers. See individual numbers. Geography 212 (1%) Physical Geography (3) Geography (1%) Geography 250 (3) Geography (1%) Geography (3) Geography (100 level) (1%) Geography (100 level) (Vh) Geography (100 level) (Vh) Geography (200 level) (1 / ) Geography (100 level) (1%) Geography 101 B (Vk) Geography 101 (3) French 180 (3) French 100 (3) French 180 (3) French 290 (3) French 160 (3) French 180 (3) GEOGRAPHY Geography 101 Geography 102 Geography 106 Geography 108 Geography 110 Geography 111 Geography 110 & 111 Geography 111 & 200 Geography 112 Geography 114 Geography 112 & 114 Geography 200 Geography 201 Geography 200 & 201 Geography 216 Geography 221 Geography 249 1 2 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Geography 203A (1%) Geography 203B (Vh) Geography 203 (3) Geography 201 B (IV2) Geography 201 A (Vk) Geography 201 (3) Geography (200 level) (1%) Geography (200 level) (1VJ) Geography 205 B (1V?) GEOLOGY Geology 110 Geology 111 Geology 110 & 111 Geology (3) Geology (3) . These courses transfer separately I. See individual numbers. Transfers with 111 Transfers with 110 Geology 105 (3) Transfers with 111 Transfers with 110 Geology 200 (3) Capilano College Simon Eraser University University ol British Columbia University of victoria GERMAN German 100 & 101 German 108 German 200 & 201 For information on the transferability German 100 (3) of any one of the following German courses see footnote 3 German 100 (3) German 200 (3) German 100 (3) (must complete survey of German grammar) | German 200 (3) (grade of "C" or above required.) HISTORY History 106 History 107 History 106 & 107 History 108 History 109 History 108 & 109 History 110 History 111 History 110 & 111 History 200 History 201 History 205 History 206 History (3) History (1%) History 240 (Vh) part creditHistory (3) History (l'/i) History 240 (1%) part credit" These courses transfer separately. These courses transfer separately. History 240 (3) See individual numbers. See individual numbers. History 212 (3) History (1%) History 210 (Vk) part creditHistory 213 (3) History (1%) History 210 (1%) part creditThese courses transfer separately. These courses transfer separately. History 210 (3) See individual numbers. See individual numbers. History 101 (3) History (1%) History 230 (1%) part creditHistory 102 (3) History (1%) History 203 (1%) part creditThese courses transfer separately. History 135 (3) History 230 (3) See individual numbers. History (3) (200 division) History (1%) History (200 level) (1%) History (3) (200 division) History (1%) History (200 level) (1%) History 201 (3) History (1%) History (200 level) (Vk) (students should not be permitted to take 355) History 224 (3) History (1%) History (200 level) (Vk) See U.Vic. History Department LEGAL STUDIES Legal Assistant Studies 150 Legal Assistant Studies 151 Legal Assistant Studies 258 Legal Assistant Studies 268 Political Science 151 (3) Criminology (3) Legal Studies (3) Legal Studies (3) MATHEMATICS Mathematics 009. 010. 011, 012 Mathematics 010, 011, 012 Mathematics 100 Mathematics 101 Mathematics 100 & 101 Mathematics 100 & 108 No equivalent. No credit. Mathematics 012 (0) All three must be taken - Mathematics 100 (3) Mathematics (3) Mathematics 101 (3) | Mathematics 203" (Vk) 'see below These courses transfer separately, See individual numbers, These courses transfer separately, See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately, See individual numbers, These courses transfer separately, See individual numbers. Mathematics 130 (3) or 203* [Vk] plus (Vk) "see below Mathematics 100 (1%), plus Vk' "see below Mathematics 100 (1%), plus Vk' 'see below These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. 1 Mathematics 100 & 110 Mathematics 101 & 102 Mathematics 101, 102 & 205 Mathematics 101 & 205 Mathematics 102 Mathematics 103 Mathematics 104 Mathematics 103 & 104 Mathematics 105 Mathematics 105 & 108 Mathematics 105 & 110 114 Mathematics (100 level) (Vk) Statistics (100 level) (1Vi) with Algebra 12; without Algebra 12 (0) credits. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Statistics (100 level) (3) with Algebra 12; without Algebra 12 Statistics (100 level) (1%) Statistics 250 & 251 (3) These courses transfer separately. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. These courses transfer separately. Statistics 250 (1%) See individual numbers. See individual numbers. Mathematics 302 (3) Mathematics 204 (1%) Statistics 250 (1%) Computing Science 103 (3) Computer Science (1%) Computer Science 110 (Vk) -See page 109 Computing Science 105 (3) Computer Science 118 (IVi) Computer Science 110 (Vk) -See page 109 These courses transfer separately. Computer Science 115 (3) Computer Science 110 & 115 (3) See individual numbers. Mathematics 100 (3) Transfers with 108 or 110 Mathematics 012 (0) These courses transfer separately. Mathematics 111 (3) (1.5 units in These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. faculty of Science) See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. Mathematics 111 (3) (1.5 units in These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. faculty of Science) See individual numbers. Capilano College Simon Fraser University University ol British Columbia University ol Victoria Computer Science 101 (1Vi) Fall '81, Spring '82 Computer Science 115 (3) Fall '81, Spring '82 Mathematics 100 (Vk)' "see below Computer Science 110 (1Vz) Mathematics 151 (3) Mathematics 152 (3) & Mathematics (1) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Mathematics 100 (1%) Mathematics 101 (1%) Mathematics 100 (1Vi) Mathematics 101 (Vk) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Mathematics 200 Mathematics 205 Mathematics 215 Mathematics 232 (3) Mathematics 272 (3) I Mathematics 242 (3) Mathematics 221 (114) Mathematics 205 (Vk) Mathematics 220 (Vk) Mathematics 100 (1%), Mathematics 101 (1Vi) & Mathematics (100 level) (D Mathematics 210 (Vk) Statistics (200 level) (1%) Mathematics (200 level) (Vk) Mathematics 230 Mathematics 231 Mathematics 235 Mathematics 251 (3) Mathematics 252 (3) Mathematics 310 (3) Mathematics 106 Transters with 104 Mathematics 106 & 104 104 transters separately. See individual numbers. Mathematics 157 (3) Mathematics 108 Mathematics 110 Mathematics 111 Mathematics 110 & 111 Mathematics 200 (1%) Mathematics 201 (1%) Mathematics 315 (1Vi) •Not for faculty of Science or Mathematics students. "Exempt Commerce 111. Computer Science 110 & 115 (3) Mathematics 102 (1%) Mathematics 200 (IV2) Mathematics (200 level) (Vk) Mathematics 201 (Vk) MEDIA Media 171 & 271 Media 181 & 182 Communications 257 (3) Communications 258 (3) MUSIC Music 011 Music 100 Music 101 Music 100 & 101 Music 110 & 111 Music 114 & 115 Music 120 Music 121 Music 120 & 121 Music 120, 121 & 220, 221 Music 130 & 131 Music 140 Music 141 Music 140 & 141 Music 154 Music 170 Music 180 & 181 Music 184 & 185 Music 190 Music 191 Music 194 & 195 Music 200 Music 201 Music 200 & 201 Music 210 & 211 Music 214 & 215 Music 220 Music 221 Music 220 & 221 Music 220, 221 4 120, 121 Music 230 & 231 Music 240 Music (3) Music (3) Music (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Music (100 level) (1) Transfers with 101 Music (100 level) (1) Transfers with 100 Music 100 (3) or Music 101 (3)' "see below Music (200 level) (1Vi) Music 140 (2) Music 236 (Vk) Music 143 (1) Music (100 level) (1%) Transfers with 1 2 1 Music History (3) Music (100 level) (IV2) I Transfers with 120 Music History (3) Music (100 level) (Vk) Music 120 (3) or Music These courses transfer separately. Education 102 (3) See individual numbers. Music 110 (3), Music These courses transfer separately. These courses transfer separately. (100 level) (3) See individual numbers. See individual numbers. Music 180 (1) Music 154 (1) Music (100 level) (1) Music (100 level) (1) Applied Music (credit to be confirmed) Music 140 (2) by examination for B.Mus.) Music (1%) Music (3) Music (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Music History (3) Music History (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Transfers with 201 Transfers with 200 Music 200 (3) or Music Education 201 (3)* 'see below Music 142 (2) Music 243 (1) Transfers with 221 Transfers with 220 Music 320 (3) or Music Education 102 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Music 154 (1) Music (100 level) (1) Music (100 level) (Vi) Music (100 level) (1) Music (170 level) (1) Music (100 level) (%) Music (100 level) (V2) Music 181 (1) Music 100 A (1) Music 100 B (1) Music (200 level) (Vk) Music 236 (Vk) Music (100 level) (1%) Music (100 level) (1Vi) Music (100 level) (3) Music 110 (3), Music (100 level) (3) Music 180 (1) Music (100 level) (1) 115 Capilano College Simon Fraser University Music 241 Music 240 & 241 University of British Columbia University of Victoria Music (100 level) (1) Applied Music (credit to be confirmei1 Music 140 (2) by examination for B.Mus.) Music 250 Music 251 Music 254 Music 255 Music 290 Music 291 Music 294 & 295 Music (200 level) (Vk) Music (200 level) (1) Music (100 level) (1) Music (100 level) (1) Music (200 level) (%) Music (200 level) ('/?) Music 181 (1) •Applicants must have at least 65% I (or equivalent) in Music Education 101 & in Music Education 201 (or equivalent courses) to pursue a Music Education concentration major. PHILOSOPHY Philosophy 101 Philosophy 102 Philosophy 101 & 102 Philosophy 101 & 210 Philosophy 101, 210 & 211 Philosophy 110 Philosophy 111 Philosophy 200 Philosophy 201 Philosophy 200 & 201 Philosophy 210 Philosophy 211 Philosophy 210 & 211 Philosophy 220 Philosophy 221 Philosophy 100 (3) Philosophy 120 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Philosophy 100 (3), Philosophy (3) Philosophy (Vk) Philosophy (1%) Philosophy 100 (3) Transfers with 102 Transfers with 101 Philosophy 100 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. 100 transfers with 102, 210 transfers separately. See individual numbers. 101 transfers with, 102, 210, 211 transfer separately. Philosophy (100 level) (Vk) Philosophy 100 (3), Philosophy 203 (3) These courses transfer separately. Philosophy (3) See individual numbers. Philosophy (3) Philosophy (1%) (a student cannot receive credit for both Capilano Philosophy 110 & UBC Philosophy 102) Philosophy (3) Philosophy (Vk) Philosophy (3) Philosophy (Vk) Philosophy 220 (3) Philosophy (Vk) These courses transfer separately. Philosophy 201 (3) See individual numbers. Philosophy 100 (3) Philosophy (1%) Philosophy 203 (3) Philosophy (Vk) These courses transfer separately. Philosophy 250 (3) See individual numbers. Philosophy 241 (3) Philosophy (1%) Philosophy (3) Philosophy (Vk) Philosophy (100 level) (IV2) Philosophy 232 (1V ) Philosophy 326 (Vk) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Philosophy (200 level) (1%) Philosophy (200 level) (Vk) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Philosophy (200 level) (1%) Philosophy (200 level) (IV2) 2 PHYSICS Physics 104 Physics 100 (3) Physics 105 Physics (3) Physics 104 & 105 Students will be exempted from Physics 131 (2) Physics 101 (3), Physics (1) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Physics 101 (3) Physics 102 (3) Students will be exempted from Physics 131 (2) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Physics 120 (3) Physics 121 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Physics 233 (2) Physics (3) Physics 221 (3)These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Physics 108 Physics 108 & 111 Physics 108 & 115 Physics 110 Physics 111 Physics 110 & 111 Physics 110 & 115 Physics 114 Physics 115 Physics 114 & 111 Physics 114 & 115 Physics 200 Physics 201 Physics 200 & 210 Physics 201 & 211 116 - Physics (1'/2) not for credit in the Science Faculty Physics (Vk) not for credit in the Science Faculty These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Transfers with 111 or 115 Physics 110 (3) Physics 110 (3) Transfers with 111 Transfers with 110 Physics 110 (3) Physics 110 (3) Transfers with 105 Transfers with 104 Physics 103 (3) Physics (100 level) (1%) Physics 102 (3) 108 transfers separately. See individual numbers. Transfers with 111 Transfers with 110 Physics 102 (3) Physics 115 (3) Transfers with 210 Transfers with 211 Physics 213 (2) 110 transfers with 111 115 transfers with 114 Transfers with 115 Transfers with 114 111 transfers with 108 & 110 114 transfers with 115 Physics 101 (3) Transfers with 210 Transfers with 211 Physics 217 (1V ) Physics 215 (2) Physics 214 (V/2) Transfers with 111 & 115 Transfers with 108 & 110 & 114 Physics 110 (3) 2 Capilano College Physics 210 Physics 211 Physics 210 & 211 Physics 220 Physics 221 Physics 220 & 221 University of British Columbia University of Victoria Transfers with 200 & 211 Transfers with 201 & 210 Physics 239 (1) Transfers with 221 Transfers with 220 Physics 216 (2). Physics (1) Transfers with 200 Transfers with 201 Transfers with 200 & 201 Physics 211 A {Vk) Physics 211 B (1%) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Political Science (1%) Political Science 202 {Vk) Political Science 201 {Vk) Political Science 200 (1Vi) Arts [Vk) (may not take Political Science 302 for credit) Political Science (Vk) Political Science (1%) Political Science 204 (3) Political Science (100 level) (1%) Political Science 201 (Vk) Political Science 210 (1%) Political Science (200 level) (Vk) I Simon Fraser University Physics (1)' Physics (1)' Physics 235 (2)' Physics (3)* Physics 211 (3)' These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. "Students who have completed Physics 200, 201, 210, 211, 220, 221 at Capilano College will be prepared to enter third year Physics courses at SFU. POLITICAL SCIENCE Political Science 100 Political Science 101 Political Science 102 Political Science 104 Political Science 120 Political Science 111 (3) Political Science 212 (3) Political Science 131 (3) Political Science 221 (3) Political Science 251 (3) Political Science 201 Political Science 203 Political Science 201 & 203 Political Science 241 (3) Political Science 141 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Political Science 211 (3) Political Science 206 Political Science 203 (1%) 1 Political Science (200 level) (1 /?) Political Science 240 (Vk) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Political Science (200 level) (Vk) PSYCHOLOGY Psychology 100 Psychology 101 Psychology 100 & 101 Psychology 100 & 201 Psychology 100 & 204 Psychology 100 & 200 or 205 Psychology 200 Psychology 201 Psychology 204 Psychology 205 Psychology 206 Psychology 220 Psychology 222 Psychology 220 & 222 Psychology (3) Psychology (3) Psychology 101 (3), Psychology (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Psychology 360 (3) Psychology (Vk) Psychology (Vk) Psychology 100 (3) Psychology 100 (3) Psychology 100 (3) Psychology 100 (3) Psychology (Vk) (may not take Psychology 308 for credit) | Psychology (1%) (may not take Psychology (3) Psychology 308 for credit) | Psychology (Vk) (may not take Psychology 351 (3) Psychology 301 for credit) Psychology (114) Psychology (3) Psychology (1%) Psychology 355 (3) Psychology (114)* Psychology 370 (3) Psychology (1%)* Psychology 340 (3) These courses transfer separately. Psychology 206 (3)* Psychology (100 level) (1%) Psychology 201 (Vk) Psychology 100 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Psychology 100 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Psychology (100 level) (Vk) Psychology (200 level) (1%) Psychology (100 level) (IV2) Psychology (200 level) (1%) Psychology (200 level) (Vk) Psychology (200 level) (114) Psychology (200 level) (Vk) Psychology 220 (3) See individual numbers. "Students granted credit for Capilano I Psychology 220 and/or 222 will not receive credit for UBC Psychology 300 and/or 305 respectively. NOTE: Maximum advance credit permitted in Psychology is 9 units. RECREATION Recreation 160 Recreation 180 Recreation 280 Kinesiology 143 (3) Kinesiology 143 (3) Kinesiology 343 (3) SOCIOLOGY Sociology 100 Sociology 101 Sociology 100 & 101 Sociology 200 Sociology 201 S.A. 150 (3) S.A. 250 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. S.A. (3) S.A. (3) Transfers with 101 Sociology (114) Transfers with 100 Sociology (Vk) Sociology 200 (3) (1st or 2nd year) Sociology 100 (3) Sociology (1Vi) Sociology (114) Transfers with 201 Transfers with 200 117 Capilano College Simon Fraser University University of British Columbia University of Victoria Sociology 200 & 201 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. S.A. 260 (3) S.A. 280 (3) S.A. (3) Sociology 210 (3) Sociology 200 (3) Sociology (Vh) Sociology (1%) (2nd year) Sociology (1%) Sociology (IVi) (2nd year) Sociology (100 level) (Vh) Sociology (200 level) (IVi) Sociology (100 level) (1%) Sociology (100 level) (1V) Sociology 210 Sociology 211 Sociology 222 Sociology 223 Communications 230 (3) FOR FURTHER INFORMATION ON SOCIOLOGY SEE 1. PAGE 109 2 SPANISH Spanish 100 & 101 Spanish 108 Spanish 200 & 201 For information on the transferability Spanish 100 (3) of any one of the following Spanish courses see footnote 3 Spanish 100 (3) Spanish 200 (3) Spanish 100 (3) Spanish 260 (3) (grade of C+ required, oral test if continuing in Spanish) THEATRE Theatre 100 Theatre 101 Theatre 100 & 101 Theatre 120 Theatre 121 Theatre 120 & 121 Theatre 200 Theatre 201 Theatre (Studio) (3) Theatre (Studio) (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Theatre History (3) Theatre History (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Theatre (Studio) (3) Theatre (Studio) (3) Theatre (tit) Theatre (Vh) Theatre 200 (3) Theatre (IVi) Theatre (1V) Theatre 120 (3) Theatre (100 level) (IV2) Theatre (100 level) (iy ) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Transfers with 121 Transfers with 120 Theatre 100 (3) Theatre (1%) Theatre (Vh) Theatre (200 level) (1%) Theatre (200 level) (1'/ ) Arts (1Vi) English (100 level) (1%) 2 2 2 WOMEN'S STUDIES Women's Studies 100 Women's Studies 101 Women's Studies 104 Women's Studies 105 Women's Studies 106 Women's Studies 107 Women's Studies 110 Women's Studies 112 Women's Studies 120 Women's Studies 121 Women's Studies 122 Women's Studies 122 & Anthropology 120 Women's Studies 122 & Anthropology 121 Women's Studies 150 Women's Studies 151 Women's Studies 192 Women's Studies 202 (3) Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies 200 (3) History (IVi) (History credit may be negotiated with SFU on an individual basis Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies 200 (3) Anthropology (1Vi) (1st or 2nd year) S.A. 170 (3), S.A. (3) or S.A. 170 These courses transfer separately. (3), Women's Studies 200 (3) See individual numbers. S.A. 170 (3), S.A. (3) or S.A. 170 (3), These courses transfer separately. Women's Studies 200 (3) See individual numbers. Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies (3) Theatre (Studio) (2) Women's Studies (100 level) (Vh) History (200 level) (1Vi) Anthropology 100 (1V) (part credit) Anthropology 100 (3) 2 Anthropology 100 (3) Notes COURSE DESCRIPTIONS Anthropology Art Biology Business Management B u s i n e s s Office T r a i n i n g Chemistry Commerce Communications Counselling Group Programs Dialogue Canada Economics Education English E n g l i s h as a S e c o n d L a n g u a g e Fine Arts French Geography Geology German History L a b o u r Studies Learning Assistance Legal Assistant S t u d i e s Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r Mathematics Media M e d i c a l Office Assistant Music Music Therapy Office T r a i n i n g Philosophy Physics Political S c i e n c e Psychology Recreation Retail M e r c h a n d i s i n g Sociology Spanish Theatre Arts Women's Studies Word Processing Index A. A C A D E M I C D I F F I C U L T I E S 9 ACADEMIC STUDIES/UNIVERSITY TRANSFER .... ADDRESSES OF CAMPUSES 16 Inside front cover ADMISSION — LYNNMOUR, HOWE SOUND AND SUNSHINE COAST 3 3 3 3 3 W h o is E l i g i b l e W h e n to A p p l y H o w to A p p l y English Proficiency ADMINISTRATION 124 ALTERNATIVE CAREER TRAINING FOR T H E M E N T A L L Y D I S A B L E D 107 ART PROGRAM '. C o m m e r c i a l Art Crafts P r o g r a m S t u d i o Art P r o g r a m F o u n d a t i o n s of V i s u a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 49 51 50 49 52 ATHLETICS 11 ATTENDANCE 7 AUDIT STATUS B. B A S I C T R A I N I N G A N D S K I L L S D E V E L O P M E N T BOOKSTORE 7 . . . 106 10 11 BOUTIQUE 14 BURSARIES BUSINESS MANAGEMENT PROGRAMS T w o Y e a r Full T i m e P r o g r a m s T w o Year Part T i m e P r o g r a m s Full T i m e B u s i n e s s Administration (10 months) P a r t - T i m e Certificate P r o g r a m s Other c o u r s e s 58 58 60 60 61 62 BUSINESS TRAINING A N D CAREER DEVELOPMENT S e e Office Administration Division 86 1 9 5 2 2 0 62 87 22 24 68 11 29 25 0 26 107 28 29 31 33 33 34 35 1° 69 92 37 7 8 7 4 93 80 85 94 40 • 4 0 4 2 3 100 103 4 4 4 4 5 6 47 96 4 COURSE OVERLOAD 4 5 10 C O U R S E VERIFICATION C A L E N D A R F O R 1982-83 2 CREDIT FREE STATUS 7 CANADIAN STUDIES P R O G R A M 16 CREDIT FREE P R O G R A M S 13 CAREER DEVELOPMENT RESOURCE CENTRE .... 11 CREDIT STATUS CAREER PROGRAMS Student C o u r s e and W o r k L o a d s E m p l o y m e n t Opportunities for G r a d u a t e s Exemption Standing T r a n s f e r to and from Other Institutions A d m i s s i o n Criteria & Dates 48 48 48 48 48 48 C. CAFETERIAS CERTIFICATE AND DIPLOMA REQUIREMENTS CHANGING REGISTRATION STATUS Limitations of S p a c e C o u r s e Verification A d d i n g or C h a n g i n g a c o u r s e W i t h d r a w i n g from a c o u r s e C h a n g i n g f r o m credit to audit status C h a n g e of N a m e or A d d r e s s Right to Register ... D. D I P L O M A A N D C E R T I F I C A T E R E Q U I R E M E N T S Address & Telephone 8 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 48 124 COLLEGE FOUNDATION 14 C O M M U N I T Y E D U C A T I O N . . . see C r e d i t Free p r o g r a m s CORRESPONDENCE EDUCATION 9 COUNSELLING COURSE CHALLENGE PROCEDURE 11 7 COURSE DESCRIPTION C O D E 7 9 8 11 DOWNTOWN EDUCATIONCENTRE COLLEGE BOARD COURSE CREDITS ... "DOWN SOUTH" BOUTIQUE CHEMICAL AND METALLURGICAL TECHNOLOGY PROGRAM 7 4 inside front cover E. E N G L I S H P L A C E M E N T T E S T 16 ENGLISH TUTORIAL ROOM 17 F. F A C U L T Y — Refer to S p e c i f i c P r o g r a m s and C o u r s e A r e a s FEES • Tuition C o m m u n i t y E d u c a t i o n a n d Credit Free c o u r s e s C o n d i t i o n s of Registration Income tax receipts Fee waivers for senior citizens Deferred fees i Refunds , Non-registration De-registration F I N A N C I A L AID A N D A W A R D S ... 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 14 FINANCIAL INFORMATION 6 F I R S T AID A N D H E A L T H S E R V I C E S 12 FITNESS C E N T R E 11 FOOD AND BEVERAGE SERVICES 10 FOURTH INSTRUCTIONALHOUR 7 121 G. G E N E R A L C O U R S E INFORMATION GRADING "I" G r a d e s A p p e a l of Final g r a d e s Statement of grades Transcript G r a d e Point A v e r a g e 7 7 8 8 8 7 GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS 8 H. H A N D I C A P P E D S T U D E N T S E R V I C E S 10 H E A L T H A N D FIRST AID S E R V I C E S 12 HEALTH AND H U M A N SERVICES PROGRAMS .... Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n U p g r a d i n g W o r k i n g with the Developmentally H a n d i c a p p e d . . Homemaker Program L o n g Term C a r e A i d e Registered N u r s e s Refresher P r o g r a m 69 69 70 70 72 72 73 H I G H S C H O O L E Q U I V A L E N C Y — S e e B a s i c T r a i n i n g for Skills Development HOLIDAYS I. 2 IDENTIFICATION C A R D INDEX 3 121 INFO C E N T R E 10 INSTRUCTIONAL YEAR 7 INTRODUCTION 1 L. L A B O U R S T U D I E S P R O G R A M 35 PUBLIC A N D PRIVATE U S E OF C O L L E G E FACILITIES 13 R. R E C O R D S , S T U D E N T 9 R E G I S T R A T I O N - Lynnmour, Howe Sound and Sunshine Coast H o w to Register W h e n to Register Academic, Career, Vocational C r e d i t Free c o u r s e s 4 4 4 4 6 S e e a l s o C h a n g i n g Registration Status REGISTRATION SCHEDULE 5 REPEATING A COURSE 7 RETAIL MERCHANDISING P R O G R A M 103 S. S C H O L A R S H I P S 14 SCHOLASTIC AWARDS 8 S C I E N C E S - G e n e r a l Information 17 SECHELT CAMPUSAddress & Telephone inside front cover S E L F P A C E D L E A R N I N G (SPL) 17 SERVICES 10 SEXUAL HARASSMENT 10 LEARNING ASSISTANCE CENTRE-Lynnmour .... 12 Sechelt 13 Squamish 12 Learning A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m s 108 SQUAMISH C A M P U S - L I B R A R Y / M E D I A S E R V I C E S , Lynnmour, Squamish S T U D E N T ACTIVITY FEES 6 STUDENT LOAN 14 10 a n d Sechelt 12 Address & Telephone inside front cover LIMIT O F R E S P O N S I B I L I T Y 9 STUDENT NEWSPAPER LIMITATIONS OF S P A C E 5 STUDENT NUMBER 3 LOANS, STUDENT 14 STUDENT RECORDS 9 LOSTAND FOUND M. M A P S - P a r k i n g H o w to Get T h e r e 10 119 120 MATH LEARNING CENTRE 17 MEDIA R E S O U R C E P R O G R A M 73 MEXICO-TRAVEL/STUDY COURSE TO 17 MUSIC PROGRAMS Commercial Music M u s i c Transfer Music Therapy 77 77 79 79 O. O F F I C E A D M I N I S T R A T I O N D I V I S I O N B u s i n e s s Office T r a i n i n g C a r e e r Alternatives P r o g r a m Legal Assistant S t u d i e s Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r P r o g r a m M e d i c a l Office A s s i s t a n t Administrative S e c r e t a r y Word Processing Programs O P E N LEARNING INSTITUTE OUTDOOR RECREATION PROGRAMS O u t d o o r Recreation M a n a g e m e n t Wilderness Leadership Fitness L e a d e r s h i p L e i s u r e Lifestyling Adventure and C h a l l e n g e T r a i n i n g Expedition Program OVERLOAD OF COURSES P. P A R K I N G 86 87 88 88 91 93 86 96 9 96 97 98 99 100 98 99 4 10 PLACEMENT CENTRE 11 PLAGIARISM 9 PREPARATORY AND SPECIAL NEEDS PROGRAMS B a s i c T r a i n i n g for Skills Development 106 Alternative Career Training for the Mentally Disabled 107 22 E n g l i s h as a S e c o n d L a n g u a g e 107 Learning Assistance Courses 108 B a s i c S k i l l s in M a t h , E n g l i s h , C h e m i s t r y — S e e t h o s e subjects C a r e e r Alternatives for W o m e n 88 STUDENT UNION & S T U D E N T ACTIVITIES T. T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S 10 inside front c o v e r T E L E P H O N E N U M B E R O F C A M P U S E S inside front c o v e r TESTING SERVICES Health tests 12 Fitness 11 TRAINING FOR BUSINESS & INDUSTRY 48 TRANSCRIPT/STATEMENT OF GRADES 8 TRANSFER GUIDE 109 TRANSFER TO A N D F R O M OTHER INSTITUTIONS Academic Career 16 48 TRAVEL/STUDY COURSE TO MEXICO TUTORIALS 17 , V. V I S I T O R S VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS VOCATIONAL, PRE-EMPLOYMENT AND UPGRADING PROGRAMS B u i l d i n g Material S u p p l y W o r k e r Building Construction Heavy E q u i p m e n t O p e r a t o r A p p l i e d L a n d s c a p e Horticulture Retail S a l e s T r a i n i n g S m a l l E n g i n e Repair Waiter/Waitress T r a i n i n g Welding Drafting General Mechanics W. W H Y C O M E T O C A P I L A N O ? WOMEN'S RESOURCE CENTRE 12 7 48 105 105 105 105 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 1 13 WOMEN'S STUDIES P R O G R A M 17 WORK STUDY PROGRAM 14 123 College Board and Administration College Board Members Lynne Connell, Government Appointee David C r a i g , G o v e r n m e n t A p p o i n t e e Ian E d g a r , S c h o o l Dist. 45 Brian H o d g i n s , S c h o o l Dist. 46 C a r l Hunter, S c h o o l Dist. 45 Margaret J e s s u p , S c h o o l Dist. 44 T . J . M a c D o n a l d , S c h o o l Dist. 4 8 N o r r i s Martin, G o v e r n m e n t A p p o i n t e e M a r i o n Reeves, G o v e r n m e n t A p p o i n t e e Hilda Rizun, Government Appointee, Chairman V e r n a S m e l o v s k y , S c h o o l Dist. 44 Dr. Lalit M. Srivastava, G o v e r n m e n t A p p o i n t e e Board Representatives B o b C o o k , Faculty A s s n . ( C C F A ) Karen E w i n g , Faculty A s s n . ( C C F A ) Bill Little, Staff U n i o n ( A U C E 4) B o b M c K e e , Staff U n i o n ( A U C E 4) P l u s 2 representatives to be n a m e d by Student S o c i e t y General Administration Paul G a l l a g h e r . B.A., M . E d . , D . C . L . Principal Marie J e s s u p , C . G . A . Bursar A l a n P.D. S m i t h , B.A., M.A. Director of P l a n n i n g David W o o l l e y , B . S c . Registrar J i m D i l l o n , B.A., L . L . B . Human Resources Administrator David Brewer, P . P . Director of S u p p l i e s a n d S e r v i c e s Ken Hughes Facilities S u p e r v i s o r Instructional Administration D o u g l a s K. J a r d i n e , B . A . S c , P h . D . Dean of Instructional S e r v i c e s Franklin C . G e l i n , B.A., M.A., P h . D . Dean of A c a d e m i c S t u d i e s G . F . Lee, B . S c , M . S c , P h . D . Dean of C a r e e r / V o c a t i o n a l P r o g r a m s 124